Meridian America Inc Switch 21 Users Manual
Meridian 1 Sys Options 21-51-61-71 Planning-Engineering Meridian 1 Sys Options 21-51-61-71 Planning-Engineering Free Phone System Manuals Voice Communications 800 593-6000
Meridian 1 Sys Options 21-51-61-71 Planning-Engineering Meridian 1 Sys Options 21-51-61-71 Planning-Engineering
71 to the manual e364435c-f991-49f5-bc3c-5de340746dec
2015-02-09
: Meridian-America Meridian-America-Meridian-America-Inc-Switch-21-Users-Manual-555013 meridian-america-meridian-america-inc-switch-21-users-manual-555013 meridian-america pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 867
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System overview
Standard
.‘,
-:
:;.i\
‘\
I
.’
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System overview
Publication number: 553-3001-I 00
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
0 1990 Northern
Telecom
All right reserved
System overview 553-3001-l 00
-.
.:.
.:
.’
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1.0
‘:
\
:.“‘I
j
System overview 553-3001-100
iii
About this document
This document describes the features and services, hardware and software
architecture, and the family of products that comprise Meridian 1.
References
See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for
- Master index (553-3001-000)
- System overview (553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
- System engineering (553-3001-151)
- Power engineering (553-3001-152)
- Sparesplanning
(553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-154)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- System installation procedures (553-3001-210)
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Installation procedures for telephone sets
and attendant consoles (553-3001-215)
- Extended systems installation (553-3001-250)
- Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251)
System overview 553-3001-100
iv About this document
- General maintenance information (553-3001-500)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement (553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
- XII software management (553-3001-300)
- XII features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-1 XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
_ . .
_......
,. ‘; - .
j,
‘.’
System overview 553-3001-100
V
Contents
Meridian 1
1
The Meridian 1 commitment
Advanced features
2
5
System architecture
9
Meridian 1 modular architecture
Control
Switching
Peripherals
Software architecture
Firmware
Software
Office Data
Resident Programs
Non-Resident Programs
Hardware architecture
Common equipment
Network equipment
Peripheral Equipment
Power equipment
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
11
11
11
13
13
17
31
32
Product description
37
Universal Equipment Modules
CPU module (NT8D34)
CPU/Network module (NT6D39)
Network module (NT8D35)
Common/Peripheral Equipment module (NTSDll)
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37)
Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13)
37
39
41
43
45
48
50
System overview 553-3001-100
c
vi Contents
Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module
InterGroup module (NT8D36AA)
Meridian Mail module (NT6D44)
Pedestal (NT8D27AB)
Top cap (NT7DOO)
Expansion kit (NT8D49)
Meridian 1 system options
Meridian 1 system option 21A
Meridian 1 system option 21
Meridian 1 system option 51
Meridian 1 System option 61
Meridian 1 system option 71
List of terms
System overview 553-3001-l 00
(NT8D47)
52
54
55
57
57
57
60
60
62
64
66
68
71
1
Meridian 1
Introduction
Meridian 1 Communication Systems are a family of digital multiplex voice
and data switching systems built upon a foundation of state of the art digital
switching equipment and advanced software program control. Meridian 1
systems provide a wide range of sophisticated voice and data services for
both Private Branch Exchange (PBX) and Central Office (CO) applications
ranging in size from 30 to 60,000 ports.
A Meridian 1 Communication System is a single source solution to the
complex requirements of today’s business communications environment. In
a single, integrated system, it provides advanced voice features, local area
network communications, and sophisticated information services. A
comprehensive open architecture ensures continual growth in capacity and
the capability to address the ongoing needs of business communications and
information management.
The foundation for Meridian 1 Communication Systems is a voice and data
circuit-switched digital sub-system. It is comprised of a central processing
unit, memory store, and a digital switching network that uses time division
multiplexing and pulse code modulation techniques. Peripheral interfaces
are used to connect a wide array of telephones, trunks, and terminals.
,:
/
!
:;
.
::
.
.~.,.
..‘
)I
Meridian 1 Communication Systems systems are also designed to
accommodate the rapidly expanding requirements for data communications.
Building upon the strength of the original SL-1 architecture, significant
system enhancements have been developed for data communications,
including:
System overview 553-3001-100
2 Meridian 1
Meridian Modular Telephones, a family of digital telephones that
utilize standard twisted pair wiring and support a wide range of data
communications options.
Meridian 1 LANSTAR, a 2.56 Mbps local area network (LAN) for
Macintosh II and IBM PC compatible computers.
The Meridian 1 commitment
Northern Telecom is committed to meet the needs of our customers by
providing systems which guarantee:
Continuing product compatibility
A high degree of component and system reliability
Cost effective, modular packaging
Advanced administration and maintenance capabilities
Ease of installation
Cost effective system expansion and upgrade
Product compatibility
All new products are compatible with the installed base of systems and can
be installed alongside existing equipment. For network enhanced Meridian
SL-1 systems, the upgrade consists of adding X11 release 15 software with
a new CPU ROM pack, Superloop Network cards in existing network slots,
and one or more Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules. For nonnetwork/GE enhanced Meridian SL-1 systems, an upgrade package is also
available. For more information about extending existing systems, see
Extended systems installation (553-3001-250).
In addition, Meridian 1 systems now utilize the DS-30 signalling method
used by other Northern Telecom switching products, providing a common
signalling scheme throughout the Meridian 1 family and allowing for
system growth beyond 10,000 ports without requiring a change in peripheral
equipment.
System
overview
.i
553-3001-l
00
Meridian 1 3
System reliability
Meridian 1 systems are designed and built to meet the highest standards for
reliability, resulting in less downtime and increased system availability. In
most systems, critical system elements are duplicated to guarantee system
reliability. There are two identical Central Processing Unit (CPU) and
memory circuits in most system configurations, and both CPUs can access
both memory circuits. If one CPU or memory circuit fails, the system
automatically switches to the standby CPU or memory circuit without
disrupting call processing.
Modular equipment packaging
Meridian 1 hardware is housed in modular equipment cabinets that are
common to all system elements. These cabinets are called Universal
Equipment Modules (UEM). Each UEM has removable front and rear
covers with locking latches for easy access to its contents.
UEMs are stacked one on top of another to form a column. Each column
may contain up to four UEMs. Systems are comprised of one or more
columns. An Expansion Kit is provided to interconnect the columns in a
multi-column system for compliance with FCC standards for EMI/RFI. At
the base of each column of UEMs is the pedestal The pedestal houses
cooling fans, air filters, a power distribution assembly (including the circuit
breakers and power switches) and a System Monitor circuit. At the top ofeach column is a Top Cap assembly which consists of two air exhaust
grilles and a thermal sensor assembly.
Advanced administration & maintenance
An important feature common to all Meridian 1 systems is an advanced
administration and maintenance system. Administration and maintenance
functions can be performed locally or at a remote location. These functions
include service change, reassignment of features, and additions or deletions
of equipment. Meridian 1 systems also provide an automatic in-line
conversion feature which significantly simplifies upgrades of Xl 1 software.
Reconfiguration of system data structures occurs during system reload.
A System Monitor circuit card controls and monitors the status of all powerrelated hardware and functions, including column thermal status, power
supply operation, blower operation, power fail transfer, circuit breakers,
external rectifiers, batteries, and Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS)
systems. The same system monitor is used for AC and DC powered
System overview X3-3001 -100
L.
,.
.’
4 Meridian 1
systems. A System Monitor is installed in.the pedestal of each column.
The System Monitor located in the column containing CPU0 acts as the
master system monitor; monitors located in other columns act as slaves.
The master polls the slaves and reports their status to the CPU. The master
System Monitor is connected to the CPU by an RS232C port located on an
SD1 card. Slave System Monitors are connected to the master in a daisy
chain fashion with an 8-conductor RJ type connector.
System messages reported to the CPU by the System Monitor are output to
the system terminal. System messages include the following types of
information: status or fault indication, hardware type, column number,
module number and power supply unit number.
Maintenance and traffic messages are also output to the system terminal.
Maintenance messages indicate the results of diagnostic routines and alert
maintenance personnel to fault conditions. Traffic messages indicate the
load on different areas of the system and the associated grade of service.,
Meridian 1 systems feature an advanced background diagnostic program
which reports system status and identifies detected faults. The program
automatically restarts where it stopped, following an interruption.
Diagnostic routines may also be initiated by maintenance personnel as
required.
_
A new series of circuit cards contain microprocessors which offload
processing functions previously performed by the CPU. The on-board
microprocessors significantly increase circuit card and system diagnostic
capabilities, resulting in improved maintainability. Where possible,
hardware switch selection has been replaced with software-controlled
selection of circuit card options. The on-board microprocessors also allow
for circuit card parameters to be changed without requiring hardware
revisions. Parameters are stored on the system disk drive unit, and are
downloaded to the circuit card at system reload or upon user command.
The new cards also make use of on-board intelligence by reporting their
product code, serial number, release number and manufacture location,
assisting maintenance and inventory control.
System overview 553-3001-100
.4
.
Meridian 1 5
Ease of installation
Every Meridian 1 system is shipped from the factory assembled and
equipped to order. Installation effort is reduced to unpacking and
positioning equipment, plugging in connectorized cables, ‘and adding
customer-specific programming where required.
Ease of expansion
The modular packaging scheme employed by the Meridian 1 family of
products accommodates growth by permitting easy expansion. System
expansion simply requires adding one or more UEMs. The modular
packaging scheme also provides for low cost, easy expansion from one
system type to another. For example, the card cage assembly of a UEM
containing CPU equipment for a small system may be removed and
replaced with the CPU card cage assembly designed for larger systems. I n
addition, peripheral equipment, which is the bulk of the system investment,
is common to all system types and may be retained when expandi&
Advanced features
By providing service capabilities defined by software, which can be
expanded as needs evolve, Meridian 1 systems offer advanced features and
capabilities in an economical, flexible, and maintainable form. In addition.to a wide range of standard voice and data services, Meridian 1 systems also
provide a number of sophisticated communications services and features,
including:
- Automatic Call Distribution (ACD)
- Electronic Switched Network (ESN)
- Call Detail Recording (CDR)
- Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
- Meridian Mail Voice Messaging
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) is used when a large volume of
incoming calls must be answered by a group of telephones allocated for this
purpose. Incoming calls are served on a first-in, first-out basis and are
distributed among the available telephones. For more information on ACD,
refer to Northern Telecom Publication Automatic Call Distribution Basic
features description (553-2671-100).
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
Y
..:
6 Meridian 1
ESN
The Electronic Switched Network (ESN) group of features supports voice
and circuit-switched voiceband data telecommunications for multiplelocation customer applications. ESN applications range from a single
network node (combined PBX and network switching system) to a widelydispersed network with up to 256 locations. For more information about
ESN, refer to the ESN Feature Document 6400-886 and to the following
Northern Telecom Publications:
- ESN: 308-3001-100
- BARSmARS: 553-2751-100,553-2751-101
- CDP: 553-2751-102
CDR
Call Detail Recording (CDR) is a software package that gathers call
processing data and produces call records used for accounting and
administrative purposes. Call records provide information about the call,
such as the time and date the call was placed, the identity of the caller, and
the digits dialed. CDR is compatible with all Meridian 1 software generics.
For more information, see Call Detail Recording general description
(553-2631-100).
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) is an international specification
of standards for digital communications. ISDN provides standard digital
interfaces between telephones, terminals, and telecommunication networks.
ISDN services are distinguished by two types of access: Primary Rate
Access (PRA) and Basic Rate Access (BRA). For more information on
PRA, see ISDN Primary Rate Access product description (553-2901-100).
Meridian Mail Voice Messaging
Meridian Mail is a comprehensive electronic voice processing system
designed and developed to increase any organization’s productivity by
enhancing telecommunications activities. Meridian Mail provides a wide
array of sophisticated features, including: telephone call answering, voice
messaging, automated attendant service, call routing, information mailbox,
and interactive voice response applications.
System
overview
553-3001-I
,:. L’..%‘.
:.:.:_ ::55$
i
00
c
:.
.
..:
..I
Meridian 1 7
Meridian Mail voice messaging eliminates telephone tag and wasted calls
by allowing detailed messages to be exchanged when parties are unavailable
or busy. Guided by easy to follow prompts, a user can leave messages for
others, retrieve messages, forward messages, and respond to messages with
the touch of a single button.
i
.
I
I
.: -. ‘Z..,
:.,-;. . ...:
“T’.’
:
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
8 Meridian 1
,
r- h
. . .
-*
_ .’
System
overview
+
..
553-3001-100
9
System architecture
Meridian 1 modular architecture
An important characteristic of Meridian 1 systems is a modular system
architecture. It utilizes an efficient and flexible approach, employing
modular construction in all areas of hardware and software, and state-of-theart commercial and custom components. The result is a system which is
highly flexible in terms of operational, maintenance, and administrative
characteristics. As demands dictate, any module may be enhanced,
singularly or in combination with other modules. Each system is organized
around three functional areas: Control, Switching, and Peripherals.
Control
The Control complex provides the sequences required by the system to
process voice and data call connections, monitor call activity, and perform
system administration, maintenance, and testing. It is composed of two
elements: the central processing unit (CPU) which directs lower level
subsystems in the hierarchy, and the system memory which stores the
operating programs.
Switching
The switching function is performed by the network equipment, which
interconnects terminal devices for communication with each other. The
network architecture is based on the concept of a digital multiplexed loop.
A loop is a bidirectional path between Network and terminal device which
transmits voice, data and signalling information.
System overview 553-3001-100
.d
10 System architecture
Peripherals
Peripheral equipment provides the analog and digital interfaces for all
peripheral devices, and performs analog to digital conversion of all input
signals before switching is performed by the Network. Additionally,
Peripheral equipment circuits provide the supervisory and transmission
functions needed for trunks connected to the external telecommunications
network.
Meridian 1 systems use a star topology for connecting peripheral devices to
the switching equipment, an approach which permits uniform distributed
wiring methods. This approach provides significant benefits in the area of
administration, installation, maintenance and reliability.
Figure 1
Meridian 1 modular architecture
Control
Switching
Peripherals
Network
Circuits
-yjgjJ
Software architecture
The adaptability of software control provides a complete array of services
and features tailored to meet changing requirements.
Call processing, maintenance and administration of Meridian 1 systems are
controlled by software programs stored either as firmware programs, as
software programs resident in system memory, or as non-resident programs
on disk. The information which describes system configuration and
associated peripheral equipment is termed office data. This data resides in
the system memory and on disk.
System overview 553-3001-I 00
..
System architecture I I
Firmware
.:;
::j
.,. “.
,‘;-T._....~
>g ->yyI
:. . ~ ;-“‘:
. . ,,’
:
These are fundamental programs consisting of hard-wired logic instructions
stored in Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) which manipulate
data in the central processor and control input/output operations, error
diagnostic and recovery routines.
Software
Software programs consist of instruction sequences that control call
processing, peripheral equipment, administration and maintenance
functions. These sequences are interpreted by the fiiware programs into
machine instructions. Several generic software programs with optional
feature packages are available to satisfy varying requirements.
Office Data
The office data describes the characteristics of the system in terms of
configuration and call dependent information such as features and services.
Office data is arranged into blocks defining peripheral equipment, system
configuration and transient data. These data blocks permit configuration of
Meridian 1 systems to specific customer needs.
Resident Programs
Resident Programs are programs always available in memory during system
operation. Firmware programs control other resident programs and provide
all CPU arithmetic operations. The other resident programs are those which
are automatically loaded into the system memory from the disk drive at
system power-up. Once loaded, these programs remain in memory.
Non-Resident Programs
Non-Resident Programs are the overlay programs stored on disk which are
loaded into the “overlay area” of system memory when required to perform
specific tasks. Only one overlay program may be loaded at a time and is
removed from the overlay area when no longer required. Overlay programs
can be loaded automatically, under program control, or manually, via an
administrative terminal.
Once the user has logged into the system, commands for specific overlay
programs are processed by the overlay loader program. When loaded, the
overlay program assumes control. Only one administrative terminal can
input into the overlay arca at a time. More than one device, however, can
System overview 553-3001-l 00
12 System architecture
receive output simultaneously. A terminal may be configured as an input
only or output only device.
Overlay programs provide the system interface for maintenance, service
change, and traffic measurement. Each overlay program is independent and
has its own specific set of commands and formats. Overlay programs may
be run concurrently with normal call processing without interfering with
system traffic. There are five main categories of overlay programs:
Service Change and Print Routines
Service changes do not generally require hardware intervention. Instead,
the service administration programs are used to create or modify all aspects
of the system from individual feature key assignments to complete system
configurations. There are also programs and print routines for retrieving the
data from the system to check the status of office data assignments.
Maintenance Diagnostics
These programs are the primary instruments for maintenance purposes.
Individual programs are used for automatically or manually testing the CE
and PE. The programs may be loaded into the overlay area at the request of
maintenance personnel, or as part of a daily maintenance routine
automatically initiated by the system at a specified time. In addition,
background and signaling diagnostic routines can occupy the overlay area
when it is not in use.
Traffic
All systems are equipped with traffic data accumulation programs. There is
also a resident traffic print program which examines the schedules, transfers
data from accumulating to holding registers in accordance with schedules,
and prints the traffic data. In addition, there is a traffic overlay program
which is used to query and modify schedules, options, and thresholds.
Equipment Data Dump
After making service changes, the changes must be transferred to disk in
order to save them. When the equipment data dump program is invoked, all
the office data in the read/write memory is written to the system disk. The
data dump program is also used to install a new generic version or issue and
capture protected data store information which may be changed by the user,
such as speed call lists. The program may be invoked automatically during
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
-.-
System architecture 13
a midnight routine or on a conditional basis (i. e. , data dump only occurs
if a software service change has been made). It may also be invoked
manually via the input/output (I/O) interface to the system.
Software Audit
This program monitors system operation and gives an indication of the
general state of the system operation. The program is concerned mainly
with the system software. When a software problem is encountered, the
program attempts to clear the problem automatically.
Hardware architecture
Each Meridian 1 system is composed of the following hardware
subsystems:
- Common equipment (CE): Provides the device control, software
execution, and memory functions of the system.
- Network equipment (NET): Performs the switching function under
CPU control.
- Peripheral equipment (PE): Provides the interface for line and trunk
circuits.
- Terminal equipment: Telephone sets and attendant consoles.
- Power equipment Provides the electrical voltages required to operate
equipment.
Common equipment
Common Equipment (CE) consists of one or more Central Processing Units
(CPUs), memory circuits, and mass storage devices which control the
operation of the system. The CE communicates over a common control bus
which carries a constant flow of program instructions and data under direct
control of the CPU. The digitized speech signals follow a separate path on a
network switching bus which allows communications links to be established
between any of the peripheral devices.
- The Central Processing Unit (CPU) provides the computing power
essential for entire system operation.
.:
‘:i
I
;--.:.,:,,
., _.’
!
System overview 553-3001-l 00
z
14 System architecture
- The system memory stores all operating software programs and data
unique to the particular Meridian 1 system, including switching
sequences, features, class of service information, and quantity and types
of terminals.
- The Mass Storage Unit provides high speed loading of the operating
programs and data into memory.
- The Digital Service Circuits provide functions such as dial and ringing
tones, and call conferencing capabilities.
- The Serial Data Interface (SDI) provides a RS232C communications
link for administration and maintenance on either a local or remote
basis.
- The Network Circuit Cards provide a digital matrix for circuit-switched
connections to associated peripheral devices.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The CPU performs the control and switching sequences required by the
system. The software that directs these functions is loaded into the system
memory from the mass storage unit by the CPU. Information flows
between the CPU, I/O devices, and the system memory over the CPU bus.
The data required by the CPU to perform its control and switching functions
is held during system operation in Random Access Memory (RAM) and fed
to the CPU via the CPU bus. The operating data is loaded into the RAM
from floppy diskettes on system power-up.
The CPU function is performed by circuit cards which include Read-OnlyMemory fiiware that contains fault clearing programs and instructions to
control the loading of system memory from the mass storage unit.
Meridian 1 systems incorporate a CPU design that is identical for most
system options.
- 24-bit data words plus l-bit parity
- 24-bit linear addressing that permits memory allocation to be assigned
on a contiguous basis instead of the 64K pages partitioning referenced
above
- 16M words - subdivided for up to 12M words of physical memory
space and a remainder of 4M words for I/O spaces
System overview 553-3001-100
_
System architecture 15
- asynchronous (handshake) bus operation
- 16 file registers used to hold address and data for all operations
- a sense (interrupt) input line to indicate that a particular device (tape,
TTY, PE) requires action by the CPU
- a trap facility which, when activated by an external signal, causes the
CPU to immediately begin executing instructions starting at a particular
address; this facility is used to enter a recovery routine when a fault is
detected
Mass Storage Unit
A mass storage unit equipped with two floppy diskettes and/or a Winchester
hard disk is used for high speed loading of the resident operating programs
and office data into system memory. The loading process is controlled by
instructions held in the Read-Only-Memory (ROM) fiiware. When
loading is complete, the diskettes remain in the mass storage unit to provide
a non-volatile store for automatic loading purposes in the event of software
being erased from memory during a power failure. Non-resident software is
loaded from the disk automatically or by manual request when required.
The Mass Storage Interface (MSI) card is designed to interface with
external devices that are compatible with the Small Computer System
Interface (SCSI). This storage capability is provided by the following
hardware configurations:
.._
- NT8D68AA Floppy Disk Unit: two 3.5” 1.2 Mbyte floppy disk drives
(providing 2.4 Mbytes of formatted capacity) as a standard system
offering,
- NTSD69 AA Multi Disk Unit: a Winchester Hard Disk with 10 Mbytes
of formatted capacity. When this option is equipped, the floppy disks
are used for backup and system loading.
System overview 553-3001-100
C.
16 System architecture
Both types of Mass Storage Unit (MSU) are compatible with any Meridian
1 system running Software Generic Xl 1 Release 8 or later. The upgrade
procedure involves replacing the Magnetic Tape Transport and associated
tape interface with the desired Mass Storage Unit and equivalent Mass
Storage Interface card (MSI) or Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) card. The
Mass Storage Unit requires the identical space required for the magnetic
tape unit, See Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251) for more
information about disk drive upgrades.
Input / Output (I/O) llnterfaces
There are various methods of communicating with Meridian 1 systems. A
family of Serial Data Interface (SDI) circuit cards provides from one to four
communication channels which conform to EIA Data Interchange Standard
RS-232-C. I/O addressing is under switch control of the SD1 card and
allows up to 16 RS-232-C compatible devices, such as a terminals, to
communicate with the system. The devices are used to input commands
and/or receive responses from the system during administration and
maintenance procedures.
Memory
Firmware, software, and data are stored in a read/write Random Access
Memory (RAM). The memory is a critical part of the stored program
control system. It contains the memory stores of all of the basic operating
instructions for the system, plus data on the configuration of the particular
application being served. Memory utilization is dependent upon what
features are programmed into the system and the number of peripheral
terminations being served. The memory is split into four segments to
facilitate processor address purposes and permit a functional separation of
programs.
- Unprotected Data Store (LIDS): These pages hold the transient or
unprotected data that is required during call processing. Included are
the timing queues and call registers.
- Protected Data Store (PDS) : This protected data store holds the office
data blocks that are particular to specific installations.
- Program Store (PS): Allocations within the Program Store are as
follows:
System overview 553-3001-I 00
c
:
i.
:.,: .-.~a.
.-a
./
System architecture 17
I
‘. !
_‘:I
2
‘J
!
I :
_ .. . . . . .
.- .. . . . . > . .
: ::‘ ‘:<-i..,
‘,‘-.,--,: ‘:.A,,
Firmware - This portion of the memory is a non-volatile Read
Only Memory (ROM) used for storage of all system fiiware.
The ROM is programmed during manufacture and the instructions
are permanent and indestructible. It stores the basic rules of
operation necessary to initialize the system and bring it into a
working state. A recovery or “trap sequence” is included in
fiiware which is automatically invoked in response to power-on,
system reset, or when certain faults are detected.
Overlay - This portion of the memory may be loaded with
various non-resident programs as required during automatic
diagnostics, service order change, traffic measurement, or
maintenance.
Software - The remainder of this memory page is reserved for all
of the system software such as the call processing and optional
programs. Additional software storage capability is provided by
the incremental addition of more memory pages within this
category.
Input / Output Addresses - There are no RAM modules utilized
for this page. Instead the address range is reserved for
._
Input/Output (I/O) device addresses. These devices include
signaling for peripheral equipment along with magnetic tape and
terminal assignments.
Network equipment
Network equipment consists of network circuit cards which perform the
digital switching of voice and data signals, peripheral signalling cards which
perform scanning and signal distribution. , and service circuit cards, such as
tone and digit switches, which provide call progress tones and outpulsing as
instructed by the CPU. Network circuits employ Pulse Code Modulation
(PCM) and Time Division Multiplexing (TDM) to perform the switching
function.
Loops and Superloops
Network equipment interfaces with peripheral equipment via digital
multiplexed loops. A loop is a bidirectional path between Network
equipment (NET) and Peripheral equipment (PE) for voice, data and
signalling information. Upon commands from the CE, the network
establishes a path, linking a specific input to a specific output.
System overview 553-3001-l 00
18 System architecture
Meridian 1 systems provide two network circuit cards, the QPC414
Network Card which provides 2 loops per card, and the NT8DO4AA
Superloop Network Card which provides 4 loops per card, grouped together
in an entity called a Superloop. The Superloop permits all 120 ‘timeslots
provided by the network card to be shared among the peripheral devices
served by the superloop, providing higher traffic capacity and simplified
traffic engineering.
The flexibility of the network loop plays an important role in the Meridian 1
architecture. Besides the ability to increase circuit-switched bandwidth on
an incremental card basis for cost-effective growth, application may be
varied for value added services. The network structure allows for the full
connectivity of all devices irrespective of how they connect to the system.
The network loop is a key element in the implementation of Computer to
PBX Interface (CPI) and Digital Trunk Interface (DTI). CPI provides an
integrated interface for connecting large numbers of host computer ports via
24 channels each supporting up to 19. 2 kbps for asynchronous data or up
to 56 kbps for synchronous data. DTI provides a digital link of 24 channels
each of which may be flexibly allocated for both voice and data
communications. Both CPI and DTI use the North American T-l standard
(DS-1 format) and each equipped link is assigned an associated network
loop.
Network organization
Network loops are organized into groups. Systems are configured as half,
full, or multiple group machines. A half network group machine provides a
up to 16 loops, a full group system provides from 17 to 32 loops, while a
multiple group system provides from 33 to 160 loops.
For applications beyond the traffic handling capability of the single network
group, additional switching stages are introduced to form a multi-group
arrangement. These connecting paths , provided by the InterGroup Module,
are merely an extension of the originating and terminating network loop
involved in a call. There are eight one way junctors from each group to all
others. Since each path provides thirty connecting channels, a total of 480
connection paths exist from one group to another - 240 in each direction.
Five network groups may be interconnected to constitute a fully configured
digital switching matrix.
System overview 553-3001-l 00
.-
System architecture
19
Network/Peripheral configuration
The allocation of peripheral equipment to the network loop determines the
traffic handling capability of the switching network. The lower the number
of terminations, the higher the loop traffic capacity. The quantity and type
of terminal assignments are allocated to optimize the traffic handling
capabilities of the switching network.
A universal PE bus structure permits any mix of PE card types to be located
in a PE module. Provisioning of PE cards and their associated density
(number of ports) determines the network loop to PE module configuration.
Complete modularity permits voice and data modules to be segregated so
that the specific traffic patterns of one may be met without impeding the
other.
Enhanced Network Configurations
For peripheral equipment housed in NT8D13 PE modules, network capacity
may be allocated in single lcop mode and dual loop mode. In single-loop
mode, one peripheral equipment module is connected to one network loop,
yielding a maximum concentration of 160 terminations to 30 time slots. In
dual loop mode, half of the PE cards in a module use one loop, and the other
half use another loop, yielding two maximum concentrations of 80
terminations to 30 time slots.
System overview 553-3001-100
.
20 System architecture
Figure 2
Single and dual loop configurations
PE UEMIOR
QPc414
ENET
Circuit
Pack
Network
SHELF
Two Network Loops
Connected To One
PE Shelf Containing
Single, Double Or
Quad Density PE
Ctrcuit Packs
Loop
Network Loop
PE UEMI OR SHELF
$F[
One Network Loop
Connected To Two
-PE Shelves Containing
Single Or Double
Density PE Circuit Pa&s
PE UEMl OR SHELF
Combined
Single And Dual
Loop Connections
To Three PE Shelves
Containing Single Or
Double Density PE
Circuit Packs
System overview 553-3001-l 00
System architecture 21
Superloop Network Configurations
The Superloop Network Card combines four regular network loops to make
120 timeslots available to PE cards housed in Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment Modules. This increased bandwiath and larger pool of timeslots
increases the network traffic capacity by 25% for each 120 timeslot bundle.
The NT8D37 Intelligent PE Module is divided into segments of 4 card slots.
These segments are numbered O-3. Segment 0 consists of PE slots O-3,
segment 1 consists of card slots 4-7, segment 2 consists of card slots 8-11,
and segment 3 consists of card slots 12-15.
A Superloop may be assigned from one to eight Intelligent PE segments. A
number of different superloop to segment configurations are possible. The
configuration chosen will depend upon system traffic requirements and the
specific PE cards used. Figures 4 through 9 illustrate different superloop to
segment configurations. Note that the TN to Timeslot concentration figures
(figure 3) are nominal, and may vary from segment to segment.
‘-
System overview 553-3001-100
22 System architecture
Figure 3
NT8D37 lntellegent Peripheral Module segmentation
segment 0
segment 1
Line Cards:
NTBWPAA Digital Line Card 16 to 32 TNs
NT8W3AA Analog Line Card 16 MS
NTBDOSAA Message Waiting Line Card 16 TNs
segment2 --
Segment 3
Trunk Cards:
NTBD14AA Universal Trunk Card 8 TNs
NT8DlMA E&M Trunk Card 4 TNs
TN density:
Per segment 16 iu 128 TNs
Per IPE module 64 to 512 TNs
Note: Maximum TN density assumes ail slots equipped with NT8DMM Diiital Line Cards with 16 voice and 16 data TNs
provisioned. Typical mix of line and trunk cards yields a nor&al density of 64 TNs per segment. 256 TNs per IPE module
System overview 553-3001-l 00
System architecture 23
1 segment per Superloop
In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 4).
In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line
Cards with all 16 voice and all 16 data TNs provisioned, the.1 segment per
superloop configumtion will provide a virtual non-blocking (120 Timeslots
to 128 TNs) environment (see Figure 2) Four NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network Cards and one NT8DOlAC Controller-4 Card are used to
implement a 1 segment per superloop configuration.
,.‘i‘... ,\*
:::.--:.,
Figure 4
1 segment per Superloop configuration
segment 0
Segment
I
I
I
1
Ssgmem
I
2
Segment 3
I
I
.:-__
. ?. , .-,
.:.:y .:
- .. .*I
System overview 553-3001-l 00
c
: ..
24 System architecture
2 segments per Superloop
In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 5).
In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line
Cards with no data TNs enabled, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8Do9AA
Message Waiting Line Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8D15AA Tnmk Cards,
the 2 segment per superloop configuration will provide a virtual nonblocking (120 Timeslots to 32-128 TNs) environment (see Figure 2). For
instances where half of the data TNs on NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards are
enabled, this configuration still provides a low concentration of TNs to
timeslots (120 Timeslots to 1% TNs) and a very low probability of
blocking. Two NT8DO4A.4 Superloop Network Cards and one
NT8DOlAD Controller-2 Card are used to implement a 4 segment per
superloop configuration.
Figure 5
2 segments per Superloop configuration
System overview 553-3001-100
System architecture 25
4 segments per Superloop
In this configuration, 4 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 6).
In cases where the segment is populated with NT8DO2AA Digital Line
Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAAMessage Waiting Line
Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 4 segment per
superloop configuration will provide a medium concentration (120
Timeslots to 64-256 TNs) environment (see Figure 2). In instances where
half of the data TNs on NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards are enabled, this
configuration provides a concentration of 120 Timeslots to 384 TNs. One
NT8DO4AA Superloop Network Card and one NT8DOlAD Controller-2
Card are used to implement a 4 segment per superloop configuration.
Figure 6
4 segments per Superloop configuration
System overview 553-3001-100
Y
:
26 System architecture
8 segments per SUperlOOp
In this configuration, 8 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop (see Figure 7).
ln cases where the segment is populated with NT9IO2AA Digit& Line
Cards, NT8DO3 Analog Line Cards, NT8DO!JAAMessage Waiting Line
Cards, or NT8D14AA or NT8DlSAA Trunk Cards, the 8 segment per
superloop configuration will provide a high concentration (120 Timeslots to
128-512 TNs) environment (see Figure 2). In instances where half of the
data TNs on NT8DO2AA Digital Line Cards are enabled, this configuration
provides a concentration of 120 Timeslots to 768 TNs. One NT8DO4AA
Superloop Network Card and two NT8DOlAD Controller-2 Cards are used
to implement an 8 segment per superloop configuration.
System overview 553-3001-l 00
..
System architecture 27
Figure 7
8 segments per Superloop configuration
.._
.:.y;- _T.
,,
..:+
I I,.. . .. _:,
: -:: :
..T
.,
System overview 553-3001-100
28 System architecture
1 segment per Superloop segmenis per Superloop
In this configuration, 1 segment is assigned to 1 Superloop and an additional
3 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 8). This
configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the single
segment served by the fiist Superloop and a medium concentration of TNS
to Tiieslots for the 3 segments assigned to the additional Superloop, as
described in the preceding examples. Two NT8DO4AA Superloop Network
Cards and one NT8DOlAD Controller-2 Card are used to implement a 1
segment and 3 segment per superloop configuration.
Figure 8
1 segment per Superloop/
Segment 1
I
segmsnt 0
ir
r
segments per Stiperloop configuration
lot4
JotI
ssgmml2
r
I
-
nt,:
Cmtrdlr
-Serves
System overview 553-3001-I 00
.
segments l-3
System architecture 29
2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop
In this configuration, 2 segments are assigned to 1 Superloop and an
additional 6 segments are assigned to another Superloop (see Figure 9).
This configuration provides a virtual non blocking environment for the two
segments served by the first Superloop (or a very low concentration of TNs
to Timeslots when some data T’Ns are enabled) and a medium concentration
of TNs to Timeslots for the 3 segments assigned to the additional superloop,
as described in the preceding examples. Two NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network Cards and two NTSWlAD Controller-2 Card are used to
implement a 2 segment and 3 segment per superloop configuration.
:
System overview 553-3001-100
.
30 System architecture
Figure 9
2 segments per Superloop/ segments per Superloop configuration
System overview 553-3001-100
c
System architecture 31
Peripheral Equipment
Peripheral Equipment consists of peripheral controller cards which provide
the timing and control sequences for peripheral circuits, analog and digital
line and trunk cards, which provide the interfaces for terminal devices, and
circuit cards which provide Digital Trunk Interface (DTI),and Primary Rate
Access (PRA) services.
The peripheral controller performs the first stage of multiplexing signals
from the terminals, which are then passed on to the network for digital
switching. The peripheral controller also transmits timing signals, and
carries out other functions associated with the control of the peripheral
circuits.
The line card converts incoming analog signals into digital signals which
are then passed on to the peripheral controller. This conversion is
accomplished by an integrated encoder/decoder (codec) chip. There is a
codec for each port on the line card. Conversion from digital back to analog
is also performed by the codec for outgoing signals. For digital telephones,
the codec is located within the telephone set itself.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is used to convert analog signals to digital
signals. The PCM method converts the analog signal to digital by samplin.g
the amplitude of the analog signal at a rate of twice the highest signal
frequency and converting the amplitude of each sample into a series of
coded pulses. The PCM sampling frequency standard for
telecommunications is 8 kHz.
Companding (compressing - expanding) PCM is a standard technique for
using 8 bits words to efficiently represent the wide dynamic range of voice
and data signals. Two standards for companding are internationally
recognized:
Mu-255 law for North American applications
A-law for international service
Meridian 1 codecs conform to both standards and are software selectable (in
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Modules) for use in North America and
internationally. The codecs are also designed to pass signals up to 3.4 kHz
System overview 553-3001-100
..
32 System architecture
with minimum time delay and low phase distort&, a requirement for the
proper transmission of data signals.
Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE)
In a local operating environment, the peripheral equipment may be housed
up to 50 feet from the common equipment. The RPE feature extends this
range to approximately 70 miles between local and remote facilities. This
extension is made possible by converting the multiplexed loop signals to a
form compatible with the commonly used T-l type digital transmission
system.
Any medium conforming to DS-1 format (1.544 Mbps) may be used to link
local and remote sites, including digital microwave radio and fiber optic
transmission systems.
DTVPRI
Allocation of circuit-switched bandwidth may also be made on a networkloop basis to Primary Rate Access (PRA) or Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
circuits. These optional services are based on the standard T-l format
(DS-1 24 channel) used in digital transmission networks.
DTI allows for the replacement of 24 conventional analog trunks by a single
T-l digital link. Each of 24 channels provides up to 56 Kbps for voice and
synchronous data transmission, or up to 19.2 Kbps for asynchronous data.
Power equipment
Meridian 1 systems feature a modular power distribution architecture which
parallels the modular design concept of the Universal Equipment Module.
Meridian 1 power systems provide the following features:
- AC-powered and DC-powered system options, providing flexibility to
meet a wide range of customer requirements.
- A distributed, modular power architecture, with power supplies located
in each Module, rather than in separate, centralized power shelves.
- All DC systems are available as complete systems, with rectifiers
provided by Northern Telecom, or can be equipped for customerprovided external power.
System
overview
553-3001-100
--
System architecture 33
- A new System Monitor has been designed to provide enhanced power,
cooling, and general system monitoring capabilities. This new System
Monitor interfaces to the CPU via a Serial Data Interface card, for
intelligent error and status reporting.
- Maintenance messages that indicate the location of power faults and
status down to the specific Column and Module.
- Equipment modules that are truly Universal, in terms of power and
cooling. Meridian 1 systems are designed to eliminate power and
thermal limitations: any card can go in any slot, and all modules can be
filled to capacity with any logically valid combination of cards, with
virtually no engineering rules.
- A universal quick-connect power wiring harness is used to distribute
input voltages and monitor signals to power supplies located in each
Module.
.- An advanced cooling system which employs forced air impellers. The
velocity of the impellers is automatically adjusted to meet the cooling
requirements of the system.
- Fuses are eliminated, as the system exclusively uses circuit breakers for
input power protection.
- Modular backup capabilities.
AC and DC systems differ primarily in the power components external to
the UEM. See Figures 8 and 9 for block diagrams of the AC and DC
powering schemes. DC systems always require the use of rectifiers. This
can be a disadvantage in applications that do not require reserve power
backup in the event of a utility power failure. The use of a rectifier in DC
powering is an advantage in applications that do require battery backup,
since all that is needed is to add batteries, as in the traditional central office
powering scheme.
AC-powered systems are especially well-suited for those applications that
do not require reserve power, as there are no external power components
required. There are a wide variety of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
systems available for AC systems that require reserve power, and the use of
a UPS is an effective method of providing backup power in many situations.
System overview 553-3001-100
34
System
architecture
The choice of which powering scheme to use is determined primarily by
reserve power requirements and preferences, and by existing power
equipment at the installation site.
Figure 10
AC power architecture
I
UPS
Battery
Bank
I
DC
RkXXifkI
- - w
AC
inp
,
‘
AC POWERED SYSTEM
fgg
Required i --
0
Optional
(with reserve power )
1
,.--,-..
,:,..:
.i
.:: : j
System
overview
553-3001-100
System architecture 35
Figure 11
DC power architecture
DC POWERED SYSTEM
(with reserve power)
System overview 553-3001-l 00
.d
:
36
System
System
architecture
overview
553-3001-l
00
z..
:
:
37
Product description
Universal Equipment Modules
The Meridian 1 System is comprised of Universal Equipment Modules
(UEMs), each containing everything needed (card cage assembly, power
supply, I/O cabling, etc) to support a specific system function. These UEMs
are assembled up to four high on a pedestal, to form a column. The pedestal
contains a central Power Distribution Unit (PDU), cooling fans, air filters,
and a System Monitor circuit. At the top of each column is a Top Cap,
which consists of two air exhaust grilles and a thermal sensor assembly that
works in conjunction with the System Monitor. Systems are comprised of
one or more columns. Each Universal Equipment Module is available in
AC or DC powered versions.
The Universal Equipment Modules are constructed of die cast aluminum,
providing strength and durability. For ease of access each module has
removable front and rear covers. All cable routing between the module and
the Main Distribution Frame (MDF) is handled through the rear of the
module. Cable exit can occur at the top, to access overhead cable racks, or
at the bottom to take advantage of raised floors. Universal Equipment
Modules are assembled on a pedestal that houses a central Power
Distribution Unit, cooling units and system monitor circuitry. The pedestal
can be equipped with either leveling feet or casters. UEMs may be
assembled in columns up to four high.
The following Universal Equipment Modules are available:
- CPU module (NTSD34)
.:;
,_ \ .y’..
::: -:‘
1
.‘. :
- CPU/Network module (NT6D39)
- Network Equipment module (NT8D35)
System overview 553-3001-l 00
.
38 Product description
- Common/Peripheral Equipment module (NT8Dll)
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37)
- Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13)
-
- Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47)
- InterGroup module (NT8D36AA)
- Meridian Mail module (NT6D44)
Figure 12
Universal Equipment Modules
\
Universal
Equipment
Univwbsl
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
Top-P
Equipment
.
Product description 39
CPU module (NT8D34)
The NT8D34 CPU module houses the CPU and Memory cards used to
provide system control and storage of data and programs, for the Meridian 1
system option 71. Each NT8D34 CPU module houses one CPU; two are
required for the Meridian 1 system option 71. For configuration flexibility
the NT8D34 CPU module is available with an AC power supply option or a
DC power supply option. These power supplies provide the voltages to
operate the circuit cards located in the modules.
The NT8D34 CPU module contains 17 card slots which support the
following:
- slots l-2 : Memory
- slot 3: CMA
- slot 4: CPU Interface
- slot 5: CPU Function
- slot 6: SD1
- slot 7: MS1
- slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)
- --
- slot 14: Clock Controller
- slot 15- 17: FDU/MDU or Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)jPrimary Rate
Interface (PRI)
System overview 553-3001-l 00
40
Product
description
Figure 13
NT8D34 CPU module -typical configuration
-
I
!
~CPU/Mem
SL-1 CE Module
Common Equipment
System
overview
c
553-3001-100
Product description 41
CPU/Network module -(NT6D39)
The NT6D39 CPU/Network module houses the CPU and Memory circuit
cards used to provide system control and storage of data and programs for
Meridian 1 system option 51 and 61. Each NT6D39 module houses one
CPU and up to 16 network loops required for each Meridian 1 system
option 51 and 61.
For configuration flexibility the NT6D39 CPU/Network module is available
with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These
power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in
the Modules.
For a half group, single CPU system (Meridian 1 system option 51) one
NT6D39 module is required. For a full group, dual CPU system (Meridian
1 system option 61) two NT6D39 Modules are required.
The NT6D39 contains 17 card slots which support the following:
- slots 1 - 8: Network cards
- slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI)
- slot 10: Peripheral Signaling
- slot 11: 3-Port Extender (3PE)
- slot 12: Mass Storage Interface (MSI)/Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) .- slot 13: SD1
- slot 14: CPU Function
- slot 15: CPU Interface
- slot 16: Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA)
- slot 17: Memory
- slot 18: FDWMDU
!
.,
.;
_:..
:
:
,
.::
‘-1
.:
:
-.
1
System overview 553-3001-100
42 Product description
Figure 14
NT8D39 CPU/Network module -typical configuration
;L-1 CE Module
1 Net
System overview 553-3001-l 00
I CPUAkm
Product description 43
Network module (NT8D35)
The NT8D35 Network module houses the circuit cards which are used to
provide the digital multiplexed network loops of the switch.mg system,
along with the control and signalling cards rquired to interface the
switching function with the CPU. The NTSD35 Network Module is used in
Meridian 1 system option 71 only. The NT8D35 module also supports
Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) and/or Primary Rate Interface @‘RI) cards.
For configuration flexibility the NT8D35 Network module is available with
an AC power option or a DC power option. These power supplies provide
the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in the modules.
The NT8D35 Network module houses up to eight QPC414 (ENET) cards or
four NT8DO4AA SuperLoop Network cards, or any combination for a total
of 16 network loops per module. In a typical configuration, 14 voice/data
loops are available when one NT8D17 Conference/Tone and Digit Switch
card is configured in the module. Two NT8D35 modules are required to
make a full network group of 32 loops. A maximum of 10 NT8D35
Modules (5 network groups) may be configured.
The NT8D35 contains 15 card slots which support the following:
- slots 1: 3PE
- slots 2-3: InterGroup Switch (IGS) 1, DTWRI, or SD1
- slot 4: Peripheral Signaling
- slots 5-12: Network Cards
- slot 13: DTI/PRI or SDYQSDI
- slot 14: DTI/PRI
- slot 15: not used
j
i
:
!
,i
1
_:: ..i- ..
, ,,Y..
..‘,,
. . . . . ..‘.
,,.
/’
System overview 553-3001-100
Y
:.
Product description 45
Common/Peripheral Equipment modute (NT8Dli)
The NT8Dll module houses the common, network and peripheral
equipment circuit cards for Meridian 1 system options 21A and 21.
The NT8Dll CE/PE module is available intwo versions, AC or DC power.
These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards
located in the modules.
The NT8Dll CE/PE module is divided into two functional sections:
- Common Equipment (CE)
- Peripheral Equipment (PE)
There are 10 Common Equipment (CE) and 10 Peripheral Equipment (PE)
card slots. The CPU functions are provided by card slots 1-3. The Network
Equipment functions are provided by card slots 3-10.
The NT8Dll module will utilize two specially designed circuit cards for
Meridian 1 System Options 21A and 21 only.
- Memory/Signaling card (NT8D19AA) - provides the peripheral
signaling functions in addition to providing the memory and
miscellaneous CPU equipment functions.
- Network/DTR card (NT8D18AA) - provides the Controller card -(NT8DOl) functions for the Intelligent PE cards installed in the
NT8Dll module, along with a SuperLoop Network and Digitone
Receiver functions.
The NTSDl 1 module uses the new Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards
to provide trunk and station interface in system options 21A and 21.
System overview 553-3001-100
46 Product description
The NT8Dll CE/PE Mod&e contains 20 card slots which support the
following:
- slot 1 : FDI
- slot 2 : CPU
- slot 3: Memory
- slots 4-8: Network cards
- slot 9: Conference/Tone and Digit Switch card (N’lXD17AA)
- slot 10: Network/DTR card (NT8D18AA) (Always configured
as SuperLoop 28)
- slots O-9: Intelligent Peripheral Equipment cards only
System overview 5!53-3001-100
..
.-.;
:,::,
:
,. ,:,_ ,:,:,+
,.. :(
.!
48 Product description
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D37)
The Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module uses the new Peripheral
Equipment cards only and may be used with system options 21A,.21,51,
61,7 1. With an upgrade assembly the Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
modules may be used with all existing systems.
The NT8D37 Intelligent PE module is available in two versions, AC or DC
power. These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit
cards located in the modules.
The NT8D37 module may only be connected to a SuperLoop Network
(NT8DO4AA) circuit card. It houses one Controller card (NT8DOl) and up
to 16 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment circuit cards. The card slots are
numbered from 0 to 15, for a total of 16 PE card slots.
The NT8D37 Intelligent PE module supports 16 PE circuit cards, yielding a
capacity of 256 Integrated Voice/Data (IVD) lines (512 TNs), although a
typical configuration includes a mixture of Digital lines, Analog lines,
Trunks and Digitone Receiver (DTR) circuit cards.
All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module
through an I/O panel. To serve all 16 PE card slots, 12 PE cables are
required to the MDF.
System overview 553-3001-100
.
Product description 49
Figure 17
NT8D37 Intelligent PE module-typical configuration
1 IPE
0
@ LJ
II.
PE Pwr Sup
System overview 553-3001-100
..
50
Product
description
Peripheral Equipment module (NT8D13)
The Peripheral Equipment module uses the PE circuit cards currently
housed in PE shelves for the Meridian SL-1 systems. It provides the
interface to the system for trunks and stations. The NT8D13 module may
only be connected to an ENET (QPC414) circuit card and maybe used in
system options 21A, 21,51,61,71 and the Meridian SL-IXT, NT, RT, ST,
N, and XN systems. It houses one Peripheral Buffer circuit card (QPC659)
and up to ten existing peripheral equipment circuit cards.
When the Meridian Data Service ADM, SADM, ASIM or AIM are required
on system options 21A, 21,51,61, and 71, the NT8D13 PE module must be
used.
For configuration flexibility the NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment module is
available with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option.
These power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards
located in the Modules.
All cable connections to the MDF are made in the rear of the module
through an I/O panel. Seven PE cables are required to the MDF for all 10
card slots.
System
overview
..
553-3001-l
00
$
F
I
?
I
I
Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card
*
5
It-l
II 211
-II Iill
B I
$ ltlt
3
Analog or Dgilial Line Card cr Trunk Card
Analog or Dgital Line Card or Trunk Card
WC659
Peripheral Buffer Card
Analog or Dgillal Line Card or TrunkCard
Analog or Dgtial Line Card or Trunk Card
Analog or Dgflial
Line Card or Trunk Card
Analog or Dgltial Line Card or TrunkCard
Analog or Dgltial Line Card or Trunk Card
I
I
52
Product
description
Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier module (NT8D47)
The NT8D47AA/DC RPE Carrier module is used to extend the Network to
PE interconnection distance between local and remote sites. It, 1
accommodates two network loops. The number of modules required per
system depends on the number of stations in the remote site.
For configuration flexibility the Remote Peripheral Equipment Carrier
module is available with an AC power option or a DC power option. These
power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located in
the modules.
The RPE backplane contains 12 card slots which support the following:
- slot 1: DTI
- slot 2: 1.5 Mb Converter
- slot 3: 2 Mb Converter
- slot 4: Carrier Interface
- slot 5: Remote Peripheral
- slot 6: Local Carrier Buffer
- slot 7: Carrier Interface
- slot 8: 2 Mb Converter
- slot 9: 1.5 Mb Converter
- slot 10: Carrier Maintenance
- slots 1 l-12: DTI
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
Product description 53
Figure 19
NT8D47 RPE Carrier module -typical configuration
System overview 553-3001-100
%.
54 Product description
InterGroup module (NT8D36AA)
The InterGroup module provides a path for the switching of traflic between
the network groups in system option 71. Faceplate cables from Segmented
Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock (SCG) and InterGroup Switch (IGS)
circuit cards are connected to the InterGroup module. These faceplate
cables are accessed from the front of the module.
The InterGroup module does not require any power card for operation.
Therefore it may be used with systems using the AC power option or the
DC power option.
Figure 20
NT6D36AA InterGroup module
/II
I I\
System overview 553-3001-l 00
..
Product description 55
Meridian Mail module (NT6D44)
;:. ..:,=-,
I././
._
I..
.,
j! II --.--x..:~:;
-.
. .
. . .
The NT6D44 Meridian Mail module houses the circuit cards currently used
by the Meridian Mail Option for Meridian SL-1 systems: The NT6D4.4
Meridian Mail module may only be connected to an ENET (QPC4 14)
circuit card and may be used in Meridian 1 system options 21A, 21,51,61,
71 and the Meridian SL-1 XT, NT, RT, ST, N, and XN systems.
For configuration flexibility the NT6D44 Meridian Mail module is available
with an AC power supply option or a DC power supply option. These
power supplies provide the voltages to operate the circuit cards located iu
the Modules.
Meridian 1 system option 21A must be upgraded to Meridian 1 system
option 21 when the NT6D44 Meridian Mail module is equipped.
System overview 553-3001-100
c
: ..
56 Product description
Figure 21
Meridian Mail module -typical
configuration
MERIDIAN MAIL MODULE NT6D44
..
\
Circuit breakers
for Power
sup+3
rputer &h /
V corsmdr
Availabiliiy
\
I
,;;;ym Bus Controller
Common Equipment
NT4RO6M
Power St&ply
Hard Disk Modules: NT4G5QAG
(multiple
155MB-NT6D46AA
ncdes)
2OOMBNT6D47AA
or
6OMB.NT6D46AA
Random
PIDCWSU
NT4RolAA
(Maidan 1
or
GMWd
wrpo=
signal vcica
Enhanced Single
PfOWstuw
CcmpMer Eloerd
NT4RwAA
NT4ROBAA
(Meridian tW
or DMS-loo)
/I
AC-8
Memory
NT4G5gAF
(sing* de)
System overview 553-3001-100
N.h!oJLe
’
RS-232
.setice
wle
NT4ROW
Product description 57
Pedestal (NT8D27AB)
The NT8D27AB pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction and
houses the power distribution unit, system monitor, blower unit, and fan
unit connector. One pedestal is required per equipment column.
The pedestal is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 25.50 inches deep by 10
inches high and weighs 30 lbs empty. Leveling feet are provided for up to
four tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers. Input power
for the system is brought into and distributed by the pedestal. A Power
Distribution Unit located in the pedestal contains an EMI filter and one 30
amp circuit breaker.
One pedestal distributes the input power for one column. Also located in
the pedestal are two forced air impellers and a reusable dust filter. The
impellers are protected by two 1 amp circuit breakers.
.-
Top cap (NT7DQO)
The top cap is mounted on the top module of each column. It provides
additional EM1 shielding, air exits, and I/O cable exits.
The top cap is approximately 31.5 inches wide by 22 inches deep by 3
inches high and weighs 8 lbs. It consists of a front and a rear air exhaust
grills, each secured by two clips underneath the edge of the grill.
._
Three versions of the top cap are available:
- NT7DOOAA
AC systems
- NT7DOOBA
DC systems
- NT7DOOAB
Meridian 1 System option 21A only
Expansion kit (NT8D49)
The Expansion kit bolts modules together for side-by-side expansion when
in a contiguous row. The Expansion kits also maintain shielding against
EMI/RFl. See Figures 22 and 23.
System overview 553-3001-100
58 Product description
Figure 22
Multi-column system equipped with NTBD49 Expansion kits
NT8D49
System overview 553-3001-l 00
Expansion K i t s
Product description 59
NT8D49 Expansion Kit
Spacer
System overview 553-3001-l 00
60
Product
description
Meridian 1 system options
Several system options are available. The use of the Universal Equipment
Modules allows for seamless growth from one option to another by adding
or replacing Universal Equipment Modules or card cages. The options are
selected depending upon the application, line size, and other customer
requirements:
- Meridian 1 system option 21A - Single CPU-l module only
- Meridian 1 system option 21- Single CPU
- Meridian 1 system option 51- Single CPU, Half Network Group
- Meridian 1 system option 61- Dual CPU, Full Network Group
- Meridian 1 system option 71- Dual CPU, Multiple Network Groups
Meridian 1 system option 21A
The Meridian 1 system option 21A package includes the CE/PE base
hardware, 1 Network/DTR card, 1 Conf/TDS card, 1 Floppy Disk Unit
(FDU), 2 SD1 paddle boards. The Pedestal and Top Cap assemblies must be
added. These assemblies include a Top Cap-21A, System Monitor-21A,
Pedestal, AC power cord and a power distribution Unit-21A. The Meridian
1 system option 21A supports only the AC power option.
Figure 24
System option 21 A
System
overview
553-3001-I
00
Product description 61
Table 1
System option 21A specifications
Power
AC only
Typical Number of Ports
160
Maximum Number of Ports
320
Maximum Number of Modules
1
AC Input Voltage
208 V ac
Number of CPUs
1
Number of Network Loops
l
7 SuperLoops
or 12 ENET Loops plus two
service loops (Conf/TDS)
Cooling
Fan in Top Cap
Memory
768K
Data
Floppy Disk Unit
Storage
Software Generic
1011 Rls 15
Hardware Features
No Power Distribution Unit Contains
System Monitor (NT7D15AA)
Additional network loops require expansion modules
(Intelligent PE or Peripheral Equipment Modules).
Note:
System overview 553-3001-100
Y
62 Product description
Meridian 1 system option 21
The Meridian 1 system option 21 package includes the CEjPE base
hardware, 1 Network/DTR card, 1 Conf/TDS card, 1 Floppy Disk Unit
(FDU), 2 SD1 paddle boards. The Pedestal and Top Cap assemblies must be
added. Figure 25 illustrates a typical configuration with the shaded area
showing the base package.
Figure 25
System option 21
System overview 553-3001-100
Product description 63
.;. _,
,‘)2;:‘,i,
,’ .” . ..’ ,y
-. :, ,-,z
Table 2
System option 21 spcifications
Power
AC or DC
Maximum Number of Ports
800
Input
208Vacor-48Vdc
Voltage
Number of CPUs
1
Number of Network Loops
7 SuperLoops
or 12 ENET Loops plus two
service loops (Conf/TDS)
Cooling
Fan Impellers in pedestal
Memory
768K
Storage Media
Floppy Disk Unit
Software Generic
1011 Rls 15
Hardware Features
Standard Power Distribution Unit Contains
System Monitor (NT8D22AB)
;..
‘:.
:
3
..,
,::
._,!
.)
System overview 553-3001-l 00
c
64 Product description
Meridian 1 system option 51
The Meridian 1 system option 51 package includes 1 CPU/Network module,
1 Conference and TDS card, 1 SuperLoop NetworJc card, 2 SD1 paddle
boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal assembly
and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be added. Figure 26
shows a typical system configuration with the shaded areas showing the
base package.
Figure 26
System option 51
I
I
r
System overview 553-3001-l 00
Universal
Equipment
Module u
Ufliversal
Equipment
‘tlll
1111
Product description 65
Table 3
System option 51 specifications
:,
.;
..-:.-‘.,.
‘L
Power
AC or DC
Maximum Number of Ports
1000
Input
208 V ac or -48 V dc-
Voltage
Number of CPUs
1
Number of Network Loops
16
Cooling
Fan Impellers in pedestal
Memory
768K
Storage Media
Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit
Software Generic
1111 Rls 15
Hardware Features
One Half Network Group, Standard Power
Distribution Unit Contains System Monitor
(NT8D22AB)
‘:;.
: ‘: !
:,
System overview 553-3001-100
66 Product description
Meridian 1 System option-61
The Meridian 1 System option 61 package includes 2 CPU/Network
Modules, 2 Conference and TDS cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1
paddle boards, 1 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment module, 1 Pedestal
assembly and 1 Top Cap. The FDU or MDU assembly must be.added.
Figure 27 shows a typical system configuration with the shaded areas
showing the base package.
Figure 27
System option 61
niversal
Universal
Equipment
~g”“‘&‘~y~~~
. .. .. .. .. r
I-:.:~::.: :i.:;:~.:i ~
.. .... ...........
.... ....
.... ...
... ........
........
IY
.... ....
... ......... .
.............
........
......................
.. .. . ... ...... .:.~:...:...:.:.:.:::::::: ..:.: ..... ~:( ._,
::::.:.:.~.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:
................. ~ .. ..: . >
......................
...........
.............................
..... .....................
.............................
..:.:.:.:.:.:.: .: ........
........ .................. .
................................
iii~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~CPl- -........ii... . h
........
..........................
....................
.....................
System overview 553-3001-l 00
..
Product description 67
_I‘ , j
j
Table 4
System option 61 specifications
.<. :. 12;
:;.‘.
;,:.:;,
1. . ;.._, (,:
Power
AC or DC
Maximum Number of Ports
2000
Input
Voltage
1208Vacor-48Vdc
Number of CPUs
2
Number of Network Loops
32
Cooling
I
1 Fan Impellers in pedestal
Memory
768K
Storage Media
Floppy Disk Unit or Multi Disk Unit
Software Generic
I1111 Rls 15
I
I
Hardware Features
1One Network Group, Standard Power
Distribution Unit and Contains System
Monitor (NT8D22AB)
I
I
I
.I
System overview 553-3001-100
‘...
68
Product
description
Meridian 1 system option 71
The Meridian 1 system option 71 package includes 2 CPU Modules, 1
InterGroup module, 1 Network Group assembly, 2 Conference and TDS
cards, 1 SuperLoop Network card, 2 SD1 cards, 2.Intelligent Peripheml
Equipment Modules, 2 Pedestal assemblies and 2 Top Caps. The FDU or
MDU assembly must be added. Figure 28 shows a typical configuration
with the shaded areas showing the base package.
Figure 28
System option 71
System
overview
C.
:
553-3001-l
00
Product description 69
Table 5
System option 71 specifications
Power Distribution Unit and Contains
‘:
:;
... . .: :.: “ C
:::‘:.:‘)
, _. . - . A,
~
.,.E : .:::.::
::.
System overview 553-3001-100
70
Product
System
description
overview
553-3001-l
..
00
71
List of terms
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution.
ADM
Add-On Data Module.
AIM
Asynchronous Interface Module.
ALU
Arithmetic Logic Unit.
Architecture
The interrelationship between the parts of a system. The framework of a
system.
ASIM
Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module.
Analog
A process which models information in the form of a continuously varying
parameter such as current, voltage, or phase.
System overview 553-3001-100
72
List of terms
Analog signal
A signal that varies in a continuous manner such as voice or music. An
analog signal may be contrasted with a digital signal which represents only
discrete states. The signal put out by a data set has both analog .zuid discrete
characteristics.
ANI
Automatic Number Identification.
Ampere
A unit of electrical current or the rate of flow of electricity which is equal to
watts divided by volts.
Backplane
A printed circuit board that extends throughout the length of the shelf and
connects to the circuit pack connectors. Also known as a motherboard.
Battery back-up
System power furnished by stand-by batteries that are charged by a charger.
If commercial power fails, the batteries will maintain service for a limited
period of time determined by the size of the batteries and the traffic on the
system.
BISDN
Basic Rate Integrated Services Digital Network.
BTU
British thermal unit. The quantity of heat required to raise the temperature
of one pound of water one degree Fahrenheit at a specified temperature (as
39” E). Also means Bus Terminating Unit.
Capacity
The information-carrying ability of a telecommunications facility, group,
network, or system measured in Bits Per Second.
Cards
See circuit packs.
Card Cage
Also referred to as card chassis. A frame for holding circuit cards in a
microprocessor. A standard cage holds nine cards; units with motherboards
can hold up to 20 cards.
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
List of terms 73
CAS
Centralized Attendant Service.
CASM
Centralized Attendant Service, Main.
CASR
Centralized Attendant Service, Remote.
cc
Clock Controller.
CDR
Call Detail Recording.
CE
Common Equipment.
Central Office (CO)
The site where the telephone companies terminate customer lines and locate
the switching equipment which interconnects those lines.
Central Processing Unit (CPU)
The main portion of a computer that contains the primary storage,
arithmetic and logic units, and the control unit; Mainframe.
Centralized depot
A repair house for SL-1 systems that serves subdepots.
Centrex
Central Exchange. A telco PBX type of service incorporating Direct Inward
Dialing (DID) and Automatic Identification of Outward Dialed Calls
(AIOD).
Circuit packs
Also known as cards, circuit packs are individual circuit boards that carry
the necessary electronics for particular functions (memory, disk drive
control, etc. ). These cards lit into expansion slots provided by Apple,
IBM, Radio Shack, and other computer manufacturers.
ClwlA
Changeover and Memory Arbitrator.
System
..
overview
553-3001-100
74
List of terms
co
Central Office.
CPU
Central Processing Unit.
Common equipment (CE)
A hardware subsystem that houses one or more Central Processing Units
(CPUs), memory circuits, mass storage devices, and service circuits.
Configuration
A group of machines (hardware) which are interconnected and are
programmed to operate as a system.
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)
Equipment or devices which are capable of transmitting and/or receiving
data signals over a communications network commonly called a business
.machine.
dB
Decibel
DCHI
D-Channel Handler Interface.
Diagnostic programs
Software routines used to test equipment and pinpoint faulty components.
Digital
A process which models information as discrete values of some parameter
such as voltage, current, or phase. Compare with analog.
Digital Multiplex Switching System (DMS)
A family of switching systems using new technology that provides digital
circuit switched service for voice and data transmission. DMS is
characterized by the use of pulse code modulation (PCM) and time division
multiplexing (TDM) throughout the switched network. The system allows
the direct switching of PCM signals without their conversion to analog
format.
System
overview
553-3001-l
00
List of terms 75
Digital signal
A signal made up of discrete, non-continuous pulses whose information is
contained in theirduration, periods, and/or amplitude.
Directory number
The four-digit number or extension given to a Meridian SL-1 telephone set.
Also known as DN.
DSL
Digital Subscriber Loop.
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment.
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface.
DTR
Digitone Receiver.
EIA
Electronics Industry Association.
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference. Unwanted electromagnetic coupling.
Examples are ham radio heard on electric organs and church music heard in
hearing aids. Also known as QRM or “static.”
ESN
Electronic Switched Network.
Failure rate
The estimated number of failures for that item during one million (106)
hours of operation.
Firmware
A set of instruction sequences stored permanently in hardware (ROM).
.i
,..:‘.(..
.;:,: ,._.
..(
FM
.‘,’
_’
Frequency Modulation; A process whereby the frequency of a previously
single frequency carrier wave is varied in step with the amplitude of a
complex modulating wave. Also means Fully Modular.
System overview 553-3001-100
c
76
List of terms
Frame
A distributing frame. The structure on which all distribution and trunk
cables into a central office are terminated (attached).
Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)
Combining two or more information channels into a single transmission
channel by assigning each information channel an exclusive frequency band
within the transmission channel bandwidth. (See “Multiplex” and “Time
Division Multiplex. “)
I/O
Input/Output; Refers to devices that communicate with customer quipmcnt
The result equals a properly functioning communications channel or system.
I/O Channel
Input/Output channel; A component in a computer system controlled by the
central processing unit that handles the transfer of data between main ‘storage and peripheral equipment.
I/O Panel
A separation plane that prohibits RF (Radio Frequency) emissions from
passing through the cube and provides mounting for I/O cable connectors.
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network.
IVD
Integrated Voice and Data.
Kbk
Kilobits per second.
Line
A communications channel or circuit an electrical path.
Loop
A bidirectional path between network equipment and peripheral equipment.
MCDS
Multi-Channel Data System.
System overview 563-3001-100
..
List of terms 77
MDF
Main Distributing Frame. See “Frame” above.
‘I
u
::>;..
: :> .,
.>, . ,..:.
-“’:;.::
t. a -.; >- 1
‘I.
MF
Multi-Frequency; A method of sending numerical address digits between
telephone company switching centers coded as two or more frequencies
between 300 and 3400 Hertz.
MFS
Multi-Frequency Signaling. Also means Multi-Frequency Sender.
MGS
Multi-Group Switch.
MSI
Mass Storage Interface.
MSL-1
Meridian SL- 1.
MSU
Mass Storage Unit.
Multiplex (MUX)
The process of combining two or more information channels into a single. .transmission channel. (See “Frequency Division Multiplexing” and “Time
Division Multiplexing. “)
Network equipment (NET)
A hardware subsystem that provides digital multiplexed switching for voice,
data, and signaling paths.
NFT values
The number of spares required for a field-replaceable item. NFT is
calculated by multiplying the number (N) of that item in use by the failure
rate (F) for the item from Appendix 1 by the turnaround time (T) in hours.
(N X F X T = NFT value. ) See Appendix 1 for details.
......
:
,. . .,
:: :.:.-..1.
‘“< . _ -I /:‘I,,
NTP
Northern Telecom Publication.
System overview 553-3001-l 00
..d
:.:
78
List of terms
ODAS
Office Data Administration System; provides a method of retrieving
administrative information stored in Meridian SL-1 memory.
Office data
Office data represents system configuration data, peripheral equipment data,
and transient data (temporary) used for call processing.
PBX
Private Branch Exchange.
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation,
PDU
Power Distribution Unit.
PE
Peripheral Equipment.
Pedestal
Base assembly upon which Universal Equipment Modules are stacked; The
pedestal houses the Power Distribution Module, System Monitor, Blower
Module (and/or Fan assembly), Harnessing, and Air Grille and Filter units.
Peripheral equipment
A hardware subsystem that provides analog and digital telephone and trunk
interfaces and houses a combination of line, trunk, and receiver packs.
Population range
The quantity of each type of SL-1 switch in the area served by a repairhouse depot. See Appendix 1 for details.
Power supplies
Individual units that generate the different DC voltages required by
backplanes installed in a module. Their primary function is to provide
power to a shelf of cards housed within a UEM.
PRA
Primary Rate Access.
System overview 553-3001-100
:
List of terms 79
ISDN Primary Rate Interface.
Private Branch Exchange
PBX; A small telephone switching center enabling a customer’s telephone
stations to connect to the public switched network.
Private Exchange
A private (manual) telephone exchange that provides private telephone
service to an organization that does not allow calls to be transmitted to or
from the public telephone network.
PROPvl
Programmable Read-Only Memory.
Public Switched Network
The Direct Distance Dialing (DDD) telephone network; Any exchange
. . type
of service that is made available for public use.
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)
A modulation technique whereby the signal is converted from an analog to
digital format by sampling the signal at periodic intervals and digitizing the
amplitude into a finite number of discrete levels; Five-bit information code.
RAM
Random Access Memory; Storage system or computer memory that is
accessible by the user for either storing or retrieving information. RAM is
volatile memory.
Redundancy
The duplication of software/hardware used as a standby in case one fails
(redundant CPUs).
Retrofit
To furnish with new parts or equipment not available at the time of
manufacture.
RF
Radio Frequency; A group of electromagnetic energy waves whose lengths
are between the audio range and the light range.
System overview 553-3001-100
80
List of terms
RFI
The disruption of radio signal reception caused by any source which
generates radio waves at the same frequency and the same path as the
desired wave.
RH
Relative Humidity.
ROM
Read Only Memory: Storage system or computer memory that is “burned
into” the microprocessor chip and can only be read, not written to or
modified. Non-volatile memory.
RPE
Remote Peripheral Equipment.
Satellite operation
The operation of a telecommunications system at a remote location as a‘
completely unattended system connected to the main system by special
point-to-point circuits. The two (or more) systems act as one total system
served by attendants at the main system.
SBE
Segmented Bus Extender.
SDI
Serial Data Interface.
SEQ
Sequencer.
Single depot
A repair house that services SL- 1 systems.
Software
A set of programmed instruction sequences stored either as resident
programs in the system memory or as non-resident programs on disk which
are loaded into memory when needed.
:i‘.-,. .I ,
.,-;9
Software generic
A term used to describe the software package being used. Each software
generic (X11, for example), has a series of releases (like release 8).
System
overview
..
.
.
553-3001-l
00
List of terms 81
Spare stock size
The quantity of spares for a given stock item.
Sparing interval
The period of time that stocks of replaceable SL-1 items should last without
being replenished.
Stock confidence level
The allowed probability of not being out of stock when the sparing interval
of one year is greater than 99. 9 percent.
System hardware
Hardware configuration.
System monitor
A microprocessor-based circuit pack used to monitor the UEM (Universal
Equipment Module) power supplies, stack thermal status, and fan operation
status. Each system monitor reports its status to the system CPU, and the
head (master) system monitor checks their statuses. The master system
monitor will trip the stack circuit breaker in the event of a problem
(excessive temperature, for example).
TCM
Time Compression Multiplexing.
TDS
Tone and Digit Switch.
Time Division Multiplex (TDM)
Combining two or more information channels into a single transmission
channel by assigning each information channel an exclusive periodic
transmission time interval. (See “Multiplex: and “Frequency Division
Multiplex. “)
Top cap
A drip-proof cover for the UEM (Universal Equipment Module). It
provides airflow exits, RF/EM1 shielding, I/O cable entries/exits, and
overhead cable-rack mounting.
^....
.‘!
;. : . . .
; .;,.: ,‘j
._ v . ,
3PE
Three-Port Extender.
System overview 553-3001-100
Y
82
List of terms
Trunk
A single circuit between two points, both of which are switching centers or
individual distribution points.
Teletype machine.
2DFi
Two-Way Tie, Dial Repeating.
Turnaround time
The number of days it takes to replace a failed item and to return a useable
item to stock.
UEM
Universal Equipment Module; a modular, self-contained hardware cabinet
(or cube) that houses a card cage assembly, its associated circuit packs,
power supplies, and I/O panels. A Meridian SL-1 system may consist of
stacks of UEMs.
UPS
Uninterrupted Power Supply.
VAC
Voltage
Alternating
Current.
VDC
Voltage Direct Current.
VDT
Video Display Terminal; monitor.
System overview 553-3001-100
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System overview
Copyright 0 1990 Northern T&corn
All rights reserved.
information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29, 1990
Printed in U.S.A.
nit
northern
tolocom
SL-1
System options 21,51,6.1,71
Installation planning
Standard
:
;
.,.. -... .
‘. .::. :-/
:,“.: i;.:
:’
:
.,I’
-3
:
:..
““..
,i
i.’
d
: !
S-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Installation planning
Publication number: 553-3001-l 20
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
installation planning 553-3001-120
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1.0
Installation planning 553-3001-120
..
,
iii
Preface
Notice
The Canadian Department of Communications label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the equipment meets certain
telecommunications network protective, operational and safety
requirements. The Department does not guarantee the equipment will
operate to the user’s satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure that it is permissible to
be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company.
The equipment must also be installed using an acceptable method of
connection. In some cases, the company’s inside wiring associated with a
single line individual service may be extended by means of a certified ._
connector assembly (telephone extension cord). The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent
degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment should be made by an authorized Canadian
maintenance facility designated by the supplier. Any repairs or alterations
made by the user to this equipment, or equipment malfunctions, may give
the telecommunications company cause to request the user to disconnect the
equipment.
..;
: :.. 11 ;,
(. .;., .: . . . .
,,.. . . . . . . . ..I
., -,. . . . . ., .;
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
I
.
iv Preface
Users should ensure for their own protectjon that the electrical ground
connections of the power utility, telephone lines and internal metallic water
pipe system, if present, are connected together. This precaution may be
particularly important in rural areas.
J
CAUTION
Proper electrical ground connections
Users should not attempt to make electrical ground
connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electrical inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
c
About this document
This section of the Planning and engineering guide deals with planning the
environment that the SL-1 (Option 21,51,61, and 71) system will inhabit,
including equipment location, commercial power requirements (AC and
DC), grounding, and cabling requirements. Most of the considerations for
site planning and installation are common for both AC- and DC-powered
systems. Where there are differences, these are noted in the applicable
sections. The information is intended to assist with the site selection, site
planning, and installation planning process.
References
See the SL-1 planning & engineering guide for
- Muster index (553-3001-000)
- System overview (553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
- System engineering
(553-3001-151)
- Power engineering
(553-3001-152)
- Sparesplanning
(553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-154)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Muster index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- System installation procedures (553-3001-210)
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.d
vi About this document
- Installation procedures for telephone
sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215)
- Extended systems installation (553-3001-250)
- Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251)
- General maintenance information
(553-3001-500)
- Fat.& clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-I XII software guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
- XII software management
(553-3001-300)
- Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-1 XII input/output guide (553-300140) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
Installation planning X3-3001 -120
..
About this document vii
Related documentatiori
The following documents contain information that may be of value during
the site planning and preparation process.
- 1987. “Maintenance, Testing and Replacement of Large Storage
Batteries.” IEEE, Vol. 450: all pages. - 1987. “Design and Installation of Large Lead Storage Batteries.” IEEE,
Vol. 484: all pages.
- 1981,1982,1983. ANSI/IEEE Standard, Vols. 484,142,81: all pages.
(484-1981; 142-1982; 81-1983)
- 1984. Gaseous Hydrogen Systems. NBRA, Vol. 50A: all pages.
- 1984. National Electrical Code. NFPA, Vol.. 70: all pages.
- 1986. Canadian Electrical Code. Canadian Standards Association,
C22-1-1986
..
- Grounding Electrode System
(NBC Articles: 250-23,250-26,250-54,250-8
1,250-83,250-84 and,
250-86)
(CEC lo-204,10-206,10-504,10-520,10-700-710)
- Grounding Electrode Conductor
(NEC Articles: 250-23,250-26,250-51,250-53,250-g 1,250-92 and,
250-94)
(CEC 10-500, lo-502,10-804,10-808,10-812)
Installation planning
553-3001-l
20
viii About this document
- Grounded Conductor (i.e., Neutral)
(NEC Articles: 250-26,250-50,250-51,250-53
and, 250-61)
(CEC lo-206,10-900-908,10-500,10-502,10-518)
- Equipment Grounding Conductor (NEC Articles: 250-50,250-5
250-53,250-57,250-91,250-32,250-92 and; 250-95)
1,
(CEC 10-900-908,10-500,10-502,10-510,10-804,10-300,10-302)
- Main Bonding Jumper (NJX Articles: 250-23,250-26
and, 250-61)
(CEC lo-204,10-206,10-518,10-520)
- Grounding Evaluation-Practices and Equipment, ECOS Electronics
Corporation, 205 West Harrison Street, Oak Park, IL 60304
- Full of Potential. James G Biddle Co. Plymouth Meeting, PA 19462.
- Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment XFPA
75
- MIL-Handbook - 4 19 (raised floor installation requirements)
- “Network Equipment Building Systems Generic Equipment
Requirements” specification TR-EOP-000063. Bellcore.
- OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration Standards (29
CFR 1910)
- Recommended Practice on Static Electricity - NFPA 77
- Soares Grounding Electrical Distribution Systems for
Safety
- Uniform Building Code 1982
- Local building codes
Note: If a conflict arises between a code included in this document
and a local or national code, follow the local or national code.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
..
ix
Contents
Planning activities
1
The installation outline
The Milestone chart
1
4
Researching the requirements
General requirements
The equipment room environment
Environmental factors
Temperature and humidity
Static electrfcity
Vibration
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
Dust
Lighting
Earthquake bracing
Structural
Air conditioning requirements
SL-1 system power options
DC-powered SL-1 systems
AC-powered SL-1 systems
Commercial AC power source
Input power specifications
Commercial power conditioning
Grounding
Commercial power and grounding requirements
Building ground requirements
Isolated ground topology
Non-isolated ground topology
Grounding guidelines
7
7
8
11
11
11
11
..-12
12
13
13
13
13
16
17
18
18
19
20
20
21
21
22
22
22
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
x Contents
AC service panel
Dedicated versus shared power
Auxiliary power requirements
Isolated service receptacles
Non-isolated service receptacles
Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) powering
Cabling
Cable types
Twisted-pair telephone cables
25-Pair MDF cables
Twisted-pair shielded cables
Interface (l/O) cables
UEM cable routing
Network to PE cabling
Power and ground cables
Cable access requirements
Fire protection and safety precautions
Fire protection and prevention
Recommended fire extinguishing systems
Security precautions and safeguards
Safety procedures and training
Occupational noise exposure
Planning the site
Selecting a site
Space
Location
Power and grounding
Structural integrity
Developing the site
The equipment room
Primary storage
Secondary storage
Maintenance/Technician area
Equipment room accessories
The floor plan
Floor loading estimates
The building cable plan
Wire routing
Floors
Installation planning 553-3001-120
..
23
23
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
‘-35
36
37
37
37
..c 3
+.4:y:.:‘I..: ..“‘:
_
. %
>
”
39 --39
39
39
39
39
40
40
40
41
41
41
42
47
48
51
51
.+:?tT.
c;; -$
Contents xi
Ceilings
Walls
Between floors
Electromagnetic Interference
Termination points
Distribution frames
(EMI)
Preparing for delivery
Considerations
Equipment handling
:.
:
:’
.,
51
5-l
51
52
52
52
55
55
57
precautions
Preparing for installation
59
Work orders
Equipment room floor plans
Cabling plan
The installation plan
Manuals
Preinstallation inspections
Equipment room inspections
General inspections
Reserve power inspections
59
60
61
62
62
62
63
64
64
_ _‘.
.c..:. -I--__
;-f ._,, ::..- :;
\,.‘“..,..“,
-‘.
_,
Installation planning
553-3001-120
xii
Contents
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.d
,
1
Planning activities
The installation outline
Since installations differ from site to site, no single overall schedule of
predelivery activity will apply in all cases. In each instance, prepare a
detailed plan when the site has been selected and the equipment ordered.
Use Table 1, “Outline for installation planning, ” as a guide for making a
detailed checklist. Use Table 2 for listing the activities that are involved in
site preparation.
. . . ,‘{;,‘,y
::
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
..s
2 Planning activities
_’
Table 1
Outline for installation planning
Items
Procedures
Research
Read the requirements identified
in this document.
Establish equipment environment,
air conditioning requirements,
floor loading requirements, and
other requirements listed in this
section.
Select a site
Check space, location, power and
grounding, and delivery issues.
Develop the site
Produce a detailed checklist. Use
this outline as a guide.
Prepare for delivery
Prepare equipment room
environment and delivery route.
Ensure safety conditions.
Establish fire prevention.
Prepare for installation
Installation planning 5!53-3001-120
Obtain work orders, equipment
room floor plans, cabling plans,
manuals, installation plans,
preinstallation inspections, and
delivery equipment.
Planning activities 3
Table 2
Site planning activities
Activities
Wform detailed site survey. Determine if building wire needs
/erification and gather preliminary customer data.
Hold contract review meeting.
Prepare project plarl.
Hold customer meeting to discuss project plan and division of
responsibilities.
Hold Construction Phase site survey to prioriiize site development
.
tasks.
Identify environmental, space, power and grounding requirements ant
prepare
site
accordingly.
Gather customer data.
Perform site inspections to ensure site is ready for installation.
Plan customer user training.
Note: In all the activities above, the Northern Telecom distributor is
generally responsible to ensure that these activities have been
implemented.
. ._ . .
..i .
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
..
4 Planning activities
The Milestone chart
-
Planning and monitoring site preparation activites is easier when you use a
Milestone chart. The Milestone chart is a site planning schedule. It shows
the sequence of activities necessary to complete a job and will be different
with each site. Depending on the complexity of the site, the chart may be
more detailed with scheduled due dates for each activity group.
When preparing your Milestone chart, consider not only the individual
operations, but the overall installation schedule. A Milestone chart may
show the necessary operations in order and may assign a start date and end
date for each.
Remember to obtain the appropriate sign-offs when the site is ready for
delivery and installation of the equipment. Sign-offs may include
regulatory items such as electrical and air conditioning inspections and the
approval of the cable plan.
Table 3 lists typical activities that should be included in the Milestone chart.
Your chart may differ from this one.
The first Milestone prior to delivery should be used to prepare specifications
and drawings, request bids, order equipment related to the site preparation,
and begin renovations or construction of the equipment room.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Planning activities 5
Table 3
Milestone chart
I
Select the site.
Plan the equipment room layout.
Plan power and grounding, reserve and/or
battery requirements.
Plan cable requirements.
Plan and start renovations to implement
equipment room layout.
Continue
tasks.
site
construction
and
renovation
Install power, grounding, reserve power, air
conditioning, and heating.
Install special rigging such as overhead cable
racks and distribution frame equipment as
required.
Test site wiring to ensure minimum
requirements are met.
3
Complete construction and ensure power and
grounding are in place.
Test air conditioning and heating systems.
Complete final equipment room inspection
identifying and resolving any delivery
constraints.
Make equipment delivery arrangements.
Note: The Milestone chart shown is only an example of the activities
ecommended for site preparation. Depending on the complexity of the site,
zhart will be more detailed with scheduled due dates (milestones) for each
33ivity group.
the
Installation planning 553-3001-120
2,
6 Planning activities
Installation planning 553-3001-120
7
Researching the requirements
Knowing the requirements for system installation saves valuable time and
energy when the time comes for system delivery. The first step in planning
a site, then, is researching those requirements. The purpose of this section
is to define the general requirements necessary to plan and develop the site
before system installation.
General requirements
The following general requirements must be considered (in addition to local
and national building and electrical codes) when planning the installation of
an SL-1 system:
- Equipment room environment (including preliminary floor plan and
system layout)
- Power and grounding requirements
- Cabling requirements (including guidelines for ordering correct cable
lengths)
- Fire protection (including location of sprinkler heads) and safety
precautions
Installation planning 553-3001-120
:.
:
r...:.:--:3
‘:.‘...-.I:
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.”
.:
20 Researching the requirements
Commercial power conditi6ning
If the quality of the commercial power source continuously meets the SL-1
system requirements listed in this section, a power conditioner is not
required, however, where the commercial power is of poor quality and
cannot consistently meet the SL-1 system requirements, a powerconditioner
may provide some improvement.
k$?j
L; :.cT;.:.x-<
Note:
When using power conditioning equipment, simply install the
equipment in series with the commercial power feed. Do not modify
the SL-1 system grounding scheme.
Grounding
Essential to trouble-free system operation and the safety of personnel is the
employment of proper grounding. The SL-1 system has several different
grounds and signal returns that are generally referred to as grounds: logic
return (for DC systems), AC “green wire” ground (in AC systems), and the
personal hazard equipment ground.
The SL-1 system does not, by design, need an AC isolated ground (IG)
system (though this may be required by local codes), but it does need a
single point ground system. This means that each of the various grounds
from each of the columns should terminate at a single connection point
--before attaching to the actual ground reference at the main AC panel or
transformer. The single point ground may be implemented either by use of
the isolated ground bus in the AC panel, or by a separate logic return
equalizing bus for battery returns and logic returns where a non-isolated AC
system is used.
The SL-1 system power must originate from the supply service (main AC
panel or transformer) where the ground conductor and the neutral conductor
connect and are referenced to the main building ground (MGM). Cold
water pipes and ground rods should only be used to improve the ground
reference of the building’s main service panel. Do not use the MGM as the
ground reference for the SL- 1 system.
The DC resistance of the system ground conductor, which runs from the
SL-1 to the main building ground, should be as close to zero as possible
with the maximum total resistance on all runs within the building not to
exceed 0.5 ohms.
installation planning 553-3001-120
.4
,:rzZ?
;:.
._ $
‘:T
Researching the requirements
21
Failure to follow the~grounding proceduresmay result in an installation that
is:
- unsafe for personnel working on or using the equipment
- not protected horn lightning or power transients
- subject to service interruptions
.
-
- subject to degraded system performance
Commercial power and grounding requirements
The commercial power source refers to the main AC utility power feed, for
either AC-powered or DC-powered systems. For AC systems, this power is
wired directly to the system. For DC systems, this power source connects to
the rectifiers which convert to -48 V dc for distribution to the system.
In North America, the power supplied can be either 208Y or 240 V ac
nominal. Three phase is not required by single power feeds fromalternate
phases is normal practice where three phase power is available. Refer to
Table 8 for the exact voltage range.
Building ground requirements
Although the SL- 1 system (by design) does not require an isolated AC
--ground system, the NEC does. For this reason Northern Telecom
recommends the use of an isolated AC ground system. Non-isolated ground
systems are acceptable only where not required by a national code.
This system does not need an isolated AC ground system, but it does need a
single point ground system. Single point ground may be implemented
either by the use of an Isolated Ground (IG) bus in the AC panel to
terminate all AC grounds and other ground reference conductors, or by a
separate logic return equalizer (LRE) ground bus for system ground and
logic returns where a non-isolated AC system is used.
No&: Where required, Northern Telecom will provide an LRE with
each system delivery. Multi-column systems require the use of an
LRR.
installation planning 553-3001-120
22 Researching the requirements
Isolated ground topology
A dedicated Isolated Ground (IG) bus bar is required with this method.
This IG bus is located in the AC panel and serves as the ground window. It
is used for all AC (green wire) grounds as well as logic returns. It also
accommodates a conductor which references to the (+) battery bus in a DC
system. An alternate form of this isolated topology is to use one or more
isolated equalizing bars external to the AC panel but which connects to
ground exclusively by means of the AC IG bus.
Isolated orange outlets are required (as per NEC 250-74 Exception 4).
Grounding conductors shall be routed with the phase conductors (Article
300-20). All ground wiring-for IG receptacles are to be terminated on the
dedicated IG bus per applicable codes (complies with NEC 384-27).
Non-isolated ground topology
In a non-isolated system the AC equipment ground (ACEG) connects to the
metal panel, and the associated conduit may also contact various structural
metal. This ground alone is not adequate for the SL-1 system, but a
dedicated ground conductor which connects to the main building ground is
then used for the main ground window to terminate logic returns and
reference the (+) battery bus. Frame grounds will connect to the ACEG.
Grounding guidelines
---
The following must be observed to implement the single-point ground:
- All ground conductors must be identified in accordance with local
codes and terminated in a manner that is permanent, resulting in low
impedance connections.
- Terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance
during the life of the installation.
- All grounding conductors must be continuous with no splices or
junctions and tagged, “DO not remove or disconnect.”
They should also be insulated against contact with foreign grounds.
- Grounding conductors must be no-load, noncurrent carrying cables
under normal operating conditions.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.rX
Researching the requirements 23
- In a steel-framed building, the SL-1 ground interface must have a
connecting reference to the building steel on the same floor on which it
resides (or within one floor).
Note: Northern Telecom does not recommend the use of building steel
as part of the SL-1 ground system. Proper wire sizing of the System Ground Reference conductor ensures
compliance with this requirement provided the building ground has been
properly installed as per NEC rules and regulations and the associated CEC
regulations.
Using an Isolated Ground bus is often a lower cost method but may not be
allowed by all telcos and may be prohibited by local ordinances.
Note: All voice and data lines leaving or entering the SL-1 system
(which run external to the building) must have fault protectors that
connect directly to earth ground. Fault protectors provide E&lI/RFI
protection outside of the SL-1 system.
AC service panel
Dedicated versus shared power
Dedicated AC power transformers are preferred; however, a shared
transformer or distribution is acceptable.
---
The following figures identify the differences between dedicated and shared
distribution and between isolated and non-isolated grounds:
Installation planning 553-3001-120
24 Researching the requirements
Figure 1
Dedicated transformer in isolated ground system
Transformer
Conduit
Meridian SL-1 Service Panel
3nRv
J
I
Isolated
Ground
Receptacle
(\
l%A
I
I I I I I I I isolated
lb Ground Bus
l-Hl+rTl-r
Note 6
Cadwelded
or 2 ALCU
Clamps
bgic Return
~~~~l~~ing Bus
Logic Return
Conductor
Building
Ground
, ._s‘::s
, ...
:6;‘.
:’ ::-::G
2: .;
: .;. ,,
..”
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Researching the requirements 25
Notes for Figure 1: Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run
between the transformer and the AC panel.
Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall
provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase
208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conductor.
Receptacles: All 120V service drops in the equipment room must have
IG type receptacles. Each circuit must have individual hot, neutral, and
ground conductors.
NEMA numbers for receptacles are:
2081240 @ 30 A IG-6-30
120
@ 15 A IG-5-15
Panel circuit breakers are:
208Vl24OV
..
30A
A dedicated service panel should be located in the equipment room.
If the service panel has sufficient terminating points on the isolated
ground bus, the logic return equalizer may not be required.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Y
26 Researching the requirements
Figure 2
Dedicated transformer in non-isolated ground system
h Aeridian SL-1 Service Panel
Conduit
Transformer
I
208V
Note 5
-Ad
Note 4'
30A
’
;
=A
Isolated
e Neutral Bus
’
1
;
15A
I /
II\
’
0
6‘
(Receptacle) -
Note 7
Logic Return Equalizing
1,
F
’
n--d
___L__
WJIKWCi”’
Note 8
Building
Ground
563-3016
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Researching the requirements 27
Notes for Figure 2: Ground conductor should be the same size as the largest conductor run
between the transformer and the AC panel.
Transformer (dedicated for SL-1 and Telco Interface Equipment) shall
provide a secondary voltage of single phase 120/240 or three phase
208Y/12OV and must have a system ground conductor.
Receptacles: Each circuit must have individual hot, neutral, and ground c
conductors.
NEMA numbers for receptacles are:
208/240 @ 30 A L6-30
120
@ 15 A 5-15
Panel circuit breakers are:
208V/24OV
30A
.
A dedicated service panel should be located in the equipment room.
Auxiliary equipment using an RS-232 interface will, if such equipment
is too remote to be powered from the SL-1 service panel, require a
modem or fiber link to provide ground isolation.
Connection to the building ground source should be made at the same
physical location as the transformer grounding conductor. If the LRE is
connected to a building ground point other than the transformer ground
point, a bonding jumper must be installed between the two points.
Two approved fastening devices or cadwelded devices should be used
here.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
..
.’
.:...
28 Researching the requirements
Figure 3
Shared AC distribution in an isolated ground system
SL-1 Related Wiring Contained
In Rigid Conduit or EMT
el
1.-.I
r &Note
Neutral bus
Isolated from
power panel
t
To LRE
Note 6
5539017
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.
Researching the requirements 29
Notes for Figure 3: An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated
ground.
An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground
conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground.
An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a
minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m) from the building earth reference.
Connections to the building earth reference must be either cadwelded or
provided with two ALCU clamps.
NEMA numbers for IG ground receptacles are:
208/240 @ 20 A IG-L6-20
208/240 @ 30 A IG-L6-30
120 @ 15A IG-5-15
Panel circuit breakers are:
208V 30A
240V 30A
Connection to the building ground source should be made at the same
physical location as the transformer grounding conductor. If the LRE is
connected to a building ground point other than the transformer ground
point, a bonding jumper must be installed between the two points.
‘!
:,
i,
/
..:::.
.~,
i.
:::,:::.
.:: ‘,:
-!
-i..
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
.
:
30 Researching the requirements
Figure 4
Shared AC distribution in a non-isolated ground system
I
I
SL-1 Related Wiring Contained
In Rigid Conduit or EMT
bi!EE!l, ,
Note 3 -b
LRE
To LRE
Note 6
5633016
installation planning 553-3001-120
..
:
:
Researching the requirements
31
Notes for Figure 4: An isolated ground receptacle must be used for systems with isolated
ground.
An isloated ground receptacle with individual hot neutral and ground
conductors must be used for systems with isolated ground.
An alternate earthing electrode, if required, must be installed in a
minimum of 6 ft. (1.8m) from the building earth reference.
Connections to the building earth reference must be either cadwelded or
provided with two ALCU clamps.
NEMA numbers for IG ground receptacles are:
208/240 @ 30 A IG-L6-30
120
@ 15 A IG-5-15
Panel circuit breakers are:
208Vl24OV
..
30A
Connection of the LRE to the building ground source should be made at
the same physical location as the transformer grounding conductor. If
the LRE is connected to a building ground point other than the
transformer ground point, a bonding jumper must be installed between
the two points.
Installation planning
..
553-3001-l 20
32 Researching the requirements
Auxiliary power requirements
Integrated terminals, printers, modems, and data units require local power.
Power for devices located in the equipment room must meet the following
criteria:
- wired and fused independently of all other receptacles
- tagged at the power panel to prevent unauthorized interruption of power
- not controlled by a switch
- referenced to the same building interface point on the building system
ground as the SL-1 AC panel ground
Isolated service receptacles
For isolated ground systems, the auxiliary power receptacles used should be
12OV, 6OHz, 15A, individually fused, isolated ground circuits terminating
on NEMA non-locking type IG 5-15 such as Hubbell, Cat. No. IG-5262,2Pole, 3-Wire, orange duplex receptacles. A green conductor must be used
for extending the safety ground and must be wired according to the isolated
ground specifications.
Note:
This requirement is based on safety concerns and exceeds
NRC/CRC requirements.
Non-isolated service receptacles
For non-isolated ground systems, the auxiliary power receptacles used
should be 12OV, 6OHz, 15A, individually fused circuits terminating on
NEMA non-locking type 5-15.
In non-isolated ground systems auxiliary equipment which connects to the
SL-1 system should be isolated through the use of fiber optic signal cables
such as RS-232-C. Failure to provide this isolation will defeat the single
point ground.
Power Fail Transfer Unit (PFTU) powering
The PFIXJ, when used with AC systems, operates with a separate 120 V ac
to 48 V dc power supply. If the AC system is not backed-up (for example,
when no UPS is present), the PFIU power supply requires a separate and
dedicated auxiliary power outlet. Power to the PFTU is terminated when
the system power goes down and vice versa.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Researching the requirements 33
CabHng
This section identifies the various cabling used in the SL-1 system and
provides some guidelines for cabling. Equipment placement in relation to
cable lengths should be considered and planned for. Depending on your
system and future expansion (of PE modules, for example), the cables you
choose must be the right length.
Cable types
All cables must be designated (tagged) at both ends. The SL-1 uses at least
five types of wiring:
- Twisted-Pair Telephone Cables
- 25-Pair MDF Cables
- Twisted-Pair Shielded and Non-Shielded Cables
- Interface (I/O) Cables
- Power and Ground Cables
Twisted-pair telephone cables
These cables carry analog voice and digitized voice/data information
between distribution frames and devices located throughout the office.
They run from cross-connect panels to jacks (8-pin modular) located within
8 feet (2.4 m) of each peripheral device.
2L,Pair MDF cables
These cables carry voice and data information between the SL-1 UEMs and
the distribution frame. When the cables are run from the UEM to the
distribution frame, one end of the cable must be equipped with a 25-pair
female connector which terminates on the cabinet I/O panel.
;
:
(.’ :.
;y:. : : :’ !
,, , . ,,
Twisted-pair shielded cables
These cables are used to interconnect the trip power monitoring connections
between power interface units and the main distributing frame. Typically, a
16 AWG, stranded (Belden type 8408-2 conductor or equivalent) type
shielded cable is used for trip connections. All other connections are
serviced by non-shielded, 16 AWG stranded cable.
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
34 Researching the requirements
Interface (l/O) cables I/O cables are typically 25conductor flat-ribbon or round cables interfaced
through RS-232-C connectors. These cables are used to connect data units
to printers, host computers, and modems.
UEM cable routing
Cables may be routed internally in the UEM horizontally in front and at the
rear of the card cage, vertically on the right side only and vertically through
square holes near the rear of the DEM. Cables may be routed externally in
the back of and on the left and right side of the UEM between the EMI/RFI
I/O panel and the rear cover. The cables may be routed in these channels up
to the top of the column or down to the floor through the pedestal.
Note: Routing cables on the inside of a UEM from the front to the
back on the left or Power Supply side is not recommended. This is
because of the limited access in routing the cables and of the effects of
EMI/RFI noise generated in this area to signals in the cables.
Network to PE cabling
IPE cabling from Network to PE originates from the faceplate of the
Superloop Network card and extends to the backplane connectors on the
Controller card of the lPE Module.
PE cabling originates from the faceplate of the Network card to the
faceplate of the Dual Loop Buffer.
Power and ground cables
For AC-powered systems, a 9-foot, three-conductor line cord is normally
supplied except in areas where conduit will be required. For DC-powered
systems, wiring is generally done through conduit.
installation planning 553-3001-120
I
c
---
Researching the requirements
35
Cable access requirerients
The customer is responsible for supplying all access for station, feeder, and
riser cabling including where necessary:
- conduit
- floor boring
- boring all major walls on a particular floor
- access into hung ceilings, including removal and replacement of ceiling
tiles
Fire protection and safety precautions
Fire protection and prevention
Building, fire, and safety codes establish the degree of protection required
for an installation. Additional information is available from the National
Fire Protection Association in its publications entitled “Standard for the
Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing Equipment (NFPA 75)
and “National Electrical Code” @VFPA 70).
Properly locating and installing sprinkler heads, fire and smoke sensing
devices, and other fire extinguishing equipment require expertise. Local
codes and experts should be consulted during the planning stage, and the
recommendations of insurance underwriters and local building authorities
should be sought and followed.
Some fire precautions can be implemented during the construction phase of
preparation for an installation. Walls enclosing the equipment area should
extend from floor to ceiling, and the walls, floor, and dropped ceiling, if
any, should be constructed of noncombustible covering. Shatterproof
windows and sprinklers outside and above the windows should be installed
to prevent the spread of fire from an adjacent building.
If the structural floor is made from combustible materials, it should be
covered with a noncombustible covering, and the space between the raised
and permanent floors should be cleared of all debris before the system is
installed.
Storage areas and the roof or floor above the equipment room should be
watertight since water leakage from the floor above could easily damage the
equipment below. In addition, ducts and plumbing work for airInstallation planning
553-3001-l
20
36 Researching the requirements
conditioning systems should be designed to inhibitthe spread of fire, heat,
and smoke from one part of a building to another. Smoke detectors should
also be installed.
Services such as steam, water, and power should be checked regu.Iarly, and
pipes should be inspected for excess condensation,.leaks, and corrosion. If
power connections are made beneath a raised floor, waterproof electrical
receptacles and connectors should be used.
Recommended fire extinguishing systems
In most cases, carbon dioxide or water sprinkler systems are to be used.
Water sprinklers are generally less expensive than the carbon dioxide kind.
Specifically, dry-pipe water sprinklers are strongly recommended since this
type will interrupt power to the room and open a master valve to fill the
overhead sprinklers.
Carbon dioxide systems are also effective in containing a fire, but they
quickly exhaust the available oxygen supply. If a carbon dioxide system is
used, an alarm should sound warning onsite personnel of the release of
carbon dioxide. For health and safety reasons, employees must be
evacuated within 30 seconds of the release.
q
I.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
CAUTION
Use of other fire extinguishing systems
Northern Telecom does not recommend the use of
Halon or any other fire extinguishing system not stated
above. Northern Telecom is supported by the
Environmental Protection Agency to enforce any
restrictions on the use of other fire extinguishing
systems.
Researching the requirements 37
Security precautibns and safeguards
Existing practices of building security should be extended and improved to
provide adequate protection for the equipment.
Safeguards such as tamperproof keylock door controls and electrically taped
glass doors and windows can be tied into an alarm system. A monitoring
unit using closed-circuit television can also be installed.
Protect critical data such as business records or other information by storing
backups well away from the equipment room. A regular updating program
is highly recommended.
Safety procedures and training
Company personnel should be taught how to respond to emergencies. Some
companies designate such individuals as security members. Training could
include how and when to evacuate personnel and records, to notify the fire
department, to shut off all electrical power, and to properly handle fire
extinguishers.
In addition to training, temperature and humidity monitoring devices (both
visual and audible alarm signals) should be installed in the equipment and
storage rooms so that individuals can respond quickly to an emergency.
Occupational noise exposure
When employees are subjected to noise levels exceeding those listed in
1910.5 of the OSHA Standards, or local standards internationally,
administrative and engineering controls should be initiated. If these
controls fail to reduce sound levels effectively, protective equipment should
be provided. The acoustic noise generated by an SL-1 UEM column should
not exceed 6OdBA (decibels “A”-weighted). Depending on the ambient
external temperature, the acoustic noise could be as low as 45 dBA.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
: :
38 Researching the requirements
Installation planning 553-3001-120
.a
.
: ‘.
.
.
39
Planning the site
Planning the site is an important element to consider when planning the
installation of an SL-1. It impacts the installation costs, operation and
maintenance and can have an overall effect on system performance.
Selecting a site
Sites should be selected and evaluated according to the followingcriteria
and the detailed information given in this document:
Space
The proposed site should provide adequate space for system unpackaging,
system installation, operation, potential expansion, service, storage of
supplies, and system operator area (if applicable). It should also provide
sufficient cooling for efficient operation of the equipment and a suitable
operating environment for the system.
Locat ion
The location should be convenient for delivery of equipment and close to
related work areas for efficient operation. The location of related equipment
(distribution frame and batteries) must be considered when selecting the
site.
Power and grounding
Sufficient power and proper grounding facilities must be available.
Structural integrity
The floor must be strong enough to support anticipated loads, and the
ceiling must be able to support overhead cable racks, if applicable.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
40 Planning the site
Developing the site
-
After selecting a site, the following items must be considered during site
development:
- Space and equipment layout requirements
- Equipment rmrn accessories
- Detailed floor plans and loading requirements
- Building cable plans
- System wire routing
- Cable termination points
The equipment room
Space and equipment layout requirements differ with each installation,
depending upon equipment selected and the available physical area. The
following categories of required space should be considered when planning
site needs:
- Primary storage
- Secondary storage
- Maintenance/Technician area
Primary storage
The floor area required for an SL-1 depends on the number of columns of
UEMs ordered, the length-to-width ratio of the area, and the location of
walls, partitions, windows, and doors. To determine the exact layout
required, prepare a detailed floor plan after reading all of the requirements
provided in this section.
Operating needs determine the location of free-standing peripherals like
printers and terminals. Printers and terminals must not exceed the
maximum distances defined for their interface circuits. Wall jacks and
outlets must be provided for all devices located in the equipment room.
Within a system there are certain requirements that must be met when
drawing up the equipment room floor plan.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
s.
.:
:
Planning the site 41
.:
Note: Sample floor plans may .vary from your own depending on your
system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room.
Follow the engineering guidelines as specified in System engineering
(553-3001-151).
Secondary storage
Provide space for the storage of disks, printer paper, printouts, and daily
reports within the equipment area. A secure storage room for spare parts is
recommended.
Similar environmental conditions should be maintained for storage and
operation areas. If it is not possible to maintain the storage area
environment exactly the same as that of the operating equipment, adequate
time must be allowed for stored materials to adjust to the equipment room
environment before they are used.
..
Maintenance/Technician area
The maintenance/technician area is used primarily to store tools, test
equipment, manuals, spare parts, and as an online work center. The area
should have good lighting and convenient access to the equipment. Typical
items that would go into a maintenance/technician area are:
- shelf for instruction books
- spare parts storage room
- paper storage area
- locking cabinet or storage area for back up disks
- table or desk
- printer/VDT or equivalent device
Equipment room accessories
The following equipment room accessories are recommended:
- Temperature/humidity
! ‘_3 .:.:,
! “‘_L’
recorder(s)
- A key or combination with option key&k for the switchroom door
(electric locks, such as push button access code or card reader, are not
recommended unless battery backup or key override is provided)>
- Desk or table, file cabinet, and storage shelves
Installation planning 553-3001-120
42 Planning the site
- Storage cabinets for spare parts, backup tapes or disks, and printer
Paper
The floor plan
...>.;,.%
Since the space requirements and the overall layout of the equipment room
can have an effect on the installation, operation, and maintenance of a
system, a detailed floor plan should be drawn up for each site.
The floor plan should show the location of utility closets and cross- connect
terminals. All cables running from distribution points to the zones should
be clearly designated with the zone ID. The zones are typically the
termination point of conduits throughout the office. (See Figure 8 “Sample
building cable plan” for an illustration of zones.) Within a zone the cables
should be identified by their number within the zone.
Note: According to the National Fire Code, equipment must be
located at least 12 inches from a sprinkler head. If your system has .four UEMs and a cable rack, do not place the equipment directly under
any sprinkler heads.
Consider the following guidelines when planning the equipment room floor
plans:
- a recommended minimum ceiling height of 8 ft (2436mm) or greater
---
- a minimum distance between equipment aisles of 30 inches (760mm)
- a minimum distance between end of aisle stacks and wall and between
rows of 3 ft (914mm)
- location of modems, printers, and terminals
- size and location of reserve power
- size and location of cross-connect terminal
- size and location of maintenance/technician area
- number of rows and future expansion needs (RF’E or Meridian Mail, for
example). Refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) for guidelines
on system expansion.
Installation planning 553-3001 -I20
..
;. . . . .>
-4
<;?I $7
Planning the site 43
The weight and dimgnsions of the SL-1 system should also be considered:
Table 9
Weight and dimensions of an SL-1 system
Assembly
item
Pedestal
Top Cap
UEM
1 Module
2 Module
3 Module
4 Module
stack
stack
stack
stack
Weight
empty
Weight
full
4 0 ibs.
1 5 ibs.
5 0 ibs.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7 0 ibs.
1 5 ibs.
130 tbs.
2 1 5 ibs.
3 4 5 ibs.
4 7 5 ibs.
6 0 5 ibs.
SiZS
width
SiZe
dipth
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
26
22
22
26
26
26
26
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
Size
height
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
in.
1 0 in.
4 in.
1 7 in.
3 1 in.
4 8 in.
6 5 in.
8 2 in.
Note: Multi-column systems require a three inch spacer between each column for
cable routing and to provide EM1 shielding.
.
installation planning 553-3001-120
44 Planning the site
Figures 5,6, and 7 show sotie sample equipment room floor plans. These
may vary from your own.
Figure 5
SL-1 Option 21 equipment room floor plan
IX cross connect terminal
I
36 in.
(915 mm)
~qg~~w
,
/
t
25 in.
(65 mm)
1 additional
* equipment
‘(such as reserve
1p o w e r s u p p l y o r
auxiliarv
,
,
f
f
/
f
Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on
your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room.
A template for floor drilling procedures is available. The drawing,
(number PO709207), is delivered with the packing instructions.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Planning the site 45
Figure 6
SL-1 Options 51 and 61 equipment room floor plan
‘5533020
Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on
your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room.
.
.‘.-‘,-~~.-‘,
,’
,Y
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
46 Planning the site
Figure 7
SL-1 Option 71 equipment room floor plan
553-3021
Note: This sample floor plan may vary from your own depending on
your system needs and the size/arrangement of your equipment room.
SL-1 Option 71 may also expand to a second row of Peripheral
Equipment modules.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Planning the site 47
Floor loading estimates
Floor loading estimates should be obtained in order to plan for proper
stacking of modules. (Floor loading is the weight of the system divided by
the occupied floor arena Point loading is the local pressure exerted by the
system feet on the floor.)
Table 10 shows the floor loading estimates for stacking an SL-1 system.
The estimates given represent a fully-loaded module complete with
pedestal, maximum circuit pack alIowances, power supplies, and cables.
Table 10
Floor loading estimates
Modules
LBS/FT2 (kPa)
Point Load
(Ibs/in2) (kPa)
3ne
38.1 (1.8 kPa)
11 .O (75.8 kPa)
Two
60.3 (2.8 kPa)
17.3 (119 kPa)
Three
82.4 (3.9 kPa)
23.7 (163.4 kPa)
Four
104.6 (5 kPa)
30.0 (206.8 kPa)
Note: The numbers under “LBS/FT2 (kPa)” are based on a
floor area of the system of 5.64 square feet. These numbers
do not include the weight of the optional overhead cable rack.
The numbers under “Point Load (Ibs/in2) (kPa)” are based on
distributing the system weight among four feet, each with an
area of 4.91 square inches; these numbers do not reflect the
use of optional casters.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
48 Planning the site
The building cable plan
-
The building cable plan should be divided into zones. The zones are
typically the termination point of conduits throughout the office. Each zone
on the building cable plan should be identified with a letter or number, and a
block of numbers should be assigned to each zone. Be sure to leave room
for expansion. See Figure 8 “Sample building cable plan” for an illustration
of zoning.
In addition, the following information and guidelines should be consider&
Each telephone, console, or data set connected to the SL-1 requires
telephone wire run from a nearby telephone jack to a cross-connect
location. Also, each component connected to the system requires a
termination. (Modular jacks should be within 8 ft
[2436 mm] of the device.) The location of all devices that interface
with the SL- 1 should be known.
Telephone directory number, features, and Office Data Administration
System (ODAS) designator of each telephone in the office should also
be known.
- Three-pairs of telephone wire should be provided from the telephone or
data set location to the distribution frame. Location of all distribution
points (main and intermediate) should be known.
Consoles require a 16-pair (or 25pair) cable equipped with an
Amphenol-type connector.
If any existing wire is to be used, ownership of that wire must be
clearly defined.
All wiring carrying high-speed data must pass a verification test at the
time of installation. The test is performed as part of the installation
procedures.
-..
:.:;
: .\.
.:,--.;.,:.j
..‘- a
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Planning the site 49
- A random sampling of in-place wiring’is taken during a site survey to
ensure that it meets specifications for high-speed lines.
::
..,r
::
.:.
.
.
- When telephone cable is run in conduit, that conduit must not be used
for any other wiring. The location of conduits and floor ducts, for
example, should be known.
~.
.:.:::::
- The wiring plan should show the routing of all wiring, the location of
each telephone, console, or data set, and any other relevant information
about the device. It should also show the location of any power outlets
that the device will require. Power outlets must be equipped with
safety ground.
- Flat under-carpet cables are not recommended.
- Bridge taps for sets are not recommended.
:i
:
.:.::.. ? j
::: !: ;. ‘,,
. . . . .
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
-.
:
the site
50 Planning
Figure 8
Sample building cable plan
ZONE
ZONE
I
Each Zone
Approximately
6CG600 sq. ft.
-
I
I
-
ZONE
I
P ---m-B
1 -
ZONE
.
I
B
-
B
-
-
-
-
l
-
-
-
-
-
6
z
h
8
Installation planning 5!53-3001-120
L.
~
Planning the site 51
Wire routing
The routing of all wires for the SL-1 must be specified as part of the plan.
To plan wire routing, establish the start and end point of each cable relative
to the location of telephones in the office. Remember that each modular
jack (8-pin or 6-pin, for example) must be within 8 feet.
(2.4 m) of the telephones.
At this point the construction of the office must be investigated to determine
the best wiring routes. Consider the following information when
performing this task
Floors
Telephone wire travels along floors in one of two ways:
- Out in the open: In some cases wires are tacked to the surface of walls
and other physical structures. For the safety of employees, wire should
never be stretched across the top of floor. Run the wires along
baseboards, ceiling mouldings, or door and window casings.
- Concealed: In other cases wires are run inside a floor conduit. The
conduits can travel between utility closets and jack locations. In some
cases the floor conduits connect to a conduit passing through walls or
ceilings. In all cases the conduit must be used exclusively for
telephone cables. The use of under-carpet cables is not recommended.
Ceilings
The National Electrical Code and local building codes specify what types of
telephone wire may be run in each type of ceiling. Local building codes
take precedence.
Walls
Wiring that needs to be run horizontally cannot be blind fed through walls.
Cables that need to be run vertically should, when possible, run inside a
wall, pole, or similar facility for vertical wire drops.
Between floors
Telephone utility closets should be located as closely to one another as
possible. In many cases, contractors are hired to install the conduit. Local
coding laws will specify whether a licensed contractor is required.
installation planning 553-3001-l 20
52 Planning the site
Electromagnetic Interference (EMI)
Data degradation may occur if wires travel near strong sources of
electomagnetic interference. See “The equipment room environment” in
this document for common sources of interference.
Termination points
Once the routes for the wires have been determined, the termination points
for the these wires must be decided. The cables can terminate at various
locations:
- main cross-connect terminal-typically in the equipment room
- intermediate cross-connect terminals-typically on each floor in
telephone utility closet
- wall jacks or terminal boxes-typically near the final device location
(within 8 ft [2.4 m])
Distribution frames
House cables terminate on the vertical side of two-sided frames and crossconnect to equipment which is typically located on the horizontal. When a
color field approach is taken, the house cables typically terminate in the
blue field and the equipment terminates on the purple (USA) or white
(Canada) field.
In all cases the block where the cables are terminated must be clearly
designated with the cable location information and the cable pair
assignments.
Note: A log book (cable record) of all termination information should
be kept See Table 11 for an example.
installation planning 553-3001-120
Planning the site 53
Table 11
Sample cable record
CABLE RECORD
I
iiiii
I
I
I
I
I
sOR-.l(
Installation planning 553-3001-120
54 Planning the site
Installation planning 553-3001-120
55
Preparing for delivery
The route the equipment must take from the receiving area to the
installation area must be studied in advance. The route should be measured
to ensure problem free delivery of the equipment. The following factors
must be considered:
Considerations
-
size and security of the loading and storage areas
- capacity and availability of elevators
- the number and size of aisles and doors en route
- restrictions such as bends or obstructions in halls
- floor loading capacity of the loading, storage, and equipment room
iUC!aS
- number of steps and stairways
- dimensions of fully-loaded, packaged system complete with shipping
pallet (39”W x 3O”D x 70%)
Note: The SL-1 system is shipped with a software package, three
UEMs, a pedestal, and a shipping pallet (five inches high). The fourth
UEM is shipped separately. Refer to Table 9 for the weight and
dimensions of an SL-1 system.
2
.i
i
,.-.-:.“:: ..j
.’ ,.. .i.
“‘‘.I
Installation planning 553-3001-120
..A
.
56 Preparing for delivery
In addition, here are some questions to consider when preparing for
delivery:
- Has a request been made for equipment delivery?
- Is a list of all equipment ordered available on site?
- Are transportation arrangements to premises completed?
- Is assistance available to prepare the switchroom?
From unloading area to equipment room
- Are unloading/unpacking facilities available?
- Are unloading/unpacking tools available? (pallet jack, for instance)
- Is there access to and from unloading area to equipment room?
- Is the equipment room threshold large enough for the equipment to
enter?
Note:
The equipment should be located as close to the final
installation area as possible. This will provide for an easier, perhaps
safer, installation.
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
Preparing for delivery 57
Equipment handling precautions
The following general guidelines should be followed when handling SL-1
equipment:
1:;
‘;
-
.
.,
‘I -‘.‘-+ :,
_ _ _ _ . ._
. ._. .,^.
,.._ ,’
- Circuit packs, disks, and tapes are very sensitive to s.tatic discharge; all
static electricity should be discharged-from the body prior to handling.
- Circuit packs should be handled carefully: only handle packs by the
edges, only remove and insert packs when necessary, and only unpack
or handle packs away from machinery such as electric motors or
transformers.
- If your system is using reserve power, the batteries may weigh in
excess of 500 pounds each and may be packaged four to a shipping
pallet. To prevent stressing of the floor, do not place the pallets sideby-side in the equipment room.
- Special ramps supplied with the product must be used to move the
product off the pallet. Follow the instructions on unloading the
machine provided on the side of the product. (See CAUTION box
below.)
CAUTION
Lifting the pedestal
The pedestal of the SL- 1 must never be pried up in
order to lift the stack. This could cause major damage
to the pedestal. Carefully slide the pedestal and
associated stack manually, and use the special ramps
provided with your system.
Installation
..
.I.-
planning
553-3001-120
5 8 Preparing for delivery
Installation planning 553-3001-120
-.
‘.
: ..
:
_
‘.
59
Preparing for installation
The following items should be provided at the time of installation:
- Work orders
- Equipment room floor plan
- Building cable plan
- Installation, Administration and Maintenance Manuals, and User
Guides
- Installation plan
- Delivery equipment (pallet jack, for instance)
- Unloading/unpackaging
instructions
Work orders
The Work order may include:
- Terminal Number (TN) assignments
- Directory Number @N) assignments
- individual terminal, data unit feature assignments
- terminals and user profiles
- system and terminal cross-connect assignments
- a detailed listing of the equipment ordered
- administration database entries for features and services
Note: The work order will vary depending on the distributor for a
specific system.
Installation
planning
553-3001-120
60 Preparing for installation
Equipment room floor plans
The equipment room floor plans should show the location of:
- each SL-1 module, power module, and future expansion module
(UEM)
- a reserve power unit (if applicable)
- maintenance and administration terminal and printer (if equipped) and
printer locations (if applicable)
- the cross-connect terminal
- the AC panel and outlets
- any cable racks
- miscellaneous external equipment (data units, modems, etc.)
- auxiliary processors
Note: The suggested floor plans are provided for your assistance.
Depending on the complexity of your equipment room, your floor plan
may vary from the ones provided in this document.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Preparing for installation 61
Cabling
plan
-
The cabling plan should show:
- cable routing and designation information
- location of peripheral devices and pr$rters (if applicable)
- directory numbers (DNs) assigned to each peripheral device and Office
Data Administration System (ODAS) designators (if the software
package is equipped)
- features available to each terminal
- type of cable or wiring to each terminal, printer, and PC
- location of cross-connect terminal
- location of conduits, floor ducts, including access points (junction
boxes and hand-holes)
- auxiliary processors
Installation planning
553-3001-l 20
62 Preparing for installation
The installation plan
-
The installation plan may consist of a floor plan, a cabling plan, and an ITS
(Installation and Test Sequence) chart, The chart shows typical installation
tasks, the sequence of the tasks, and task start and duration information.
Manuals
The following manuals should be at hand when installing an SL-1:
- SL-1 master index (553-3001-000)
- SL-1 installation and maintenance guide
- SL-1 planning & engineering guide
- SL-1 Xl1 software guide
- Product Bulletins (where applicable)
- User Guides
..
See the References list in “About this document” located at the beginning of
this publication for more information.
Preinstallation
inspections
The following items should be inspected and signed off prior to starting the
installation:
- Equipment room
- General inspections
- Reserve power (if applicable)
Installation planning 553-3001-120
-__
Preparing for installation 63
Equipment room inspections
An equipment room inspection ensures that the following conditions are
met:
- physical and environmental requirements met
- system power and utility outlets installed and tested
- lighting installed and working
- AC power distribution installed according to Northern Telecom
specifications
- equipment room is dry, clean, and ready for installation
- equipment locations have been marked on the equipment room floor
- entranceways, doorways, halls, and elevators from the loading dock to
the equipment room are large enough for system transport _
- terminal, printer, and PC locations ready
- sufficient wiring is provided
- single point grounding is implemented
- sufficient and appropriate terminal connecting blocks are provided_-
Installation planning 553-3001-l 20
L.
64 Preparing for installation
General inspections
General inspections ensure that the following conditions are met
- building cross-connect terminals are provided
- conduits or floor ducts to terminal locations are‘installed (including
service fittings)
- access conduit for raceway is in place
- sufficient terminal blocks are provided
- sufficient cross-connect yire is provided
Reserve power inspections
For reserve power inspections if batteries are used, ensure that the following
conditions are metz
- reserve power room is well ventilated and operating at optimum
temperature (specific gravity readings are based on a temperature of 77”
F (25” C)
- proper lighting is available
- reserve power room is located within manufacturer’s recommended
proximity to the switch
- protective equipment is available (goggles, face shields, acid-resistant
gloves, protective aprons, water for rinsing eyes/skin, and bicarbonate
sew
- reserve power room is well secured
- floor loading requirements are met
- reserve power room is accessible (no blocking of doorway)
- noise levels meet OSHA standards 1910.5 or local standards
internationally
- reserve power area properly interfaces to the equipment
Note: For detailed instructions on battery usage, see ANSI/IEEE
Standard 450-1987: “IEEE Recommended Practive for Maintenance,
Testing, and Replacement of Large Lead Storage Batteries for
Generating Stations and Substations.”
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Preparing for installation 65
An Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS) isused for reserve power in ACpowered systems. It includes basic and supporting equipment, including
rectifier/charger, inverter, controls and instrumentation. A battery bank is a
separate item but may be required together with the UPS. The following
items should be inspected and signed off prior to starting the installation:
- Environmental requirements are metz both operating and
storage/transportation.
- Other requirements are met such as flammability, reliability (MTBP),
and electrostatic discharge.
- Since a UPS also makes use of batteries, see “Reserve power
inspections” above for more details on pre-installation inspections.
Note: Refer to the manufacturer’s specifications for details on the
storage and operating environment of UPS. Temperature and humidity
ranges should be considered for proper maintenance of the UPS.
Installation planning 553-3001-120
Y
:.
..
,..
:.:
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Installation
planning
Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29,199O
Printed in U.S.A.
mt
northern
talactlm
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System engineering
Standard
-..
.,..
,j
;;
: : r-y
:- ..,/
northern
talaeam
Meridian I
c
: :
..
.:_
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System engineering
Publication number: 553-3001-151
Document Status: Standard
Document release: 1 .O
Date: January 29,199O
..
,. .
. ..:.:. ,_,;,
,..._
,~ . _ .: ,
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
System engineering
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard release 1 .O
System engineering 553-3001-151
iii
About this document
General information
The following document has been updated to include new naming
conventions and system engineering guidelines for the SL-1 System.
Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text
using parentheses.
This section provides the necessary information to:
- determine the equipment requirements for an SL-1 installation
- configure and assign equipment in the system
- distribute traffic equally over the system components
- maintain traffic distribution and equipment utilization levels when
adding or removing equipment or when altering the system
configuration
Note: The figures and limits used in this section are not necessarily
typical and should not be interpreted as limits of the system capacity.
The figures should be altered to suit the application of a particular
system. Memory and real time figures, which vary for each generic of
SL-1, are given in an appendix to this publication.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
iv About this document
References
See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for
- Master index (553-3001-000)
- System overview
(553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
-
- System engineering (553-3001-151)
- Power engineering (553-3001-152)
- Sparesplanning
(553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering
(553-3001-W)
See the list of fine and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-I installation and maintenance guide for
- System installation procedures (553-3001-210)
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Installation procedures for telephone
sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215)
- Extended systems installation (553-3001-250)
- Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251)
- General maintenance information
(553-3001-500)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software. installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
- XII software management
(553-3001-300)
- XIIfeatures and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-I XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
System engineering 553-3001-151
s.
V
Contents
System organization and capacities
Option 21
Options 51 and 61
Option 71
Universal Equipment Modules
CUPE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC)
Description of CUPE UEM (NT8Dll AC/DC)
CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39WDC)
Description of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC)
CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC)
Description of CPU UEM (NT8D34AA/DC)
Network UEM (NT8D35AA/DC)
Description of Network UEM (NT8D35AAIDC)
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment UEM (IPE)
(NT8D37AA/DC)
Description of IPE UEM (NT8D37AA/DC)
PE UEM (NT8D13WDC)
Description of PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC)
Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) UEM
(NT8D47AIVDC)
Description of RPE UEM
InterGroup UEM (NT8D36AA)
Description of InterGroup UEM
System capacities
Network tem-rinating capacity
Network traffic capacity
Memory capacity
Configuration
capacities
1
1
1
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
-14
15
16
17
19
20
21
22
23
23
24
24
24
24
25
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
vi Contents
Definitions
-
General rules
UEM and column designations
Configurations
Peripherals
Traffic distribution
Traffic definitions
Equipment utilization
Network loop traffic
Partitioning
Network loop assigning
PE card distribution
IPE card slot assigning
Card slot priority
Class of service priority
Trunks
Attendant consoles
Telephone sets
Card slot assignment
Assigning cards
Terminal number assigning
Ongoing assignment plan
Cutover study
Threshold study
Equipment relief
Assignment records
41
Step 1
43
Step 2
CCS per terminal
Comparative method
Manual calculation of ccs/t
Manual calculation example:
Default method
Default method example:
System engineering 553-3001-151
.4
27
27
28
29
30
31
33
33
33
34
35
36
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
39
39
39_39
40
40
Provisioning guidelines
Growth forecast
Example
:
27
43
43
Contents vii
Step 3
53
Trunks required
Example
53
53
54
Step 4
Line, trunk, and console load
Line load
Trunk load
Console load
54
54
54
54
55
Step 5
55
56
56
56
56
57
59
DTR requirements
Model 1
Model 2
Model 3
Model 4
Detailed calculation: method 1
Detailed calculation: method 2
60
Step 6
60
Total system load
Step 7
61
Network loop requirements
Non-blocking configuration with Superloop Network
Blocking configuration with Superloop Network
Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414)
DTVPRI cards
65
Step 8
Network
Step 9
i
.:
,_
_1:
:
::.
;: : ., ,-: :/
PE cards
Step 10
PE UEMs
61
62
62
62
63
groups
65
66
66
67
67
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
viii Contents
68
Step 11
TDWonference loop
68
Step 12
69
Memory
69
Step 13
70
Equipment summary
70
Feature calculations
71
Calculations
Calculations
Calculations
Calculations
Example
Calculations
with
with
with
with
Authorization Code
Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
Charge Account for CDR
Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
71
72
73
74
. . 74
75
with Integrated Message Service (IMS)
77
Worksheets
Card
distribution
103
Tables
115.--
System engineering 553-3001-151
-,
.- . .
l-l
System organization and capacities
The SL-1 System is basically organized into different kinds of systems and
can support from 32 to 10,000 analog or digital lines, depending on traffic
and feature requirements. System configurations are determined by
customer requirements and the physical limitations of the equipment. Both
AC and DC power options are available.
The following figures show a high level view of each system configuration.
For information on power packs, cooling system, and system monitor, refer
to the System overview (553-3001-100) document, Both AC and DC power
is available.
Option 21
This cost effective unit comes in two sizes. The standard version is a
single-CPU system that may contain up to four UEMs. It can be configured
with an optional fan shelf for up to two UEMs (AC or DC power options).
The modified version, Option 21A, is an optimized single-module AC
system. See Figure l-l.
Options 51 and 61
Option 51 is a CPU/Network-based (NT-type) system; one shelf contains
single CPU/half group; it serves from 800 to 1,000 lines. Option 61 is a
CPU/Network-based (NT-type) system; two shelves contain dual CPU/full
group; it serves from 1,000 to 2,000 lines. See Figures 2 and 3.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
1-2 System organization
Figure l-l
Option 21 with multiple UEMs
553-3022
System engineering 553-3001-151
System organization 1-3
Figure 1-2
Option 51 with half network group
553-3023
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
.4
1-4 System organization
Figure 1-3
Option 61 with full network group
553-3024
System engineering 553-3001-151
System organization l-5
Option
71
Option 71 is a multiple network group machine with redundant CPU and
serves from 2,000 to 10,000 lines. See Figure 14.
Figure 1-4
Option 71 with multiple network group
-
t
Main UEM Columr
553-3025
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-151
1-6 System organization
Universal Equipment Modtiles
This document has been updated to include new naming conventions.
Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are identified in the text
using parentheses.
Each configuration of the SL-1 consists of a nuniir of Univ&sal
Equipment Modules (UEMs). Each module can be identified by its
function. There are nine different types of UEMS:
Table l-1
Identification of UEMs
Universal Equipment Module
Number required
per system
Common/Peripheral Equipment 1
(CE/PE) (NT8Dl lAC/DC)
CPU/Network (NTGD39AA/DC)
1
CPU (NT8D34AA/DC)
2
Network (NT8D35AAIDC)
2 (see note)
Peripheral Equipment
(PE) (NT8D13AAIDC)
depends on
system size
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
(IPE) (NTBD37AAIDC)
depends on
system size
Remote Peripheral Equipment
(RPE) (NT8D47AA/DC)
depends on
system size
InterGroup
1 (see note)
(NT8D36AA)
Meridian Mail (NTGD44AADC)
Optional
Note: In Option 61, two network UEMs are required per
network group; InterGroup UEMs are required in SL-1
Option 61 only. For more information on UEMs, refer to
Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-l 54).
System engineering 553-3001-151
-,
System organization 1-7
CUPE UEM (NT8h 1 AC/DC)
Table l-2
Identification of CUPE UEM (NTBDll
Unit
AC/DC)
Number required
per UEM
Common/Peripheral Equipment
Power Supply (CE/PE Pwr Sup)
(AC-NT7D14AA) (DC-NT7D04AA)
1
Floppy Disk Interface card (FDI)
(QPC742)
1
CPU card (QPC687)
1
Memory/Peripheral Signalling
card (NT8D19AA)
1
NetworkDTR card (NT8D18AA)
1
ConferenceffDS card
(NT8Dl7AA)
1
Network cards
16
Enhanced Serial Data Interface
(ESDI)
Serial Data Interface Paddle
Board (Dual Port) (NT8D41AA)
supporting 6 SDI ports
53
Peripheral Equipment Line Cards
SlO
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-151
1-8 System organization
Description of CE/PE UEM (NT8Dl lAC/DC)
Slots 1,2, and 3 are reserved for the following circuit cards:
:
- Floppy Disk Interface (FDI) (QPC742)
- Central Processing Unit (CPU) (QPC687)
- Memory/Peripheral Signalling Card (NT8D19AA)
Slots 4 through 9 in the Network area can be used by the following cards:
- Superloop Network Card (lVlXDO4AA) serves one superloop (four
loops).
- Enhanced Network Card (QPC4 14) serves two loops.
- Conference/IDS Card (Conf/rDS) (NTSD17AA) uses two loops in the
Network area; at least one ConfR’DS is required in the system.
- Digital Trunk Interface Card (DTI) (QPC472) occupies two slots.
- D-Channel Interface Card @CHI) (QPC757)
- Quad Serial Data Interface Card (QSDI) (QPC84 1)
- Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) (NT8D68AA)
Note: FDU occupies two slots and resides either in Network slots 4-9
or Peripheral Equipment (PE) slots O-9, depending on slot availability. --If all slots in the first column of the CE/PE UEM are occupied, FDU
can reside in the second PE module.
System
engineering
553-3001-151
System organization 1-9
Slot 10, Net/Corn, must be occupied by the Network/DTR card
(NTSDlSAA) which combines the functions of a Network and Peripheral
Equipment controller and a Digitone receiver. The card provides ten loops
for ten PE cards.
Peripheral Equipment slots 0 through 9 can be occupied by any of the
following cards:
- Digital Line Card (NTSDO2AA)
- Analog Line Card (NT8DO3AA)
- Analog Message Waiting Line Card (NTSDO9AA)
- Universal Trunk Card (NTSD14AA)
- E&M Trunk Card (NTSDISAA)
- Floppy Disk Unit (NTSD68AA )-see note above
.j
iI:
,,....
, ..I’:..
.__ ( :.
.’ ‘;.,
.,-’
,.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
,
l-1 0 System organization
CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC)’
Table 1-3
Identification of CPU/Network UEM (NTGD39AAIDC)
Unit
Common Equipment Power
Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8D29AB)
(DC-NTGD41AB)
Number-required
per UEM
1
Network cards (QPC414)
18
Superloop Network cards
(NT8D04AA)
~6
Clock Controller/Serial Data
Interface (SDI)
(QPC471 /QPC139)
1
Peripheral Signalling card
(QPC43)
1
Three Port Extender (QPC441)
1
Mass Storage interface (MSI)
(QPC584) or Floppy Disk
Interface (FDI) (NT8D68AA)
1
CPU Function card (QPC579)
1
CPU Interface card (QPC580)
1
Changeover and Memory
Arbitrator (CMA) card (QPC581)
1
768K Memory card (QPC583)
1
Serial Data Interface (SDI) card
(QPC139)
1
Multi-Drive Unit (MDU)
(NT8D69AA) or Floppy Disk Unit
(FDU) (NT8D68AA)
1
Note: The Multi-Disk Unit (MDU) requires MSI cards; the
Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) requires FDI cards. MDU/FDU
occupies two slots.
System engineering 553-3001-151
.4
:
:
System organization l-11
Description of CPWNetwork UEM (NTGD39AAiDC)
Slots 1 through 8 are reserved for the following cards:
- Network cards (QPC4 14 or NT8DO4AA)
The rest of the slots contain the following cards:
- slot 9 : Clock Controller or Serial Data Interface (SDI)
- slot 10: Peripheral Signaling
- slot 11: Three Port Extender (3PE)
- slot 12: Mass Storage Interface (MSI)
- slot 13: SD1
- slot 14: CPU function
- slot 15: CPU interface
- slot 16: Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA)
- slot 17: Memory
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
l-l 2 System organization
CPU UEM (NT8D34AAIDC)
Table l-4
Identification of Single CPU UEM
Unit
Number- required
per UEM
Common Equipment Power
Supply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8D29AB)
(DGNTGD41AB)
1
CPU function card (QPC579)
1
CPU interface card (QPC580)
1
Changeover and Memory
Arbitrator (WA) card (QPC581)
1
Memory cards (QPC583)
2
Mass Storage Interface card
(MSI) (QPC584) or Floppy Disk
interface (FDI) (NT8D68AA):
1
Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)
cards (QPC215)
15
Clock Controller card (QPC471 or
QPC775 international)
I
Multi-Drive Unit (MDU)
(NT8D69AA)
or one DTI (Digital
Trunk Interface) card (QPC742)
1
Bus Terminating Unit (BTU)
(QPC477 -A20 or -A21)
2
Note: MDU requires MS.1 cards; FDU requires FDI cards; MDU
occupies three slots in the UEM, FDI occupies two.
System engineering 553-3001-151
System organization 1-13
Description of CPU UEM (NT8434AAIDC)
Slots l-2 are reserved for the following cards:
- Memory cards (QPC581)
The rest of the slots contain the following c-ards:
- slot 3: CMA
- slot 4: CPU interface
- slot 5: CPU function
- slot 6: SD1
- slot 7: MS1
- slots 8-12: Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)
- slot 13: available
- slot 14: Clock Controller
_.
- slot 15: Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit (PDU), or
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)/Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are --identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
<,
l-1 4 System organization
Network UEM (NT8D%AA/DC)
Table l-5
Identification of Network UEM
hit
Number_ required
per UEM
:ommon Equipment Power
upply (CE Pwr Sup) (ACIT8D29AB) (DCNTGD41 AB)
1
‘hree-Port Extender (3PE)
slPC4.41)
1
Iter-Group Switch (IGS) cards
ZPC412)
2
‘eripheral Signalling card
3PC43)
1
#erial Data Interface (SDI) card
zlPCl39)
1
uperloop Network cards
‘JT8D04AA)
14
letwork
s8
cards (QPC414)
rigital Trunk Interface (DTI)
JPC472) cards
16
LonferencefTone
and Digit
‘witch (Conf/TDS) (NT8D17AA)
ards
~8
us Terminating Units (BTU)
JPC477)
2
Note: IGS cards are for Option 71 only. In Options 51 and 61,
these slots are occupied by Clock Controller Cards fQPC471 B or
higher vintage].) The four Superloop Network cards (NTBD04AA;
or eight QPC414 Network cards can be configured in any
combination for a total of 16 loops. Also, as a DTVPRI-only UEM
Network UEM contains one CE Pwr Sup and up to six DTVPRI
cards.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
System organization l-15
Description of Network UEM (NT8D35AAIDC)
The slot assignment of cards is as follows:
- slots 1: Three Port Extender (3PE)
- slots 2-3: Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for Option 71 only), PRI/DTI, or
SD1
- slot 4: Peripheral signaling
- slots 5- 12: Network cards
- slot 13: PRI/DTI or SD1
- slot 14: PRI/DTI
- slot 15: not used
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
..
identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
l-1 6 System organization
Intelligent Peripheral&ipment UEM (IPE)(NT8D37AAlDC)
Table l-6
Identification of IPE UEM
Unit
Number required
per UEM
Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply (PE Pwr Sup) (ACNT8DOGAA) (DC-NTGD41AB)
AC Ringing Generator
(NT8D21AA) (required only when
analog cards are present)
Controller-2 (Cont-2)
(NT8DOl AD) Card or Controller-4
(Cont-4) (NT8DOlAC) Card (See
note.)
1
Line cards or a combination of
analog, digital, trunk, and Digitone
receiver cards (Table l-7 shows
the port-to-line card orientation.
~16
System engineering 553-3001-151
I
-2
System organization 1-17
Description of IPE‘UEM (NT8D37AA/DC)
The NT8D37 IPE backplane (NT8D3701) contains 16 card slots. Slots O-15
are for line cards. Slot 16 is for miscellaneous. The Controller Card is
situated near the center of the module, between slot 7 and slot 8.
If one or two superloops are to be served, use Cont-3 If three or four
superloops are to be served, use Cant-4. The Controller-4 card is required
when a large number of Integrated Voice and Date (ND) lines are nonblocking and when they require, on average, more than four Digital Line
Cards (Dgtl LCs) per IPE DEM.
The nominal capacity.of the IPE UEM is 256 Integrated Voice and Data
(IVD) or analog lines; however, a typical configuration of the PE UEM
includes a combination of line, trunk, and Digitone Receiver cards which
provide about 160 lines with the appropriate trunks.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
.s..
-.
.:
‘.
l-1 8 System organization
Table l-7
Port-to-line card orientation for IPE (NT8D37hUDC) line cards
Line card
Ports served
Digital Line Card
(NT8D02AA)
16 Digital
Analog Line Card
(NTBD08AA)
16 Analog
Analog Message Waiting
Line Card (NT8DOSAA)
16 Analog with Message
Waiting features
Universal Trunk Card
(NT8D14AA)
ZG 8 trunks with any
combination of
CO/DID/RAN/Page
Digitone Receiver Card
(NT8D18AA)
8 channels of DTMF or
MF receivers
E&M Trunk Card
(NT8Dl5AA)
I 4 trunks with any
combination of
E&M/Page trunks
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
System organization l-19
PE UEM (NT8D13&DC)
Table l-8
Identification of PE UEM (NTBD13AAIDC)
Number required .
-per UEM
Unit
Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply (PE Pwr Sup)
(AC-NTBDOGAA)
(DC-NTGD41
See note.
1
AB)
AC Ringing Generator (Rng Gen)
(NT8D21 AA) (required only when
analog cards are present.)
Dual Loop Peripheral Equipment
Buffer (QPC659)
Line cards or a combination of
analog, digital, trunk, and Digitone
receiver cards
silo
Note: QPC710 DTR can be
used if required by the customer; If
QPC710 DTR is used with a single loop on the
QPC659, then
slot 10 cannot be used. Both AC and DC versions of PEPS are
available.
The NT8D13 PE backplane (NT8D1302) contains 10 line card positions.
The PE Buffer is situated near the center of the module, with five line cards
to the left and five line cards to the right.
The nominal capacity of the PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC) is 160 Integrated
Voice and Data (IVD) or analog lines; however, a typical configuration of
the PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC) includes a combination of line, trunk, and
Digitone Receiver cards which provide about 100 lines with the appropriate
tnmks.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
‘..
,
l-20 System organization
RPE UEM (NTBD47AtiDC)
Table l-9
identification of RPE UEM
Unit
Number
Number
per UEM perJtPE
loop
Common/Peripheral
Equipment Power Supply
(CPE Pwr Sup)
(NT7D14AA)
1
1.5Mbps Converter cards
(QPC62)
2
1
2Mbp.s Converter cards
(QPC66)
2
1
Carrier Interface
(QPC99)
2
1
Local Carrier Buffer
(QPC63)
2
1
Remote Peripheral Buffer
(QPC65)
2
1
Carrier Maintenance card
(QPC67)
1
1
Digital Trunk Interface
cards (QPC472) / Primary
Rate Interface (PRI)
(QPC720)
s3
cards
Note: Each RPE UEM can
System engineering 553-3001-151
support up to two RPE loops.
System organization 1-21
Description of RPE UEM
The slot assignment of cards is as follows:
- slot 1: PRI/DTI (optional)
- slot 2: 1.5 Mb converter
- slot 3: 2 Mb converter
- slot 4: carrier interface
- slot 5: remote peripheral
- slot 6: local carrier buffer
- slot 7: carrier interface
- slot 8: 2 Mb converter
- slot 9: 1.5 Mb converter
- slot 10: carrier maintenance
- slots 11-12: PRI/DTI (optional)
The minimum configuration for RPE consists of an RPE UEM at the main
PBX site and the following equipment at the remote site:
- one RPE UEM (NT8D47AALDC)
- one PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC)
- one pedestal
- one top cover
The engineering rules for RPE UEM are the same as for the existing RPE
shelf except there are three 2” slots available for DTI/PRI Cards in the RPE
UEM.
1
i
:
.A-:,.
;:. : :I::: :::‘1
. ..< . . .,
.:. .,;-.. ,,
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
1-22 System organization
InterGroup UEM (NT8D36AA)
Figure l-5
InterGroup
0
I I-I I
UEM
IGSO
Ial
IGSl
IGS 0
J,3 (m> Jlacm)
4(m)& (m)Jqo
4
0
J15(-)J*‘,(w) 2
Jll
II--
512
J17c~3~
0
I
0
I I
c”““)
0
I I
I
553-3026
Description of InterGroup UEM
The NT8D36AA InterGroup UEM provides a path for the switching of
--traffic between the network groups in the system. Faceplate cables from the
Segmented Bus Extender (SBE), System Clock (SCG), and Intergroup
Switch (IGS) circuit cards are connected to the InterGroup Module.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
.:
System organization 1-23
.’
System capacities Network terminating capacity
The Superloop Network Card (NT8DO4AA) has four network loops
grouped as one superloop. One superloop can serve up to, two Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment UEMs (IPE) (NT8D37AA/DC).
Network traffic capacity
Each superloop is capable of carrying 3500 CCS (or 875 CCS/Ioop) of
combined station, trunk, attendant console and Digitone traffic during
Average Busy Season Busy Hour (ABSBH) subject to the following grades
of service:
- the loss of no more than 1% of the incoming terminating calls, provided
the called line is free
- the loss of no more than 1% of the originating outgoing calls in the
system, provided an idle trunk is available
.
- the loss of no more than 4% of the intra-office calls, provided that the
called line is free
- no more than 1.5% of the originating calls wait longer than 3 seconds
for dial tone
- the loss of no more than 1% of tandem calls, provided an idle outgoing
trunk is available
Memory capacity
The memory capacity is a function of the machine type. Memory
requirements are a function of the system size and features available. See
Table l-10 for the memory capacities of each system:
Table l-10
Memory capacity per system
System
Memory
Mbytes
Option 21
768K words
1.5
1 Options 51 and 61 1768K words 1
I Option 71
1
1.5M
2.3
words
1
4.5
I
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
1-24
System
organization
Configuration capacities
The maximum configuration capacities of the SL-1 Options 51,61, and 71
are:
- 100 customers
- 30 steps in a hunting group
- 8191 speed call lists per system
- 4095 ringing number pickup groups per customer
- 5 12 trunk routes per customer
- 254 members per trunk route
- 4 listed directory numbers per customer (DID only)
- 1 lamp field array per customer, may be repeated once on other console
or SL-1 set
- 150 lamps per array (all numbers to be consecutive)
- 63 consoles per customer (Release 8 and later releases)
- 10 feature keys per console
- 20 incoming call indicators per console
- 16 trunk group busy indicators per console
- 2 additional key/lamp strips per console
- 6 additional key/lamp strips per SL-1 set
- 16 input/output devices (TTY etc.)
- 30 appearances of the same directory number
A system may not be able to accommodate simultaneously all the maximum
values listed due to system limitations on the real time, memory, or traffic
capacity.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
.:.
..’
2-1
Definitions
General rules
Apply the following rules for system engineering when arranging various
Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) within an SL- 1.
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
identified in the text using parentheses.
UEM and column designations
Columns of Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) are numbered from 0 to
63. The column with CPU 0 is Column 0. Within a column, the UEMs are
numbered as 0 to 3 starting from the bottom UEM.
A UEM column can be built up to a maximum of four UEMs before moving
to the next column; however, three UEMs per column can be configured if
it is easier for installation and maintenance.
All the SL-1 Common Equipment (CPU UFMs) must be at the bottom or
one level up for proper cooling and reliability. The mass storage unit-Multi-Disk Unit (MDU) or Floppy Disk Unit (FDU)--is usually located in a
CPU UEM and requires lower operating temperatures than the cards. For
this reason, do not install MDU/FDU in the third or fourth UEM.
The Common Equipment (CE) UEMs must be located next to each other at
the same horizontal level. The CPU/Network Modules (NT6D39AA/DC)
(CNE) must be located on top of each other.
The CPU, InterGroup, and CE UEMs must be located in the same vertical
column. For these UEMs, all inter-UEM cabling must be internal, not
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
2-2 Definitions
through the I/O panels or EM1 filters. In addition, all vertical routing of the
internal signal cables should be done on the right side of a column.
The InterGroup UEM should be located at the top of a column and adjacent
to the CE UEMs.
Peripheral Equipment (PE or IPE) UEMs may be located away from CE and
CPU UEMs by a maximum network cable length of 45 feet. This means
that typically at floor level the CE UEM serving its PE cannot be more than
20 feet apart.
Configurations
A full network group consists of two half network group UEMs stacked one
on top of the other. This rule does not apply when the Network Module is
used only as a DTI/PRI shelf.
SL-1 Option 51 can be configured using one Network Module (half network
group) or two Network Modules (full network group). SL-1 Option 71 must
be expanded in increments of full network groups.
In multiple-group machines, the addition of network groups should be
considered in the floor plans. Make sure the network groups are located in
one contiguous equipment bay. One possibility is to provide space for
--expanding network groups to the left of CPU UEMs and Peripheral
Another
possibility
is
to
Equipment (PE or IPE) to the right of CPU UEMs.
keep Peripheral Equipment (PE or IPE) expansion as a separate bay. See
Figure 14 “Option 71 with multiple network group.”
System engineering 553-3001-151
v
I
Definitions 2-3
Peripherals
One superloop (the equivalent of four regular loops) should serve two, four,
six, or eight segments. A segment is one-fourth of the Intelligent Peripheral
Equipment (IPE)(NT8D37AA/DC) shelf containing four slots.
A superloop can serve from one segment to two IPE UEMs in increments of
one segment, depending on the ratio of TN to TS. Preferably, a superloop
should be configured to serve an even number of segments. Assign full
traffic and IPE Cards to one superloop before assigning to the next.
For every superloop which has “empty” IPE slots associated with it
(because it is not assigned to exact multiples of eight cards), there should be
spare traffic to use those slots when the system grows. Future additions of
IPE Cards can be made to these superloops.
For traffic purposes, Network/DTR (Net/DTR) may be typically assigned to
serve 96 lines, 32 trunks, and 8 DTR ports (10 IPE Cards total ) even though
it has higher traffic capacity.
The total number of AC Ringing Generators (Rng Gen) in a system can be
minimized by consolidating all Analog Line Cards in a few IPE UEMs and
CE/PE UEM, if applicable. For traffic and reliability reasons, no more than
three-fourths of the IPE and CE/PE UEMs should be filled with Analog
Line Cards (Anlg LC)(NT8DO3AA) or Analog Message Waiting Line --cards (Anlg M/W LC) (NT8Do9AA).
Note: This document has been updated to include new naming
conventions. Acronyms and abbreviations for the new names are
identified in the text using parentheses.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
2-4 Definitions
Traffic distribution The traffic distribution in the SL- 1 is illustrated in Figure 2-1. This
illustration is valid when considering individual customer or system traffic.
Figure 2-1
Traffic distribution over the SL-1
SL-1 System
/
Line
traffic
7Y
originating
terminating
Loop
traffic
homing
” terminating
incoming
Trunk
iraff ic
outgoing
553-3027
Traffic definitions
The following are definitions of traffic terminology used in determining the
provisioning requirements of an SL-1 System:
- ccs=
Hundred call seconds. The unit in which amounts of telephone traffic
are measured. One call which lasts for one hundred seconds equals one
ccs.
yn..
I:: :::. :’
,:..
.;,.:..._..,.~,Z .,..I.
.
4
,+
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
Definitions 2-5
- Line=IT+OO+IOT+IOO
where:
Line
IT
00
IOT
100
=
=
=
=
=
Line traffic in CCS
Incoming Terminating traffic in CCS.
Originating Outgoing traffic in CCS
Irma-Office Terminating traffic in CCS
Inn-a-Office Originating traffic in CCS
- R=(IOT+IOO)/Line
where:
R
= Irma-Office Ratio
- Loop=Line+IT+OO
where:
Loop
= loop traffic in CCS
=Line+Line-RxLine
= Line x (2-R)
- Total line capacity = Total loop capacity / (2-R)
- Total trunk capacity = Total line capacity x ( 1-R)
= Total loop capacity x (1-R) / (2-R)
- Total I/O capacity = Total loop capacity x R / (2-R)
- Network = Total CCS handled by the SL-1 switching network or:
= Traffic received from stations + trunks, attendants, Digitone
receivers, conference circuits and special features.
- InterGroup = Traffic flow between two network groups in SL-1s having
more than one network group.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
2,
2-6 Definitions
Equipment utilization
Equipment is provided and maintained throughout the SL-1 location life at
an 85% utilization level.
Network loop traffic
The recommended traffic level for a Network superloop is:
- 3500 CCS without Digitone-using apparatus
- 2975 CCS with Digitone-using apparatus
The traffic level per netwcrk loops depends on whether or not the Peripheral
Equipment uses Digitone trunks.
Partitioning
The SL-1 can be configured as a partitioned or non-partitioned system when
.
it is to serve more than one customer.
A partitioned system dedicates each customer and the customer’s associated
lines and trunks to actual partitioned segments of the system in terms of
loops and shelves. Consoles and Digitone receivers are normally spread
over all loops and shelves in a partitioned system.
In a non-partitioned system, all customers, trunks, lines, consoles, and
Digitone receivers are spread over all loops and shelves. A non-partitioned
system provides the following advantages:
- fewer traffic loops are required
- fewer PE shelves and cards are required
- system call-carrying capacity is more easily achieved and maintained
- customers are distributed evenly over the loops
- load balancing is more easily accomplished by being done on a system
basis rather than for each customer
System engineering 553-3001-151
Definitions 2-7
Network loop assigning
When assigning the loop number in systems equipped with two Network
UEMs, the load should be distributed evenly across both UEMs. Loops
should be assigned in the order shown in Table 2- 1. Record the loops used
in Worksheet L provided at the end of this document.
.
The total number of Peripheral Equipment UEMs should be distributed over
the total number of voice and data loops. Normally, one PE UEM is
assigned to a superloop. However, one PE UEM cart be assigned from one
half-superloop to as many as four superloops, depending on the
concentration of Terminal Numbers to Timeslot ratio. See Table 2-l for
details on loop number assignments.
Total number of loops = 4 x No. of Superloop Network Cards + 2 x No. of
3nhanced Network Cards
rable 2-1
,oop number assignment
Number of groups
Number of loops
1
28
2
56
3
84
4
112
5
140
Note: The assignments shown may vary
depending on system configuration and size.
Conference (CONF) and Tone and Digit Switch
(TDS) may be assigned any even loop number.
Do not assign the odd loop number associated
with CONF or TDS loop.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
2-8 Definitions
PE card distribution
Using Worksheet M (provided at the end of this document), determine the
total number of each type of PE cards (500, SLl, TRK, DTR, etc.) per PE
UEM.
Using Worksheets N and 0 (also provided at the end of this document),
determine the number of Multiple Appearance Groups (MAG) assigned to
each loop. (Also refer to Worksheet S for a Multiple Appearance Group
Record sheet). Multiple appearance groups should be balanced over all the
loops.
Multiple appearance groups that call each other frequently should not be
assigned to the same loop, but should be assigned to the same network
group to reduce inter-group calls in multiple network group systems. Large
multiple appearance groups of more than 10 TNs should be avoided, if
possible.
Users within a multiple network group system that call each other
frequently should be assigned to the same network group. Similarly, trunk
groups that are used primarily by certain groups of users should be assigned
within the same network group as the users.
System engineering 553-3001-151
Definitions 2-9
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (.IPE) card slot assigning
Card slot priority
Input messages from card slots 1 and 0 in each IPE module (card slot 0 in
each EPE shelf) are directed to a high priority input buffer.. The input
messages from the remaining slots on each -lPE module are directed to a
priority input buffer. The system processes the low priority input buffer
only when the high priority buffer and the SL-1 and 500 output buffers are
empty, thereby minimizing input buffer delay on signals from devices in
high priority card slots. This mechanism is important for certain types of
trunks that require critical timing. It is relatively unimportant for other
devices.
Class of service priority
Class of service priority is completely unrelated to card slot priority.
Selected sets and trunks can be assigned a high priority (HPR) class of
service Requests for dial tone from high priority sets and trunks are
processed before sets and trunks assigned a low priority (LPR) class of
service The fewer the sets and trunks assigned as high priority, the better
the service received during heavy load conditions.
Trunks
Incoming Delay Dial, Wink Start, and similar trunks have a timing
--advantage at seizure time when assigned to card slots 1 and 0 in the IPE
module. TIE/DID trunks with DTMF pulsing (incoming) used on the high
priority card slots (1 and 0) have a better chance of attaching a DTR before
the first digit arrives. Trunks using 10 or 20 pps (incoming) should not be
assigned to high priority slots to minimize the number of high priority input
messages during pulsing.
The recommended card slot assignments for trunks is as follows:
- AIOD type trunks must always be assigned to card slots 1 and 0.
- Delay Dial, Wink Start and DTMF type trunks should be assigned to a
high priority card slot if possible.
- Trunks using 10 or 20 pps (incoming) should not be assigned to a high
priority card slot if possible
- Other types of trunks may be assigned to high priority card slots to
avoid glare, but can also be assigned card slot 2 through 10.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
low
2-10 Definitions
Attendant consoles Attendant consoles should never be assigned to a high priority card slot.
Too many high priority messages from attendant consoles assigned to these
card slots can result in delays in output messages to attendant consoles, sets
and trunks. Attendant consoles should always be assigned to card slots 2
through 10. A large number of attendant consoles should not be assigned to
the same network loop since buffer overflow may result (ERR030 and
ERR040 messages on the TTY).
Telephone sets
SL-l-, X0-, and 2500~type sets can be assigned to any card slot. However,
there is no service or user~advantage gained by assigning sets to high
priority card slots. One disadvantage of assigning a 500~type set to high
priority card slots is the possibility of input messages during pulsing
delaying output buffer processing.
Card slot assignment
Use Worksheet P (provided at the end of this document) to assign cards to
the UEM slots. Calculate the average load after all packs of a particular type
have been assigned. Total the load and keep a running total. If this method
is followed, cards need not be interchanged at the end of the process
because of load imbalance.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
Definitions 2-11
Assigning cards Procedure 2-1
Order for assigning cards
1
Assign cards requiring a card slot 1 assignment (high priority slot).
2
Assign cards for high-usage trunks, such as CO trunks.
3
Assign cards for low-usage trunks, such as paging and dictation.
4
Assign cards for attendant consoles.
Note: For the.PE UEM (NT8D13AA/DC), card slot 1 is reserved for
high priority signaling. For the IPE UEM (NT8D37AA/DC), both card
slots 0 and 1 are reserved for high priority signaling.
5
Assign Digitone receiver cards.
6
Assign cards for sets associated with multiple appearance groups.
7
Assign remaining cards. On a system which has a high density of
Digitone sets, assign the least number of SO0 line cards to loops which
have Digitone receivers assigned.
Note: Loops and Conference/Tone and Digit Switch Cards
(Conf/TDS) should be evenly distributed across Network UEMs and
groups.
8
Calculate the total load per UEM.
9
Calculate the total load per loop.
10 If required, rearrange card assignments to balance the load.
System engineering 553-3001-151
2-12 Definitions
Terminal number assigning
Once the cards are assigned to the PE UEMs, the individual units on each
card can be assigned. Use Worksheet Q (at the end of this document) to
record the Terminal Number (TN) assignments. TN 0000 cannot be used on
superloop 0. Therefore, use loop 0 for Enhanced Network or .
Conference/IDS Card to avoid wasting a port. -
Ongoing assignment plan
Use the initial assignment records to complete an SL-1 System assignment
plan for each equipped network loop in the system. (See Worksheet R at
the end of this document). From this system loop profile, an assignment
plan can be developed for each loop. Assignments for future trunks,
multiple appearance group stations, consoles, and Digitone receiver
requirements can be developed for each loop according to the profile.
Cutover study
Once the system has been placed in service, a cutover study should be
undertaken. The results of this study are used to update the loop profiles
and create a new assignment plan. Ongoing assignments should follow the
new assignment plan until the first customer busy-season trunking study.
At that time loop threshold measurements are set so that at least one of the
predominant busy hours would produce a CCS load output.
Threshold study
From the threshold study printout the loop profile should be updated, and a
new assignment plan should be developed. At this time, it may be advisable
to estimate the system capacity for future growth. If the growth capacity is
sufficient to last beyond the next annual threshold study, assignments can
continue in accordance with the assignment plan. If the growth capacity is
not sufficient, plans should be made to establish a tentative date when new
equipment (loops or shelves) must be ordered and installed. This date
generally should be controlled by physical capacity and tracked by total
working physical terminations.
System
engineering
553-3001-151
---
Definitions 2-13
Equipment relief When additional equipment is installed, assignments should be concentrated
into the new loop or shelves until the first threshold study. At that time, the
loop profile would be updated and a new loading plan developed. At any
time when a loop exceeds 500 CCS (based on 85% traffic level), that loop
should be suspended from future assignments. If any loop should encounter
service problems, that loop should be suspended and sufficient load
removed to reduce service levels to an acceptable level.
Assignment records
The following printouts are available from the system and should be used in
addition to worksheets to assist in maintaining assignment records:
- list of trunk route members
- list of TN blocks
- list of unused card positions
- list of unused units
- DN to TN matrix
Refer to Xl1 Features and services (553-3001-305) for information on how
to obtain and manipulate data in the SL-1.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
c
..
Provisioning guidelines
Procedure 3-1
Provisioning guidelines
Note: To determine the equipment requirements, follow the
provisioning guidelines in the order shown below. Worksheets and
Tables are all provided at the end of this document.
Step 1
Define and forecast growth.
Step 2
Estimate ccs per terminal.
Step 3
Calculate number of trunks required.
Step 4
Calculate line, trunk, and console load.
Step 5
Calculate DTP requirements.
Step 6
Calculate total system load.
Step 7
Calculate number of superloops required.
Step 8
Calculate number of Network groups required.
Step 9
Calculate number of PE cards required.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..d
:
3-2 Provisioning guidelines
Step 10
Calculate number of PE UEMs re&rexl.
Step 11
Provision TDS/Conference loops.
Step 12
Calculate memory requirements.
Step 13
Assign the equipment/prepare equipment sutimary.
Note: The provisioning methods described in this document are based
on a non-partitioned system using the figures provided. The figures are
intended as a guide only.
The details of each step are given below in the following steps:
System engineering 553-3001-151
..2
.-
-.
Provisioning guidelines 3-3
Step 1:
Define and forecast growth
The first step in provisioning an initial SL-1 is to forecast the growth of the
system at the 2-year and 5-year interval in terms of telephone stations.
The number of telephones required when the system is placed in service
(cutover) is determined by the customer. If the customer is unable to
provide a 2-year and 5-year station growth forecast, then a customer
estimate of annual growth of personnel in percent is used to estimate the
number of stations required at the 2-year and 5-year interval.
Example
A customer has 500 employees and requires 275 telephones to meet the
system cutover. The customer projects an annual increase of 5% of
employees based on future business expansion. The employee growth
forecast is:
- 500 employees x 0.05 (% growth) = 25
- 525 employees x 0.05 = 27 additional employees at 1 year
- 552 employees x 0.05 = 28 additional employees at 2 years
- 580 employees x 0.05 = 29 additional employees at 3 years
- 609 employees x 0.05 = 31 additional employees at 4 years
- 640 employees x 0.05 = 32 additional employees at 5 years
The ratio of telephones to employees is 275/500 = 0.55.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
.:
3-4 Provisioning guidelines
To determine the number of telephones required from cutover through a 5year interval, the number of employees required at cutover 1,2,3,4, and 5
years is multiplied by the ratio of telephones to employee.
- 500 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 275 telephones required at cutover
- 525 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 289 telephones requiredat 1 year
- 552 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 304 telephones required at 2 years
- 580 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 319 telephones required at 3 years
- 609 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 335 telephones required at 4 years
- 640 (employees) x 0.55 (ratio) = 352 telephones required at 5 years
This customer requires 275 telephones at cutover, 304 telephones at 2 years,
and 352 telephones at 5 years.
Every Directory Number (DN) assigned to an NE-500 or NE-2500 set
requires a Terminal Number (TN). Each SL-1 set requires a TN.
Determine the number of NE-500, NE-2500, and SL-1 TN required for each
customer, and enter this information on Worksheet A (provided at the end
of this document). Perform this calculation for the cutover, 2-year, and 5year interval.
System engineering 553-3001-151
,, :‘. : I.- ..,
x.
.: j
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
3-10 Provisioning guidelines
Default method
Studies have been conducted which estimate the average line CCS/r to
never be greater than 5.5 in 90 percent of all businesses. If attempts to
calculate the CCS/r using the comparative method or the manual
calculation have not been successful, the default-of 5.5 line CCS/r can be
used.
The network line usage is determined by multiplying the number of lines by
5.5 CCS/r. The total is then multiplied by 2 to incorporate the trunk
CCS/r. Unfortunately, when this method is used, the intra CCS/r is added
twice to the equation, and the result could be over provisioning if the intra
CCS/T is high.
Another difficulty experienced with this method is the inability to forecast
individual trunk groups. The trunk and intra CCS/T is forecasted as a sum
group total. Examples of the Default method and the Manual calculation
method are shown in Table 3-4 for comparison.
Default method example:
- 275 Stations at Cutover
- 304 Stations at 2 years
- 352 Stations at 5 years
Cutover 275 x 5.5 (CCWI’) x 2 = 3025 CCS Total System Load
2 Year 304 x 5.5 (CCS/r) x 2 = 3344 CCS Total System Load
5 Year 352 x 5.5 (CCS/T) x 2 = 3872 CCS Total System Load
System engineering 553-3001-151
--
Provisioning guidelines 3-l 1
Table 3-4
Defautt Method and Manual Calculations analysis
1
Default Method
Manual Calculations
Difference
Cutover
3025
2863CCS
162 CCS
2 Years
3344
3162 CCS
182 CCS
5 Year5
3872
3657 CCS
215 CCS
-: . .
~.‘.YY . .
_ .’ -1 I
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
-.
.:
3-12 Provisioning guidelines
Step 3:
Calculate number of trunks required
Trunks required
The values obtained through any of the three previous methods should now
be entered on Worksheet A (provided at the end of this document). Add
your calculations to the worksheet. Once the trunk CCS/T is known, and a
grade of service has been specified by the customer, the number of trunks
required per trunk group to meet the cutover, 2-year and 5-year
requirements of a customer can be determined as follows:
Example
The customer requires a Poisson 1% blocking grade of service (see Table
3-A at the end of this document). The estimated trunk CCS/r is 1.14 for a
DID trunk group. With the cutover, 2-year and 5-year number of lines, the
total trunk CCS is determined by multiplying the number of lines by the’.
trunk ccs/r:
Cutover 275 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/I) = 313.5 CCS
2 year 304 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/r) = 346.5 CCS
5 year 352 (lines) x 1.14 (trunk CCS/I’) = 401.28 CCS
Use Table 6- 1 to determine the quantity of trunks required to meet the trunk
CCS at cutover, 2-year and 5-year interval. In this case:
- 17 DID trunks are required at cutover
- 18 DID trunks are required at 2 years
- 21 DID trunk are required at 5 yearrs
Note: For trunk traffic greater than 4427 ccs, allow 29.5 ccs/mmk.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
.:.
I -.
---
Provisioning guidelines
3-l
3
Step 4:
Calculate line, trunk, and console load
Line, trunk, and console load
_
Once the quantity of trunks required has been estimated, enter the quantities
on Worksheet A (in Step 1) for the cutover, 2-year and 5-year interval. This
calculation must be performed for each trunk group to be equipped. The
total trunk CCS/T is the sum of each individual trunk group CCS/r. This
value is also entered on Worksheet A. (See Worksheet A at the end of this
document.)
Line load
The line load is calculated by multiplying the total number of 500 and
SL-1 line Terminal Numbers (TN) by the line CCS/r. The number of TN is
..
determined as follows:
- one TN for every Directory Number (DN) assigned to one or more 500
or 2500~type set
- one TN for every SL-1 set.
- one Tn for every digital set M2xxx or M3xxx without data option.
- two TNs for every M2xxx or M3xxx set with data option.
Trunk load
The trunk load is calculated by multiplying the total number of digital sets,
500, and SL-1 line TN having access to the trunk route by the CCS/r per
trunk route.
Console load
The console load is determined by multiplying the number of consoles by
30 CCS per console.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
3-14 ‘hovisioning guidelines
Step 5:
Calculate DTR requirements
Once station and trunk requirements have been determined for the complete
system, the Digitone Receiver (DTR) requirements can be calculated. DTR
are shared by all customers in the system and should be distributed equally
over all the network loops.
Tables 6-3 through 6-6 (at the end of this document) are based on models of
PBX traffic environments and can be applied to determine DTR needs in
most cases. When the system being provisioned does not fall within the
bounds of these models or is equipped with any special features, the detailed
calculations must be performed for each feature and the number of Digitone
receivers must accomodate the highest result.
Some special features are:
- Centralized Attendant Service (CAS)
- Direct Inward System Access (DISA)
- Authorization Code
- Charge Account for Call Detail Recording (CDR)
- Integrated Message Service (IMS)
Note: Refer to the section “Feature calculations” for more information
on the above features.
System engineering 553-3001-151
Provisioning guidelines 3-15
From the appropriate table (See Table.6-3 to.Table 6-6 at the end of this
document) determine the number of DTR required and the DTR load for
cutover, two-year, and five-year interval. Record this information on
Worksheet B (located at the end of this document).
The following models are based on some common PBX traffic
measurements:
Model 1
Table 6-3 is based on the following factors:
- 33% intra-office calls, 33% incoming calls, and 33% outgoing calls
- 1.5% dial tone delay grade of service
- no Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
Model 2
.
Table 64 is based on the following factors:
- assumes same traffic pattern as model 1
- the system has Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
- Poisson 0.1% blockage grade of service
---
Model 3
Table 6-5 is based on the following factors:
- 15% intra-office calls, 28% incoming calls, and 56% outgoing calls
- 1.5% dial tone delay grade of service
- no Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
Model 4
Table 6-6 is based on the following factors:
- assumes same traffic pattern as model 3
.!
.,
~ . .
. . - . ..,
..- . .I .:- .:
‘:::‘.i:;+ : . . ,
- the system has Digitone DID trunks or incoming Digitone tie trunks
- Poisson 0.1% blockage grade of service
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
3-16 Provisioning guidelines
Detailed calculation: method 1
This method can be used when there are no incoming Digitone DID trunks
and the following is assumed:
- Receiver traffic is assumed to be inflated by 30% to cover unsuccessful
dialing attempts.
- Call holding times used in Irma-office and Outgoing Call calculations
can be assumed to be 135 seconds if unknown.
- Receiver holding times assumed to be 6.2 and 14.1 seconds for intra
and outgoing calls respectively.
- Factor (l-R)/2 in (1) Outgoing, assumes that Incoming calls and
Outgoing calls are equal. R is the intra-office ratio.
Procedure 3-2
Detailed calculation method 1
1
Calculate Digitone calls:
Intra-office traffic = 100 x Diaitone station traffic (ccs) x E
call holding time in seconds
2
Outgoing traffic
2
= 100 x Digitone station traffic
call holding time in seconds
X(I-R)
2
Calculate total receiver traffic:
Total receiver traffic = 1.3 x l(6.2 x Irma) + (14.1 x out&&]
100
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
Provisioning guidelines 3-17
3 Calculate average holding time:.
Average holding time = f6.2 x Intra) + (14.1 x outeoing)
Intra calls + outgoing calls
4
Refer to Table 6-7 or Table 6-8 (at theend of this document) and use
answers from (2) and (3) above to determine the number of receivers
required.
Detailed calculation: method 2
This method can be used when incoming Digitone trunks are included in the
system. This method uses the same assumptions as method 1, with the
receiver holding time assumed to be 2.5 seconds for a DID call.
Procedure 3-2
Detailed calculation method 1
Calcualte Intra-office and Outgoing Digitone calls as shown in
Method 1 (1):
DID calls = 100 x Dinitone station traffic (in ccs)
call holding time in seconds
Calculate total receiver traffic:
Total receiver traffic =
1.3 x 6.2 x Intra + (1.3 x 14.1 x outeoinp) + (2.5 x DID call@
100
Refer to Table 6-9 (at the end of this document) and use the answer
from (2) above to determine the number of digitone receivers required.
System engineering 553-3001-151
3-18 Provisioning guidelines
Step 6:
Calculate total system load
Total the line, trunk, console, and Digitone receiver load for each customer
to arrive at a total load figure for each customer for the cutover, 2-year, and
5-year interval. Enter this figure on Worksheets B and C (at the end of this
document).
Step 7:
Calculate number of superloops required
The system network loop requirement is the total of all individual customer
loops and superloops required. The number of network loops and
superloops required is calculated for each customer for the cutover, IL-year,
and 5-year interval. Network loops and superloops are provisioned at
cutover on the basis of the 2-year loop requirement figure.
To determine the number of superloops required, first separate the traffic
supported by Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414). Enhanced Networks
support the traffic carried by Data Line Cards (QPC3 11, QPC430,
QPC432), RPE, and DTI/PRI. Remaining traffic including DTR traffic
should be engineered for superloops.
Number of Superloop Network Cards or Number of superloops =
Traffic to be handled bv Superloon Network
2975
These figures are based on an 85% utilization level. The value obtained
should be rounded to the next higher number. For Option 21, exclude the
traffic carried by 10 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Cards in the
first module before computing the number of Superloop Network Cards.
System engineering 553-3001-151
Provisioning guidelines 3-19
Non-blocking configura‘tion with Superloop Network
For non-blocking applications (or non-blocking part of the system), provide
one superloop per 120 Terminal Numbers (INS). Each line or trunk is one
TN except that an integrated voice and data line is two TNs (assuming dam
port is configured).
Blocking configuration with Superloop Network
For applications where blocking is allowed, one superloop can serve up to
512 lines (1024 TNs). The actual number of lines will depend on the traffic
requirement of the lines.
Enhanced Network Cards (QPC414)
The traffic carried by Enhanced Network Cards includes the data traffic,
RPE traffic, and DTI/PRI traffic (which includes both the data and voice
traffic).
Provide separate loops for RPE and DTI/PRI traffic. Based on 85%
utilization, the number of loops required is calculated as follows:
Number of loops =
Traffic reauired to be carried bv Enhanced Network Cards
560
Number of Enhanced Network Cards = Number of
2
100~s
The value obtained should be rounded to the next higher number.
DTI/PRI cards
Digital Trunk Interface Cards (DTIs) provide the interface between the SL-1
switch and the T-l/IX 1 Digital transmission trunks. Digital trunks are
offered in the group of 24 trunks. The number of DTI Cards required can
be found from Table 3-5 when the DTUPRI traffic is known.
Note: The number of DTI/PRI loops = number of DTI/PRI cards
System engineering 553-3001-151
3-20 Provisioning guidelines
Table 3-5
Number of DTI cards required when DTl/PRI
traffic is known
DTIPRI traffic (CCS) Number of DTI cards
1 - 507
1
508 - 1201
2
1202 - 1935
3
1936 - 2689
4
2690 - 3456
5
3457 - 4231
6
4232 - 5006
7
5007 - 5781
8
over 5781
provide 8+ one DTI for
each 774 ccs in excess
of 5781 ccs.
Note: In a Network module, if two network slots
are available but not contiguous, the Superloop
Network Card or Enhanced Network Card can be
moved to create a 2” slot for DTI/PRI. The
Superloop Network Card can be plugged into the
left or right half of the “superslot” to achieve this
For non-blocking applications, the Ring Again feature must be provided
since blocking may occur at the far end of the trunk.
Since the DTI/PRI Card physically occupies two network slots, therefore,
the number of DTI/PRI Cards should be multiplied by 2 to obtain the
required number of network slots.
DTI/PRI Cards can be plugged into a Network module, a
Common/Peripheral Equipment module, a Common Equipment module, a
CPU module, or Remote Peripheral Equipment modules. After all essential
cards are configured in these UEMs, estimate the available slots for
DTI/PRI. If enough slots are not available for all DTl/PRIs required, a
special DTI/PRI-only Network module can be added to the system.
System engineering 553-3001-151
Provisioning guidelines 3-21
Step 8:
Calculate number of Network groups required
Compute the number of Network groups based on the total. number of loops
required (excluding conference and tone loops). The following equation
should be used: (Also refer to Table 3-6.)
Total number of loops = 4 x no. of Superloop Network Cards + 2 x
no. of Enhanced Networks
Table 3-6
Number of groups based on the total number
sf loops required
Number of groups
Number of loops
1
2
3
4
5
28
56
84
112
140
Note: Use Worksheet C (at the end of this
document) if no superloop is required. If the total
number of loops required exceeds 22, then a
multiple group system should be installed.
Based on the above criteria, installing a multiple group system at the start is
more cost-effective than converting to a multiple group system (from a
single gropu system) between the 2-year and 5-year interval.
:. -.
I ; :.:::,
.. . .::_
-:
i--?sq.-.~:‘-.- -.-”
.,
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
3-22 Provisioning guidelines
Step 9:
Calculate number of PE cards required
Enter the number of Digitone receivers required (from Worksheet B) at the
cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval on Worksheet D. Use a separate
worksheet for the cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals.
Using the information on Worksheet A, enter the number of M2xxx TNs,
M3xxx TNs, NE-500/2500 TN, SL-1 TN, and trunk TN required at the
cutover, 2-year, and 5-year interval (for all customers).
Divide each entry by the number of terminal number assignments per card,
round up to the next highest figure, and total the number of cards required.
Calculate the number of new cards and old cards separately.
Note: Worksheets are provided at the end of this document.
Step 10:
Calculate number of PE UEMs required
The number of PE UEMs provided at cutover is based on the 2-year
estimate of PE cards required and an 85% utilization level. The maximum
capacity of an Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Module is 256
Integrated Voice and Data (IVD) or analog lines; however, a typical
configuration should include a combination of line, trunk, and digitone
receivers which provides up to 160 lines with appropriate trunks.
Divide the number of PE cards required at 2-years by 8.5, round to the next
higher figure, and enter this value on Worksheet D (at the end of this
document).
To compute the number of Peripheral Equipment (PE) UEMs, total the
number of line cards, trunk cards, and Digitone receiver cards required at 2
years by 13.6 and round to the next higher integer figure. Enter this value
into Worksheet D (located at the end of this document).
Calculate the number of IPE UBMs and PE UEMs required.
System engineering 553-3001-151
‘...
: ..
Provisioning guidelines 3-23
Step 11:
Provision YEWConference loops
Tone and Digit Switch (TDS) and Conference (CONF) loops are
provisioned according to the two-year figure for the number of network
loops required. All systems should be equipped with a minimum of two
TDS and two CONF loops.
Refer to Table 6- 10 (at the end of this document) to determine TDS and
CONF loop requirements for systems other than SL-1 S. Enter these figures
on Worksheet F (at the end of this document).
uirements
Refer to the end of this document and use Worksheets G through fto
calculate memory needs. The two-year figure for sets, consoles, trunks, for
example, should be used when calculating. Once the total memory needs
are determined, add an additional 10% to the total.
---
Step 13:
Assign the equipment / prepare equipment
summary
Equipment summary
Use Worksheet J (at the end of this document) to record the equipment
requirements for the complete system at cutover. Proceed to assign tire
equipment. The equipment summary may have to be updated as a result of
assigning procedures. The equipment summary, once finalized, may be
used to order the equipment for the system.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
_:-
4-1
Feature calculations
Calculations with Authorization Code
With authorization code, the receiver holding times are changed from 6.2
seconds to 19.6 seconds for intra-office calls, and from 14.1 seconds to 27.5
seconds for outgoing calls.
Use these figures in (2) and (3) of Detailed calculation Method 1,‘and (2) of
Detailed calculation Method 2 when calculating the DTR requirements for a
system with the authorization code option.
The following is assumed.
- All Digitone intra-office and outgoing calls require authorization. .-_
- The average number of Special Services Prefix (SSP) digits is 2 (the
maximum is 4).
- The average number of authorization code digits is 10 (range is 1 to 14
digits).
- The average receiver holding time is 13.4 seconds.
Note:
See Table 6-7 at the end of this document.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
4-2 Feature calculations
Calculations with Centralized Attendaht Service (CAS)
This method is used to determine the DTR requirements for the main
location of a system equipped with the CAS option. The following is
assumed:
- All attendant calls presented through Release~Link Trunks’ (RLT) from
a remote PBX require Digitone Receivers.
- The average number of digits dialed is 4.
- Average receiver holding time is 6.2 seconds.
Procedure 4-l
Calculations with CAS
1
Calculate the attendant calls from the remote PBX:
attendant call = 100 x attendant traffic from the remote (CCS)
attendant work time (in seconds)
2
Add the attendant calls to the intra-office calls calculated in (1) of
Method 1, and proceed with the remaining calculations of Method
1.
,--t--Y
_ . _
A.,.
::
:
r:,
-.
System engineering 553-3001-151
:;
3
.a
Feature calculations 4-3
Calculations with Charge Account for CDR
The receiver holding time for outgoing calls changes from 14.1 seconds to
20.8 seconds.
Apply this change to (2) and (3) in Method 1 and (3) in Method 2 to
determine DTR requirements for a system with the charge account for CDR
option.
The following is assumed:
- 50% of the Digitone outgoing calls require charge account.
- The average number of SSP digits is 2 (maximum is 4).
- The average number of digits in the account number is 10 (range is 2 to
23 digits).
- The average receiver holding time is 13.4 seconds. See Table e-7.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
C.
4-4 Feature calculations
Calculations with Direct inward System Access (DISA)
This method is used when a system is equipped with DISA. The following
is assumed:
- The DISA calls come through DISA trunks or DID trunks.’
- 75% of DISA calls require security code.
- The average number of digits in the security code is 4 (range is 1 tc 8).
- The DISA receiver holding time is 6.2 seconds.
Procedure 4-2
Calculations with DISA
1
Calculate the number of DISA calls.
DISA calls = 100 x DISA traffic
call holding time
2
Calculate the DISA receiver traffic.
DISA receiver traffic = 6.2 x DISA calls
100
3
Add this traffic to (2) in Method 2 and proceed with the remainder
of Method 2 calculations.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
.__
Feature calculations 4-5
Calculations with Integrated Message Service (IMS)
This method is used when a system is equipped with IMS. The following is
assumed:
- Only messaging calls from 2500 sets require DigitoneReceiver service
- 50-50 split of originating and terminating calls and 135 seconds
average call holding time were assumed in Step (a).
- 50% of calls from 2500 sets were intra-PBX calls Step (b).
- In general, a caller will not wait until the completion of Recorded
AMOMCement to act (press message button or transfer to attendant).
The average time is listening to an announcement is four seconds, (Step
d).
- If the actual number of 2500 sets is not known, assume it to be 60% of
total lines.
Procedure 4-3
Calculations with IMS
1
Calculate originating calls from 2500 sets of the PBX.
Calls from 2500 sets = CCS/line x 100 x Qty 2500 sets/(2x135) = A_-
2
Calculate intra-PBX calls from 2500 sets.
Irma-PBX 2500~set calls = A x 0.5 = B
3
Calculate calls requiring service of DTR.
Calls to DTR = B x 0.5 = C where 0.5 is the fraction of B which goes to
the messaging service.
4
Calculate traffic (CCS) to DTR.
Messaging CCS to DTR = C x 4/100
Messaging CCS should be added to the total DTR traffic to determine
the overall DTR requirements.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
‘.d
5-1
Worksheets
Worksheets
5-l
Growth Forecast: Worksheet A
Line Usage: Worksheet B
Network Loop Calculation : Worksheet C
PE Card Calculations : Worksheet D
Universal Equipment Module Provisioning : Worksheet E
Conference Loop Requirements : Worksheet F
Unprotected Memory Calculations : Worksheet G
Protected Memory Calculations : Worksheet H
Program Store Calculations : Worksheet I
Equipment Summary : Worksheet J
Balancing Network Loops : Worksheet K
Load Balancing : Worksheet L
Card Distribution : Worksheet M
Multiple Appearance Groups Assignments : Worksheet N
Station Load Balancing : Worksheet 0
Card Assignment : Worksheet P
TN Assignment Record : Worksheet Q
System Assignment Plan : Worksheet R
Multiple Appearance Group Record : Worksheet S
‘-
5-2
5-4
5-6
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-13
5-16
5-19
5-21
5--23
5-24
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-30
5-32
5-35
5-36
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
.I..
5-2 Worksheets
Worksheet A
Growth forecast
One sheet for each customer, one sheet for the system
as a whole.
Customer:
OUTWATS
Fx
Private Line
Dial Dictation
Paging
RAN
AIOD
DTI
E&M 2W
E&M 4W
c o
System engineering 553-3001-151
.d
.-
-.
Date:
-
Worksheets 5-3
Worksheet A continued
Growth forecast
Line CCS/r
Total Trunk CCS/T
Intra CCSjT
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
c.
I
5-4 Worksheets
Worksheet B
One sheet for each customer for cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals. One for the
system cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals.
-year
Customer:
Address:
Line usage
M2xxx
M3xxx
SL-1
500
2500
TN
TN
TN
TN
TN
ccsfr
ccs/T
cc&s/r
ccs/T
ccs/T
=
=
=
=
=
ccs
ccs
ccs
ccs
ccs
TOTAL LINE LOAD
=
ccs
X
X
X
X
X
---
Trunk usage
TlWlk
Route
No of TNs
Accessing Route
CCS/r Per
Trunk Route
X
=
ccs
X
=
ccs
X
=
ccs
X
=
ccs
System engineering 553-3001-151
c.
,
Total CCS Load
Per Trunk Route
: .:
Worksheets 5-5
Worksheet B continued
TOTAL TRUNK LOAD
=
CCS
Console usage
No. of
Consoles
x 3occcs =
Total Console Load
Digital Receivers
Table
#ofDTR
Total DTR Load
ccs
Total Load ‘ccs
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
5-6 Worksheets
Work!&?et c
One sheet for each customer.
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Address:
Network loop calculation
Total load
(CC9
ccs /Loop
No. of loops
Round to next
highest figure
Cutover
2-year
=
5-year
---
Number of Network Loops Required at 2 Years
=
Number of Network Groups Required at 2 Years
(Use Table C- 1 Below)
=
System engineering 553-3001-151
Worksheets 5-7
Worksheet C continued
Table C-l
Network groups required at 2 years
No. of
Network
Groups
Maximum No.
of Voice Loops
No DGT Trunks
in CCSlLoop
560
500
Wiih DGT Trunks
in CCSlLoop
540
485
24
13440
12000
12960
11640
48
26880
24000
25920
23280
72
40320
36000
38880
34920
96
53760
48000
51840
46560
120
67200
60000
64800
58200
Note: The maximum CCS/loop for any SL-1 is 600 CCS/loop when
no Digitone Trunks are used or 580 CCS/loop when Digitone Trunks
are used.
..:- .:
.I-.
.
‘..:
.
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
5-8 Worksheets
Worksheet D
One for the complete system at cutover, 2-year, and 5-year intervals.
Y e a r :
Customer:
Address:
Table D-l
PE card calculations
No. of
L
ISDgl
C
2-YR
CUT
=
No. of
DTR
=
No. of 500 TN
4
=
No. of SL-1 TN
4
=
No. of Consoles
No. of
CO/FX/ Wats/Private Link Trunks
2
No. of 2-Wire E&M/DX/Pahuz Trunks
2
System engineering 553-3001-151
I
..
=
=
5YR
Worksheets 5-9
Worksheet D continued
:.:
_ (I. :. ./
e..-cd-.....
,.e_,-...
-.-=.’ ,*:;.-‘j‘i
Table D-l continued
PE card calculations
CUT
No. of LOOD Sienaline/DID Trunks
2
2-YR
I
5YR
I-
.
I
No. of Dictation Trunks
2
No. of Recorded Announcement Trunks
4
No. of AIOD Trunks
.
No. of 4-Wire E&M/DX Trunks
2
TOTAL CARDS
PE UEM calculations
Use the total cards required at 2 years to determine the number of PE UEMs to be provisioned at
cutover.
PE UEMs required
(Round to next highest number)
=
8.5
Number of PE UEMs required at cutover
. . ‘.‘>.,:_
,,_
_:,
System engineering
553-3007
-7 57
5-10 Worksheets
Table D-l continued
PE card calculations
CUT
No. of Dgtl LC =
Number of digital ports in service + number of
TCM consoles x 6
2-YR
5-YR
No. of Anlg LCs =
Number of analosr ports in service
16
No. of Anlg M/W LCs =
Number of analog norts with Message Waiting
feature in service
16
No. of XUT =
Total number of CO/DID/RAN/PAGE trunks
8
No. of XEMs =
Total number of E&M/PAGE/Dictation trunks
4
TOTAL CARDS
Notes: Do not configure more than one TCM console on one Dgtl LC
for higher reliability. Try to spread Dgtl LCs supporting consoles over
different XPE UEMs and different superloops for even higher
reliability. Use paging trunks on XUT or XEM depending on what
combination minimizes the total number of trunk cards required.
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
Worksheets 5-l 1
WorksheetE
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
D a t e :
Address:
UEM provisioning
(1) Single network group system
CPU UEM
1
PE UEM
(2) Multiple network group system
CPU UEM
Network UEM
PE UEM
System engineering
---
553-3001-l
51
C.
:
..:
:
.
.
5-l
2 Worksheets
Worksheet F
One sheet for the complete system.
D a t e :
Customer:
Address:
Conference loop requirements
Conference loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop requirements.
Conference Loop Required =
Tone and Digit loop requirements
Tone and Digit loops are provisioned according to the 2-year network loop
requirements.
Tone and Digit Loops Required =
Estimated real time usage calculation
.
E R T U = BLlneT /2100
150
= Percent Utilization of CPU Real Time
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
: -.
..
, _..
:..
Worksheets 513
Worksheet F continued
Where:
Total Line Load is the 2-year figure
T
= the average processing time for a call in seconds;
use 0.6 for a single network group system, or
0.24 for a multiple network group system
150
= the average holding time
2100 = the maximum useable real time of the CPU in seconds
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
5-14
Worksheets
Woiksheet
G
One sheet for the complete system.
Date:
Customer:
Items
Words
-
Total
Fixed Amount of
Storage Required
500+2500TN
SL-1 TN
Add-On Modules
Network Groups
Trunk Circuits
---
Consoles
Customer Groups
Trunk Routes
Network Loops
(Excluding
Conference)
RPE Loops
Total
(Include total from second worksheet)
Total words
(Include total words from second worksheet)
System engineering 553-3001-151
Worksheets 5-l 5
Woiksheet
G continued
Serial Data
Interface Cards
MF Senders
Conference Card
Digitone Receivers
Low priority Input
High priority Input
NO-Type Output
Buffers
SL- 1 Type Output
Buffer
Total
(Add to first page total)
Total words
(Add to first page total words)
System engineering 553-3001-151
c
5-16 Worksheets
Worksheet ‘C continued
Memory Card Code
OPC/NT k words (lk = 1024 Words)
Capacity
Unprotected Memory Cards Required
Memory Card Addresses Required
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
Worksheets 5-l 7
iVorksheet
H
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
Table H-l
Gxed Amount of
500+25OOTN
kid-On Modules
lhnk Circuits
Trunk Routes
Code Restricted
Trunk Routes
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
5-18 Worksheets
Worksheet H continued
Total
(Include total from third page)
Add 10%
Total words
(Include total words from third page)
Memory Card Code
Capacity
Protected Memory Cards Required
Memory Card Addresses Required
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
OPC/NT
k words (lk = 1024 Words)
Worksheets 5-l 9
Worksheet H continued
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Datei
Table H-l continued
Prnterted memnrv calcdatinnn
Total
Tone and Digit
Switch
Conference Card
History File
Total
(Add to first page total)
Add 10%
Total words
(Add to first page total words)
.
/
._
:..
: . . ..I ..I.. :,
; .
. _ . . . .. .,
.
.
,,
System engineering 553-3001-151
5-20 Worksheets
Worksheet I
One sheet for the complete system.
Date:
Customer:
Program store calculations
Storage in k
(lk = 1024 words)
Program Name
Basic
Overlay Area
Read Only Memory
Total
=
k
Total x 1024
=
words
System engineering 553-3001-151
Worksheets 521
Worksheet I continued
Memory Card Code
Capacity
QPCNr
k words (1 k = 1024 Words)
Program Store Cards Required
Memory Card Addresses Required
;_-.: . :
‘._..
:.’
:
“.’
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
:. -
: ..
5-22 Worksheets
Worksheet J
Equipment summary
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Table J-l
Equipment
Da&e:
summary
Equipment
summary
Quantity
Based on figure
Line and Trunk
Cards
Cutover
Digitone Receivers
2Year
Unprotected
Memory Cards
2Year
Protected Memory
Cards
2Year
Conference Loops
2Year
Tone and Digit
-Ps
2Year
Call Registers
2Year
High Priority Input
Buffers
Cutover
System engineering 553-3001-151
Worksheets $23
Worksheet J continued
One sheet for the complete system.
D a t e :
Customer:
Table J-1 continued
Equipment summarv
I
5
I
I
Central Processing
Network Groups
. .
. . . . .,:
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
: :
5-24 Worksheets
WorksheetK
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
-
Table K-l
Balancing network loops over network groups
Customer
Network
Group 0
Network
Group 1
System engineering 553-3001-151
C.
:
::
Network
Group 2
Network
Group 3
Network
Group 4
Worksheets 525
Work!dleet L
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
_
Load balancing
Total system load
ccs
Voice loops required
PE UEMs required
Average CCS per UEM
=Tatalsystemload=
PE UEMs required
ccs
Average CCS per Loop
= Tota1 svstem load CCS =
Voice loops required
ccs
Table L-l
Load balancing
;:.-‘,“-.::.:
: :‘; :. .:,::.;
System engineering 553-3001-151
5-26 Worksheets
Worksheet L continued
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
Table L-l
Load balancing
Loop number
UEMs assigned
System engineering 553-3001-151
CCS per loop
CCS per UEM
Worksheets 527
Worksheet M
One sheet for the complete system.
Date:
Customer:
Card distribution
Divide the total number of a card type by the total number of BE
to arrive at a
cards-peNEM figure:
UEMs
Table M-l
Card distribution
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
5-28 Worksheets
WorksheetN
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
Table N-l
Multiple Appearance Group (MAG) assignments
Loop number
Loop number
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ool-N
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
500-I-N
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
500-I-N
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-1 TN
5ooTN
MAG No.
SL-I TN
5ooTN
SL-1 Packs
500 P a c k s
SL-1 Packs
500 Packs
SL-1 Packs
500 Packs
SL-1 Packs
500 Packs
---
System engineering 553-3001-151
Worksheets 5-29
-Worksheet 0
One sheet for the complete system.
Customer:
Date:
-
Station load balancing
Total SL-1 TN to be assigned
Less number of SL-1 TN assigned to MAG
m
Equals number of SL-1 TN not in MAG
=
TOTAL
SL-1 TN not in MAG
Number of 500 TN not in
MAG assigned per UEM
TOTAL 500 TN to be assigned
Less number of 500 TN assigned to MAG
Equals number of 500 TN not in MAG
500 TN not in MAG
Number of 500 TN not in
MAG assigned per UEM
System engineering 553-3001-151
s.
5-30
Worksheets
Worksheet 0 continued
Total 2500 TN to be assigned
Less number of 2500 TN assigned to MAC
Equals number of 2500 TN not in MAG
2500 TN not in MAG
System engineering 553-3001-151
Number of 2500 TN not in
MAG assigned per UEM
Worksheets 531
-Worksheet P
Customer:
Date:
Table P-l
Card to UEM assignment
Loop number
UEM number
Table P-2
Card to UEM assignment
Loop number
UEM number
System engineering 553-3001-151
C.
..
.-
-.
5-32 Worksheets
Worksheet .P continued
Customer:
Date:
Table P-3
Card to OEM assignment
Loop number
UEM number
Table P-4
Card to UEM assignment
Total
packs
Loop number
UEM number
System engineering 553-3001-151
ccs
load
Worksheets
5-33
-Worksheet Q
One sheet for each PE UEM in the system.
Date:
DN = Directory Number
RTMB = Route Member Number
UEM number
Loop number
Group number
Table Q-l
TN assignment record
Pack pos
Pack type
1 Pack CeT 1 DN
In
I
1 RTMB
I
1 CUST
I
I
I
2
6
7
I
System engineering 553-3001-151
Y
5-34 Worksheets
Worksheet Q continued
DN = Directory Number
RTMB = Route Member Number
Date:
UEM number
Loop number
Table Q-1 continued
TN assignment record
Pack pas
4
5
6
System engineering 553-3001-151
C.
.:
Group number -
Worksheets 535
Worksheet Q continued
Table Q-l continued
TN assignment record
hop #-
U E M
#
Grp L.-
Pack pos
7
8
System engineering 553-3001-151
5-36 Worksheets
WorksheetR
SL-1 system assignment plan
Prepared by:
D a t e :
System:
Customer:
One sheet for each equipped voice loop.
Loop number
UEMs equipped
Trunks working
Trunks equipped
Consoles
Digitone receivers
2500 TN
500 TN
SL-1 TN
MAG assigned
Load capacity
Recommended assignment plan
System engineering 553-3001-151
Group number
Worksheets 537
‘WorksheetS
Multiple appearance group record
Prepared by:
D a t e :
System:
Customer:
Table S-l
Multiple appearance group record
MAG
LP.
EXT.
I
stat.
I
Set
I
System engineering 553-3001-151
2.
..A
6-1
Tables
6-1
Tables
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
Table
6-l : Trunk Traffic
6-2: Trunk Traffic
6-3: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-4 : Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-5: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-6: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-7: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-8: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-9: Digitone Receiver Requirements
6-l 0: TDS and CONF Loop Requirements
6-l 1: Digitone Receiver Provisioning
6-1
6-3
6-5
6-7
6-9
6-l 1
6-l 3
6-15
6-17
6-19
.6-20
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
-.
6-2 Tables
Table 6-1
Trunk traffic (Poisson 1% blocking)
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
ccs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
0.4
5.4
15.7
29.6
46.1
64
84
105
126
149
172
195
220
244
269
294
320
346
373
399
426
453
480
507
535
562
590
618
647
675
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
5
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
703
732
760
789
818
847
876
905
935
964
993
1023
1052
1082
1112
1142
1171
1201
1231
1261
1291
1322
1352
1382
1412
1443
1473
1504
1534
1565
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
1595
1626
1657
1687
1718
1749
1780
1811
1842
1873
1904
1935
1966
1997
2028
2059
2091
2122
2153
2184
2215
2247
2278
2310
2341
2373
2404
2436
2467
2499
3
Note:
;or trunl
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
T
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
2530
2563
2594
2625
2657
2689
2721
2752
2784
2816
2847
2879
2910
2942
2974
3006
3038
3070
3102
3135
3166
3198
3230
3262
3294
3326
3359
3391
3424
3456
__
121 y 3488
1 2 2 3520
123
3552
124
3594
125
3616
126
3648
127
3681
128
3713
129
3746
130
3778
131
3810
132
3843
133
3875
134
3907
135
3939
136
3972
137
4004
138
4037
139
4070
140
4102
141
4134
142
4167
143
4199
144
4231
145
4264
146
4297
147
4329
148
4362
149
4395
150
4427
ccs
Tables 6-3
Table 6-2
Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking)
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
ccs
TRKS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
4
7.9
20.9
36.7
55.8
76.0
96.8
119
142
166
191
216
241
267
293
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
744
773
803
832
862
892
922
952
982
1012
1042
1072
1103
1133
1164
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
1659
1690
1722
1752
1784
1816
1817
1878
1910
1941
1973
2004
2036
2067
2099
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
ccs
-
3581
3614
3647
3679
3712
3745
3777
3810
3843
3875
3810
2941
2974
4007
4039
-continueck
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
..
:
6-4 Tables
Table 6-2 continued
Trunk traffic (Poisson 2% blocking)
TRKS
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
CCS
320
347
374
401
429
458
486
514
542
571
562
627
656
685
715
TRKS CCS
46
1194
47
1125
48
1255
49
1286
50
1317
51
1348
52
1374
53
1352
54
1441
55
1472
56
1503
57
1534
58
1565
59
1596
60
1627
Note: For trunk
System engineering 553-3001-151
TRKS CCS
76
2130
77
2162
78
2194
79
2226
80
2258
81
2290
82
2322
83
2354
84
2386
85
2418
86
2450
87
2482
88
2514
89
3546
90
2578
traffic greater than
TRKS
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
4533 ccs,
CCS
TRKS CCS
3094
136
4072
3126
137
4105
3158
138
4138
3190
139
4171
3223
140
4204
3255
141
4237
3288
142
4209
3321
143
4302
3353
144
4335
3386
145
4368
3418
146
4401
3451
147
4434
3483
148
4467’.
3516
149
4500
3548
150
4533
allow 30.2 ccs/trunk.
Tables 6-5
Table 6-3
Digitone receiver requirements
Nok: Refer to Section 3-15 for the Model assumptions for
this table.
System engineering 553-3001-151
.u
I
6-6 Tables
Table 6-4
Digitone receiver requirements
Number of
digitone
receivers
Maximum
number of
digitone line!
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
21
52
90
134
183
235
293
353
416
483
553
623
693
770
Digitone
Number of
receiver load digitone
(CCS)
receivers
2
7
15
27
40
55
71
88
107
126
145
166
187
208
1231
Note: Refer to Section 3
System engineering 553-3001-151
-.
..::
Maximum
Digitone
number of
receiver load
digitohe lines (C’CS)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
843
920
996
1076
1153
1233
1316
13%
1480
1563
1650
1733
1816
1903
5 for the Mod
assumptions for this table.
253
276
299
323
346
370
395
419
444
469
495
520
545
571
.-
.-__
Tables
6-7
Table 6-5
Digitone receiver requirements
13
14
15
16
548
618
689
762
203
28
229
29
255
30
282
Note: Refer to Section 3-15 for the
this table.
1697
1781
1864
628
659
690
Model assumptions for
System engineering 553-3001-151
6-8 Tables
Table 6-6
Digitone receiver requirements
Number of
digitone
receivers
Maximum Digitone
Number of
number of receiver
digitone
digitone
load (CCS) receivers
lines
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
4
18
41
72
109
148
193
240
291
340
391
448
505
562
624
Maximum Digitone
number of receiver
digitone
‘load (CCS:
lines
2
17
683
253
7
18
745
276
15
19
808
299
872
323
27
20
935
346
40
21
1000
370
55
22
23
1067
395
71
24
1132
419
88
107
25
1200
444
26
1267
469
126
27
1337
495
145
28
1405
520
166
187
29
1472
545
1543
571
208
30
231
Note: Refer to Section 3-15 for the Model assumptions for
this table.
.-‘--‘--.
. ._._ .
_.,.._
^.-..._
-W.. . ::
.;_.. ~
,I
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
.:
:
I
:
Tables 6-9
Table6-7
Digitone
receiver load capacity in CCS
Average holding time in
seconds
Number of digitone
receivers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
0
106
131
157
185
212
241
270
300
339
361
391
422
454
101
125
150
176
203
231
259
288
317
346
377
409
438
91
120
144
170
196
223
250
278
397
335
365
396
425
94
116
140
165
190
216
243
271
298
327
356
386
414
91
113
136
161
185
211
237
264
292
310
348
378
405
89
111
133
157
182
207
233
259
286
313
342
371
398
2
9
19
33
49
68
88
109
131
154
178
203
229
255
282
319
336
364
393
0
2
8
19
33
49
67
8 6
107
129
152
176
200
225
251
278
306
331
359
388
0
0
2
8
18
32
48
66
65
106
127
150
173
198
223
248
274
392
327
355
383
2
8
18
32
47
65
84
104
126
148
171
196
220
245
271
298
324
351
379
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
6-10 Tables
Table 6-7 continued
Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS
Average holding time in
seconds
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13 .
14
15
Number Of digitone
receivers
0
487
517
550
583
615
647
680
714
746
779
813
847
882
913
947
981
1016
1051
1083
1117
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
System engineering 553-3001-151
C.
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Tables 6-11
Table 6-8
Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS
Average holding time in
seconds
16 1 17 1
18 (
19 (
25
D
Number Of digitone
receivers
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
192
190
189
18
30
45
62
80
100
121
142
165
188
211
236
260
286
312
337
364
2
4B
1’7
2!3
44
6( 3
71 3
97
111 3
131 3
16( 3
18: 3
20( 5
23( 3
251
27! a
30: 5
32! a
35’ 5
L
System engineering 553-3001-151
-.
6-12 Tables
Table 6-8 continued
Digitone receiver load capacity in CCS
Average holding time in
seconds
19
18
17
16
20
21
0
10
0
0
’
402
431
458
486
514
544
573
603
631
660
690
720
751
782
813
341
872
902
934
965
3919
42 7
4544
4 8 :2
5113
53! 9
56! 9
5918
62i5
6 5 :5
6 8 :5
7115
7415
77t 5
80 7
83!5
8615
89t 5
92 7
95:1
396
424
451
478
506
535
565
594
622
651
680
710
740
771
801
829
859
890
921
952
393
421
448
475
503
532
561
590
618
646
676
705
735
766
7%
824
854
884
914
945
39
41’
44
47:
50
52’
55:
58
614
64:
67:
70
73
76
79:
82i
84!
87!
90!
94
-0
I
22
23
24
25
0
0
0
0
388 386
416 414
442 440
470 467
497 495
526 523
555 552
584 581
611 608
639 636
668 665
698 694
727 724
757 754
788 784
818 814
845 841
875 871
905 901
936 931
936
385
412
438
465
492
521
549
578
605
633
662
691
721
750
780
810
837
867
897
927
383
410
436
463
490
518
547
576
602
631
659
688
718
747
777
807
834
863
893
923
381
409
434
461
488
516
545
573
600
628
656
686
715
744
774
804
831
860
890
920
Number of digitone
receivers
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
System engineering 553-3001-151
Tables 6-13
Table 6-9
Digitone receiver requirements
(Poisson 0.1% blocking)
Number of digitone
Number of digitone
System engineering 553-3001-151
..
:I
6-14 Tables
Table 6-10
Network group capacities
Number of
network
groups
Maximum number No figitonetrunks
of
744 I 560 I 500
voice loops
CCS per loop
Digitone trunks
720/5401485
CCS per loop 1
1
24
17850 / 13440 / 12000
17280 / 12960 / 11640
2
48
35700 / 26880 / 24000
34560 I25920 / 23280
3
72
53550 I40320 I36000
51840 138880 / 34920
4
96
71400 / 53760 / 48000
69120/51840/46560
5
120
89250 I67200 I 60000
86400 / 64800 / 58200
Note: This table is based on an 85% utilization level. The 17850 CCS limit used above is
based on CCS/Loop figures of 744 CCS/Loop with no Digitone trunks and 720 CCS/Loop
with Digitone trunks. This constitutes an 85% utilization level of the maximum CCS/Loop
of the current system which is 875 CCS/Loop with no Digitone trunks and 848 CCS/Loop
with Digitone trunks and with the use of a Superloop Network Card.
System engineering 553-3001-151
Tables 6-15
Table 6-10
TDS and CONF loop requirements
..: .._.*: _..-I. _;:
!,;z‘+ .f
,.., ;; -.’
..’ .,:.,
Network loops
required at 2 years
Tone and Digit
Switch
loops required
Conference loops
required
1-12
1
1
13-24
2
2
25-36
3
3
37-48
4
4
49-60
5
5
61-72
6
6
73-84
7
7
85-96
8
8
97- 108
9
9
m-120
10
10
System engineering 553-3001-l 51
6-16 Tables
Table 6-l 1
Digitone receiver provisioning
(assumes 1 l-second holding time)
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
70-89
go-111
11/L-121)
11,l 1’12
134-157
158-182
183-207
208-233
234-259
260-286
287-3 13
314-342
343-371
3
r)rmIL-3YU
Plnn
399-427
428-456
457487
488-515
516-545
546-576
577-607
608-638
639-667
668-698
699-729
I
I
I
I
!
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
I
I
I
I
I
-continued-
I
System engineering 553-3001-151
920-9s 1
952-984
985-1017
1018-1050
1051-1084
1085-1118
1
1119-1153
1154-1188
1189-1223
1; !24-1258
1259-1293
1294-1329
1330-1365
1366-1400
14101-1435
1436-1470
1471-1505
1506-1540 1
1541-1575
1576-1610
1611-1645
1646-1680
1681-1715
1716-1750
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
5
56
57
58
59
60
61
5
1
Tables 6-17
Table 6-11 continued
Digitone receiver provisioning
(assumes 11-second holding time)
I
I
DTR CCS
1751-1785
1786-1820
1821-1855
1856-1890
1891-1925
1926- 1960
1961-1995
DTR ports
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
1996-2030
69
2171-2205
74
2766-2800
2801-2835
2X36-2870
91
92
93
1
DTR CCS
2871-2905 2906-2940
294 l-2975
2976-3010
3011-3045
3046-3080
3081-3115
DTR ports
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
I
3116-3465
101
I
I
1
System engineering 553-3001-151
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
System
engineering
Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29,199O
Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1
Generic Xl 1
Memory calculations
Standard, release 15
SL-1
Generic Xl 1
Memory calculations
Publication number: 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Product release: Xl 1 release 15
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: December 20,1989
0 1984 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
C.
ii
Revision history
December 1989
Standard, release 1.0. This Publication is reissued as the Standard version
for Relaes 15. Changes are marked with R15.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
c
...
Ill
Contents
General
Memory description
3
Memory Generic 711 (S and MS)
Memory Generics 811 and 911 (N and XN)
Memory Generics 1011 (ST)
Memory Generics 1111,1211,
and 1311 (NT, XT, and RT)
Templates
5
5
5
5
6
Memory calculations
9
Package dependencies
Program store requirements
Unprotected data storage requirements
Protected data storage requirements
..-_ 1 0
11
85
115
List of terms
163
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
:.
:
iv Contents
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
1
General
This Appendix provides memory information relating to the SL-1 Integrated
Services Network (EN).
Engineering and assigning of equipment (553-2201-151) provides
provisioning information and the associated data worksheets for a complete
system. For Generic Xl 1, Engineering and assigning of equipment (5532201-151) directs the user to this Appendix for specific memory c&.&ion
information. Apply this information in worksheets G, H, I of that document
for the machine types in Table 1.
Use these numbers to identify machine types in the following tables.
Note : The memory calculations for the RT (13 11) are the same as-for
NT(llll).
Table 1
Machine type designators
.
!
(
,:-,.
.
.,
:“‘.:.
^
.,../
Machine
Code
type
number
System
,option
MS/S
=
711
N
=
811
XN
=
911
ST
=
1011
21
NT
=
1111
51161
XT
=
1211
71
RT
E
1311
Memory
calculations
553-2201-151
Appendix
1
2 General
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
.:
.- -.
3
Memory description
Software and office data are stored in a read/write Random Access Memory
(RAM). The RAM is organized into modules of 128K, 192K, 256K, 512K
or 768K by 16bit words, or 24-bit words for NT, RT, and XT machines in
Release 12 and later. Memory size depends on the features programmed
into the machine and the number and type of stations served. The memory
module pack(s) are mounted in the CE shelf. The following table shows the
..
valid hardware configuration for the various SL-1 systems.
Release 15 introduces other System Options, whose memory calculations
coincide with the following current machine types:
- System option 21 has the same.memory capacity as the 1011 machine
--(ST) type
- System options 51, and 61 have the same memory capacity as the 1111
machine (NT) type
- System option 71 has the same memory capacity as the 1211 machine
(XT) type
Memory calculations 553-2201-I 51 Appendix 1
4 Memory description
Table 2
QPC memory module packs per systemMemory
size
MS/S
128K
1 - 478
l-479
1 - 479
192K
1 - 423
l-426
1 - 426
256K
2 - 478
2-479
2-479
N
XN
NT/FIT
XT
ST
OR
1 - 674
l-426
1 - 478
+
+
1 - 479
l- 479
384K
2-426
2-426
512K
1 - 672
1 - 672
320K
576K
3-426
768K
4 - 426
1536K
1 - 673
1 - 583
1 - 583
1 - 583
2 - 583
2304K
3 - 583
Note : 1K = 1024 words. Storage capacity of the:
- QpC423 memory circuit pack is 192 x 1024 or 196,608 words
- QPC426 memory circuit pack is 192 x 1024 or 196,608 words
- QPC478 memory circuit pack is 128 x 1024 or 131,072 words
- QpC479 memory circuit pack is 128 x 1024 or 13 1,072 words
- QPC583 memory circuit pack is 768 x 1024 or 786,432 words,
with 25bit words for NT and XT machines
- QPC672 memory circuit pack is 512 x 1024 or 524,288 words
- QPC673 memory circuit pack is 512 x 1024 or 524,288 words
- QPC674 memory circuit pack is 256 x 1024 or 262,144 words
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..s
I
Memory description 5
Memory Generic 711 (S and MS)
The memory requirements for a Generic 7 11 system consists of a Read
Only Memory (ROM) circuit pack and RAM circuit pack(s). The memory
system is divided into pages.
The unprotected and protected data stores are usually assigned to pages 0
and 1.
The bottom 8K words of page 2 are replaced with the QPC486 ROM pack.
The remaining top words of page 2 are assigned to program store.
Page 3 (Input/Output memory) is not assigned to a QPC478 module and
page 4 is not used.
Additional pages of program store are provided as required, by RAM pack
addition or rearrangement.
Configuration Overlay LD 17 is used to assign the RAM type or‘
combination of types for data and program store to a system (see 553-3001400).
Memory Generics 811 and 911 (N and XN)
Software and office data for Generics 8 11 and 9 11 are stored in a RAM (as
for Generic 7 11) except that QPC426 and/or QPC479 modules (or a
QPC672) are used.
The ROM for Generic 8 11 is contained in a QPC486 pack while the ROM
for Generic 9 11 is part of the QPC443 Control and Timing pack.
Memory Generics 1011 (ST)
Software and office data for Generic 1011 system are stored in a RAM (as
for Generic 7 11) except that QPC673 (with error correction) is used.
The ROM for Generic 1011 is contained in QPC717 ROM pack which
connects to the QPC687 CPU pack.
Memory Generics 1111,1211, and 1311 (NT, XT, and RT)
Software and office data for Generic 1111,1211, and 13 11 systems are
stored in a RAM (as for Generic 711) except that QPC583 modules, with
24-bit addressing, are used.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
6 Memory description
The ROM for Generic 1111; 1211, and 13 11 is contained in a QPC579 CPU
Function Unit.
Templates
A template is a map of the pattern of keys/features assigned to a telephone,
The protected data structure for the SL- 1 NE-500/2500 and digital
telephones is based on the concept of shared templates. For example, if two
or more telephones have identical key/feature layouts, then the data
regarding this layout is contained in a single template, thereby reducing the
storage required for data description.
The operation of the template mechanism is internal and is transparent to
the user. Templates are created automatically either by service change
programs or by the sysload program at system startup. The data print
program (Overlay 20) of 553-3001-400 has been extended to assist in
optimizing template usage. The program can print:
- individual templates or all templates in the system.
- the number of telephones using a particular template.
- the Terminal Numbers (TNs) using a template.
- the total number of templates defined and the number of templates used
by at least one telephone.
IVole : A large number of telephones clustered around a relative small
number of templates indicates efficient use of templates.
When data is entered into the system, use the following guidelines to
maximize the protected memory savings provided by the template
mechanisms.
(a) If two or more telephones have the same functions defined, they should,
if possible, have the same key/feature layout assigned. This ensures
that all such telephones and add-on modules share the same template.
(b) For telephones that have the same functions defined but their auto-dial
and/or call-forward features have different number sizes, it is less
expensive (in terms of memory) to make the sizes of the numbers equal
rather than assign the telephones to different templates. The rule to be
used is that a new template requires at least 12 words of protected data
for SL-1 telephone sets and four words for 500/2500 telephones,
whereas four extra digits use only 1 word.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
c.
..-_
Memory description 7
(c) Use Overlay 20 of 553-300140 to m&ntain a current list of all
templates defined in the system. Consult this list whenever service
change of telephones is to be performed.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
8 Memory description
---
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
9
Memory calculations
The memory requirement for Xl 1 Generic must be calculated individually
using the following tables:
Table
Storage
3
Software Program
4
Unprotected Data
5
Protected Data
Record the memory requirements on worksheets G, H and I and add thisdata to the other completed main practice worksheets to compile the total
provisioning data for the SL- 1 system.
Note: The memory requirement figures shown in the tables are based
on the following software releases:
711
811
911
1011
1111/1211
1311
_: : :.::. :: !
, .:. . - , ., ,
,,
.,
:
Releases
Releases
Releases
Releases
Releases
Releases
4 through 13
4 through 14
4 through 14
9 through 15
8 through 15
12 through 15
Note 1:711,8 11 and 911 Release 6 information is included in Release
7.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
- ..
10 Memory calculations
Note 2:The memory calculations for the RT (1311) machine are the
same as for the NT (1111) machine type.
The absence of Generic release indicator R4, R5, or R7 in the Version
column indicates the storage words for the associated program applies to all
Generic releases.
Package dependencies
Each Generic contains a basic feature group (always provided) to which
optional features can be added. For a complete list of the packages
available and their related package dependencies, refer to Equipment
identification and ordering (U.S.) (553-2201-153).
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
.u
.:
.‘.
Memory calculations 11
Table 3
Software program storage requirements
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Resident (Basic)
:
!
:L.-,T
i
,..,
-.. : .:.
,‘,,.:_j;
_,-. .:
,.;
./
Version
Storage in Ks
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RIO
Sll/lOll R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
111 l/121 1 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
73.88
77.04 85.59
87.61
90.24
96.70
112.74
122.62
77.15
81.96
89.67
91.10
95.31
Comments
_.
102.02
116.75
126.90
136.36
75.76
81.65
89.30
90.62
92.51
73.53
111.03
121.59
136.06
158.77
68.46
70.02
73.53
84.23
87.84
94.62
122.20
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
12 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Read/Write Firmware
(continued)
Storage in KS
Version
711 R4-10
711 R12-13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9-10
811/1011 R12-15
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-10
911 R12-14
111 l/121 1 R8-10
1111/1211 R12-15
0.74
0.36
0.34
0.35
0.35
0.39
0.55
0.40
0.77
0.77
Note 1
0.96
Note 1
Comments
-
(Note 1)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
:.:
:
x:
.: ..
Memory calculations I 3
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
UK = 1024 words)
Overlay Area
Version
Storage in KS
10.58
15.74‘
16.46
16.92
16.96
17.12
18.07
10.75
11.00
15.58
16.46
16.94
17.42
17.43
18.07
10.75
20.51
11.00
15.58
16.46
16.94
17.42
17.43
18.07
25.41
20.51
16.46
17.42
26.14
27.10
10.60
30.76
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
Sll/lOll R14-15
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14-15
Comments
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
14 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
PrOgWll
(1K = 1024 words)
OF-IF
CUST
AIOD
Storage in KS
Version
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
1011 R15
1111/1211
9.19
6.38
711 R4-12
711 R13
811 R4-8
811/1011 R9-12
81 l/101 1 R13-15
911 R4-5,8-12
911 R7
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.88
0.91
0.88
0.88
0.91
0.87
0.86
0.90
0.65
0.66
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-..
I
3
All Releases
17.67
12.58
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
1011 R15
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
..
0
Comments
0
All Releases
.
Memory calculations 15
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
CDR
_..
:,
‘...
.:‘;;.:;:: :;::
I. .,, ..s. ,.,!
-I
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 RS
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13-14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
111 l/121 1 R12
111 l/121 1 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
1.77
1.80 1.94
1.99
2.05
2.20
2.38
2.47
1.77
1.79
1.94
1.98
2.05
Comments
.
2.20
2.38
2.47
1.74
1.77
1.91
1.95
2.02
2.17
2.35
2.45
2.48
1.50
1.55
1.67
1.80
1.75
1.76
- continued -
_’
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
16 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
CDR TTY
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 RS
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4,5
811 R7
811 R8
811 R9
811 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4,5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
0.56
0.57
0.59
0.71
0.72
0.99
1.07
1.16
0.56
0.59
0.71
0.72
0.99
1.07
1.16
0.56
0.59
0.70
0.72
0.98
1.06
1.14
0.54
0.55
0.76
0.82
0.83
Comments
-
Memory calculations 17
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
CDR CLNK
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
Sll/lOll R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4
0.56_
0.59
0.66
0.69
0.81
0.56
0.59
0.59
0.66
0.69
0.81
0.89
0.56
911 R5
911 R7-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 1 R14-15
0.57
0.59
0.66
0.70
0.82
0.90
0.46
0.51
0.53
0.58
Comments
0.64
- continued -
::.
:.
1....
/:_
.
.
:.;
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
18 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Version
PrOgEUU
Storage iu KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
RAN
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7-8
711 R9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 Rll
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R14
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
1.34
1.34
1.36
1.41
1.49
1.55
1.33
1.34
1.36
1.40
1.49
1.55
1.54
1.31
1.36
1.34
1.38
1.46
1.47
1.53
1.60
1.03
1.07
1.12
1.13
1.11
1.15
-
Memory calculations 19
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
TAD
DNDI
requirements
(continued)
Storage in KS
Version
711 R4-5
0.71
711 R7-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9-12
81 l/1011 R13-15
911R4-5
911 R7-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.72 0.76
0.71
0.72
0.72
0.76
0.72
0.73
0.77
0.54
0.56
711 R4-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
81 l/101 1 R12
811/1011 R13
81 l/101 1 R14
911 R4-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 RS-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
0.39
0.40
0.42
0.40
0.39
0.39
0.40
0.42
0.40
0.42
0.38
0.39
0.41
0.39
0.41
0.43
0.29
0.30
0.28
0.30
0.30
Comments
..
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
20 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
EES
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7-8
81 l/101 1 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO
Sll/lOll R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12-13
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Comments
0.60
0.79
-
0.76
0.75
0.79
0.81
0.83
0.87
0.60
0.79
0.76
0.81
0.83
0.85
0.89
0.91
0.60
0.78
0.75
0.80
0.82
0.84
0.88
0.90
1.00
0.54
0.58
0.59
0.61
0.63
0.69
0
All Releases.
M e m o r y calculations
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
requirements
Version
21
(continued)
Storage in KS
711 R4-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-8
81 l/1011 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO
81 l/1011 R12811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
1.54
1.56
1.59
1.65
1.53
1.53
1.55
1.58
1.64
1.66
1.52
1.52
1.51
1.53
1.57
1.62
1.64
1.74
1.17
1.19
1.21
1.19
1.21
1.26
Comments
..
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
:
:
22 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
UK = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-12
711 R13
811 R4-8
81 l/101 1 R9-12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-12
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R15
0.20
0.22
0.20
0.20
0.22
0.19
0.22
0.16
0.17
0.18
Comments
_
- continued -
. ., .
-. . . ..._ ..,
. ..,. .?
i;; . : . . . 1
,:., .I :i’
,
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
C.
1
Memory calculations 23
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
BRTE
_ .,_
‘-.--_
.,. .’.._.
,y,;’ : .., :
Version
Storage in Ks
Comments
4.95
5.48 5.61
5.68
5.74
5.86
6.81
7.00
4.95
5.47
5.61
5.68
5.74
5.86
6.81
7.00
7.19
4.87
5.39
5.52
5.59
5.65
5.77
6.71
6.93
7.12
7.86
6.34
4.46
4.55
5.30
5.01
5.15
5.63
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
81 l/l01 1 R13
81 l/101 1 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
..
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151
Appendix 1
24 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Storage in KS
Version
Program
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
RPE
711 R4-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R4-8
811/1011 R9
Sll/lOll RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-156
0.99
1.00
1.02
1.00
1.00
1.01
1.03
1.02
0.98
1.00
1.01
0.77
0.78
0.74
DNDG
711 R4-12
711 R13
811 R4-8
811/1011 R9-12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.47
0.49
0.47
0.47
0.49
0.46
0.36
0.49
0.36
0.35
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
-
Memory calculations 25
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
MSB
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
0.08
0.10‘
0.13
0.08
0.10
0.10
0.13
0.19
0.08
0.09
0.10
0.13
0.19
0.21
0.07
0.09
0.13
0.15
Comments
.
---
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
26 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
progr~
(1K = 1024 words)
ss25
Version
Storage in KS
711 R8
711 R9-10
711 R12
711 R13
811 R8
811/1011 R9-10
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
81 l/1011 R14
911 R4-5,8-10
911 R7
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 RS-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
0.61
0.62
0.64
0.67
0.61
0.62
0.64
0.67
0.72
0.61
0.60
0.63
0.66
0.71
0.96
0.49
0.50
0.49
0.53
0.71
Comments
-
r ; ::.::.I’-::.:
: .::.
._
.,.
4 ._’
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
Memory calculations 27
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
DDSP
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12-13
811 R4
811 RS
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
111 l/121 1 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
1.81
1.82 2.10
2.11
2.47
2.98
3.37
1.81
1.82
2.10
2.11
2.47
2.98
3.36
3.67
3.98
1.79
1.79
2.07
2.08
2.43
2.93
3.32
3.63
3.94
4.63
1.60
1.87
2.27
2.58
2.66
2.88
3.35
Comments
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Y
28 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
UK = 1024 words)
ODAS
Version
Storage in KS
711,811/1011,911
711,811/1011,911 R9
711,811/1011,911
RlO-12
711,811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-15
- continued -
Memory calculations
s.
553-2201-151 Appendix 1
1.12
1.22
1.21
1.22
1.22
1.20
0.72
0.88
0.96
0.94
0.88
Comments
_
Memory calculations 29
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
Version
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
DI
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
Sll/lOll R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
81 l/101 1 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8-9
911 RlO
911 R12-13
911 R14
0.58
0.61‘
0.63
0.65
0.68
0.67
0.58
0.61
0.63
0.63
0.65
0.67
0.70
0.57
0.59
0.62
0.62
0.67
0.69
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
0.74
0.46
0.47
0.50
0.49
0.50
0.54
_.
---
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
30 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Version
hOgGUll
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
DISA
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8-10
711 R12-13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-10
811/1011 R12-13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-8
911 R9-10
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-10
111 l/121 1 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14-15
0.28
0.29
0.30
0.32
0.28
0.29
0.30
0.30
0.32
0.34
0.27
0.28
0.29
0.30
0.34
0.32
0.34
0.35
0.22
0.26
0.23
0.25
-
- continued -
. c.:-:;,
. .
‘.,.. .1’.. :.
1: :::..7:.1
.,
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.c.
Memory calculations
31
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
CHG
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9-12
911 R13
911 R14
111 l/121 1 R8-10
1111/1211 R12
0.24
0.29 .
0.34
0.35
0.37
0.24
0.29
0.34
0.35
0.37
0.38
0.24
0.28
0.33
0.34
0.37
0.38
0.25
0.26
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14-15
0.27
0.28
Comments
.
._
- continued -
.A’,: .
:. -.. .’ .:.: :
i- .,>: ;., : 1 , [ :
,:. :.;
j
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 A p p e n d i x 1
c.
.‘...
:
32 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
Version
(1K = 1024 words)
CAB
3AUT
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5-8
811/1011 R9
8 1 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5-7
911 R8-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
lOllR15
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
1.12
1.14
1.24
1.11
1.12
1.12
1.14
1.24
1.26
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.23
1.25
1.28
0.84
0.85
0.88
0.90
0.91
711 R4-12
711 R13
811 R4-8
811 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.30
0.31
0.30
0.30
0.30
0.31
0.29
0.30
0.31
0.22
0.21
Comments
1.11
-
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
L.
.-
-.
Memory calculations 33
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
prOgMtl
Version
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
CASM
711 R4-5
711 R7-10 711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
Sll/lOll R9-10
811/1011 R12Sll/lOll R13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R4-5
911 R7-10
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
0.14
0.15
0.16
0.19
0.14
0.15
0.15
0.17
0.19
0.22
0.13
0.15
0.17
0.19
0.22
0.23
0.11
0.13
0.14
0.16
0.17
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
34 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
2ASR
Storage in KS
Version
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
Sll/lOll R9
811/1011 RlO
81 l/101 1 R12
811/1011 R13
81 l/101 1 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
6.05
6.08
6.53
6.54
6.60
6.64
6.81
6.92
6.06
6.12
6.57
6.59
6.65
6.69
6.86
6.97
7.49
5.97
6.02
6.52
6.53
6.60
6.64
6.80
6.92
7.44
7.85
5.14
5.19
5.22
5.34
4.95
5.33
5.56
Comments
-
Memory calculations 35
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
BQE
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 Rll
711R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
81 l/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
2.05
2.15.
2.27
2.29
2.33
2.42
2.46
2.47
2.55
2.06
2.16
2.27
2.29
2.33
2.43
2.56
2.47
2.52
2.03
2.12
2.24
2.25
2.29
2.39
2.53
2.43
2.59
2.70
1.76
1.79
1.86
1.89
1.83
1.87
1.93
Comments
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
36 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
VTRF
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-13
811 R4-8
81 l/101 1 R9-15
911 R4-8
911 R9-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.54
0.54
0.54
0.52
0.53
0.44
0.45
0.45
0.38
ZMAC
711 R4-5
711 R7-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9-12
81 l/101 1 R13-15
911 R4-5
911 R7-12
911 R13
911 R14-15
1111/1211 R8-15
0.82
0.83
1.00
0.82
0.83
0.83
1.00
0.81
0.83
0.97
1.00
0.70
MCDR
711 R4-12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5-8
81 l/101 1 R9-13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4
911 R5-13
911 R14-15
111 l/121 1 R8-13
1111/1211 R14-15
1.20
1.31
1.20
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
1.31
1.19
1.29
Comments
Note 5
Note 5
Note 5
Note 5
0.91
Memory calculations 37
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
NCOS
Version
Storage in KS
711,811,911,1011
711,811,911,1011 R13
811,911,1011 R14-15
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
- continued -
Comments
0.10
0.08‘
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.06
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Y
38 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
ZPRK
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
Sll/lOll RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
3.41
3.51
3.53
3.54
3.58
3.76
3.98
3.41
3.51
3.53
3.53
3.58
3.76
3.98
4.12
3.35
3.36
3.45
3.47
3.52
3.70
3.95
4.09
4.23
2.60
2.62
2.76
2.80
2.90
2.97
Comments
-
.
Memory calculations
39
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
ssc
IMS (UST, UMG)
Version
Storage in KS
811,911,1011 R14-15
1111/1211 R8-15
711 R4
711 RS
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
Sll/lOll R14-15
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
0.10
0.10‘
0.08
7.47
7.49
7.59
7.63
7.70
2.80
2.83
3.00
7.47
7.49
7.59
7.63
7.70
2.80
2.83
3.00
3.02
7.36
7.38
7.47
7.51
7.58
2.75
2.79
2.97
911 R14
2.98
711,811,911,1011
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
R8
R9
RlO
R12
R13
R14-15
Comments
.
5.97
6.03
2.12
2.14
2.16
2.17
- continued Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
40 Memory calculations
Table 3 ”
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
ROA
Storage in Ks
Version
711
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-7
911 R8
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-14
1111/1211 R15
0.36
0.36
0.38
0.40
0.38
0.38
0.38
0.40
0.42
0.36
0.10
0.27
0.10
0.11
0.43
0.08
0.08
0.31
Comments
.
- continued -
..:
:,
. .‘..-‘.L.., _
3
.‘.‘-“‘:
,: : J*
: :.’
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 41
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)’
prOgMIU
Version
Storage in KS
Comments
(lK = 1024 words)
IWG
711 R4
711 R5-7
711 RS-10
711 R12-13
811 R4
811 R5-7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-10
811/1011 R12-13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R4
911 R5-7
911 R8-10
2.03
2.30
2.32
2.63
2.03
2.30
2.32
2.32
2.63
2.68
1.99
2.26
2.27
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-10
1111/1211 R12
2.65
2.59
2.64
2.69
1.83
2.09
1111/1211
1111/1211
1.97
2.01
R13
R14-15
- continued -
.6
.--
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
%.
:
42 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
MCBQ
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-8
911 R9
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
111/1211 R15
1N S C
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
Comments
2.53
2.56
2.66
2.67
2.68
2.76
2.54
2.57
2.68
2.67
2.69
2.70
2.78
2.81
2.50
2.52
2.63
2.64
2.65
2.74
2.78
2.86
2.07
2.08
2.09
1.95
1.98
2.01
0
All Releases
- continued -
L
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
2.
:
-.
Memory calculations 43
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
1 BACD
I
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
81 l/101 1 R9
811/1011 RlO
81 l/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 Ri3
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
!
i
Version
:y_:.- ..,. :-,<:
.,;--;:.:. ;
Comments
8.98
9.01‘
10.68
10.91
11.64
12.79
15.02
15.66
8.99
9.01
10.86
10.92
11.67
12.83
15.05
15.69
16.13
8.85
8.87
10.69
10.75
11.84
12.97
15.17
15.90
16.35
17.63
8.50
9.35
10.24
11.97
11.36
11.68
12.78
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
.
.
::
44 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
711
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-7
811 R8
81 l/101 1 R9-10
ACDB
81 l/101 1 R12
811/1011 R13-14
911
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-10
111 l/121 1 R12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
0.05
0.09
0.12
0.05
0.04
0.05
Comments
-
0.09
0.12
0.05
0.09
0.12
0.13
0.04
0.09
0.08
0.09
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
,
Memory calculations 45
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
r
PrOgKUU
Version
Storage in KS
(1K = 1024 words)
ACDC
LMAN
Comments
13.54
13.49 .
14.16
14.19
14.75
15.77
16.97
17.99
13.54
13.49
14.16
14.19
14.75
15.77
16.97
17.99
17.98
13.39
13.34
14.01
14.04
14.60
15.61
16.62
17.83
20.87
11.25
11.67
12.46
13.26
12.77
14.80
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
81 l/101 1 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
111 l/121 1 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
0
..
.-,
All Releases
- continued Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
46 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
MUS
ACDA
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5-7
811/1011 R8-10
Sll/lOll R12
Sll/lOll R13-14
911 R4-5
911 R7-9
911 RlO
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.28
1.29
1.03
1.04
1.05
1.06
1.29
1.28
1.01
1.02
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1.03
1.26
1.27
1.39
1.25
0.81
0.99
0.91
0.97
R8-9
RlO
R12
R13-14
R15
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151
..
Appendix 1
0
Comments
.
All Releases
.I.:-._
.:I
> ::.
:.,.: -,I
i,.-I..
., .L’
::
Memory calculations 47
Table3
Software program storage requirements (continuedj
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
MWC
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7-8
711 R9
711 RlO
1.19
1.24
1.26
1.29
1.38
1.42
1.19
1.24
1.26
1.29
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7-8
811/1011
811/1011
811/1011
811/1011
811/1011
Comments
R9
RlO
R12
R13
R14
1.38
1.42
1.43
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
..
1.16
1.20
1.21
1.23
1.26
1.35
1.40
1.41
2.80
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
111 l/1211 R13-14
1111/1211R15
0.92
0.93
0.96
1.02
1.01
2.03
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
48 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
AAB
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7-13
811 R4-5
811/1011 R7-14
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9-13
1111/1211 R14-15
0.07
0.11
0.07
0.11
0.07
0.11
0.12
0.08
0.09
0.08
Comments
_
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
I
C.
Memory calculations 49
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
GRP
requirements
Version
(continued)
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8-9
711 RlO
711 Rll
711R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 RS
811 R7
811/1011 R8-9
811/1011 RlO
2.19
2.17
2.20
2.22
2.26
2.25
2.29
2.13
2.18
2.17
2.19
2.21
2.25
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
2.28
2.13
2.32
2.15
2.13
2.16
2.18
2.22
2.24
1.65
2.30
2.35
2.11
1.68
1.70
1.49
1.63
1.65
Comments
.
- continued -
.::- .“’
‘L’..’
“ . ,,
.. .. .. .. ,,T,,
,. .:. ,,
.,
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
:
50 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
NFCR
LNK
Version
Storage in Ks
7 11 (before R9)
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
8 11 (before R9)
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13-15
9 11 (before R9)
911 R9
911 RlO
0.29
0.38
0.44
0.46
0.50
0.29
0.38
0.44
0.46
0.50
0.29
0.38
0.43
911 R12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12-15
0.45
0.49
0.23
0.30
0.33
0.35
711,811,911
711,811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1011,1111/1211
111/1211 R13-14
111/1211 R15
0.15
3.46
3.46
3.43
4.37
0.12
2.45
3.08
- continued -
Memory
calculations
553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Comments
_
Memory calculations 51
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
Storage in KS
Version
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
9CDD
FCA
711 R4-5
711 R7-9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
81 l/101 1 R7-9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
Sll/lOll R13-15
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-15
2.22
2.23 2.50
2.83
1.50
2.22
2.23
2.53
2.83
1.50
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.50
2.80
1.50
1.85
2.07
2.33
1.03
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
0
.-
All Releases
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
52 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
!3R
Storage in KS
Version
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
Sll/lOll R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
4.13
4.36
4.51
4.87
5.48
5.97
6.19
4.13
4.36
4.51
4.87
5.48
5.97
6.19
6.50
4.06
4.29
4.44
4.80
5.41
5.89
6.13
6.44
6.56
3.52
3.73
4.20
4.56
4.35
4.57
4.61
Comments
-
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
- -.
Memory calculations 53
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
AA
HIST
requirements
(continued)’
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
Sll/lOll R8-14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-14
1111/1211 R15
0.55
0.59
0.65
0.64
0.58
0.59
0.65
0.57
0.58
0.64
1.00
0.47
0.73
711,811,911,1011
811,911,1011 R14-15
111 l/1211 R8-15
0.04
0.04
0.03
Comments
.
- continued -
,. ..._. ‘.: .F
..’ ,::3 .:.:- :,
:. :: ., . .:, ;
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
54 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Version
Program
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-14
1111/1211 R15
AOP
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
c
0.42
0.54
0.62
0.63
0.65
0.42
0.54
0.62
0.63
0.65
0.64
0.42
0.52
0.60
0.61
0.63
0.80
0.44
0.45
0.56
_
Memory calculations 55
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)’
Version
Storage in KS
Comments
BARS
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
0
All, Releases
?TARS
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
0
All Releases
CDP
711,811,911,1011
711,811/101iR13
81 l/101 1 R14-15
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R14-15
0.07
0.08
0.08
0.09
0.07
0.05
..
PQm
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
0
All Releases
FCBQ
711,811,911,1011
1111/1211
1111/1211 R13-15
0.02
0.02
0.01
All Releases
OHQ
711 R4,5,7
711 R8-13
811 R4-7
811 R8-9
811/1011 RlO-15
911
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.11
0.12
0.11
0.12
0.12
0.11
0.12
0.09
0.08
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
56 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
PrOgWIl
Version
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1624 words)
NAUT
711 R4-5
711 R7-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
81 l/101 1 RS-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.
0.49
0.50
0.51
0.49
0.50
0.50
0.51
0.55
0.48
0.49
0.50
0.54
0.57
0.38
0.37
0.36
0.40
0.41
-
Memory calculations 57
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
SNR
requirements
Version
(continued)
Storage in KS
711 R4-5
711 R7
711 R8-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811/1011 R8-l?,
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4-5
911 R7
911 R8-12
911 R13
0.76 _
0.78
0.84
0.85
0.76
0.78
0.84
0.85
0.93
0.75
0.77
0.83
0.85
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
0.92
0.96
0.59
0.60
0.65
0.68
Comments
..
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.
58 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
I’DET
Version
Storage in KS
711 R4
711 R5-12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5-7
811/1011 R8-12
Sll/lOll R13-14
911 R4
911 R5-12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-14
1111/1211 R15
see
711,811,911,1011,
1111,121l
m
711 R4-5
711 R7-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R4-5
811 R7
811/1011 R8-9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
Sll/lOll R13-14
911 R4-5
911 R7-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
0.36
0.39
0.42
0.36
0.38
0.38
0.42
0.35
0.38
0.41
0.45
0.30
0.32
0
0.51
0.62
0.65
0.71
0.51
0.62
0.62
0.65
0.71
0.51
0.61
0.64
0.70
0.71
0.72
0.51
0.53
0.50
Comments
.
.
All Releases
Memory calculations 59
Table3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
ATVN
Version
711
711
711
711
711
711
711
811
811
811
Storage in KS
R4
R5-7
R8
R9
RlO
R12
R13
R4
R5-7
R8
811/1011
811/1011
811/1011
81 l/1011
811/1011
4.99 5.00
5.02
5.03
5.12
5.18
5.25
4.97
4.98
5.00
5.01
5.10
5.17
5.24
5.29
4.92
4.93
4.95
5.04
5.11
5.20
5.25
5.52
3.92
3.93
4.00
4.05
3.80
3.84
3.99
R9
RlO
R12
R13
R14
911 R4
911 R5-7
911 R8-9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
111 l/121 1 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
ACDR
Comments
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
0
All Releases
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
60 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Storage in KS
Version
HOT
711 (before RlO)
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811/1011 (beforeR10)
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 (before RlO)
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 (beforeR10)
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12-13
1111/1211 R14-15
0
0.24
0.26
0
0.24
0.25
0.26
0
0.24
0.25
0.26
0
0.24
0.18
0.19
DHLD
711,811/1011
711,811/1011 R12
711,811/1011 R13-15
911
911 R12
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 R8-10
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.58
0.59
0.61
0.57
0.59
0.60
0.46
0.47
0.44
LSEL
711,811/1011
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1111/1211 R8-15
0.17
0.16
0.17
0.12
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Comments
.
All Releases
Memory calculations 61
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in KS
ss5
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
0.01 -
DRNG
711 R4-5,7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4-5,7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
0.41
0.49
0.48
0.68
0.70
0.58
0.41
0.49
0.48
0.70
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4-5,7
911 R8-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-15
0.60
0.58
0.40
0.48
0.69
0.57
0.39
0.38
0.55
0.42
Comments
All Releases
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
62 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
PBXI
Storage in KS
Version
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9-10
711 R12
711 R13
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-10
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R5
911 R7
911 RS
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
111 l/121 1 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
2.84
4.28
4.70
4.82
6.26
6.24
3.27
4.72
4.76
4.89
6.33
6.31
7.14
3.23
4.66
4.70
4.82
4.83
6.25
6.24
7.04
7.26
3.71
3.83
3.84
4.94
4.57
5.18
5.26
Comments
_
Memory calculations 63
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in KS
DLDN
711 R5-13
811 R5-7
Sll/lOll R8-15
911 R5-15
1111/1211 R8-13
1111/1211 R15
0.09.
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.06
0.07
4MF
711 R5
711 R7-8
711 R9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R5
811 R7-8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
1.37
1.44
1.46
1.47
1.57
1.37
1.44
1.46
1.47
1.57
1.61
1.36
1.44
1.43
1.45
1.46
1.57
1.61
1.62
1.09
1.11
1.12
1.15
1.16
Comments
.
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
64 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
CSL
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R7
811 R8
811 R9
81 l/1011 RlO
81 l/101 1 R12
81 l/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
111 l/121 1 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
IOD
711,811,911,1011,
1111/1211
SC1
711 R7-13
Sll/lOll R7-15
911 R7-14
111 l/121 1 R8-15
Comments
13.96
14.68
15.10
15.08
17.04
17.65
13.96
14.68
15.10
15.08
17.04
17.64
17.65
13.55
14.26
14.69
14.67
16.61
17.24
17.80
11.23
11.51
11.49
12.99
12.45
12.54
All Releases
0
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
I
Memory calculations 65
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
JCOS
Version
Storage iu KS
Comments
711 R7-8
711 R9
711 RlO-13
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/101 1 RlO-14
911 R7-8
911 R9
911 RlO-12
911 Rl3-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-14
0.22.
0.24
0.25
0.22
0.21
0.24
0.25
0.21
0.23
0.24
0.25
0.17
0.18
0.19
RESDB
811/1011 R14
911 R14
1111/1211 R14
4.30
4.47
7.46
CDRQ
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
All Releases
ATh4
711
Sll/lOll
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
All Releases
.
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
.
66 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Version
PrOgEllU
Storage in KS
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
CSLA
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
lIENANT
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9-12
711 R13
811 R7
81 l/1011 R8
Sll/lOll R9
Sll/lOll RlO-12
811/1011 R13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9-12
911 R13
911 1 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
111 l/121 1 R9-12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
FTDS
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-.
0.38
0.43
0.44
0.43
0.38
0.43
0.44
0.44
0.43
0.48
0.38
0.43
0.44
0.43
0.47
0.51
0.33
0.34
0.32
0.35
0.38
0
0
0
0
- continued -
. All Releases
All Releases
Memory calculations 67
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
3SET
Version
Storage in KS
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 R12
81 l/1011 R13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R12
911R13
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
BET
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
LNR
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO-12
711 R13
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/1011 RlO-12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO-15
Comments
8.70 8.75
8.69
8.74
9.67
8.57
8.66
9.57
12.53
6.66
6.34
6.99
9.12
0
0
0
0
..
All Releases
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.24
0.26
0.28
0.30
0.19
0.20
0.22
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
68 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
DLT 2
711 R9-13
811/1011 R9-14
911 R9-14
1111/1211 R9-14
PRETRANS
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO-13
811 R8
811/1011 R9
81 l/1011 RlO-13
Sll/lOll R14-15
911 R8
911 RlO-13
911 R14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9-13
1111/1211 R14-15
0.33
0.34
0.35
0.33
0.34
0.35
0.37
0.33
0.34
0.36
0.24
0.25
0.26
SUPV
711 R8
711 R9-12
711 R13
811 R8
811/1011 R9-12
81 l/1011 R13-14
911 R8
911 R9-12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
111 l/121 1 R9-14
1111/1211 R15
0.77
0.66
0.68
0.78
0.67
0.69
0.77
0.65
0.67
0.68
0.72
0.56
0.48
0.50
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
_.
:.
0
0
0
0
Comments
-
Memory calculations 69
Table 3
Software
program
storage
requirements
(continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Yl-DS
Version
Storage in KS
ZPND
711 RlO-12
711 R13
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
81 l/101 1 R13-15
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
111 l/121 1 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-15
711 R8-13
81 l/101 1 R8-14
911 R8-14
1111/1211 RS-14
Comments
O0
0
0
0.88
0.90
0.88
0.90
0.86
0.88
0.71
0.64
.
SLST
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
A Releases
JPN
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
All Releases
DNIS
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
0
0
0
0
All Releases
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
70 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
3GD
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 RlO
Sll/lOll R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
11.21
11.51
11.32
11.21
11.51
11.32
11.33
11.09
11.35
11.22
11.54
8.90
9.13
8.26
8.40
RMS
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 RlO
81 l/1011 R12
Sll/lOll R13-14
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1111 RlO
1111/1111 R12
111 l/121 1 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
1.55
1.58
1.60
1.55
1.58
1.60
1.53
1.55
1.58
1.67
1.20
1.22
1.18
1.25
Comments
_
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
s.
..:
.:...
.:
Memory calculations 71
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
UK = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in Ks
MR
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
81 l/101 1 RlO
811/1011 R12
81 l/1011 R13-15
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1111/1111 RlO-15
0.85 0.85
0.89
0.85
0.85
0.89
0.83
0.84
0.88
0.64
Awu
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 RlO
81 l/1011 R12
81 l/101 1 R13
811/1011 R14
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
4.49
4.57
4.62
4.48
4.58
4.61
4.62
4.43
4.51
4.58
4.34
3.35
3.40
3.27
3.06
?MSI
711 RlO-13
811/1011 RlO-15
911 RlO-14
1111/1211 RlO-15
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.04
Comments
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
72 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
3PAO
711 RlO-13
811/1011 RlO-15
911 RlO-14
1111/1211 RlO-15
0.05
0.05
0.05
0.04
>LC
711 RlO-13
81 l/1011 RlO-15
911 RlO-14
1111/1211 RN-15
0.08
0.08
0.08
0.06
SLP
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
Sll/lOll R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13-15
1.11
1.17
1.23
1.10
1.17
1.22
1.23
1.09
1.16
1.21
1.22
0.87
0.92
0.89
MCT
711 RlO-13
811/1011 RlO-15
911 RlO-14
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14-15
0.34
0.34
0.34
0.29
0.28
0.27
0.24
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Comments
-
Memory calculations 73
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
UK = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in KS
ICDR
711 RlO-13
Sll/lOll RlO-15
911 RlO-14
1111/1211 RlO-15
APL-AUX
711 RlO
711 R12
711R13
811/1011
81 l/1011
811/1011
811/1011
911 RlO
Comments
0
0
0
0
4.76
4.77
5.06
4.77
4.77
5.06
5.07
4.69
RlO
R12
R13
R14-15
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1111/1211 RlO-12
111 l/1211 RlO-13
1111/1211 R14-15
4.70
5.00
5.01
3.80
3.70
3.71
TVS
711 R12-13
81 l/101 1 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
0
0
0
0
TOF
711 R12-13
811/1011 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
0
0
0
0
_.
- continued -
:
_.
I-..
_.
:
-:
I
.”
~
.!,
.,,
I)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
74 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
NKL
ISA ISDN PRA
Version
Storage in KS
81 l/1011 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
0
0
0
711 R12-13
81 l/101 1 R12-14
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-14
0
0
0
0
Comments
.
Note 7 for R13
-cnntinlml -
g:!,..? .:. _’:.::.;a‘7
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
Memory calculations 75
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in KS
IDC
711 R12
711 R13
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
81 l/101 1 R14-15
911 R12
911R13
911 R14
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14-15
AUX ACD-D
711 R13
0
81 l/101 1 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0.37
0.39
0.38
0.39
0.44
0.37
0.38
0.43
0.20
0.28
0.31
711 R13
811/1011 R13
0.18
0.18
81 l/101 1 R14-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0.19
0.19
0.14
ACD Priority Agent
711 R13
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
EMUS
711 R13
81 l/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
DCP
Comments
..
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
76 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
FTC
Version
Storage in KS
711 R13
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
DT12
811/1011 R14
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
JDMI
81 l/1011 R14-15
911 R14
1111/1211 R14-15
ISDN
711 R13
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
PRA
81 l/1011 R14-15
911 R14
1111/1211 R14-15
0
0
0
ISL
711 R13
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0.02
0.01
0.01
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
2.
Comments
.
8.55
8.43
8.57
6.11
6.12
0
0
0
Note 7
20.26
23.34
20.00
23.02
35.28
14.75
16.95
26.06
Note 7
Memory calculations 77
Table 3
Software
program
storage
PrOgGlIll
requirements
(continued)
Version
Storage in KS
Comm+ts
(1K = 1024 words)
NTWK SRVC
711 R13
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
’
911R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 Rl?
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
DNXP
711 R13
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
711 R13
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
ISDN AP
711 R13
81 l/101 1 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
0
0
0
0
PR12
811/1011 R14
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 R15
CDRJZ
Note 73.57
3.97
3.51
3.91
5.42
2.56
2.85
3.89
.
.--
4.11
4.03
4.19
2.91
2.97
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
:.:.
-.
.:.
78 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Storage in KS
Version
ACNT
Sll/lOll R14
911 R14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R14
1111/1211 R15
0.61
0.60
0.62
0.43
0.44
A C D Account Package
7 11 R 13
81 l/101 1 R13-14
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-14
0.61
0.61
0.60
0.43
- continued -
Comments
_
_ ,: ,
.: .“. - .
i.;--:,.,
y:,.. ,,j
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
.
Memory calculations
Table 3
Software
program
storage
requirements
79
(continued)
Program
Version
Storage in KS
(1K = 1024 words)
Total (base = resident + overlay area + firmware)
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
84.82
87.96
100.67
104.41
107.50
114.00
130.22
141.05
88.24
93.31
105.64
107.95
81 l/101 1 R9
Sll/lOll RlO
81 l/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
134.73
119.84
122.81
145.52
165.42
87.26
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211R15
93.42
105.84
108.04
110.41
115.42
128.46
139.66
164.57
188.92
85.66
96.17
100.42
110.37
114.94
133.38
164.57
Comments
.
..
---
- continued Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
c.
:
,
:
: . .
80 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Version
Program
Storage in KS
(1K
No. of R/W Modules (base) (Note 2)
711
81 l/101 1
911
1
1
1
1
1111/1211
-continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
(56k)
(56k)
(56k)
(56k)
Comments
.
Memory calculations
Table 3
Software
program
storage
Program
requirements
Version
81
(continued)
Storage in Ks
Comments
(1K = 1024 words)
Overflow (base) (Note 3)
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
Sll/lOll R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
111 l/121 1 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
28.82
31.96
44.67
48.41
51.50
58.00
74.22
85.05
32.94
37.3 1
49.64
51.95
56.65
63.84
78.73
89.52
31.26
37.42
49.84
52.04
54.41
59.42
72.46
83.66
29.66
40.16
44.42
54.37
58.94
.
.
---
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
82 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
Version
Storage in KS
Total of All Optional Packages (Note 4)
711 R4
93.81
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
811/1011 RlO
Sll/lOll R12
81 l/1011 R13
811/1011 R14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
1111/1211 R14
1111/1211 Rl
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Y
.:.’
100.26
128.01
142.29
136.06
162.92
174.29
186.74
93.92
100.80
127.37
144.01
135.12
161.20
194.96
209.93
232.04
92.77
99.68
121.58
142.39
133.69
159.96
192.49
207.76
229.67
275.69
112.29
106.13
126.92
155.19
154.70
170.68
207.69
Comments
Memory calculations 83
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued).
Program
Version
Storage in KS
(1K = 1024 words)
Overflow (base + all optional packages). (Note 4)
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
122.63
132.22
172.68
190.70
187.56
220.92
248.51
271.79
126.16
138.11
177.01
195.98
81 l/101 1 R9
811/1011 RlO
811/1011 R12
811/1011 R13
Sll/lOll R14
911 R4
191.77
225.04
273.69
299.45
397.46
124.03
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
911 R14
1011 R15
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
1111/1211
137.10
171.42
194.43
188.10
219.38
264.95
291.42
394.25
464.61
141.95
146.30
171.34
209.56
213.64
304.06
372.26
R8
R9
RlO
R12
R13
R14
R15
- continued -
Comments
.
_.
---
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
84 Memory calculations
Table 3
Software program storage requirements (continued)
Program
(1K = 1024 words)
ROM
Version
Storage in KS
711
8.0
811/1011
911
8.0
8.0
1111/1211
8.0
Comments
-
Note I : On XL and XN systems, Read/Write fiiware is represented
by the set of High-Level intrinsics.
Note 2 :Only 56K of the first program store is available.
Note 3 :Overflow into protected data store or page 6,5 and then 1.
Note 4 :Program is first loaded into page 2, then overflow into the
pages (if equipped) in the following sequences: page 6,5,1 (for nonenhanced systems); or page 8,9, 10, 12, 13, 14,6,5, 1 (for enhanced
systems).
Note 5 :MCDR (Mini CDR) is only available for SL-1M.
Note 6 :Resident Programs include packages 0,l and 2.
Note 7 :ISDN features are not available on 711 version.
Note 8: TSET can only be used when DSET is available and uses the
same memory.
Note 9: 1011 software must have “SLST” package turned ON.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.d
I
Memow calculations 85
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements
Version
Feature
Storage in Words
Comments
Fixed amount of storage required for system operation. .
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8-14
811 R4
3748
3983
4386
4397
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9-15
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9-14
1111/1211 R8-15
3986
4386
3398
4400
5632
5867
6267
6279
6281
7487
3751
For EACH of the following:
..,...
-‘
,..-,
500 and 2500 Sets
711 R4-7
711 RS-10
811 R4-7
811/1011 R8-10
911 R4-7
911 R8-10
1111/1211 R8-10
3.5
4.5
3.5
4.5
3.5
4.5
4.5
500 sets
711 R12-14
Sll/lOll R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
4.5
4.5
4.5
4.5
_..,
I
‘,
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
item
only
only
only
only
only
only
only
only
only
only
only ..
only
only
only
only
---
- continued -
: ;-:. : ,;:
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.4
86 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
2500 sets
Version
Storage in Words
711 R12-14
811/1011 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
5.5
5.5
5.5
5.5
2500 Sets (CFW)
711 R4-7
711 R8-12
811 R4-7
811/1011 R8-12
911 R4-7
911 R8-12
111 l/121 1 R8-12
4.5
5.5
4.5
5.5
4.5
5.5
5.5
SL-1 Sets (NDD)
711
711 R13-14
811/1011
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-8
911 R9-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
111 l/121 1 R9-12
1111/1211 R13-15
14.25
16.25
14.25
16.25
14.25
15.25
16.25
14.25
15.25
16.25
SL-1 Sets (ADD)
711
711 R13-14
811/1011
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-8
911 R9-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9-12
1111/1211 R13-15
15.25
18.25
15.25
18.25
15.25
16.25
18.25
15.25
16.25
18.25
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Comments
-
,..
,_:
:.
: : ..:.: 2:; j
:.
Memory calculations 87
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Add-on K/L Strips
Version
Storage in Words
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
10
-10
10
10
Comments
I.
Data Service Access TNs
VMS Access ‘INS
7 11 R8- 13
811/1011 R8-15
911 R8-14
1111/1211 RS-15
(Note 15)
-hlUkS
711
811/1011
911
111 l/121 1 R8-14
(Note 1)
Attendants
.
711 R4-7
711 R8-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13-14
811 R4-7
81 l/101 1 R8-9
81 l/101 1 RlO-12
Sll/lOll R13-14
911 R4-7
911 R8-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
89
92
93
97
95
98
99
103
95
98
99
103
107
98
99
103
107
- continued -
Memoty calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
88 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Customers
Version
Storage in Words
711 R4-7
711 R8-12
711 R13
711 R14
811 R4-7
811/1011 R8-12
811/1011 R13
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4-7
911 R8-12
911 R13
911 R14
111 l/121 1 R8-12
1111/1211 R13
111 l/121 lR14-15
137
152
142
144
137
152
142
144
137
152
142
192
152
142
192
Trunk Routes
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Network-Local
711 R4-14
811 R4
811 R5-7
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4
911 R5-14
1111/1211 R8--15
63
65
66
66
65
66
66
Network-RPE
711 R4-13
811 R4
811 R5-7
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4
911 R5-14
1111/1211 R8-15
80
82
83’
83
82
83
83
Comments
-
(Note 2)
- continued Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations
89
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirementstcontinued)
Feature
Junctor Group Pairs
(Note 3)
Version
Storage in Words
711 R4-14
811 R4-7
0
.o
0
74
74
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4-14
1111/1211 R8-15
Peripheral Signaling
711 R4-14
811 R4-7
..
36
52
52
52
52
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4-14
1111/1211 R8-15
Secondary Tape
Comments
711
539154 1
911
5391541
539154 1
811/1011
539154 1
1111/1211
711 R4-5
711 R7-14
811 R4-7
..
(Note 4)
-.-
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1111/1211 R8--15
Tone & Digit Switch
MF Sender
7 11
57
811/1011
59
911
59
1111/1211
59
711
57
811/1011
59
911
59
1111/1211
59
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-.
.:
90 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
141
145
143
143
147
143
147
143
147
Comments
Conference
711 R4-9
711 RlO-14
811 R4-7
811/1011 R8-9
811/1011 RlO-15
911 R4-9
911 RlO--14
111 l/121 1 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO--15
Digitone Receiver
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
LPIB
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
4x
4x
4x
4x
HPIB
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
4x HPIB
4 x HPIB
4x HPIB
4x HPIB
PBXOB
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
4 x PBXOB
4 x PBXOB
4 x PBXOB
4 x PBXOB
x # Periph. Signals
(Note 5)
BCSOB
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
4 x BCSOB
4 x BCSOB
4 x BCSOB
4 x BCSOB
x # Periph. Signals
(Note 5)
-
6
6
6
6
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
LPIB
LPIB
LPIB
LPIB
1 item
Note 5)
1 item
(Note 5)
Memory calculations 91
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Comments
ACD
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 6)
ACD Enhancement
711
Sll/lOll
911
1111/1211
(Note 11)
Extended Agent
Observe
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
1 per ACD POS
CMAC
NARS/BARS/CDP
..
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
534
534
534
534
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
1 item
--(Note 7)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
:
92 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Call Register
Storage in Words
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 RS-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13-14
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811/1011 R8-9
811/1011 RlO-12
811/1011 R13-14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 RS-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8-9
1111/1211 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-14
1111/1211 R15
CPRK
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
IMS
711
811/1011
911
1011 R15
1111/1211
1111/1211 R15
40
41
44
45
48
61
41
42
45
46
49
62
41
42
45
46
49
62
64
46
49
62
64
Comments
-
Wote
(Note 9)
28
28
28
16
28
16
1 per list
(Note 10)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
I
8)
Memory calculations 93
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements(continued)
Feature
APL
Version
Storage in Words
711
179
811/1011
179
911
179
179
1111/1211
TDET
711
811 R4-5
811 R7
10
10
11
11
10
11
11
811/1011 R8-15
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1111/1211 R8--15
DTI
Comments
1perAPLLink
711
(Note 12)
..
811/1011
911
1111/1211
ATh4 - Schedule Blk
711
(Note 13)
811/1011
911
1111/1211
ATM - Data Blk
711
(Note 13)
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Digital Sets
711
Sll/lOll
911
1111/1211
(Note 14)
- continued -
Memoty calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
94 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Version
Feature
Multi-Tenant
Storage in Words
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
CSL
32
32
32
32
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
_
(Note 16)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
Comments
Memory calculations 95
Table 4
Unprotected
data
storage
requirements
(continued)
Feature
sl-I/DLI Loops
Version
XJST
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
13
13
13
13
BGD
711
711 R13-14
811/1011
811/1011 R13-15
60
66
60
66
911
911 R13-14
1111/1211
1111/1211 R13-15
60
66
60
66
BGD Disp
BGDIAWU Loop
Storage in Words
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Comments
(Note 17)
.
711
6 x DNIS
1 item
711 R13-14
Sll/lOll
811/1011 R13-15
911
911 R13-14
1111/1211
1111/1211 R13-15
9x DNIS
6x DNIS
9x DNIS
6 x DNIS
9x DNIS
6 x DNIS
9x DNIS
(Note 18)
100
100
100
100
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
.--
1 item
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
96 Memory calculations
Table 4
Unprotected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Stnmw in Wnrdc
_ _ -_ _ __
uI.,-
..-.,
---
.
.
“_
-”
rnmmentr
V”ur..lr.1W
ISDN PRA
711 R12-14
811/1011 R12--15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-14
Overlay Data Space
711 R12-14
811/1011 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
ISL
711 R13-14
811/1011 R13-15
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R13-15
# of DCHIs
(Note 19)
ISDN Utility
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 21)
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 19)
711
Sll/lOll
911
1111/1211
Note 22
ISDN PR12
# of DCHIS
_ ( N o t e 19).
260
260
260
260
-
R13
EBLF
1011 R15
1111/1211 R15
Note 23
EOVF
1011 R15
1111/1211 R14
Note 24
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
s.
Memory calculations 97
Note I : The size of the trunk block is calhlated from:
CT + X (words),
where:
CT = 7 words (3 average card block + 4 trunk timing block)
X = (see the following table).
Trunk Types
Value of X
NorXN
Other
RLA
15
14
AUTOVON
8
8
ADM
14
13
Others
5
5
1 0 (Note)
1 0 (Note)
Note: These numbers are for Release 12.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
.-...
:
:
.’
‘.
.A.
98 Memory calculations
For Release 13 through 14, the size of the trunk block is calculated from:
CT + X (words) + Y
where:
CT = 9 words (5 average card block + 4 trunk timing block)
X = (see the following table)
Y = 0 if the trunk belongs to a route which does not have CDR or which has
CDR with dialed digits.
= 9 if the trunk belongs to a route which has CDR with outpulsed digits.
Trunk Types
MS
Value of X
Other
RAN
5
5
RLA
14
15
AUTOVON
8
8
ADM
15
15
Others
10
10
(includes ISA)
Note 2 : The size of the route block is calculated from:
24 + ceiling (number of members/l6) (words).
Releases 12 and 13
27 + ceiling (number of membeM6) (words).
Releases 14 through 15
43 + ceiling (number of members/l6) (words)
Note 3 : The number of Junctor Group Pairs is (N x (N-1)/2 in a system
with N network groups.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 99
Note 4 : The size of the TI’Y blocks is calculated from:
For Releases 4 and 5:
141+ x (words),
where: x = 8 for CDR ‘ITYs; 128 otherwise.
For Releases 7 through 15:
t + x (words),
where:
t = 16 (size (ITYI@BLOCK) + 128 (TTY output buffer) = 144
and x = the following table
Input Buffer
CDR link:
Data
128
HS link:
128+
15
APL link:
128+
(179 +
PMS Link:
20+
2
other:
Output Q
4)
8
1
I
---
Note 5 : The size of the Input/Output buffers is specified in “messages”.
Each message uses 4 words of unprotected data store. The recommended
size for I/O buffers is:
LPIB
(Low Priority Input Buffers)
= 96 messages
HPIB
(High Priority Input Buffers)
= M, LE:16 messages
S, MS: 16 messages
N, VLE: 32 messages
XL:16 x # of groups
XN32 x # of groups
PBXOB (Non SLl Output Buffers)
= 160 messages
BCSOB (SLl Output Buffers)
= 160 messages
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
100 Memory calculations
Note 6 : For ACD features the following additional storage is required
(total for system):
(KOx[(K1xCROUT)+(K2xCPID)+(K3xCDN)+CTM+(K4x
CRT)] ) + (K5 x CCUST) + (K6 x DN) + (K7 x PID)
where the multiplication constants (Ki) are:
KO=O
if ACD-C package is not equipped,
KO=l
if ACD-C package is equipped.
K1=32
size (U-ACD-RTE-EXTN) (=20)
+ word offset (TRUNK-SEIZE-TIME) (=12)
K1=32
size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=78)
@W
K1=46
(R13-15)
size (U-ACD-RTl-EXTN) (=28)
+ word offset (TRUNK-SEIZE-TIME) (=18)
K2= 11
if long report is selected.
size (U-ACDJOSBASIC)
(= 11)
K2= 11
size (U-ACDJOSBASIC)
(= 13)
(Rw
K2= 14
(Rl3-15)
size (U-ACD-POSBASIC) (= 14)
K2=22
if short report is selected
size (U-ACD-POS-EXTN) (= 22)
K2=22
size (U-ACD-POS-EXTN) (= 39)
0712)
K2=42
(Rl3-14)
size (U~ACDJOS~EXTN) (= 42)
K3=50
(R4-5)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=50)
K3=66
o-9)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=66)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
k.
: ..
Memory calculations 101
K3 =74
size(U_ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=74) for RlO
K3 =78
(R12-15)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK-EXTN) (=78)
K4=25
size (U-ACD-IOAREA) (*25)
K5=71
(R4-5)
size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15)
+ size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13)
+ size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (=43)
K5=79
(R7-10)
size (U-ACD-PRINT) (=15)
+ size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (=13)
+ size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (=51)
K5=79
(Rw
size (U-ACD-PRINT) (= 19)
+ size (U-ACD-RTE-SYS) (= 34)
+ size (U-ACD-SYS-QJOS) (= 57)
K5 = 114
(R13-15)
size (U-ACD-PRINT) (= 20)
+ size (U-ACD-RTI-SYS) (= 34)
+ size (U-ACD-SYS-QPOS) (= 60)
K6=90
cR4-5)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK) (=90)
K6= 100
(R7-8)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK) (=lOO)
K6= 117
(Rw
size w-ACD-BLOCK) (=117)
K6= 118
0312)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK) (=123)
K6 = 123
(Rl3-14)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK) (=123)
K6= 128
(Rl5)
size (U-ACD-BLOCK) (=128)
K7=24
size (U-ACD-POS) (=24)
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
102 Memory calculations
K7=29
(Rl3-15)
size (U-AC&POS) (= 29)
+ 2 for DN Expansion
+ 1 for ACD-ACNT-CODE
Kg=48
(Rl3)
for NT, RT, and XT systems
K8=48
(Rl4-15)
for XT, and NT
KS=32
(R13-15)
for XN, and ST systems
and the variables are represented by:
CCUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C package
CDN = total no. of ACD DNs for ACD-C customers
CPID = total no. of AGENT POSITION S for ACD-C customers
CROUT = total no. of ACD routes in ACD-C customers
CTM = total no. of TRUNK members in CROUT
DN = total no. of ACD DNs (for the system)
PID = total no. of AGENT POSITION S (for the system)
CRT = total no. of ACD CRTs.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
%.
Memory calculations 103
Note 7 : The unprokcted data store requirements (on a per-customer basis)
for NARS/BARS/CDP:
2x(8xRL+6xNCOS)Release4
2 x (12 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 5-8
2 x (16 x RL + 6 x NCOS) Releases 9-12 If FCBQ & OHQ is equipped:
2x(11 xRL+ lOxNCOS)Release4
2 x (17 x RL + 10 x NCOS) Releases 5-8
2 x (21 x RL + i0 x NCOS) Releases 9-12
Releases 13 through 15
If OHQ or MCBQ is equipped:
RLSZE + NCOSIZE + QROUTSIZE
Otherwise:
RLSIZE + NCOSIZE
where:
RL
FUSIZE
= number of route lists
=2x(45xRL)(FCBQ&OHQ
equipped)
= 2 x (40 x RL) (otherwise)
NCOS
NCOSIZE
= number of NCOS defined
= 2 x (1045 x NCOS) (RLBQ & OHQ
equipped)
= 2 x (6 x NCOS) (otherwise)
QROUTE
QROUTESIZE
= number of routes with either CBQ or OHQ
=2x(7xQROUTE)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
104 Memory calculations
Note 8 : N, the recommended number of Call Registers is:
N = (T + 815)/33.8 + M
where:
T=A/2xCx1.42-B.
M = the number of ACD incoming trunks.
A = the total voice loop traffic in CCS.
B = M x l(1 is average CCS per ACD trunk).
C = the total call register traffic factor
The Total Call Register Traffic Factor is equal to 1 + any of the following
factors:
0.037 if CDR Charge Account
0.074 if Authorization Code
0.037 if Parallel CDR Ports Per Customer
0.150 if NARS/BARS/CDP
0.150 if FCBQ and OHQ
0.033 if ACD RAN
0.019 if Telset Messaging
0.140 if &Is
0.083 if Ring Again
0.033 if Music Trunk
0.067 if CPRK
0.003 if NFCR
0.039 if ESN Signalling
0.0 if Stored Number Redial (negligible impact)
0.184 if IVMS (with R4-5)
0.044 if individual hold (with R4-5)
::. *,
‘ ., ., :
‘:;I
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 105
Assumptions:
(1)
The peak day traffic = 1.42 x ABSBH traffic for business offices.
(2)
All outgoing calls require authorization (worst case assumption).
(3)
An additional call register is required for 20 s to hold the
authorization code.
(4)
50% of outgoing calls use the charge account feature (worst case
assumption).
(5)
An additional call register is required for 20 s to hold the charge
account.
(6)
The additional holding time of the call register for CDR purposes is 5
seconds.
.
The average number of ports used in the multiple CDR ports
feature is 2.
(7)
(8)
A call register is required for each incoming ACD trunk.
(9)
The intra-office ration R = 0 (worst case assumption).
(10) The number of originating calls = the number of terminating calls.
(11) The blocking peak of the day traffic is PO.01.
(12) The average NARVBARS call takes 20 s to dial and 20 s to complete
outpulsing and delay for answer.
(13) The average holding time of a RAN is 15 s.
(14) The average Telset Message takes 6 s to dial and 20 s to complete
outpulsing and delay for answer.
(15) The average IMS call takes 8 s to dial, 15 seconds ringing and 40 s
with message attendant. During the busy hour, 60% of tenninating
calls are unanswered, of which 50% require IMS.
(16) A call register is required for active Ring Again call.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
106 Memory calculations
(17) Music Trunk holding time is 30 s.
(18) Average Call Park holding time is 1 min.
(19) Average holding time for New Flexible Code Restriction is 4 s.
(20) ESN Signalling Feature holding time is 15 s and 35% of calls need
signalling feature.
(21) The average IVMS call takes 8 s to dial, 15 s ringing, 10 s listening to
greeting and 50 seconds leaving message. During the busy hour, 60%
of terminating calls are unanswered, of which 50% require IVMS
(R4-5).
(22) Individual Hold call holding time is 30 s (R4-5).
Note 9 : Size per item for Call Park
k + ceiling (s/16), for UCALL-PARK-BLOCK
where:
s = number of System Park DNs per customer
k=2
UCPRKBLGCKLENGTH(1 .O)
FREE-DNJNDEX (0.5)
NUM-SYS-PRK-USED (0.5)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 107
Note 10 : IMS Unprotected Memory Reqtiirements
Release 4:
LINK Q TBL HDR = 1 word
LINK OQ TBL = 16 words
APL REQ TO SENDS = 1 word
APL RDY TO SENDS = 1 word
APL MONITOR S = 10 words
APL MAINTENENCE S = 1 word
APL PRINT MODE S = 1 word
APL PRT MSG S = 1 word
APL PRT PACK S = 1 word
MSG MONITOR S = 1 word
PACK MONITOR S = 1 word
APL INTERCEPT S = 1 word
APLILINKSELS=lword
APL LINK DATA = 179 words x N
QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N
N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block
Total Unprotected
12 + (182 x N)) words or (0.117 + 0.178 x N) K
N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block
Releases 5 and 7:
LINK OQ TBL = 16 words
APL LINK DATA = 178 words x N
QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N
N = # of APL links defined in CFW Block
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
.
: ..
.
.
.
.
108 Memory calculations
Releases 8 through 15:
LINK QQ TBL = 16 words
/
APL LINK DATA = 179 words x N
QUEUE DATA BLOCK = 4 words x N
N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block
-
Total Unprotected (Releases 5 through 14)
(16 + (182 x N)) words or (0.016 + 0.178 x N) K words
N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block.
Total Unprotected (Releasesl5)
(16 + (183 x N)) words or (0.016 + 0.178 x IV) K words
N = # of APL links defined in CFN Block.
Note II : For Releases 4 and 5: ACD Enhancement - For each customer
with historical reports active add:
62 words for the customer (U ACD PRINT)
24 words per ACD Group
(v ACD BLOCK)
11 words per Route that auto
terminates on an ACD group (U ACD RTE BLK)
2 words per ACD position (U ACD POS)
plus 11 words per ACD position if short reports are active on the
customer.
For Releases 7 through 14: ACD Enhancement - AN ACD - C customer
(see Note 6).
Note 12 : DTI unprotected memory requirement:
Releases 4 and 5
13 + 9 x number of DTI loops.
Releases 7 through 15 (per DTI loop)
local network loop data + DTI data
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 109
= 66 (for 811 and 911 machines) + 9 = 75 ‘words
= 63 (for all other machines) + 9 = 72 words.
Note 13 : In Releases 7 through 15, there is no unprotect@ data store
impact.
Note 14 : Unprotected data store for digital set voice port:
Releases 7 and 8
N/XN (words)
Others
(words)
M2009
25.25
24.25
M2018
35.25
34.25
M2112
25.25
24.25
M2317
36.25
35.25
M3000
46.25
45.25
Unprotected data store for digital set data port with Digit Display Class Of
Service (COS). Note that data ports without digital COS require one word
less than those with Digit Display.
N/XN (words)
Others
(words)
M2009
26.25
25.25
M2018
36.25
35.25
M2112
26.25
25.25
M2317
16.25
15.25
M3000
16.25
15.25
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
::
110 Memory calculations
Releases 9 through 12
N/XN (words)
Others
(words)
M2009
18.25
17.25
M2018
29.25
-28.25
M2112
20.25
19.25
M2317
36.25
35.25
M3000
46.25
45.25
Unprotected data store for digital set data ports. Note that data ports
without digit class of service require one word less than those with digit
display.
Releases 13 through 15
With Digit Display
(size in words)
Without Digit Display
(size in words)
M2009
21.25
19.25
M2018
32.25
30.25
M2112
23.25
21.25
M2317
38.25
36.25
M3000
48.25
46.25
Note 15 : The additional unprotected data store for a virtual terminal (DS
access TN or VMS access TN) is dependent on the shelf/card to which the
terminal is assigned. For all machine types, the increments (in words) are as
follows:
Releases 8 through 12
DS/VMS Access TN
Preallocated Card 14
Otherwise 15.25
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
s.
:.
Memory calculations 11 I
Releases 13 through 15
DS/VMS Access TN
Preallocated Card 15
Otherwise 16.25
Where a preallocated card is one of the following shelf/cards:
O/l - O/7, l/l - 1/8,2/l - 2/8, or 3/8 on a DLI loop.
See Note 17.
Note 16 : CSL Unprotected Data is comprised of:
Per system (with CSL package, Release 8):
CSL IQ HDRTBL + Queues
CSL OQ HDRTBL
CSL MONITOR BLK
Total
=
=
=
=
3 + (3 x 4) words
16 words
112 words
143 words.
Per system (with CSL package, Releases 9 through 15):
CSL IQ HDRTBL + Queues
CSL OQ HDRTBL
Total
= 3 + (3 x 4) words
= 16 words
= 31 words.
Per CSL Link (Releases 8 through 15):
U CSL DATA BLK
CSL I ARRAY BLK
CSL 0 ARRAY BLK
QUEUE DATA BLOCK
Total
= 123 words
= 128 words
= 128 words
= 4 words
= 383 words.
Note 17 : DLI unprotected memory requirements (per DLI loop):
= DTI requirements (Note 12) + DLI data + preallocated card data
= 75 (811 and 911 machines) + 18 + 120 words.= 213 words
= 72 (all other machines) + 18 + 120 =210 words.
Note 18 : NDIS is the number of display messages defined in Overlay 17
for the Background Terminal.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
112 Memory calculations
Note 19 : Each DCHI consists of the following unprotected data blocks:
1. DCH U BLOCK = 43 words
44forR13andR14
_
47 for R15
2. Output request buffers = 5 x # of OTBFs
3. Output buffer = 261 words
4. Input buffer = 261 words
5. Unprotected call reference table = 2 + M
6. Unprotected message link table = - 1 + M
M is computed as follows:
(a) If PRI 111 nn is defined for the DCH link:
M=24x (max @IN)+ 1)
(b) If PRI 111 nn is not defined and the backup D-channel is defined
for the DCH link:
M=24x 2
(c) If PRI 111 nn and the backup D-channel are not defined:
M=24.
(d) If DCHI is in ISL mode:
M = maximum number of ISL trunks defined
(e) If DCHI is in SHARED mode:
M = (a) or (b) or (c) + maximum number of ISL trunks defined.
(f) PR12 ONLY: unprotected data block of 65 words.
Note 20 : SIZE (BG-lNPUT AREA) (= 15)
+ SIZE (BGW-WORK-ENTRY) (= 26)
+ SIZE (BGS.SCAN-ENTRY) (= 25)
Total=66
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
c.
I
Memory calculations 113
Note 21: One bit map table for TCAP per,system.
Size of bit map (words)1/16 x number of CBS defined per system
Traffic for TCAP4 words per Application ID (1)
Note 22 : Bach DTI loop requires the following:
DTI-UDATA-LPBLK
DTI2-UDATA-CATD
47 words
9 words
Note 23: Two words in the attendant unprotected data block per attendant
console is required. This is accounted for in the attendant data block size.
If Enhanced usy Lamp field (BBLF) is ON, a bit is required to indicate
idle/busy status of each DN. This equals 7 (16 bit) words per hundreds
group defined.
Note 24 : Enhanced Ovefflow requires an additional 4 words per ACD DN.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..d
114 Memory calculations
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 115
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Fixed amount of storage required for system operation.
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9-14
811 R4
811 R5
811R7
811 R8
81 l/101 1 R9-14
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
2981
3077
3253
3249
3250
3109
3148
3253
3305
3306
3379
3460
3568
911 R8
911 R9-14
1011 R15
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9-14
1111/1211 R15
3620
3621
3461
2981
2982
3092
Comments
.
For EACH of the following:
5OOand25GOSets
711 R4-7
711 R8-10
811 R4-7
81 l/101 1 RS-15
911 R4-7
911 R8-14
1111/1211 R8-15
(Note 1)
SL-1 Sets
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 2)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
116 Memory calculations
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Add-on K/L strips
Storage in Words
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
lO/rs
lO/rs
lO/rs
lO/rs
_
Data Service Access TNs
VMS Access TNs
711 R8-14
81 l/101 1 R8-15
911 R8-14
1111/1211 R8-15
remplate Head Table
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
1
1
1
1
remplates
711 R4-5
711 R7-14
811 R4-7
81 l/101 1 R8-15
911 R7-14
1111/1211 R8-15
3 + # Entries
4+ # Entries
4 + # Entries
4 + # Entries
4+ # Entries
4+ # Entries
rnlIlks
711 R4-9
711 RlO-12
711 R13-14
811 R4-7
81 l/101 1 R8-12
811/1011 R13-15
911 R4-9
911 RlO-12
911 R13-14
1111/1211 R8-9
111 l/121 1 RlO-12
1111/1211 R13-15
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
Comments
(Note 29)
+
+
+
+
#
#
#
#
Templates
Templates
Templates
Templates
10.5
13.5
16.5
10.5
13.5
16.5
10.5
13.5
16.5
10.5
13.5
16.5
(Note 21)
(Note 22)
Memory
calculations
117
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Attendants
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Customers
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7
711 R8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7
811 R8
811/1011 R9
Sll/lOll RlO
81 l/1011 R12
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7
911 R8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
111 l/121 1 RlO
1111/1211 R12
161
166
181
203
201
207
211
161
166
181
203
201
207
211
161
166
181
203
201
207
211
203
201
207
211
1011 R15
1111/1211 R15
46
46
Comments
(Note 3)
(Note 38 for)
Releases 13
through 15)
..
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
118 Memory calculations
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Trunk Routes
Version
Storage in Words
711 R4
711 R5
711 R7-8
711 R9
711 RlO
711 R12
711 R13
811 R4
811 R5
811 R7-8
81 l/101 1 R9
81 l/1011 RlO
81 l/101 1 R12
81 l/1011 R13
911 R4
911 R5
911 R7-8
911 R9
911 RlO
911 R12
911 R13
1111/1211 R8
1111/1211 R9
1111/1211 RlO
1111/1211 R12
1111/1211 R13
31
33
34
35
37
43
50
31
33
34
35
37
43
50
31
33
34
35
37
43
50
34
35
37
43
50
Code Restrictions
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
51
51
51
51
NFCR
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
-continued Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-
Comments
# of Routes
(Note 35 for
Release 14
through 15)
x#Code
Restriction
Routes
(Note 17)
Memory calculations 119
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Peripheral Signaling
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
30
30
30
30
Vetwork Group
711
811 R4-7
81 l/101 1 R8-15
911
1111/1211
16
32
32
38
38
Vetwork-LOC
711 R4-5
711
811 R7-14
R4-5
68
70
68
811 R7
811/1011 R14-15
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1111/1211
70
70
68
70
70
Vetwork-RPE
711 R4-5
711 R7-14
811 R4-5
811 R7
81 l/1011 R8-15
911 R4-5
911 R7-14
1111/1211
71
73
71
73
73
71
73
73
TDS
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
2
2
2
2
Comments
1 item
..
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
120 Memory calculations
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
MF Sender
Version
711
811/1011
2
2
2
1111/1211
2
711
2
2
2
911
Conference
811/1011
911
Digitone
Receiver
Storage in Words
1111/1211
2
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
8
8
8
8
DN Translator
(Note 4)
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
DIG Translator
(Note 5)
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
SCL Master Head Table
for
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
SCL Head Table
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
Comments
_
1 + Number of Lists 1 item
1 + N u m b e r o f Lists (Note 39 for
1 + N u m b e r of Lists Releases 13
1 + Number of Lists through 15)
1 perlist
(Note 15)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 121
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Version
Feature
Storage in Words
711
81 l/1011
911
Comments
# SC Lists
(Note 6)
1111/1211
3ASMain
711
# Customers
811/1011
911
1111/1211
3ASPemote
711
15
15
15
15
811/1011
911
1111/1211
BARS
# Customers
..
# Customers
711
811/1011
(Note 7)
911
1111/1211
FTC
711
32 Tables
(Note 42)
EFTC
7111
32 Tables
(Note 44)
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
- continued -
# Customers
(Note 8)
NARS
---:...
.i
.
.
,...
.
,,,
-:
.
,.
,
_:
.
^
,_
811/1011
911
1111/1211
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
122
Memory calculations
Table5
Protected data storage requirements(continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
711
81 l/101 1
911
CDP
Comments
# Customers
(Note.9)
1111/1211
ACD
# Customers
(Note 10)
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Group DND
711
81 l/101 1
911
# Customers
(Note 11)
DISA
711
# Customers
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 12)
AUTH
711
81 l/101 1
911
# Customers
(Note 13)
1111/1211
1111/1211
HIST
CPRK
711
1 item
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 14)
711
# Customers
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note4)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-.
,
:
Memory cakulations
123
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
370
370
370
370
Comments
IMS
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
1 per list
(Note 16)
NFCR
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
Soft Memory
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
TDET
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
# TDET
DTI
711 R4,7-14
811 R5-7
811/1011 R8-15
911 R5,7-14
1111/1211
1 item
(Note 18)
AMP
711 R4,7-14
811 R5,7
811/1011 R8-15
911 R5-14
1111/1211
1 per
customer
(Note 17)
35
35
35
35
1 item
# Modem Pools
(Note 19)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
.,
124 Memory calculations
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Multiple Office Code
Screening
Version
711 R4,7-14
811 R5-7
81 l/101 1 R8-15
911
1111/1211
M2009 Telephone
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
# telephones
(Note 23)
M2018 Telephone
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
# telephones
(Note 25)
M2112 Telephone
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
# telephones
(Note 24)
M23 17 Digital Set
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
# ofsets
(Note 3 1)
M3000 Touchphone
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
# telephones
(Note 26)
Multi-Tenant
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
- continued -
# of Customers
(Note 27)
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Storage in Words
Comments
1 per location code (if
defined)
(Note 20)
Memory calculations 125
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
ATM Schedule Block
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
ATM Data Block
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
DLI
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Storage in Words
12
12
12
12
# ATh4 Routes
# DLI Loops
(Note 18)
..
ESDI
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
16+
16+
16+
16+
CSL
711
711 R13-14
811/1011
811/1011 R13-15
911
911 R13-14
1111/1211
1111/1211 R13-15
2
4
2
4
2
4
2
4
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
16+
16+
16+
16+
VAS
Comments
(Note 28)
Nx
Nx
Nx
Nx
7
7
7
7
N=#Ports
# Links
#
#
#
#
N
N
N
N
Links
Links
Links
Links
N = # Servers
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
126 Memory calculations
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Comments
VAS DSDN
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
# Customers
(Note.30)
CPND
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
Per system
(Note 32)
LLC
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
5
5
5
5
Auxiliary
Customer
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
187
187
187
187
ISDN PRA
711 R12-14
81 l/101 1 R12-15
911 R12-14
111 l/121 1 R12-15
# PRI
(Note 33)
ISDN PRA
(Note 34)
711 R12
811/1011 R12-13
911.R12-13
1111/1211 R12-13
# DCHI
ISDN PRA
711 R12-14
81 l/101 1 R12--15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
SID tables
(Note 36)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
s.
# Customers
Memory calculations 127
Table 5
Protected data storage requirements (continued)
Feature
Version
Storage in Words
Comments
AWU Count
711
811/1011
911
1011 R15
1111/1211
1111/1211 R15
ISL
711 R12-14
811/1011 R12-15
911 R12-14
1111/1211 R12-15
#DCHI
(Note 37)
ISDN PR12
711
81 l/101 1
911
1111/1211
#PRI2
(Note 33)s.
ISDN PR12
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
# DCHI
(Note 34)
Pretranslation
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
# PREXL
(Note 40)
JDMI/DTI2
711
811/1011
911
1111/1211
(Note 4 1)
EBLF
1011
1111/1211
(Note 44)
EOVF
1011 R15
1111/1211 R15
(Note 45)
144
144
144
288
144
288
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
:..
.
.
.,:
.
.
128 Memory calculations
No& I : The size of the protected line block for PBX telephones is
determined from the following:
Basic Line Block
4 words
5 words
6 words
7 words
Release 4
Releases 5 through 9
in Release JO
in Releases 12 through 15
Basic Line Block (ODAS)
7 words Releases 4 and 5
8 words Releases 7 through 12
10 words Releases 13 through 15
Card Block Component
1.5 words
The key layout portion of the template requires (2 + nf)/rs words in Release
4 or, (4 + nf)/rs words in Releases 5 through 15, where “nf’ is the number
of features defined for the telephone, and “rs” is the number of telephones
sharing the same template.
-
Memory calculations
553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 129
In addition to the basic line block, each feature requires extra data space as
follows:
Feature
FM-5
Associate Set
-
Automatic Wake-Up
R7-12
R13
R14-15
2 words
2 words
2 words
1 word
1 word
1 word
Call Forward Key
(4-24 digits)
l-6 words l-6 words
l-6 words
Call Forward by Call
Type
2 words
Call Party Name
Display
1 word + 3 to 13
words
1 word+4to14
words
(6-26 characters, 2
characters per
word)
(6-26 characters, (6-26 characters,
2 characters per 2 characters per
word)
word)
-_
1 word
1 word
2 words
Dial Intercom Key
1 word
1 word
DN Key
1 word
1 word
2 words
2 words
-
1 word (R12)
2 words
2 words
-
l-8 words
2-l 0 words
2-l 0 words
CFNAIHunting
EFD/EHT DN
Key
2 words
2 words
..
1 word+4to14
words
2 words
1 word
Hot Line DN
(l-31 digits)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
130 Memory calculations
Feature
R46
R7-12
R13
R14-15
Enhanced Hot Line
2-l 0 words (Rl O-
(l-31 digits)
2-10 words .
2-10 words
12)
Last Number Redial
(3-32
digits)
1 word (R8)
1 word
(4-32
digits)
l-8 words (R9-10)
l-8 words
l-8 words
Manual Line
-
1 word
2 words
2 words
Message Center DN
-
1 word
2 words
2 words
1 word
1 word
1 word
Message
Registration
Pretranslation
Enhancement
l/2 word
(for 255 calling
grows)
SCI/CCOS/RMS
Speed Call Controller
Speed Call Key
-
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
-
1 word
-
Speed Call User
1 word
-
1 word
1 word
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
‘.
:.
Memory calculations 131
Feature
R46
R7-12
R13
R14-15
Stored Number
Redial
(4-32 digits)
I
l-8 words l-8 words
l-8 wqrds
1-b words
System Speed Call
User
-
1 word
1 word
1 word
Tenant Number
-
1 word
1 word
1 word
Note 2 : The size of the protected line block for SL-1 telephones is
determined from the following:
Basic Line Block
7 words in Release 4 ‘8 words in Release 5
9 words in Release 7
10 words in Releases 8-13
13 words in Release 14-15
Basic Line Block (ODAS)
10 words Releases 4 and 5 -12 words Releases 7-12
16 words Releases.13 -15
Card Block Component
1.5 words
The key layout portion of the template in Release 4 requires 12/rs words,
where rs = the number of telephones sharing the same template.
The key layout portion of the template, in Releases 5 through 15, requires (4
+ the number of key lamp strips x 10)/m words, where rs = the number of
telephones sharing the same template.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
132 Memory calculations
In addition to the basic line block requirement, each feahue requires extra
data space as follows:
Feature
R4-5
R7-12
R13
R14-15
ACD Agent Key
1 word
1 word
1 word
ACD Display Queue Key
1 word
1 word
2 words
2 words
ACD Interflow
1 word
1 word
2 words
2 words
9 words
11 words
11 words
11 words
2 words
2 words
l-6 words
l-6 words
Key
ACD IN-CALLS key
ACD Night Service DN
Autodial
(4-32
Key
- 1 word
l-8 words
digits)
Autodial
(4-24
Key
l-6 words
digits)
Automatic Wake-Up
1 word (RlO- 1 word
1 word
12)
Call Forward Key
(4-24
l-6 words l-6 words
l-6 words
l-6 words
2 words
2 words
digits)
Call Forward by Call
Type
2 words
(Rl o-1 2)
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 133
Feature
CFNA DN
R46
1 word
R7-12
R13
2 words
1 word
R14-15
2 words
Conference Autodial
l-6 words
Conference Hotline
3-l 0 words
Conference Speed Call
1 word
.’
DIG Key
1 word
word
1 word
1 word
DN Key
1 word
word
2 words
2 words
word
2 words
2 words
EFD/EHT DN
Flash Call Key
1 word
word
1 word
1 word
Flash Override Call Key
1 word
word
1 word
1 word
Hot Line
I.
3-l 0 words
(1-31 digits)
2-l 0 words
Hot Line, Enhanced
2-l 0 words
(Rl o-1 2)
:
j
‘,’
;...z:...
.,._.
,y,
I? ;. -:-:\
-: :.:‘-;: ,:.
Hunt D N
1 word
1 word
2 words
2 words
Immediate Call Key
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
134 Memory calculations
Feature
m-5
Last Number Redial
(4-32
R7-12
1 word (R8)
R13
R14-15
1 word
l-8 words
digits)
l-8 words
(R9-12)
Message Center DN
1 word
2 words
2 words
Message Registration
1 word (RlO)
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
Park Key
1 word
Pretranslation
Enhancement
Priority Call Key
l/2 word (for 255
calling groups)
1 word
1 word
1 word
Private Line Key
1 word
2 words
2 words
SCI/CCOS/RMS
(131 digits)
1 word (RlO-
1 word
14
Signal Key
1 word
1 word
Speed Call Controller
Speed Call Key
1 word
2 words
2 words
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
- continued -
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 135
I
Feature
R45
Speed Call User
R7-12
R13
R14-15
1 word
1 word
1 word
l-8 words
1-8 words
l-8 words
Tenant Number
1 word
1 word
1 word
Time and Date Key
1 word
1 word
1 word
1 word
2 words
2 words
Stored Number Redial
Key
(4-32 digits)
Voice Call Key
l-8 words
1 word
._
Note 3 : The size of the protected line block for attendant telephones is
determined from the following:
Card Block Component
3 words
Primary Line Block
14 words in Release 4
15 words in Releases 5 through 12
21 words in Releases 13 and 14
24 words in Release 15
Secondary Line Block
4 words
3 words in Release 15
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
136 Memory calculations
In addition to the basic linebloclc, each fea@re requires extra data space as
follows:
Requirements
Feature
Autodial Key
8 words
6 words in Releases 7-15)
Flash Call Key
1 word (R8-12)
Flash Override Call Key
1 word
Group DND Key
1 word
Immediate Call Key
1 word
Paging Key
1 word
2 words in Releases 13-l 5
Priority Call Key
1 word
Speed Call Key
1 word
Store Number Redial Key
8 words
, -2 . . .
4
‘.:
,j
*
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-.
Memory calculations 137
Note 4 : Prior to Rekase 13, the memory requirements for the D&tory
Number Translator are (in words of protected data store):
(2xS)+AS+12x(l+ Nl+N2+N3)
+ADx(~+AIx~)+(DDx~)+SPDN
+ number of listed DN
+ 1 per defined DN
+ 16 (+ 64 withReleases 8and9)
(+ 65 with Release 10)
(+ 66 with Release 12)
if any attendants are defined
+ 1 if special service prefix defined
+ 3 per NARSBARS access code defined
+ 7 if RSANI access code defined
+ 1 if CAS Hold DN is defined
+ 2 if CAS RLT DN is defined
+ 3 per CDP steering code defined
+ 2 per defined Test Line DN
+ 1 per defined ACD-DN
+ 1 per defined DIG Group
+lperSLlDN
Releases 13 through 15:
:I
.,
-j
(2xS)+AS+12x(l+Nl+N2+ N3+ N4+ N5+ N6)
+ADx(2+ AIx2)+ (DDx2)+ SPDN
+ number of listed DNs
+ 2 per defined DN
+ 16 (+ 66)
if any attendants are defined
+ 1 if special service prefix defined
+ 3 per NARS/BARS access code defined
+ 10 if RSANI access code defined
+ 2 if CAS Hold DN is defined
+ 2 if CAS RLT DN is defined
+ 3 per CDP steering code defined
+ 2 per defined Test Line DN
+ 1 per defined ACD-DN
+ 1 per defined DIG Group
+lperSLlDN
_. :...: _
::;;:..i.::..
; ..; :,,, .‘;
Memory calculations
.d
553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
138 Memory
calculations
where:
S = number of different DN appearing on SL- 1 telephones, 500/2500
telephones mixed with SL- 1 telephones, and private line 500/2500
telephones
AS = number of appearance of DN within S Nl = number of different first digit in the numbering plan
N2 = number of different sequence of the fast two digits in the
numbering plan (if DN is more than 2 digits)
N3 = number of different sequence of the first three digits in the
numbering plan (if DN is more than 3 digits)
N4 = number of different sequence of the first four digits in the
numbering plan (if DN is more than 4 digits)
N5 = number of different sequence of the first five digits in the
numbering plan (if DN is more than 5 digits)
N6 = number of different sequence of the first six digits in the
numbering plan (if DN is more than 6 digits)
AD = number of ACD-DNs
AI = number of ACD POSITION-ID S in each ACD-DN
DD = number of DISA-DNs
SPDN = number of System Park DNs
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
_
Memory calculations 139
Note 5 : The protected data store requirements for the Dial Intercom feature
for each customer using the package are as follows:
l+ Gx (l+ 2x M)
where:
G = number of groups
M = number of members in each group
Release 14 through 15:
(n + 1) + (x x (2 + (~~21) 1
where:
n = maximum number of dial intercom groups in Overlay 15
x = actual number of dial intercom groups configures
y = average number of members in each dial intercom group
Note 6 : The size of a Speed Call List is:
((NB -1) x 256) + (NBR x WE)
where:
NB and WE is calculated as described in Note 15 under the Speed CalList
Head Table
NBR is the remainder of the calculation to determine NB, which was
NB = EL/EB
When EL/EB is zero, use the following formula:
((NB-l)x256)+(EBxWE)
The following quick reference chart facilitate the programming of the Speed
Call List memory requirements. Locate the intersect point of the required
DN and list sizes to determine the number of words needed.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-.
.:
140 Memory
calculations
Speed Call Quick Reference Chart
List Size
DN Size
4
8
12
16
20
24
28
31
1
6
7
8
9
10
Ii
1 2
13
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
10
15
25
35
45
55
65
75
85
20
25
45
65
85
105
125
145
165
25
30
55
80
105
130
155
180
205
30
35
65
95
125
155
185
215
245
40
45
85
125
165
205
245
290
326
50
55
105
155
205
255
310
360
406
60
65
125
185
245
312
370
340
486 I.
70
75
145
215
290
362
430
500
568
75
80
155
230
310
402
460
538
608
80
85
165
245
330
442
490
576
648
90
95
185
280
370
462
556
646
728
100
105
205
310
410
512
616
716
808
200
205
412
615
820
1026
1226
1431
1612
250
255
511
765
1020
1284
1531
1787
2013
300
312
619
920
1226
1541
1841
2416
400
412
826
1226
1636
2055
2542
,2147
2863
500
512
1026
1531
2041
2570
3063
3573
4023
600
619
1234
1853
2708
3085
3678
4289
4827
700
719
1441
2147
2862
3599
4289
5004
5631
750
769
1541
2297
3062
3856
4594
5359
6033
800
826
1648
2452
3268
4113
4904
5720
6435
900
926
1855
2667
3678
4628
5515
6431
7240
1000
1018
1955
3050
4083
5142
6125
7146
8043
3220
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
s.
: ..
Memory calculations 141
Note 7 : The protected data store requirements for BARS (on a percustomer basis) are:
Release 4
137
+ 2.73 x (HNPA + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + 1NF’A)
+ RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4)+ FCAS
Releases 5 and 7
137
+ 2.73 x (HNF’A + NPA) + 2.73 x (1HNF’A + INPA)
+ RLx(8+ 3x:RLE)+ DMEx(3+ I/4)
+ FCAS+ SDRRx(3+ 2xSDE)+ ITGE
Releases
8 through 12
16
+ SUM+ RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DMEx(3+
+ FCAS+ SDRRx(3+ 2xSDE)+ ITGE
I/4)
._
Releases 13 and 14
BASICESN
+SUM+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DMEx(3+1/4)
+ FCAS + SDRR x (3 + 2 x SDE) + ITGE
Release 15
BASICESN
+SUM+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DMEx(4+1/4)
+ FCAS + SDRR x (3 + 2 x SDE) + ITGE
where:
[(lOxR)xxn]-1
SUM=
11 x
words
(lOxR)-1
j :-,:..:‘,:‘.
:<.L..”.: -: ,
1! “+-‘.v:;
n=
maximum level of tree (n > 0)
HNPA =
number of NXX in the home NPA of the
SL-1
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
142 Memory calculations
I =
the average number .of digits that must be
inserted as part of digit manipulation
NPA=
number of NPA (area codes) in the North
American dialing plan
lHNPA=
number of 1 + NXX in the home NPA of the SL-1
1NPA =
number of 1 + NPA (area codes) in the North
American dialing plan
R=
the rate of digits equipped in each level of the tree
(translator)
RL=
the number of route lists
RLE=
he average number of route lists entries per
route list
.
DME=
the number of distinct digit manipulation entries
(included the default 0th entry)
FCAS =
(N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[ 4 + (1OOP + 15)/16]
where:
N = the number of defined FCAS tables
M = the average number of NPA codes per table
P = the average number of first digit of NXX codes
SDRR =
Number of supplemental digit
restricted/recognized blocks defined for NPA,
NXX, LGC, SPN
SDE =
Average number of SDRR entries for each SDRR
block
ITGE =
9 x ITEI; where ITEI = the number of
Incoming Trunk Group Exclusion Index
BASICESN =
SIZE (ESN-DATA-BLoCK)+SIZE (NCTI-DATA-BLOCK
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
Memory calculations 143
129
+ 305 = 434
SIZE (ESNJ’RAN-BLOCK) = 1 I
This formula is based on the assumption that the IWA/NXX translation tree
is half full and distributed evenly. This should represent the typical case.
For more precise calculation, use NABS formula.
.
Note 8 : The protected data store requirements for NABS (on a percustomer basis)are:
Release 4
137 + 12x(1+ Al+ A2)+ 12x(A3+ A4)
+ 12x(1+ Bl+ B2)+ 12x(l33+ B4)
+ 4xRN+ RLx(8+ 3xRLE)+ DME
x(3+ I/4)+ LOCx6+ FCAS+ SCC
Releases 5 and 7
137 + 11x(1+ Al+ A2)+ llx(A3+ A4)
+ 11x(1+ Bl+ B2)+ llx(B3+B4)
+SDRRx(3+2xSDE)+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DME
x (3 + I/4) + LGC x 6 + FCAS + SCC + ITGE + MDID
Releases 8 through 12
16 + SUMl+ SUM2
+SDRRx(3+2xSDE)+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DME
x(~+I/~)+LGCX~+FCAS+SCC+ITGE+MDID
Releases 13 and 14
BASICESN + SUM1 + SUM2
+SDRRx(3+2xSDE)+BLx(8+3xRLE)+DME
x (3 + I/4) + LGC x 6 + FCAS + SCC + ITGE + MDID
Release 15
BASICESN + SUM1 + SUM2
+SDRRx(3+2xSDE)+BLx(8+3xRLE)+DME
x(~+I/~)+LGCX~+FCAS+
SCC+ITGE+MDID
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
.
144
Memory calculations
where:
SuIvll =
(SUM of network translator 1)
suM2=
(SUM of network translator 2)
SUM=
[(lOxR)xxn] -1
11x ____________________________wor&
(lOxR)- 1
II=
maximum level of tree (n > 0).
Al=
number of different first digit in network translator 1.
A2=
number of different sequence of the fist two digits in the
non l+ number in network translator 1.
A3=
number of different second digits in the l+
number in network translator 1.
A4=
number of different sequence of the second and third digits
in the l+ number in network translator 1.
Bl =
number of different first digit in network translator 2.
B2=
number of different sequence of the first two digits in the
non l+ number in network translator 2.
B3 =
number of different second digits in the l+
number in network translator 2.
B4=
number of different sequence of the second and third digits
in the l+ number in network translator 2.
R=
is the rate of digits equipped in each level of the tree
(translator).
RL=
the number of route lists.
RLE=
the average number of route lists entries per route fist.
DME=
the number of distinct digit manipulation entries (included
the default 0th entry).
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 145
I=
the average number. of digits that must be
inserted as part of digit manipulation.
LGC=
number of on-net or virtual locations.
FCAS =
(N + 1) + N(M + 1) + MN[ 4 + (1OOP + 15j/16]
where:
N = the number of defined FCAS tables
M = the average number of NPA codes per table
P = the average number of first digit of NXX codes
see =
Number of entries in the SCC table.
SDRR =
Number of supplemental digit restricted/recognized blocks
defined for NPA, NXX, LGC, SPN.
SDE =
Average number of SDRR entries for each SDRR. . block.
9 x ITEk where ITEI = the number of Incoming Trunk
ITGE =
Group Exclusion Index.
MDID =
(2 x number of total office codes) + (2 x number of total
DID ranges regardless of which office codes they belong
to). Maximum of 20 ranges or office codes can be defmed
per location code, (i.e., 1 office code and 20 ranges, or 20
office codes and 1 range for each office code).
BASICESN =
SIZE(ESN-DATA-BLOCK) + SIZE(NCTI-DATA-BLOCK)
305
= 434
129
+
Memory calculations
..
553-2201-151 Appendix 1
146 Memory calculations
Note 9 : Prior to Release 13, the protected data store requirements for CDP
(on a per-customer basis) are:
137+SCx2+RLx(8+3xRLE)+DMEx(3+1/4)
Releases 13 through 15
where:
SC=
number of steering codes
RL=
the number of route lists
RLE=
the average number of route lists entries per route
list
DME=
the number of distinct digit manipulation entries ..
I=
the average number of digits that must be
inserted as part of digit manipulation.
BASICESN =
SIZE(ESN-DATA-BLOCK) + SIZE(NCTL-DATA-BLOCK)
= 434
129
+
305
CDP Steering Codes also occupy SL- 1 DN tree spaces. This portion of data
store is calculated in DN tree formula (See Note 4).
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
L.
Memory calculations 147
Note 10 : The ACD-feature requires.the following additional data store
(total for system):
For ACD-C not equipped
(K~xDN)+(K~xPID)+AID+(K~xCUST)
.
Simplified
(46xDN)+
(12xPID)+ AID+ (3xCUST)
For ACD-C equipped
[Kl + (K2 x CCUST)] + (K3 x DN) + (K4 x PID) + AID + (K5 x CUST)
Simplified
[25 + (8 x CCUST)] + (46 x DN) + (12 x PID) + AID + (3 x CUST)
where the multiplication constants (Ki) are:
K1=25
size (I-ACD-IO-BLK) (=25).
K2=8
size (P-ACD-SCHEDBLK) (=8).
K3=46
@4-5)
size (P-ACDBLOCK) (=32)
+ ptr to blk from ACD LIST (=l)
+ word offset (ACD-POS-TN) (=13).
K3=47
(R7-8)
size (P-ACD-BLOCK) (=33)
+ ptr to blk from ACD LIST (=l)
+ word offset (ACD-POS-TN) (= 13).
K3=48
(Rw
size (l-ACD-BLOCK) (=34)
+ pointer to block from the ACD List (=l)
+ word offset (ACDPOS-TN) (=13).
K3=49
size (P-ACD-BLOCK) (=39)
+ pointer to block from the ACD List (=l)
+ word offset (ACD-POS-TN) (=13).
(Rw
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
148
Memoty calculations
K3=57
(R13-14)
size (PLACD-BLOCK), (40)
+ pointer to block from the ACD List (=l)
+ word offset (ACD-PQS-TN) (=16).
K4= 12
size (I-ACD-KEY-DATA) (=l 1)
+ store for ACD-POS-TN (=l).
K4= 14
(Rl3-14)
size (P-ACD-KEY-DATA) (= 13)
+ store for ACD-POS-TN (=l).
K5=3
header (ACD-LIST) (=l)
+ header (ACD-AGENT-ID-TBL) (=2).
and the variables are represented by:
AID = total no. of AGENT IDS (for the system)
CCUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C package
CUST = total no. of customers with ACD-C/D packages
DN = total no. of ACD DNs (for the system)
PID = total no. of AGENT POSITION S (for the system).
Note II: The protected store requirements for Group DND (on a percustomer basis) are:
l+Gx(l+M)
Release 13 through 15:
l+Gx(l+2xM)
where:
G = number of groups
M = number of members in each group (2 words per member for R13-14)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 149
No& 12 : The protehd store requirements for DISA (on a per-customer
basis) are:
l+(DNx6)
Release 13 through 15
l+(DNx7)-----l+(DNx7)
where:
DN = number of DISA-DNs.
Note 13 : The protected store requirements for Authorization Code (on a
per-customer basis) are:
..
1250 + (A x ((L/4 x 128) + 64)) + (I3 x (1018 + (C x 32)))
Releases 13 through 15:
1308 + (A x ((L/4 x 128) + 64)) + (B x (1018 + (C x 32)))
where:
L = digit length
T = total authcode
A = number of overfIow blocks
B = number of auth blocks
C = number of resolution blocks per auth block.
For L less than 4 or L greater than 7
A=(T/128)+ 1
B=C=O.
For L in the range of 4 - 7
A = ((0.2 x g/128 + 1)
B = ((0.8 x T)/looO + 1)
C=8
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-.
:. -
150 Memory calculations
Note 14 : History file buffeican be 1-64K.per customer option.
Note 15 : For System Speed Call List (XL) Head Table:
3 + NB/4 + NB (round NB/4 up)
NB (no. of blocks) = EL/EB (round any remainder up)
where:
EL = entries per list (given),
EB = entries per block, 256/?VE (round up remainder)
where:
WE = words per entry, DNS/4 (round up)
where: DNS is DN size (given).
Note 16 : IMS protected memory requirements:
APP-SIZE-TBL = 10 words
MSG-SIZETBL = 40 words
LTN-TN-TBL = 255 words
LTN-LINK-TBL = 65 words
Memory calculations
s.
553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 151
Note 17: New Fletible Code Restriction (NFCR) requires the following
memory requirements:
1) A 129 word block that contains:
(a) A 128 word table that contains the pointers to the.FRL block for
each route.
(b) A pointer to the tree root address table.
2) A table that contains the pointers to the NFCR trees. Its length is defined
by the maximum number of trees (defined in the customer data block).
3 ) Four words are required for each route that has defined FRL codes.
4) Storage for customer defined trees. Amount of memory used depends
on the size of the code restriction trees the customer has defined.
It is possible to calculate an upper bound for the amount of memory that a
tree is using by applying the following formula:
..
1) The INIT condition occupies 12 words, or 14 words in R12-14.
2) For each digit sequence after the INIT condition:
(a) If the digit sequence is greater than 1 digit, memory required = (3 x
number of digits) - 4.
(b) If the digit sequence has a count field, memory required for digit
sequence increases by 1.
(c) If the digit sequence is from a BYFS, memory required for digit
sequence increases by 1.
I
,...
,..
,
1
.
,
.:
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
152 Memory calculations
Note 28 : DTI/DLI Protect&l Data Store requirements:
Releases 4 and 5
12 words
PDD-BLOCK =
PAD-TABLE =
MISCELLANEOUS =
TOTAL=
36 words
2 words
50 words
Release 7
= PDD-BLOCK + (N x PADTI-TSETBLOCK) + (T x local network
d-1
=18+ (Nx lO)+ (TX 70)
Releases 8 through 15
= PDD-BLOCK + (N x PDTI-TSET-BLOCK) + (T + L) x local network
data+ (L x (P LOOP DLI + preallocated card data))
= 18+(NxlO)+ [(T+L)x 7O]+[Lx(19+
where:
144)]
N = the number of threshold sets
T = the number of DTI loops
L = the number of DLI loops.
Note 19 : The protected data store requirements for the modem pools on a
per route basis (Modem Data Block):
l+ (1xM)
where:
M = greatest member number in modem pool route
Other AMP data store requirements have been added to their respective
fields.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
s.
:
,
Memory calculations 153
Note 20 : The size of the protected multiple office code screening line
block is determined from the following:
2 words for each NXX code defined
2 words for each range defined (maximum_ 20 ranges perlocation code - 80
words pds).
Note 21 : Templates are incremented in blocks of 10 words.
Note 22 : The trunk block size is 11.5 words with ODAS,
or 14.5 words in Releases 10 and 12,
or 19.5 words in Releases 13 and 15.
Note 23 : Requirements for voice/data port are the same as an SL-1 basic
telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires:
Before Release 9:
(24 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same templateAfter Release 9:
(10 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template.
Note 24 : Requirements for voice/data port are the same as an SL-1 basic
telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires:
Before Release 9:
(24 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template.
After Release 9:
(12 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
154 Memory calculations
Note 25 : Requirements foi voice/data port-are the same as an SL- 1 basic
telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires:
Before Release 9:
(34 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones shariqg the same teniplate.
After Release 9:
(21+ # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template.
Note 26 : Requirements for voice/data port are the same as an SL-1 basic
telephone (Note 2) except the key layout portion of the template requires
(44 + # of non-key features)/# of telephones sharing the same template. For
M3000 data port, requirements are the same as an SL- 1 basic set (see Note
2).
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
Memory calculations 155
Note 27 : Protected-data store required by .the Multi-Tenant Service feature
includes the following:
1028 words per customer that enables Tenant Service for:
Releases 4,s and 7:
= size (P_TENANTJTRS)
(=644)
+ size (TEN-CPG-ORDLS) (=256)
+ size (RTE-CPG-ORDLS) (= 64)
+ size (CPG-DEFS) (= 64)
Releases 8-14:
= size (PmTENANT-FTRS) (=644)
+ size (TEN-CFG-ORDLS) (=256)
+ size (RT&CpG-ORDLS) (= 64)
+ size (CFG-DEFS) (=256)
32 words per Tenant access map
= size (ACCESS-ARRAY)
32 words per Outgoing Route access map
= size (ACCESS-ARRAY)
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
156 Memory calculations
Note 28 : Protected data store requirements for ATM schedule block are as
follows:
Releases 4,s and 7:
24+((9xNC+l)xNH)
Releases S-15:
24+((9xNC+l)xNH)+ 13xAR
where:
NC = Number of Customers.
NH = Number of hours to be scheduled.
AR = Number of routes to be tested.
..
Note 29 : For all machine types, the additional protected data store for a
virtual terminal (DS access TN or VMS access TN) is exactly the same as
for an SL-1 set, with one exception. For any of the two TN types, the Card
Block Component is dependent on the shelf/card to which the terminal is
assigned. The component is 0 if the TN is on a preallocated card, or 1.5
words otherwise. A preallocated card may be one of the following
shelf/cards: O/l - O/7, l/l - 1/8,2/l - 2/8 or 3/8 on a DLI loop. See Note 18.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
I
Y
Memory calculations 157
Note 30 : The protected data store requirement (in words) for VAS Data
Services per customer, for each customer that has at least one DSDN, is:
= DSDN-VASJBL + (DSDN-LIST x N)
16+
(39 + N)
where:
N = the number of VAS for which at least one DSDN is defined.
Releases 10 and 12
= DSDN-VAS-TRL + (DSDN LIST x N)
16+
(248 x N)
Release 14 and 15
= DSDN-VAS-TRL + (DSDN-LIST x N)
16 +
(76xN)
where:
N = number of VAS for which at least one DSDN is defined.
-
Note 31 : Requirements for a Voice/Data port are the same as an SL- 1
basic set (see Note 2), except that the key layout portion of the template
requires 34 + # of non-key features / # of sets sharing the same template.
For M2317 data ports, the requirements are the same as the SL- 1 basic set
(see Note 2).
,
-,
,’
!
..-;;
::.:.>t,
, - _ . . .
,:,-. ..- ..,. .:
_-,
_..:
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
.- I
158 Memory calculations
Note 32 : Protected data stdre requirements for CPND per system in words
is:
where:
C = number of customers
SL = number of non-PBX DNs with or without name defined
(including trunk routes, ACD ATIN, and SL- 1)
SP = number of single appearance PBX DNs with name defined
DIG = number of DIG Groups
* = 101 for 2-digit DIG Groups
N = Name length
NA = number of Names.
Note 33 : For each PR loop configured, add 5 words for the
P-PREP-BLOCK to the PTERM LOOP-BLOCK.
Memory calculations
..
553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
Memory calculations 159
Note 34 : Each system that has DCHIs shares P-DCH-TBL which has 16
words in length. Each DCHI consists of the following protected data blocks:
P-DCHBLOCK = 23 words
Releases 13 and 14:
P-DCH-BLOCK = 25 words
Release 15:
PDCH-BLOCK = 26 words
Protected call reference table = 1 + (24 x # of PRI loops controlled by
DCHI). If DCHI is in PRA mode, add the following:
Protected call reference table = 1 + (maximum number of ISL trunks
defined) if DCHI is in ISL mode
..
Protected call reference table = 1 + (24 x # of PRI loops controlled by
DCHI) + (maximum number of ISL trunks defined) if DCHI is in SHARED
mode.
Note 35 : For each ISA route configured for IFC = ESS4, add 2 words for
the ISA-SRVCBLOCK.
With Releases 14 and 15, if IFC = ESSY, add 4 words for the
ISA-SRVCBLOCK.
Note 36 : A pointer named ISA-SID-MTHPTR has been added to fix
memory. This pointer is set to nil when SID is not defined for ISDN routes.
A data block of 32 words is defined and accessed through this pointer if SID
is defined for at least one ISDN route in the system. This data block
contains pointer to SID tables for each customer. The structure mapping
onto this data block is ISA_(3uSTID_TPTR.
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-.
‘:’
160 Memory calculations
A data block of 64 words is allocated for each customer if at least one route
is defined to have SID. The structure mapping onto this data block is
ISA-SID-RT-LIST.
Note 37 : Protected ISL Trunk TN table = l+ maximum number of ISL
Trunks defined.
Note 38 : The protected customer data per customer defined is as follows:
B+(Xx@‘+A))
where:
P = Protected customer data block (255) (262 in Release 15)
A = auxiliary customer data (14)
B = 1000 for XN, XT, RT, and NT machines
320 for all other machine types
X = number of customer groups defined
If background terminal is equipped, an additional auxiliary data block is
allocated which requires 35 words. This brings the total requirement to 305
words.
Note 39 : No protected storage is required unless the system is equipped
with the Speed Call package (66) and the entry to MSCL prompt in Overlay
17 is greater than 0. In this case, the protected memory required for SCL
main header table is:
words required = N + (1 x A)
where:
N = 1 (number of header words)
A = number of SCL as defined in Overlay 17 (MSCL prompt)
.. : .‘ ,. ::-,_. :.- :.3
”‘.’ ‘.: :’ /7
Note 40 : For each customer, an additional 255 words is needed for
PREXI-SCLN in pool CDB (compool).
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-.
Memory calculations 161
Note 41 : The protected data store requirements for DTI2 is as follows:
DTI2-SYSTEM-DATA
DTI2-SCAT-NT
DTI2-SCTA
DTI2-FCADA-NT
DTI2J’CADA
9 words
16 words
16 words
16 words 16 words
Note 42 : There are 32 pointers to FTC protected structures. Each FTC
table has 90 words
Note 43 : There are 256 pointers to EFTC protected structures. Each
EFTC table has an additional 27 words.
Note 44: A bit is required in the customer data block to indicate EBLF
allowed/denied. A bit is required in the protected attendant block if
attendant consoles have the Console GFraphics Module (CGM) configured.
._
Additional memory is required only if EBLF is ON. 104 words are
allocated in the fixed protected memory even if EBLF is not used.
Words required:
x+((z-3)xyxll)
where:
x = number of customers with EBLF
y = average number of hundreds groups per customer
z = average DN length (4,5,6,7)
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
k.
162 Memory calculations
Note 45 : EOW requires the following inRelease 15:
per target table
per source table
per ACD DN
113 words
174 words
6 words
The words required for the source table are allocated for every target ACD
DN.
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
Attendant
Administration
AAB
Automatic Answerback
ACDA
ACD Basic
ACDB
ACD Advanced
ACDC
ACD Management Reoprts
ACDD
ACD Auxiliary data System
ACDR
AUTOVON CDR
AIOD
Automatic Identification od Inward Dial
AMP
Automated Modem Pooling
Automatic Number IdentificationANI
Route Selection
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
L’
164 List of terms
ANIR
ANl Route Selection
AOP
I
/
Attendant Overflow Position
ATVN
AUTOVON
AUTH
Authorization code
AWU
Automatic Wakeup
BACD
Automatic Call Distribution-Base
BARS
Basic Automatic Route Selection
BAUT
Basic Authorixation Code
BCSOB
SL- 1 Output Buffer
BGD
Background Terminal Facility
BQUE
Basic Queuing
BRTE
Basic Routing
CAB
Charge/Authorization Base Package
CAS
Centralized Attendant Service
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
List of terms 165
CASM
CAS Main
CASR
CAS Remote
CCBQ
Coordinated Call Back Queuing
CCBQCM
Coordinated Call Back Queuing to Conventional Mains
CDP
Coordinated Dialing Plan
CDR
Call Detail Recording
CDRE
CDR Expansion
CDRQ
Emergency Acces Enhancement (911 Option)
CFCT
Call Forward by Call Type
CFNA2
Call Fortward No Answer - Second Level
CHG
CDR with Charge Account
CLNK
CDR with Magnetic Tape
CMAC
ESN Communication Management Center
CPND
Call Party Name Display
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
166 List of terms
CPRK
Call Park
1
!
CTY
CDR TIT
CUST
Multi-Customer
DDSP
Digit Display SL- 1 Set
DHLD
Deluxe Hold
DI
Dial Intercom
DISA
Direct System Inward Access
DLDN
Departmental LDN
DND
Do Not Disturb
DNDG
DND Group
DNDI
DND Individual
DNIS
Dial Number Identification Service
DNXP
Directory Number Expansion
DRNG
Distinctive Ringing
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
c
List of terms 167
DSET
Digital Set M2000
DTI
Digital Trunk Interface
EES
END-to-End Signaling
EOVF
EWnhanced Overflow (NACD)
FCA
Forced Charge Account
FCBQ
Flexible Call Back Queuing
FTC
Flexible Tone and Digit Switch Control
GRP
Groupe Call
HIST
History File
HOT
Hot Line Services
Enhanced Hot Line
Flexible Hot Line
IAP3P
Integrated Services Digital Network Application Protocol
ICDR
Internal CDR Records
IDC
Incoming DID Digit Conversion
IMS
Integrated Messaging System
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
-.
._
:
:.
.
.‘.
‘....
1 6 8 List of terms
INTR
Intercept
ISA
Integrated Services Access
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISDN
Integrated Services Digital Network
ISL
Integrated Services Digital Network Signaling Link
IVMS
Integrated Voice Messaging System
LLC
Line Load Control
LMAN
ACD Load Management
LNK
Auxiliary Processor Link
LSEL
Line Selection
MCBQ
Network Queuing - Main
MCT
Malicious Call Trace
MOD
Music on Delay
MOH
Music on Hold
MR
Message Registration
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
List of terms 169
MSB
Make Set Busy
MUS
Music on Hold
MWC
Message Center
NARS
Network Automatic Route Selection
NAUT
Network Authorization Code
NCOS
Network Class of Service
NFCR
New Flexible Code Restriction
NSC
Network Speed Calling
NSIG
Network Signaling
NTRF
Network Traffic
NTWK
Network Ring Again
NXFER
Network Transfer
occ
Other Common Carriers
ODAS
Office Data Administration System
Memory calculations 553-2201-l 51 Appendix 1
..
‘..’
170
List of terms
OHQ
Off Hook Queuing
OPAO
Out-pulsing of Asterisk and Octothorpe
OPTF
Advanced Features
PBXI
PBX Interface/Digital Trunk Interface
PBXOB
Non SL-1 Output Buffer
PMSI
Property Management system Interface
PQUE
Priority Queuing
PRA
Primary Rate Access
RAN
Recorded Announcement
RESDB
Resident Debug
RMS
Room Status Service
ROA
Recorded Attendant Overflow Announcement
RPE
Remote Peripheral Equipment (1.5 Mb/s)
see
Special Common Carrier
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
..
: ..
List of.terms
171
SCI
Station Category Indication
SLP
Station Loop Preemption
SNR
Stored Number Redial
SR
Set Relocation
ssc
System Speed Call
ss5
500 Set Access to 2500 Set Features
SS25
2500 Set Features
TAD
Time and Date
TDET
Tone Detector
TENS
Multi Tenant Services
TOF
Time Overflow Queuing
TSET
Digital Set M3000 (Touchphone)
UMG
User-to-User Teleset Messaging
UST
User Status
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
172 List of terms
Memory calc&tions 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-.
‘2
List of terms 173
Memory calculations 553-2201-151 Appendix 1
-
SL-1
Generic Xl 1
Memory
calculations
Q 1984 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
December 1989
Printed in U.S.A.
SL-1
System options 21,51-, 61,71
Power engineering
Standard
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Power engineering
Publication number: 553-3001-l 52
Document status: Standard
Document release: 1 .O
Date: January 29,199O
.. .-,.:. ,-.
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1 .O
Power engineering 553-3001-152
. ..
III
About this document
This document describes the SL-1 System power and grounding architecture
for both AC and DC systems and provides guidelines for calculating system
power consumption as well as reserve power requirements.
References
For information about the power plant used with DC-powered system option
7 1, see the following publications:
- J2412A-Description, Engineering, Ordering Information, Installation,
Connections, Operation and Maintenance (167-2191-200)
- NT5CO3 Switched Mode Rectijier -48Vl5OA -Description, Maintenance
and Ordering Information PO673491 (169-2031-200)
See the SL-1 planning & engineering guide for
- Master index (553-3001-000)
- System overview
(553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
- System engineering
(553-3001-151)
- Power engineering
(553-3001-152)
- Spares planning
(553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering
:/
~
,. ::-. .A?‘.
:‘.‘.
--,.,
.;
5
AC power system description
This section describes the characteristics of the Meridian SL-1 system where
equipment columns are directly powered by commercial power.
The commercial power voltage is brought directly into the Pedestal Power
Distribution Unit. From there it is passed through separate wiring to the
individual modules in order to provide power to the module power supplies.
I.
Input power specifications
AC power supplies operate at a nominal 2081240 V. A typical system
operating from 208 V using four UEMs will draw 15-24 Amps, depending on
the configuration. These are fed from a central point in the pedestal, access to
these connections is provided and should be used to confirm that the line -_
voltage is within the required range as indicated in Tables 1 and 2.
Table 1
AC input specifications
Input
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
180
2081240
250
Frequency (Hz)
47
50160
63
Current to a pedestal
-
see note
24A
Voltage (V ac) at pedestal
Note: Current is dependent on equipment installed see “Operating power
calculation guidelines.”
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
6
AC power system description
Table 2
Transient
tolerance
Transient
tolerance
Amplitude
Duration
(See note)
Surges
Sags
Spikes
Notches
288 U ac
8.34 mS to 50 ms
276 U ac
50 mS to 500 ms
146Uac
8.34 mS to 50 ms
166Uac
50 mS to 500 ms
815 Upk
~4.17 ms
815 U pk to ‘408 U pk
4.17 to 8.3 ms
to ou
~4.17 mS
OUto206U
4.17 mS to 8.3 ms
Note: All transients are applied at the peak of the AC waveform.
.
Internal power distribution
Figure 3 shows the internal AC power distribution elements:
- Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
- Module to Module Harness
- Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)
- Module to Backplane Harness
- AC Power Supplies
The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to the Field Wiring Terminal
Block which is located in the Power Distribution Unit (PDU). From that
terminal block, the AC voltage passes into the Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
which has a single circuit breaker providing power to each of the four modules
and the cooling fans. The System monitor runs off a small AC Power Supply
which operates independent of the circuit breaker. Module to Module
distribution produces individual AC power to each module.
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
AC power system description 7
Figure 3
AC internal power distribution
Module. - PDU
Module to
Module
Harness
/
/
Field Wiring Terminal Block
SY:. Mon.? Wr.Sup.
Power engineering 553-3001-152
..
8
AC power system description
Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
The Pedestal PDU provides the following:
- The Field Wiring Terminal Block provides a connection point for the
external wiring that is brought into the Pedestal.
- The EM1 Filter provides filtering of the wires connecting back to the
Utility in order to meet FCC and DOC requirements.
- The Main Circuit Breaker provides both a single protection device for
overload currents and a single trip device to shut down the column in the
event of a thermal overload.
- The Internal Terminal Block provides individual power hand-off points so
that each Module is independently powered from the Pedestal in order to
minimize wire size.
.
- The Power/Signal Harness provides the Power and Signal interconnections
in the Pedestal for the Blower Unit and System Monitor.
..
- The System Monitor Power Supply (a small +5V power supply) provides
power to the System Monitor, even when the main circuit breaker has
tripped.
- The Output Power Harness provides the independent power connections
from the Pedestal to the Module above it.
-
Module to Module Harness
The Module to Module Harness provides the following:
- The Module Feed provides the independent power feed(s) to the Module
above itself.
- The Module PDU Feed provides the power feed to the Module PDU.
Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)
The Module PDU provides the following functions:
- The Circuit Breaker provides a Module level of current protection so that a
fault on one Module will be disconnected while the other Modules remain
functional.
_.,-..-, .e-,-. -3
- The MPDU to Backplane Harness feed provides the power feed to the
backplane harness which in turn provides power to the AC Power
Supplies through the backplane power connector.
Power engineering 553-3001-152
..
.,
AC power system description 9
Module to Backplane Harness
The Module to Backplane Harness provides the power to the AC Power
Supplies through the backplane power connector.
AC Power Supplies
There are three different power supplies that provide power to the Peripheral
Equipment, Common Equipment and Common/Peripheral Equipment
Modules. In addition, the Ringing Generator provides ringing voltage for the
Peripheral Equipment Modules.
At each shelf, the 208/240 V ac is received through the backplane distribution
harness and converted to the necessary voltages for the individual module.
Circuit breakers are located on each MPDU to provide for safe operation and
easy maintenance.
The output voltages and currents of the power supplies are listed in Tables 3
brough 6.
fable 3
Deripheral
Equipment Power Supply
NTBWGAA
;
::
output v
Output A
+5.1 v
28 A
+8.5 V
4.0 A
+lO v
0.5 A
-lov
0.5 A
+15 v
17A
-15 v
15 A
-48V
7.7 A
. . .
y.:::..:.,.,
‘:-; ,2:-j;. i
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
10
AC power system description
Table 4
Common Equipment Power Supply
NT8D29AA
Table 5
Ringing
output v
output A
+5.1 V
60A
+12v
2.5 A
-12 v
l.OA
Generator
NT8021 AA
Output VNA
Output F
70 V ac/8 VA
25150 Hz
80 V acl8 VA
25150 Hz
06Vaxf6VA
20125 Hz
output v
Output A
- 150v
0.200 A
Power engineering 553-3001-152
..
AC power system description 11
Table 6
Common/Peripheral Equipment
Pow&
Supply
Nl7D14AA
output v
OuJput
+5.1 V
60A
+8.5 V
2.5 A
+12
l.OA
-12
0.75 A
+15v
10A
-15 v
IOA
-48 V
4.75 A
-150 v
0.13 A
output VIVA
Output F
86Vacf5VA
20 Hz
A
External power distribution and ground connections
.-_
The external distribution for AC powered systems is very simple. No
additional equipment is required; simply connect to an AC source of power.
One 208 or 240 volt circuit with 30 amps protection (circuit breaker or fuse)
should be used to feed each pedestal.
Figure 4 shows the important grounding connections and the use of the ACEG
(AC Equipment Ground) or IGB (Insulated Ground Bus). For a general
discussion of the grounding philosophy, see the section “System grounding.”
Figures 5 through 8 for AC distribution in this section are shown for
connection to standard utility power. If an Uninterruptible Power System
(UPS) is used, refer to the later section on AC reserve power.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
12
AC power system description
Figure 4
Grounding and equalizing nodes
-----H--s------- 1
9
Building ground
rod
EaZh
hems:
1.
An equalizing node for the Meridian SL-1 system may be obtained through the ACEG
the AC panel. ff isolation as per NEC 384-127 (exception 1) cannot be provided,
an alternate low impedance connection to the building ground may be required.
In either case there are many constraints which must be observed. such as:
2,3 The NEC and CEC require exposed metal (Meridian 1 cabinet) be grounded by an
ACEG
Stray connections to a foreign ground will bypass the single point concept.
4.
In high rise buildings large potentials can exist between an ACEG and other
grounds including building steel.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
AC power system description 13
General notes for AC figures
,:
c.
::,
:I
:,
,, ..,
i....,
.. :.-I
..!,
;:;::
,“:-:-‘;
Permanent connection to Branch Circuit When conduit or a raceway is
used it should be metal and regardless of the type, it must contain an insulated
ground wire (green), 6 AWG or larger.
Cord connection to Branch Circuit A separate safety ground is always
required when removable line cords are used for the following reasons:
- a telephone wire could contact AC elsewhere in the building while the cord
is unplugged (during installation)
- to minimize hazards from lightning transients when unplugged
- to minimize the effects of stray grounds (pedestal to floor RS-232 links to
monitors) during normal operation
The additional safety ground must be 6 AWG or larger, preferably insulated
and must be connected from the pedestal Frame Ground to the Service Panel
..
Ground Bus
One 30 Amp circuit per pedestal is required. Isolation as required by NEC
250-74 and 384-27 (Exception 1) is preferred.
Single Point Ground (SPG) and Isolated Ground Bus (IGB) The SPG in
this grounding scheme is the Equipment Grounding Terminal Bar in the AC
distribution panel (ACEG). If this bar is isolated from the distribution panel,
as is recommended, then it is referred to as an IGB. In the following figures,
the preferred method using an ACEG is illustrated.
Logic Return (LR) wiring and Logic Return Equalizer (LRE) location When
multiple columns are present or where links will be made to existing SL-1
equipment, the LRs of the different columns must be joined. See System
installation procedures (553-3001-210). An LRE (a bar or plate) in the
immediate vicinity allows the LRs to be joined to a single equalizing point. A
6 AWG conductor then connects the LRE to the IGB in the AC panel.
For these multiple column applications, the LRE is typically located in a
nearby rack, overhead trough or under a raised floor, It must be insulated
from its support structure.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
14
AC power system description
Note: This single point equalizing is reqmred because communication
between modules that are not in the same physical line-up would put
small amounts of DC on the AC (green wire) ground. Likewise residual
AC voltages would be superimposed (longitudinally) on the logic. There
is a only a few volts of common mode rejection capability on these lines.
Refer also to the System Grounding section later in this document.
120 V receptacles and cord or conduit items in the figures are used only as
required.
Single column AC powered system
A single column system can be easily powered as shown in Figure 5.
Figure 5
Single-column
distribution
AC in incl. main
grouncl )
cord or conduit
as required \
208i24OV
receptacle
Nota Internal strap from LR to FG
Power
engineering
..
.:
..,..
:
553-3001-152
Y
g;c/:
-;: ,:, --$
F”‘:
.:“>,
‘L!y
-3
AC power system description 15
Multi-column AC powered system
A multi-column system (with one or more columns physically adjacent to
each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 6.
Figure 6
Multi-column
distribution
AC in
AC service
panel .
120v
receptacle-
!
’
ACEG
cord or
conduit
receptacles
Note 1: This LRE may be a simple insulated connector , or if
_-
preferred, run the LR conductors separately to the
ACEG.
Power
..
engineering
553-3001-152
.:.
::.
16
AC power system description
Multi-row AC powered system
A multi-row system (with several rows of one or more columns physically
adjacent to each other) can be powered as shown in Figure 7.
!
Figure 7
Multi-row
distribution
SL-1 System
PE
JUNCT
CPU
..
SL-1 System
PE
PE
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
AC power system description
17
Extended systems . .‘...’ : ..‘.*
_,..:. ,L
.: ”
p.:
y..y+;‘j
.\..~...‘:;;
..y-,-*.r,
A typical large extended system with both new and existing equipment is
shown in Figure 8.
Figure 8
External distribution for AC systems
AC in
SL-1 System
H
I I II
Note 3
+
Note
-1
+Battery
plant
---
E iX istir
Rect/Dist cabinet
(QCA13)
Notes:
1. The rectifier cabinet will contain a bus for terminating BRs and LRs, but
if the runs are too long, a looal LRE may be needed. See ‘General notes
for AC figures.” It should still oonneot to this bus.
2. This conductor and the safety ground must be 6 AWG minimum but
may be larger, depending on battery fusing.
3. May be run independently to ACEG.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
18
AC power system description
-.-
,._--._. r.i;
..
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
..
,
..
.
.I
19
DC power system description
This section outlines the characteristics and requirements for the DC auxiliary
power that the system is connected to.
Input power specifications
The DC supply chosen must accect the calculated current drain and operate
I.
within the following specifications:
Table 7
input specifications
I
Input
Pedestal
Batlery
-40.0 to -56.5
-
-42 to -56.5
Expected nominal (with 23
sealed cells)
-
-51.75
Expected nominal (with 24
sealed cells)
-
-54.00
Noise (max C msg)
-
32 dBrnC
Maximum range
Expected nominal (with 24
stationary cells)
-52.08
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
I
C.
:
20 DC power system description
Internal power distribution
Figure 9 shows the internal DC power distribution elements:
- Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
- Module to Module Harness
- Module to Backplane Harness
- DC Power Converters
The power cables enter the Pedestal and connect to an internal terminal block
located in the pedestal. From there, the DC voltage enters the Power
Distribution Unit (PDU) which has five circuit breakers, one for each of the
four modules and one for the cooling fans. The System monitor runs off a
DC-to-DC converter. Module to Module distribution brings individual DC
power to each module similar to AC distribution.
Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
The Pedestal PDU provides the following:
- The Field Wiring Terminal Block provides a connection point in the
bottom of the Pedestal for the external wiring.
- The Circuit Breakers provide individual Module protection devices for
Module overload currents and a single trip function to shut down the
Stack in the event of a thermal overload.
- The Internal Terminal Block provides individual power hand-off points so
that each Module is independently powered from the Pedestal in order to
minimize wire size.
- The Power/Signal Harness provides the Power and Signal connections in
the PDU for the Blower Unit and System Monitor.
- The System Monitor Power Supply (a small +5V DC-DC Converter)
provides power to the System Monitor, even when all of the Circuit
Breakers have been tripped.
- The Output Power Harness provides the independent power connections
from the Pedestal to the Module above it.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
DC power system description 21
Figure 9
DC internal power distribution
I
Top Cap
I
Module to
> Module
..: .
Internal
..-.:.
:/
:
--..
> ; : ; :
::...: ..,. Ii
,,.‘/
Field Wiring Terminal
Block
Y
FGND
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
22 DC power system description
Module to Module Harness
The Module to Module Harness provides the following:
- The Module Feed provides the independent power feed to the Modules
above itself.
- The Module Harness Feed provides the power feed to the Module
backplane Harness.
Module to Backplane Harness
The Module to Backplane Harness provides the power feed to the backplane
connector which in turn provides power to the DC Power Converters.
DC Power Converters
Three different DC Power Converters provide power to the Peripheral
Equipment, Common Equipment and Common/Peripheral Equipment
Modules. The Ringing Generator provides ringing voltage for Peripheral
Equipment Modules.
At each shelf, -48 V is received through the backplane distribution harness
and converted to the necessary voltages for the individual module. Switches
are located on each converter to provide for safe operation and easy
maintenance. With separate Module breakers located in the Pedestal PDU, theModule Power Distribution Unit (MPDU) is not necessary.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
C.
DC power system description
23
The output voltages and currents of the power converters are listed in Tables 8
through 11.
Table 8
Peripheral Equipment Converter
I
NT6D4OAA
Output v
Output A
+5.1 v
28A
+8.5 V
4.0 A
+lO v
-10 v
0.5 A
0.5 A
+15 v
17A
-15 v
l5A
-48v
7.7 A
Table 9
Common Equipment Converter
I
NT6D41 AA
output v
Output A
+5.1 v
+12 v
60 A
3.5 A
-12v
l.OA
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
: ..
.:
24 DC power system description
Table 10
Ringing Generator
Nl7W3AA
Output VNA
Output. F
7 0 V act1 6 V A
20/25/50 Hz
8 0 V acfl6 V A
20/25/50 Hz
8 6 V at/l 6 V A
20/25/50 Hz
output v
output A
-150 v
0.200 A
Table 11
Common/Peripheral
Equipment
Converter
Nl7DO4AA
output v
output A
+5.1 v
5aA
+8.5 V
2.5 A
+12
l.OA
-12
0.75 A
+15 v
1OA
-15 v
1OA
-48V
4.75 A
-150 v
0.2 A
Output VIVA
Output F
70 V acll6 VA
20/25/50 Hz
80 V acll6 VA
20/25/50 Hz
86 V acil6 VA
2Ol25150 Hz
Power engineering 553-3001-152
v
DC power system description 25
External power distributioh and grounckonnections
The power plants shown in the following ‘figures are typical but there are
many variations possible for the item labeled “Rect/Dist” It could be existing
customer equipment or a system that Northern Telecom either supplies or
recommends. In any case, the rectifier and @tribution equipment are
required; the batteries are optional.
Note: The NT6D52 Switched Mode Rectifier is a QRF12 mounted
within an EM1 enclosure.
In all cases it will be necessary to carefully plan ahead. Refer to the chapter
entitled “Engineering and configuration guidelines.”
Figures 10 through 13 also show the important grounding connections and the
use of the IGB (Insulated Ground Bus). For a general discussion of the
grounding philosophy, see “System grounding.”
General notes for DC figures
Permanent Connection of the rectifier(s) to Branch Circuit When conduit
or a raceway is used it should be metal and regardless of the typejt must
contain an insulated ground wire (green), 6 AWG or larger.
Cord Connection of the rectifier(s) to Branch Circuit A separate safetyground is always required when removable line cords are used for the
following reasons:
- a telephone wire could contact AC elsewhere in the building while the cord
is unplugged (during installation)
- to minimize hazards from lightning transients when unplugged
- to minimize the effects of stray grounds (pedestal to floor RS-232 links to
monitors) during normal operation
This additional safety ground must be 6 AWG or larger, preferably insulated
and must be connected from the pedestal Frame Ground to the Logic Return
Equalizer (with Northern Telecom power units). With customer provided
power, the safety ground must go directly to the ACEG. See Figure 12.
It is preferred that the outlets for rectifier powering be isolated according to
NEC 250-74 and 384-27 (Exception 1).
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
-.
..:
‘.
I
.
.
26 DC power system description
Single Point Ground (SPG) and Isolated Ground Bus
(lGB) The SPG in
this grounding scheme is the AC Equipment Grounding bar in the AC
distribution panel (ACEG). If this bar is insulated from the distribution panel,
as is recommended, then it is referred to as an IGB. In the following figures,
the preferred methods for using an ACEG and an IGB are illustrated.
Logic Return (LR) wiring and Logic Return Equalizer (LRE) location
When multiple columns are present or where links will be made to existing
SL-1 equipment, the LRs of the different coiurnns must be joined. Refer to
System insfuflation procedures (553-3001-210). When using a Distribution
Unit such as the QBLlS, QCA13 and most others, the existing Battery Return
(BR) bus will serve double duty as the LRE. The logic return wire must be
run in conduit to the LRE. A 6 AWG conductor then connects the BR (LRE)
to the ACEG in the AC panel.
This single point equalizing is required because communication between
modules that are not in the same physical line-up would put small amounts of
DC on the AC (green wire) ground. Residual AC voltages would be
‘superimposed (longitudinally) on the logic. There are a only a few volts of
common mode rejection capability on these lines. Refer to “System
grounding.”
120 V receptacles and cord or conduit items in the figures are used as
required.
Junction Box
A junction box close to the pedestal may be required
depending on the wire size required between the pedestal and the distribution
point. See the chapter entitled “Power conductors.”
Power engineering 553-3001-152
s.
: ..
-.-
D C p o w e r s y s t e m description 27
Figure 10
Multi-column distribution with NT6D52 and ‘QBLl5
AC in
AC service
6 AWG BWLR ref
AC conduit
receptacle(s)
NT7Di 2 rack
EJofe 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit. BR(+) and LR go to the
positive bus bar in the QBL15; BAT (-) connects to the appropriate fuse in the
QBL15.
hlofe 2: May be run independently to ACEG.
;
. . ..: .
._..
,-“., ‘. c;
,,~ .._:.:.,~,:
,’
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
28 DC power system description
Figure 11
Multi-column distribution with QCA13
SL-1 System
:.:.:.:.:.:~<:~ y :$$$$ggg #y .;;;$@
.........
::$c?~::~.:~& :, _ .:*.:.:
. ..,.,. . .....,:.,. . .2‘. .,.:,... . , .y: : . :~&*:+x
~
re-pt=ies\
: :j:i-:i:.:.:.:.:.:.:.:.: : : #g$.J.,.>:.~:..::..:.:~y.,,.~~.,,~.,.~.,.~~.~ : . ,: : , i%?cw~~
$j$g$p$
AC service panel
120”
.
A(> in
‘~.~
WA13 RectIDist
cabinet
Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit.
BAT(-) connects to the appropriate fuse in the QCA13.
Power
engineering
BR(+) and LR go to LRE;
553-3001-152
..d
,
DC Power system description 29
Figure 12
Multi-column distribution with
QBLl2 customer power
AC in
SL-1 System
y
7
.A. . . . . .. . . . . . . : . . . . . . . . . < A.. . , . . A . . .: . . . . . . .
...
AC service
fjanel
I
120v
receptacle+
ACEG 4
AC conduit
Customer: Rectifier/Battery plant
Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable endosed in conduit. BFi(+) and LR go to the
QBL12 then go to a customer provided LRE.
BAT(-) connects to the appropriate
fuse in the QBL12.
Note 2: In the case of customer provided power, the SL-1 frame requires a direct
connection to the ACEG. Additionally, the customer must make the connection
between the positive bus bar and the ACEG.
.., ..A
. .. . .i.
.._..,
r .-... .
c:-. : :-.:;*.
1 . . - . . . . .,
.;.:p;
.,
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
I
C’
30 DC power system description
Figure 13
Extended systems
SL-1 System
AC service
rianel
T
120v
receptacles W
’
m
ACFr, -1
,.-a7
Note 1
X-1
\I
~~
-tIIIII
11111
FiAWr,
11
BR/LRE
(Ground - ]
window)
Fa
-RecVDist cabinet
(WA1 3)
Note 1: This is a 3 conductor cable enclosed in conduit.
LRE; BAT(-) connects to the appropriate distribution fuse.
Note 2: May be run independently to ACEG.
Power engineering 553-3001-152
BR(+) and LR go to
31
System grounding
Proper grounding is essential to system operation. The SL-1 system requires
a single-point ground. Proper grounding is required for trouble-free operation
and for the safety of personnel. The DC resistance of the conductor joining
the SL-1 system system ground reference to the main building ground should
be as close to zero as possible. The maximum total resistance from an SL-1
System pedestal to the main building ground cannot exceed 0.5 ohms, The
external earth ground should meet NEC/CEC requirements.
Lack of proper grounding can result in an installation that is not protected
from lightning or power related faults and does not provide an optimum path
for residual AC or DC currents. This may cause:
-.- Hazards for personnel working on or using the equipment
- Various service interruptions
- Excess noise on analog circuits
- High bit error rate on digital circuits
Note: All voice and data lines leaving or entering the SL- 1 system
which mn external to the building must have fault protectors that connect
directly to earth ground. This is not the ground being discussed here.
;
,: _ :.:::
j::.y.;.
j
:
-y..;
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
32 System grounding
Single Point Ground
-
This system does not, by design, require an isolated AC ground (IG) system
(although local codes may require it). The system does require a single point
ground (SPG) system. The SPG is needed because several conductors are
used as returns. These include battery returns (BR) and logic returns (LR).
Logic return is the name used to bring this particular return out of the pedestal.
But, internally, several other internal ground returns (also called analog
ground or talk battery return) are connected to the LR.
In its simplest form, the SPG may be the Isolated Ground (IG) bus or AC
Equipment Ground (ACEG) bus in the AC panel. This can be implemented if:
- The electrical code allows isolated grounds (as per NEC 384-27 exception
1. in the USA).
- This ground bar located in the AC panel has sufficient terminal points.
- There is no non isolated communication links to existing PBX or other
communication equipment.
Using an Isolated Ground bus is often a lower cost method but is not allowed
by all telcos and may be prohibited by local ordinances. An alternate ground
will be needed where an AC panel with an IG bus cannot be provided. When
an alternate SPG is used or where there are too many return conductors to
terminate on an IG bus in the AC panel, one or more ground collector nodes -may be required. A grouping of like returns, prior to attaching to the SPG
window is preferred to many long runs of smaller diameter cable. See “List
of terms” for an explanation of these ground nodes.
LRE A Logic Return Equalizing bus (copper plate or bar) is needed on multicolumn systems where the IG bus in the AC panel is:
- not being used because of local electrical code requirements
- too far removed from the pedestals being served
- too small (insufficient connection points)
- not expected to be the best ground available (for example, it is known to be
noisy or there is a more direct ground connection)
When the LRE function is served by something like an ACIG bus or the LRB
bus is also used to terminate system returns other than logic returns, there can
be confusion over terms. In general, large spread out systems require a starPower engineering 553-3001-l 52
,>. .. .d.T.
.,. . ,:1,
‘,.y:.
2: _.
..+- ‘:-3
+.
System grounding 33
like ground system with local ground references like the LRE and ACIG
coming together at a main ground window, while small systems tend to use a
ground bar or plate for several purposes and it ends up taking on the name of
it’s primary function.
Additional requirements
The following must also be observed to implement the single-point ground
concept:
- All ground conductors must be identified in accordance with local codes
and terminated in a manner that is permanent, resulting in low impedance
connections.
- Terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance during
the life of the installation.
- All grounding conductors must be continuous with no splices or junctions
and tagged, “DO not remove or disconnect.” They should alsoI. be
insulated against contact with foreign grounds.
- Grounding conductors must be no-load, noncurrent carrying cables under
normal operating conditions.
- The use of building steel as part of the ground system (in the series path)
is not recommended. However, in a steel-framed building, the SL- 1
System main ground interface must be referenced to structural steel (either on the same floor or within one floor) in order to minimize
lightning hazards.
Isolated ground topology
A dedicated Isolated Ground (IG) bus bar is required with this method. This
IG bus is located in the ac panel and serves as the ground window. It is used
for all AC (green wire) grounds as well as logic returns. It also
accommodates a conductor which references to the (+) battery bus in a DC
system. An alternate form of this isolated topology is to use one or more
isolated equalizing bars external to the AC panel but which connect to ground
exclusively through the AC IG bus.
Isolated orange outlets are required (as per h!EC 250-74 exception 4).
Grounding conductors shall be routed with the phase conductors (Article
300-20). All ground wiring for IG receptacles are to be terminated on the
dedicated IG bus according to applicable codes (complies with NEC 384-27).
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
34 System grounding
Non-isolated ground topology
In a non isolated system the AC equipment ground (ACEG) connects to the
metal panel, and the associated conduit may also contact various structural
metal. This ground alone is not adequate for the SL-1 system. A true SPG
system will not be possible, but a dedicated ground conductor which connects
to the main building ground is then used for the main ground window to
terminate logic returns and reference the (+) battery bus. Frame grounds will
connect to the ACEG.
Power engineering 553-3001-152
c.
Operating power requirements
Introduction
This section contains:
- power consumption data for both circuit packs and full modules
- guidelines and methods to help you determine total system power
I.
requirements, for both AC and DC systems
Circuit pack power consumption
The power consumption of all currently-supported peripheral equipment
circuit cards is given in Tables 12 and 13.
All of the power data is stated in Watts for simplicity, with conversion to-AC
or DC current occurring only at the last step in the calculation. In addition, all
of the stated numbers have already taken the average efficiency of the Module
power converters into account.
The traffic assumptions used in these figures are 25% active (9 CCS) for
digital and analog lines, and 100% active (36 CCS) for trunks. Note that the
power consumption of digital line cards does not vary greatly with traffic, as it
may with analog line cards.
j
_
.“..
1.. ^. _ .,
.,c--.-..a,
,_ .:. .,._ .,:: ;:
:
._.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
.:
.,
..:
36 Operating power requirements
Table 12
NTBD37 Intelligent peripheral
equipment’powe;
consumption
Typical
power (Watts)
Circuit pack
NT8DOl AC Controller-4
3
NT8DOlAD Controller-2
32
NTBD02AA Digital LC
28
NT8D03AA Analog LC
20
NT8DOSAA Analog/t&g Waiting LC
20
NT8Dl4AA Universal Trunk
36
NT8D15AA E&M Trunk
34
NTBD16AA Digitone Receiver
7
2
Table 13
NT8D13 Peripheral equipment power consumption
Circuit pack
Typical
power (Watts)
QPC71 F
2.5
QPCl92B
12.0
QPC250B
2.5
QPC297
7.1
QPC422A
10.9
QPC430E
14.8
QPC432C
10.2
QPC449D
15.6
QPC450E
7.0
QPC578D
24.6
QPC594D
32.8
QPC659C
40.4
QPC723A
14.8
QPC789A
26.4
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
‘.
:
i
Operating power requirements 37
Module power consumption
The typical and worst case power consumption data for each fully configured
module are shown in Table 14.
The “typical power” data is generally adequate for use in .system power
engineering calculations, since it is representative of most systems with
Modules fully loaded (configured) with cards, and under moderate traffic
conditions.
The “maximum power” dam is shown for reference and planning purposes
when needed, and was calculated for each module based on a fully-loaded
card cage, in the worst-possible operational configuration (in terms of power
consumption), with each card consuming typical power, plus 10% added
margin. For example, the maximum power consumption for the NT8D37
Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module was based on a configuration of
sixteen NT8D14AA Universal Trunk cards, all under 100% traffic conditions,
along with a Controller card and additional power margin.
..
Table 14
SL-1 System UEM power consumption
Power consumptbn (Watts)
Module
Typical
NT6D39
CPUMetwork
400
4 2 0 _-
NT6D44
Meridian Mail
400
450
NT8Dll Common/Peripheral Equip.
500
690
NT8D13
Peripheral Equipment
400
575
NT8D34
CPU
300
335
300
325
0
0
NT8D35 Network
NT8D36
Junctor
NT8D37
Peripheral Equipment
550
720
NT8D47
Remote Peripheral Equipment
300
350
50
80
Pedestal (Blowers)
i
‘i
.::
,
i
!
:
,.
.
,
::.:.
.-::<
:..
_ . ..~..
,~.
.
.;..
,
Maximum
. .
i...
.__,
.“.
_I
.L.
1
.
..:,
Power engineering 553-3001-152
.u
.:
38
Operating power requirements
System power calculation guidelines
The SL- 1 system was designed so that there would be no restrictions as a
result of power or thermal limitations. In other words, any card can go in any
slot, and all modules can be filled to capacity with any (logically) valid
combination of cards, with no engineering rules. _
.-i’
Two system power calculation methods are shown below. For configuring
rectifiers as well as configuring reserve power, it is recommended to use
typical current drain values.
“Wired-for” method
This method is based simply on the number of modules and columns in the
system, regardless of how many cards are initially equipped. This method will
insure that the external power supply will have adequate capacity under all
conditions and all possible growth scenarios within the modules installed.
Using Worksheet A, simply enter the quantity of each module, multiply by the
power per module, and add up the total power. To calculate the current drain,
divide by the nominal voltage. AC current is calculated by dividing 230 V ac
nominal. DC current is calculated by dividing 52 V dc nominal. Both typical
and maximum current may be calculated.
“As-equipped” method
.-
This method provides a way to tailor the system power supply more closely to
the actual power consumption of the system as installed. The method is to
take the Common Equipment power consumption as a constant, then add the
power consumption for the actual PE cards equipped (or planned) from Tables
12 and 13.
Using Worksheet B and C, enter the quantity of each circuit pack, multiply by
the power per card, and add up the total power. Enter these numbers into
Worksheet D, and follow the same steps used above. AC current is calculated
by dividing 230 V ac nominal. DC current is calculated by dividing 52 V dc
nominal. Both typical and maximum current may be calculated.
Notes on AC vs. DC systems
To calculate current drain at values other than the nominal values given in the
worksheets, simply divide by the desired nominal value. For example,
208 V ac or 42 V dc.
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
..
.‘..’
::
Operating power requirements 39
For calculations normally done in apparent or complex power (such as AC
wire and panel size, UPS rating for AC reserve power, etc.), simply divide the
total real power (in Watts) by the typical system power factor of 0.6 to obtain
the complex power (in VA).
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
.. ..
40 Operating power requirements
Worksheet A
System power consumption - “Wired for”
Typical
M o d u l e xOtv P o w e r =
NT6D39
x400=
x420=
NT6D44
x400=
x450=
NT8Dll
x500=
x690=
NT8D13
x400=
x 575 =
NT8D34
x300=
NT8D35
x300=
x325=
NT8D37
x550=
x720=
NT8D47
x300=
x350=
x50=
x80=
P e d e s t a l s
Typical Power (Watts) =
.
.
x 335 =
.
.-
.
Max. Power (Watts) =
AC System Current Drain (Amps ac)
Nominal:
Typical Power / 230=
Max. Power I230 =
.
DC System Current Drain (Amps dc)
Nominal:
Power
Typical Power / 52 =
engineering
Max. Power / 52 =
553-3001-152
.
.
:
Operating power requirements 41
Worksheet B
NT8D13 Power calculation
Circuit Pack
Qtv
x Power =
QPC71F
x 2.5 =
QPC192B
x 12.0 =
QPC250B
x 2.5 =
QPC297
-x 7.1 =
QPC422A
x 10.9 =
QPC430E
x 14.8 =
QPC432C
x 10.2 =
QPC449D
x 15.6 =
QPC450E
x 7.0 =
QPC578D
x 24.6 =
QPC594D
x 32.8 =
QPC659C
x 40.4 =
QPC723 A
x 14.8 =
QPC789A
x 26.4 =
Total NT8Dl3
Power (Watts)=
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
42 Operating power requirements
Worksheet C
NT8D37 Power calculation
I
Circuit Pack
otv
x Power =
NT8DOlAC
x32=
NT8DOlAD
x32=
NT8DO2AA
x28=
NTaDo3AA
x20=
IYT’8DO9AA
x20=
NT8D 14ti
x36=
NT8DlSAA
x34=
NT8D16AA
x7=
Total NT8D37 Power (Watts)=
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
C.
.
Operating power requirements 43
Worksheet D
System Power Consumption - “As equipped”
.
.
:,
.-...\..
. .._._
. .
;‘:
,“.z;;‘23
Typical
x P o w e r =
Otv
..
_.. ,. ,_ I
f
._I
.:
Mod&
Maximum
x Power =
otv
NT6D39
x400=
x420=
NT6D44
x400=
x450=
NTSDll
x500=
x690=
NTSD13
(from Worksheet B) =
(from Worksheet B) =
NTSD34
x300=
x335=
NTSD35
x300=
x 325 =
NT8D37
x300=
x350=
x50=
x80=
Typical Power (Watts) =
Max. Power (Watts) =
P e d e s t a l s
_’
.
(from Worksheet C) =
(from Worksheet C) =
NTSD47
I.
.-
AC System Current Drain (Amps ac)
:
Nominal:
Typical Power / 230=
Max. Power / 230 =
DC System Current Drain (Amps dc)
‘:.,
.I
-::.:.-. .>.
.::
:’ :_.:; y;,r;
Nominal:
Max. Power / 52 =
Typical Power / 52 =
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
.“.
:.
-.
.
.
:.
:
44 Operating power requirements
Upgrades to existing itistallations
Total power consumption of an installed system can be determined in several
different ways. Two methods are listed below, in order of decreasing
accuracy.
- Measure current drain for the complete installation over at .least a twoweek period under actual operating conditions. Determine peak current
drain from these measurements.
- Measure idle (or near idle) current dram for the complete installation.
Estimate peak current drain by multiplying the number of idle amperes by
1.5.
When adding or upgrading equipment, use either of these methods to
determine existing current drain/power consumption. Use the guideline in this
document to determine the added power consumption. The existing power
plant may have to be replaced or its capacity increased to accommodate the
additional power requirements. As always, be sure to provide sufficient __
capacity to accommodate planned growth of the SL-1 System.
Upgrades to existing systems may use either AC or DC equipment. Existing
capacity, reserve power requirements, and available floor space are some of
the factors to consider.
Thermal
considerations
The maximum power dissipation in the form of heat for each UEM is listed in
Table 15. These figures apply to both AC and DC powered systems. The
power figures listed here are different than those shown in previous tables for
system power consumption, since some of the power, especially for peripheral
equipment, is distributed out to the loops and sets and is not dissipated within
the UEM itself. Table 16 shows the maximum heat dissipation for some of
the external DC power equipment supplied by Northern Telecom.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
.’ _ -’
Operating power requirements 45
Table 15
SL-1 system heat dissipation
Heat dissipation
Module
..
..
Watts
BTUlhr
NT8Dll Common/Peripheral
Equipment
450
1530
NT6D39
CPU/Network
400
1360
NT8D34
CPU
300
1020
NT8D35
Network
300
1020
NT8D13
Peripheral Equipment
300
1020
NT8D37
Peripheral Equipment
425
1450
NT8D47 Remote Peripheral
Equipment
300
1020
NT6D44
Meridian Mail
400
1369
NT8D36
Junctor
0
0
Afote:Thermal
load (BTU/hr) = Total power dissipation (Watts) x 3.4
-
Table 16
External power equipment heat dissipation
Heat Dissipation
Equipment
Watts
BTUlhr
NT6D52AA 30A Rectifier
200
680
NT5C03 50A Rectifier
290
990
Note: Thermal load (BTUIhr) = Total power dissipation (Watts) x 3.4
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
:.:
46 Operating power requirements
.-
Power engineering 553-3001-152
.u
:
r
..
47
Reserve power
Reserve power is available for both AC and DC systems. AC reserve power is
provided by a separate Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS), installed in series
with the main system AC power feed. A UPS generally consists of a
combination battery charger (AC-DC converter) and inverter (DC-AC
converter), along with its associated batteries. The batteries may be internal or
external to the UPS unit itself.
I.
DC systems use the “traditional” telecommunications powering method of an
external power plant consisting of rectifiers (AC-DC converters) continuously
charging a bank of batteries, while the system power rails “float” in parallel on
the battery voltage.
--
AC reserve power
There are a wide variety of UPS vendors and systems available. Some of the
factors to consider when choosing a UPS are:
- Input and output voltage and frequency range
- Number and type of output receptacles
- Regulatory and safely agency approvals
- Efficiency, crest factor, and other performance considerations
- Alarm and status indications
- Battery recharge time
- Backup time required
-Existing batteries or other power equipment at the site
- Planned system growth
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
48 Reserve power
UPS sizing
Since power distribution for AC systems is provided on a per-column basis,
partial system backup is available for all system options, thus reducing
reserve power requirements. In other words, it is possible to back up all of the
common equipment, but only a portion of the peripheral equipment, reducing
both UPS and battery costs.
Even if it is desired to back up the entire system, the per-column powering
allows the choice of provisioning one UPS per column, one UPS for the entire
system (all columns), or any combination.
In order to determine the siie of UPS needed, the total system (or column)
power requirements are first determined as in the previous section “Operating
power requirements.” The real power in Watts (W) is then converted to
complex or “apparent” power in Volt-Amps (VA) by dividing the real power
by the typical system power factor of 0.6. The UPS is then sized in terms of
.
its rating in VA (or kVA).
The sizing and provisioning of the UPS batteries will be determined by
following the specific instructions provided by the manufacturer of the UPS
that has been selected. The general approach, however, is to take the total
system power in Watts, divide by the UPS inverter efficiency, and convert to
battery current drain by dividing by the nominal discharge voltage of the
__
battery string. The battery current drain is then multiplied by the time that is
needed for the reserve power to operate to determine the battery requirements
in Amp-hours (A-hrs).
Recommended UPS vendors and models
As of the publication date of this document, the following UPS systems have
been tested by Northern Telecom and verified to work with the SL-1 system.
These vendors and models meet high standards of both quality and
functionality and are recommended to be used with the SL-1.
This list may change at any time in the future. Other UPS vendors may have
products which work fine with SL-1 systems, and the vendors listed here may
have other models and sizes that are also suitable. In particular, there are UPS
systems larger than 10 kVA available that could be used with some of the
larger system option 71 configurations.
Power engineering 553-3001-152
.d
Reserve power 49
Table 17
Verified UPS systems
Vendor
KVA
Rating
Battery
Voltage
Alpha Technologies
1
48
Alpha Technologies
1.5
48
Alpha Technologies
3
48
Best Power Technobgy
3
48
Best Power Technology
5
48
Exide Electronics
1.5
120
Exide Electronics
3
120
Exide Electronics
5
120
Exide Electronics
6
240
Exide Electronics
8
240
Exide Electronics
10
240
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
50 Resetve
power
The UPS systems are available directly from the recommended vendors. For
application assistance and direct sales information, the UPS vendor contacts in
the U.S. are listed below:
Alpha Technologies, Inc.
3767 Alpha Way
Bellingham, WA 98225
(206) 647-2360
Fax: (206) 671-4936
Best Power Technology, Inc.
P.O. Box 280
Necedah,WI 5 4 6 4 6
(608) 5657200
(800) 356-5794
Fax: (608) 565-2221
Exide Electronics
3201 Spring Forest Road
Raleigh, NC 27604
(9 19) 872-3020
Fax: (919) 878-1541
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
C.
.,:
..’
Reserve power 51
Alarm Monitoring ^
A UPS to System Monitor Alarm cable is available from Northern Telecom
for each of the recommended UPS vendors. The alarm interface consists of an
“inverter on” signal to indicate that the commercial power is down and the
UPS is supplying power to the system, and a “summary a@m” signal from the
UPS to indicate a fault or alarm condition. The cables are listed below:
Table 18
UPS to System Monitor Alarm cables
UPS vendor
NT part number
Alpha Technologies
NT8D46AU
Best Power Technology
NT8D46A.I
Exide Electronics
NT8D46AQ
Installation
For UPS installation information, refer to the appropriate UPS vendor
installation manual. It is recommended, however, that a UPS bypass switch
be installed during the initial wiring if this switch function is not inherently a
part of the UPS itself. The UPS bypass switch allows for the PBX to be run
directly from commercial AC power while the UPS is taken off line during
installation or service, or during battery maintenance.
I
1
CAUTION
Proper care must be taken when connecting the DC battery leads to
the UPS. A battery reversal at the UPS can result in severe damage
to the UPS.
A general block diagram of a UPS installation and associated wiring is shown
in Figure 14.
Power engineering 553-3001-I 52
52 Reserve power
Figure 14
AC reserve power configuration
Commercial
AC power in
Optional external
Battery bank
I
I
” f-z!.
;:c .Y 2: .‘
;. -‘_.. . ^,.
_~
:-.
:...I
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
I
-
Reserve power 53
DC reserve power
-
Reserve power for DC systems can be provided simply by adding batteries to
the external distribution. The reserve battery capacity is determined by
multiplying the system current drain by the time that is needed for the reserve
power to operate. This will determine the total Ampere-Hour requirements of
the batteries. Refer to Worksheets A through D.
The following guidelines should be used in determining DC reserve power
requirements.
Current required
When considering battery backup you should know with reasonable accuracy
the total system power requirement.
For new installations, Northern Telecom provides the operating company
with data listing the total current drain for each configured system. A
rectifier and distribution panel which has the capacity to meet these current
drain figures, and some added capacity to charge batteries can then be
selected. For existing instahations, the total current dram of an installed
system can be calculated in several ways. Refer to “Operating power
requirements” for more information.
The amount of reserve battery capacity depends on the system line size (load),
the time the reserve supply must last in the event of power failure, and the
battery end voltage.
Batteries
Reserve batteries for a DC powered SL- 1 system must meet the following
requirements as defined in Table 19.
Table 19
Battery requirements
Float voltage
w
Battery
configuration
Equalize voltage
09
cell
String
cell
String
24 stationary cells
-2.17
-52.08
-2.25
-54.08
23 sealed cells
-2.25
-51.75
-2.35
-54.05
24 sealed cells
-2.25
-54.00
-2.35
-56.40
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
Y
54 Reserve power
The float and equalization voltages defined in Table 19 are not an exact
requirement as long as voltages do not exceed -56.5 V. See Table 7 in “DC
power description.”
Not all sealed cells require equalization, but the equalization voltage can be
used for fast charging.
Batteries to be used with the SL-1 should be sized by using an end voltage of
4IV.
The noise limitations for a battery string are:
- 20 mV rms maximum ripple
- 32 dBmC maximum noise
End cells and CEMF cells are not recommended because they are a noise
I.
source.
Other considerations
-Planned growth
- Backup time required
- Existing power system capability
- Space and thermal conditions
- Other equipment, lights, alarm systems
Power engineering 553-3001-152
s,
55
Engineering and configuration guidelines
Configuring the Meridian 1 power system requires attention to the following
points:
- Both AC and DC-powering are available.
- The AC power supply or DC-DC Converter that is used in a particular
module is virtually identical as far as external configuration purposes
are
I.
concerned.
- Equipment Module power and cooling criteria are also the same for both
AC and DC.
- A wide variety of Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems are
available for AC-powered Meridian 1 systems that require reserve poxer.
- AC-powered systems, suited for those applications that do not need reserve
power, require no external power components and connect directly to
utility power.
- All DC systems can be configured as complete systems, with rectifiers
provided by Northern Telecom. They can also be configured to connect
to customer-provided external power.
AC and DC powering schemes differ primarily in the external power
components (external, that is, to the Equipment Modules themselves).
The choice of which powering scheme to use is determined mainly by reserve
power requirements and preferences, and by the existing power equipment at
the site.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
56
Engineering and configuration guidelines
AC power architecture ^
The internal AC power system consists of the following main elements:
- Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU)
- Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU)
_
- AC Power Supplies
No arbitrary selection of these components is required - they are included
automatically in the System functional determination process.
There are three different AC power supplies that provide power to all of the
common equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined common/peripheral
equipment modules, as well as a ringing generator that provides AC ringing
(and message waiting lamp voltages) when required for the peripheral
equipment modules.
No additional external power components are required for AC-powered ‘.
systems. Reserve power, if needed, is accomplished through the use of an
external Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS).
Internal AC power equipment components
The following components are required to configure and AC powered system. _Common Equipment Power Supply AC (NT8D29AA)
The Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the Common
Equipment modules in AC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in
the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup,“ and converts 208/240 V ac to +5 V and
f12 V dc, to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards.
Configuration guidelines One Common Equipment Power Supply AC is
used in each of the following AC modules:
- CPU Module (NT8D34AA)
- Network Module (NT8D35AA)
- CPU/Network Module (NT6D39AA)
Power engineering 553-3001-152
-2
:
Engineering and configuration guidelines 57
Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC (NT8DO6AA)
The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide power to all
peripheral equipment modules in J% systems. It converts 208/240 V ac to
+5 V, +8.5 V, f10 V, +15 V, and -48 V dc voltages used to power peripheral
equipment logic cards and to supply “talk battery” to lines and trunks. This
power supply is located in the far left hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup.”
Configuration guidelines One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is
used in each of the following AC modules:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT.8D37AA)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA)
Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC (Nl7D14AA)
The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC converts
2081240 V ac to +5 V, +8.5 V, +_15 V, +_12 V, 48 V, -150 V dc, and
86 V ac/20 Hz ringing voltages used to power peripheral and common
equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message Waiting lamps on 500/2500
sets. It is located in the left of the Module in the slot labelled “CE/PE Pwr
sup. “
Configuration guidelines One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply AC is used in each of the following AC modules:
- Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NTSDllAR or NT8DllAC)
- Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D47AA)
Ringing Generator AC (NT8D21AA)
The AC Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal 208/240 V ac input
and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on 48 V dc.
The frequency and voltage options are 70 V ac at 25/50 Hz, 80 V ac at 25150
Hz, and 86 V ac at 20/25. It also supplies -150 V dc message waiting lamp
500/2500 set applications. The Ringing Generator mounts in the PE modules
to the right of the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply.
i:
:
Configuration guidelines One Ringing Generator AC is used in each of the
following, when these AC modules support 500- or 2500~type analog sets:
: . ,~. .~.:,:.._ .:
, _,.: . ,. :. . .. _.:,
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37AA)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA)
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
58 Engineering and configuration guidelines
Pedestal (NT8D27AB) The Pedestal supports the column of Equipment Modules, and houses the
Power Distribution Unit, the Blower Unit, and a reusable dust filter.
The Field Wiring Terminal Block is mounted in the bottom of the Pedestal.
Configuration
guidelines
- One per column in AC systems
- The Field Wiring Terminal Block is factory wired with the following
straps:
l
LRTN - FGND
Power Distribution Unit (NT8D53AB)
The AC Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes power to the entire
column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses a main circuit
breaker and the System Monitor.
Configuration guidelines One per Pedestal/column in AC systems
Module Power Distribution Unit (NT8D58AA)
The NT8D56AA Module Power Distribution Unit (MPDU) protects the power
supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single breaker and _
is used in conjunction with the NT8D29AA Common Equipment Power
Supply AC.
Configuration
guidelines
One per Module in AC systems
Module Power Distribution Unit (NT8D58AB)
The NT8D56AB MPDU protects the power supply and distributes power
within a module. It houses a single breaker and is used in conjunction with
the NT7D14 Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC.
Configuration guidelines One per Module in AC systems
Module Power Distribution Unit (NT8D57AA)
The NT8D57AA MPDU protects the power supply and distributes power
within a module. It houses a dual breaker and is used in conjunction with the
NT8DO6AA PE Power Supply AC and the NT8D21AA Ring Generator AC.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
Engineering and configuration guidelines 59
Configuration
:
.:.’
:
guidelines
One per hkdule’in AC systems
The internal DC power system consists of the following main elements:
- Pedestal Power Distribution Unit (PDU) - DC Power Converters
Like AC systems, there are three different DC power converters that provide
power to all of the common equipment, peripheral equipment, and combined
common/peripheral equipment Modules, as well as a ringing generator that
provides AC ringing (and message waiting lamp voltages) when required for
the peripheral equipment modules.
The external portion of DC-powered systems is generally referred to as the
power plant, and mainly consists of the rectifiers and distribution equipment,
as well as reserve batteries if required. For system options 21,51, and 61,
Northern Telecom offers a power plant based on the NT6D52AA Rectifier,
with an output capacity of 30A per rectifier, along with a rectifier/battery
connection and distribution box (QBLlS). For system option 71, Northern
Telecom offers the QCA13 power plant based on the NTSC03BJ Rectifier,
with an output capacity of 50A per rectifier, with a total system capacity of--500A.
Customer-provided power is an option for all Meridian 1 systems. The
QBL12 Battery Distribution Box is available to connect a wide variety of
customer-provided power equipment to the system.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
60 Engineering and configuration guidelines
internal DC power equipment components.
The following components are required to configure and DC powered system.
.,- -4
c$;;j
Common Equipment Power Supply DC (NT6D41 AA)
The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the common equipment
Modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on the left in the module
labeled “CE Pwr Sup,” and converts -48 V dc to +5 V and +12 V dc, to
provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit cards.
Configuration
guidelines One Common Equipment Power Supply DC is
used in each of the following DC modules:
- CPU Module (NT8D34DC)
- Network Module (NT8D35DC)
- CPU/Network Module (NT6D39DC)
Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC (NT6D40AA)
..
The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used to provide power to all
peripheral equipment Modules in DC systems. It converts -48 V dc to +5 V,
+8.5 V, +lO V, f15 V, and -48 V dc voltages used to power peripheral
equipment logic cards and to supply “talk battery” to lines and trunks. This
power supply is located in the far left hand card slot labeled “PE Pwr Sup”.
-
Configuration guidelines One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is
used in each of the following DC modules:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (lYIBD37DC)
-Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13DC)
Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC (NVDO4AA)
The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC converts 48 V dc to
+5 V, +8.5 V, +15 V, f12 V, -48 V, and -150 V dc voltages used to power
peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light Message
Waiting lamps on 500/2500 sets. The supply provides the following
selectable ringing voltage options: 70/80/86 V ac at 20/25/50 Hz. It is located
in the left of the Module in the slot labelled CE/PE Pwr Sup.
Configuration guidelines One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply DC is used in each of the following DC Modules:
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
.-;” ,-.-.:-:‘..,I”:. ,A
Engineering and configuration guidelines 61
- Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8DllDC )
- Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D47DC)
RingingGeneratorDC(NT7D03AA)
The AC Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal .48 V dc input and
provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 V dc.
The frequency and voltage options are 20/25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 V ac. It also
supplies -150 V dc message waiting lamp 50012500 set applications. The
Ringing Generator mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral
Equipment Power Supply.
Configuration guidelines One Ringing Generator DC is used in each of the
following, when these DC Modules support 500- or 2500~type analog sets:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37DC)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13DC)
.
Pedestal (NT7DOSAA)
The Pedestal supports the column of equipment modules, and houses the
Power Distribution Unit, the Blower Unit, and a reusable dust filter.
The Field Wiring Terminal Block is mounted in the bottom of the Pedestal.
Configuration guidelines One per column in DC systems
Power Distribution Unit(Nl7DlOAA)
The DC Power Distribution Unit (PDU) distributes power to the entire
column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses five circuit breakers
(one for each module and one for the Blower Unit) and the System Monitor.
Configuration guidelines One per pedestal/column in DC systems
Module Power Distribution Unit
Not applicable to DC systems.
External DC Power equipment components
The following components are required to configure DC powered system.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
62 Engineering and configuration guidelines
Switched Mode Rectifier -46VBOA (NTGD5qAA)
Converts 208/240 V ac (nominal) to -48 V dc (nominal), with a 30A output.
Connects to the system through the QBLlS Battery Distribution Box. Based
on QRF12.
,
Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions).
Generally one rectifier per every two fully loaded modules. Exact quantity
depends on system configuration and power requirements.
Rectifier Rack Assembly (NT7D12AA)
This is a 19-inch open relay rack which is approximately 4’6” feet high. It
supports up to three NT6DZAA Rectifiers.
Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). One rack
per every three NT6D52AA Rectifiers, up to a maximum of two racks per
system.
-
_,^._
i. .:x;::
.
“d”
.._....
,..-a . . ...“_
.,..
..,...3
: ” “.‘“7
‘.’ ”
,”
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
,
C’
Engineering and configuration guidelines 63
Rectifier Bafflehloirnting Kit (Nl7D1201)
The Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support brackets for
mounting the NT6D52AA Rectifier to to NT7D12AA Rack, together with a
heat baffle plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower rectifier away
from the inlet to the upper rectifier, thereby allowing cooling by natural
convection.
Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). One per
NT6D52AA Rectifier.
Battery Distribution Box (QBLlS)
Allows the parallel connection of up to three NT6D52AA rectifiers, for
connection to the SL-1 System and to reserve batteries. Includes main fuses,
diode blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and sense lead
fusing on connections from each rectifier.
Configuration guidelines System options 21/51/61 (DC versions). One per
every three NT6D52AA Rectifiers, up to a maximum of two Battery
Distribution Boxes per system.
Battery Distribution Box (QBLl2)
Connects customer-provided power equipment and batteries to the SL-1
System. Allows connection of up to 24 modules.
Configuration
guidelines
System option 71 (DC versions). Generally one
per system.
DC Power Plant (WA1 3)
Consists of a primary power cabinet with fusing and distribution hardware,
monitoring and control, and up to four NTSCO3 50A rectifiers. Up to two
supplemental cabinets can be added, with up to four rectifiers in the fist
supplemental cabinet and up to two rectifiers in the second cabinet, for a total
of 10 rectifiers and a total system capacity of 500A. (This power system is
also referred to as the J2412 power plant QCA13 is actually the cabinet
designation, but is the more commonly used name.)
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
64 Engineering and configuration guidelines
Configuration guidelines Used with system option 71 (DC version).
Quautity as required by system power consumptioti.
Switched Mode Rectifier - 48VEOA (NT5CO3BJ)
This is a solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts 208/240 V ac
(nominal) to 48 V dc (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13
power plant, with up to ten rectifiers in parallel.
Configuration guidelines Used with system option 71 (DC version).
Quantity as required by system power consumption.
Commercial power and grounding requirements
Commercial power source The commercial power source refers to the main
AC utility power feed, for either AC-powered or DC powered systems. For
AC systems, this power is wired directly to the system. For DC systems, this
power source would connect to the rectifiers, which would convert
to -48V dc for distribution to the system.
.
In North America, the power supplied can be either 208Y or 240 V ac
nominal. Three phase is not required but single power feeds from alternate
phases would be normal practice where three phase power is available. The
following Table shows the exact input voltage range:
Table 19
AC power ranges
Input
Minimum
Nominal
Maximum
Voltage (V ac) at pedestal
180
208l240
250
Frequency (Hz)
47
50160
63
All power feeds used should contain a separate safety conductor (green wire).
Northern Telecom strongly recommends that the supply conductors be
dedicated and uninterrupted from a building primary source to a dedicated
equipment room sub-panel.
Power sub-panel Power sub-panels must meet the following requirements
or be modified when used for the Meridian 1:
- Panels should be located in the equipment room.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
.u
Engineering and configuration guidelines 65
- No lighting, air conditioning, heating, generators or motors shall be
serviced from this equipment room panel.
- In areas where isolated ground systems are permissible, this panel will
provide sufficient ground connection points on the isolated ground plate
or bar to handle the AC circuit grounds as well as the other ground
reference conductors associated with the Meridian 1.
Service receptacles One dedicated outlet per pedestal (column) is a typical
requirement for AC systems that are cord connected. For DC systems, or if
reserve power is being used, the receptacles or conduit will serve the
centralized rectifiers cr UPS system directly, with power then routing to the
columns.
Unless otherwise specified, these circuits should be rated for 30 Amps. All
circuits must be:
- Wired and fused independently of all receptacles.
I.
- Tagged at the power panel to prevent unauthorized interruption of power.
- Not controlled by a switch
The NEMA receptacle types are as follows:
- Isolated Ground systems:
IG-L6-30
- Non-Isolated Ground systems:
L6-30
-
System grounding requirements Proper grounding is essential to troublefree system operation and the safety of personnel. The Meridian 1 has several
different grounds and signal returns that are generally referred to as grounds:
logic return, battery return (for DC systems), AC “green wire” ground (in AC
systems), and the personal hazard equipment ground.
_
.-:
The Meridian 1 does not, by design, need an AC Isolated Ground (IG) system
(though this may be required by local codes), but it does need a single point
ground system. This means that each of the various grounds, from each of the
columns, should terminate at a single connection point before attaching to the
actual ground reference at the main AC panel or transformer. The singlepoint ground may be implemented either by the use of the Isolated Ground bus
in the AC panel, or by a separate logic return equalizing bus for battery
returns, frame grounds, and logic returns where a non-isolated AC system is
used.
Power
engineering
553-3001-152
66 Engineering and configuration guidelines
The following must also be-observed to implement the single-point ground:
- All ground conductors must conform to local codes and terminate in a
manner that is permanent, resulting in low impedance connections.
- All terminations should be accessible for inspection and maintenance.
- All grounding conductors must be continuous with no splices or junctions
and tagged “WARNING - Ground Connection - Do not remove or
disconnect.”
- Conductors should be insulated against contact with foreign grounds.
- Grounding conductors must be no-load, non-current carrying cables under
normal operating conditions.
- The use of building steel as part of the ground system is not recommended.
The DC resistance of the system ground reference wire from the I to the
building ground should be as close to zero as possible with the maximum total
resistance on all runs, within the building, not to exceed 0.5 ohms. The ‘.
insulated grounding wire size shall conform to the National Electric Code
(NEC) 250-294,250-295 and sections 310-316 (equivalent CSA requirements
when used in Canada).
.-
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
c
67
Power conductors
Wire size calculation guidelines
Determining wire gauges to connect a pedestal to a rectifier or other external
distribution hardware is a very simple procedure, but it can be tedious if a lot
of external components are involved. A programmable calculator or computer
can help if it is going to be done often.
Too many wire gauges delivered to a site can cost more money than
The method
Using the maximum current in a conductor, determine the length that the
conductor must be (remember that the vertical portions are sometimes longer
than the horizontal portion) in order to meet the required maximum voltage
drop.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
68 Power conductors
The formula
The following formula may be used to calculate the minimum wire size in
Circular Mils (CM) required to connect any two points knowing current,
distance and the desired drop for a specific cable:
CM= 11.1x Ix D/V
where:
CM = wire size required in Circular Mils
I = current in amps (use the maximum expected)
D = distance in feet
V = Allowable voltage drop.
Typical wire values
The following are typical values for circular mils and nominal maximum
current for some of the more common wire sizes.
Table 20
Wire characteristics
Wire gauge
Circhlils
A max
4
41,750
90
6
26,250
65
8
16,510
50
10
10,380
35
12
6,530
25
Note: Maximum amperage is affected by many factors induding temperature
and insulation. Consult a wire handbook for precise tables.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
:
..:
~
Power conductors 69
Table 21
Maximum allowable voltage drops
From
To
V drop
- BAT
Pedestal
Dist. DisChg
1.0
+ BR
Pedestal
Dist. Corn
1.0
-BAT
Dist.
(- ) Battery term
0.25
+BR
Dist.
(+) Battery term
0.25
-BAT
Rectifier
Disk Chg
0.5
+ BR
Rectifier
Dist. Corn
0.5
Conductor
IMote
7: Dist. is an abbreviation for Battery Distribution Box (i.e.
QBL15, CtBLl2).
CAUTION
Although 0.25/0.5/1.0 volts is the maximum drop allowed, the
insulation and temperature rating vs current will often dictate a wire
size that will create smaller voltage drops on short lengths. After
using the formula, consult wire tables to ensure that the temperature
rise is acceptable.
-
Examples
The following three examples show how to make wire size calculations.
1. A Bat or BR conductor from the QBLl5 to a pedestal is 18 feet long and
must carry a maximum of 36 Amps:
Using CM= 11.1x
Ix D/V
CM = 11.1 x 36 x 18/0.5 = 14385.6
Choosing a standard gauge equal to or larger than this will mean 8 AWG
which has a cross section of 16510 CM.
Up to 40 amps is allowable with 8 AWG even when the insulation is rated
only 20 degrees C above the expected maximum ambient temperature.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
70 Power conductors
2 . A Bat or BR conductor from the QBLl5 to the Battery is 25 feet long and
must carry a maximum of 70 Amps:
Using CM= 11.1x
Ix D/V
CM = 11.1.x 70 x 25/0.5 = 38850
Choosing a standard gauge equal to or larger than this will mean 4 AWG
which has a cross section of 41740 CM.
3. Example of the “Caution Note” for short distances - a Bat or BR conductor
from the QBLl5 to the Rectifier is only 4 feet long and must carry a
maximum of 25 Amps:
Using CM= 11.1x
Ix D/V
CM= 11.1x25x4/0.5 =2220
Choosing a standard gauge equal to or larger than this will mean 16 AWG
which has a cross section of 2600 CM.
.
But, 16 AWG is nominally rated for only 13 Amps. In this case, 12 AWG
which is rated at 25 Amps (but with only a 0.17 V drop over the 4 feet) is
required.
Sense lead wire size
The loop resistance of the wire used to connect the f Sense terminals to the
TBC of the QBL12 to the +- terminals of the customer-provided batteries must
not exceed 2.5 ohms.
Simplified chart
Table 22 provides a simple means for determining the wire size between the
distribution box and the pedestal.
Table 22 takes into account the two constraints of wiring into the pedestal.
- The loop voltage drop from the distribution point to the pedestal cannot
exceed 2 V.
- The five wires (two BAT/BR pairs plus a logic return ) must physically fit
inside a 3/4 inch conduit.
Additionally, the table assumes that the worst case current drain does not
exceed 60 Amps per column. Other wire gauges can/should be used if the
Power engineering 553-3001-152
:
.,0. .’ --.. .,.
_j;.,‘::;:
L.I;,.: ‘.“>.X.?,,.:”~ ;.,
.
3
” ’
Power conductors 71
column draws more or less than 60 Amps. Consult a wire handbook for
precise calculations.
There are four options available for bringing wire into the pedestal:
Single conduit One 3/4 inch conduit access.
Dual conduit Two 3/4 inch conduit accesses.
Junction box (single 4 AWG) A junction box can be used to interface to one
of the 3/4 inch conduit access points in the pedestal. Single runs of #4 AWG
per feed are used between the junction box and the distribution point.
Junction box (double 4 AWG) This is the same as the case above, but double
runs of #4 AWG per feed are used between the junction box and the
distribution point.
,;
:
,’ . .
;.. ,:. ;::,. j
‘,.
.,.~..,
Power engineering 553-3001-152
..
72 Power conductors
Table 22
Pedestal wire guage requirements with two 30 A feeds (five’wiresj
Wire AWG
Single
conduit
Dual conduit
8
6
4
4
O-loft
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0-20ft
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
o-3oft
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0-4Oit
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0-50ft
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
0-60ft
No
Yes
Y
0 - 70 ft.
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
0-80ft
No
Yes
Yes
Yes ‘-
0-90ft
No
No
Yes
Yes
o-looft
No
No
Yes
Yes
0 - 200 ft
No
No
No
Yes
200+ft
No
No
No
No
Length
Junction box with Junction box with
single #4 AWG’
double #I4 AWG*
e
s
Yes
Note 1: Two 30 A feeds are typically adequate for a full column of 4 modules (two 30 A feed pairs plus
Logic return).
Note 2: When using dual conduit, the wires must be run in
pair plus LRTN in the other conduit.
BAT/BR pairs. One pair in one conduit and one
l A single or double run of 4 AWG wire from the distribution point to
a junction box near the pedestal. 10
AWG wire is run from the junction box into the pedestal PDU terminal board.
Legend:
Yes
No
= Wire size is adequate for the distance.
= Wire size has too high a voltage drop and is inadequate for the distance.
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
73.
List of terms
AC
Alternating Current
ACEG
AC Equipment Ground
AWG
American Wire Gauge
BAT
Battery
BR
Battery Return
bkr
breaker (abbreviation)
BRTN
Battery Return
CE
Common Equipment
CEC
Canadian Electrical Code
ckt
circuit
CPC
Common Product Code
CSA
Canadian Standards Association
DC
Direct Current
DisChg
Discharge
EPE
Existing PE
FGND
Frame Ground
(abbreviation)
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
74 List of terms
I
HZ
Hertz (cycles per second) -
IG
Isolated Ground
inverter
DC to AC converter
LR
Logic Return
LRE
Logic Return Equalizer
MPDU
Module (UEM) Power Distribution Unit
mS
millisecond
NEC
National Electrical Code (USA)
P B X
Private Branch Exchange
Pcord
Power Cord (abbreviation)
PDU
Power Distribution Unit (in pedestal)
PE
Peripheral Equipment (line card equipment)
PEC
Product Engineering Code
PFTU
Power Fail Transfer Unit
Pwr
Power (abbreviation)
QBLlP
75 Amp external power distribution unit
QBL15
150 Amp external power distribution unit
QCA13
50 - 200 Amp rectifier/distribution (cabinet]
QRFl2
25 Amp rectifier
RPE
Remotely located PE
SPG
Single Point Ground
telco
telephone company (abbreviation)
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
..
List of terms 75
UEM
Universal EQuipment Module
Underwriters Laboratories
UL
._\ -I.
::-, :z.;L.ZeI I- , T. ;., ups
.i .-. ._:<
Uninterruptible Power System
VAC,Vac
Volts AC
VDC.Vdc
Volts DC
W
Volts peak
Power engineering 553-3001-l 52
. ..’
‘. .
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Power
engineering
Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
information subject to change without notice.
Release 1.0
Standard
January, 1990
Printed in U.S.A.
::.:.“,,
:
..
3
;
:/
;.i
!?-i
._,
ic.: -: ,~
: .::. .,- :_::
<:::-7.‘
,. . . . ^ :, :-:. .,. :::.~
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Spares planning
Standard
SL-1
System options 21,5-l, 61,71
Spares planning
Publication number: 553-3001-153
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
..
-
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights resewed.
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
..
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1.0
Spares
planning
..
553-3001-153
iii
About this document
General
information
The Spares planning guide provides all the information necessary for the
calculation and planning of spares (replaceable) items and provides failure
rates for the SL-1 hardware.
The success of a maintenance program depends largely on the availability of
an adequate stock of replaceable items. To ease maintenance and system
reliability, follow the procedures given here for calculating spares stocks.
Spares requirements can be calculated to service SL-1 systems from a single
depot (repair house) or a centralized depot serving subdepots. Read on for
more information.
This document has been updated to include new naming conventions. Since
the SL-1 is available in both AC and DC versions, the Product Engineering
Code (PEC) is given, in some cases, for both AC and DC power options.
The failure rates of some items may not appear in this release.
Note: Running the SL-1 system at lower temperature levels will
increase the life expectancy of the components and improve overall
system reliability.
References
See the SL-1 planning & engineering guide for
.I
:
^_ ^ .
.;_.. ::;. ..,‘!
::
:.:
- Muster index (553-3001-000)
- System overview
(553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
iv About this document
- System engineering
(553-3001-151)
- Power engineering
(553-3001-152)
- Sparesplanning (553-3001-153)
- Equipment identflcation
and ordering (553-3001-154)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- System installation procedures (553-3001-210)
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Installation procedures for telephone
sets and attendant consoles (553-2201-215)
- Extended systems installation (553-3001-250)
- Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251)
- General maintenance information (553-3001-500)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
- Xl1 software management (553-3001-300)
- Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-1 Xl1 input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
V
Contents
Spares planning
Definitions and assumptions
Calculating spares requirements
Tables: NFT values
1
1
5
7
Failure rates
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
s.
:..
:
vi
Contents
._
,“..i: . . . .-.
‘:. 1. 1
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
1
Spares planning
Definitions and assumptions
Failure rate-Failure rate equals the estimated number of failures for that
item during one million (106) hours of operation. The only exception is to
measurements for cabling or other items with low failure rates. Rates are
also measured in Failures in Time (FIT) measurements. One FIT equals one
..
billion (109) hours of operation.
Sparing interval-The sparing interval is the period of time that stocks of
replaceable items should last without being replenished. This period is
assumed to be one year following the installation of the system.
_Stock confidence level-The stock confidence level is the allowed
probability of not being out of stock when the sparing interval of one year is
greater than 99.9 percent.
Pack ambient temperature-The pack ambient temperature is the average
temperature of the air immediately surrounding the circuit pack (usually
higher than the ambient room temperature). Pack failure rates in this
document are based on a pack ambient temperature of 40’ C.
Spares planning 553-3001-153
..:
2 Definitions and assumptions
Turnaround time for rep&r-The turnaround time for the return to stock
of a failed item is about 10 working days (240 hours) from a repair house.
(See Figure 1.)
Figure 1
Single depot or repair house service
Depots
Repair
House
553-1559
I --
Spares planning 553-3001-153
Definitions and assumptions 3
The turnaround timk for the return &I stock of a failed item is about two
days from a centralized depot, (See Figure 2.)
.:
.,
1.:
:1:
.. L
,. . . ...%-.
,“TS
.:I :.::
Figure 2
Centralized depot service
Y-Day
Tirnry
;rnaro,und
1 O-Day Turnaround Time (240 hrs.)
Spares planning 553-3001-153
4 Definitions and assumptions
Actual turnaround periods Will vary in the field. As the number of systems
served increases, the percentage of replaceable items required for stock is
reduced. (See Figure 3.)
Figure 3
Effect of turnaround on spares stock
“”
50 -
I
I
I
- lo-Day turnaround
-----2-Day turnaround
E
$ 4 0 -
NO .
In Field (Thousands)
Population range-Population range is the quantity of each type of SL-1
switch in the area served by the depot.
Spare stock size-The quantity of spares for a given stock item depends on
the sparing interval, stock confidence level, failure rate, turnaround time for
repair, and population range.
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
Definitions and assumptions 5
Calculating spares requirements
Replaceable items and their associated failure rates are listed in this
document. Quantities of spares required to stock a depot for the one-year
sparing interval can be calculated by following the procedures. Table 1
translates the NPT values to the number of spares required for that item.
The following values are used:
N-The number of a spares item in use.
F-The failure rate for a particular spares item.
T-The turnaround time for repairing a failed spares item in hours.
Procedure 1 explains how to calculate the quantities of spares required to
stock a depot for the one-year sparing interval:
-
:
_.!
:;
~
..,..
:..,;
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
6 Definitions and assumptions
Procedure 1
Determining spares quantities to stock
interval
a depot for the one-year sparing
1
Determine the number (N) of in-service specified circuit packs serviced
by the depot.
2
Determine the pack failure rate (F) for the specified circuit pack in the
Spares planning guide. (See Note 1 below.)
3
Determine turnaround time
4
Calculate the NFT value by multiplying N x F x T.
5
Determine the number of spares required by using the NFT values in
Table 4.
(T) in hours. (See Note 2 below.)
Note I: Pack failure rates are expressed in terms of the number of
failures per million hours.
Note 2: For a single depot or repair house service, turnaround timeis
typically 10 working days or 240 hours. For a centralized depot
service, it is typically two days or 48 hours.
For example:
A single depot services 10,000 Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE
Pwr Sup) (AC-NT8DO6AA) (DCNT6D41AB) packs. From the failure
rates listed in Table 2, the failure rate for this pack is 1.84 failures per one
million hours. If the turnaround time for a single depot is 48 hours, then:
NFT= 10,000 x
1.84
WWOO
x 48 = 0.8832
From the NIT values in Table 1, the number of spares required for NFT
value 0.8832 = 6. See Table 1.
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
s.
_-
7
Tables: NFT values
Table 1
Stock qu, antity of spares
3.46
4.01
4.58
5.16
5.76
6.37
2.94
3.46
4.01
4.58
5.16
5.76
11
12.9
12
13.6
13
14.3
14
15.0
15
15.8
16
16.5
-continued-
1
1
13.60
14.30
15.00
15.80
16.50
17.20
i
27
28
29
30
31
32
Spares planning 553-3001-153
.
8 T a b l e s : NFTvalues
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
Spares planning 553-3001-153
-.
Tables: NFTvalues 9
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
-continued-
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
10 Tables: NFT values
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
Tables: NFTvalues 11
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
NFT
values
Number
of
spares
NFT
values
Number
of
spares
Spares planning 553-3001-153
12 Tables: NFT values
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
Spares planning 553-3001-153
.d
:.
:
..
Tables: NFTvalues 13
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
-amtinued-
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
k.
14 Tables: NFT values
Table 1 continued
Stock quantity of spares
_.._,.. . .
s -.. :-. .” .j
.‘-’
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
15
Failure rates
This section lists replaceable items used in SL-1s and provides their
associated failure rates. Some failure rates are not available (N/A) at this
time but will be offered in a supplement to this document. The replaceable
items are grouped according to equipment types as follows:
- universal equipment modules
- cooling equipment
- circuit packs
- station equipment
- power equipment
- mass storage equipment
Note: The failure rates are based on a circuit pack ambient
temperature of 40’ C. This temperature is usually higher than the
surrounding room temperature.
3
;
,. .;:.
;, -::. ,- .,.:;
.,.::
. . ..a
.’
Spares planning
553-3001-l
53
16 Failure rates
Table 2
Failure rates of modules
1
Table 3
Failure rates of cooling equipment
Spares planning 553-3001-153
Failure rates 1 i’
--
Table 4
Failure rates of circuit packs
PEC/NT
Code
NT8DOlAD
NTSDOlAC
NT8DO2AA
NT8DO3AB
NT8DO4AA
NT8DO9AB
NT8D14AA
NT8DlSAA
NT8D16AA
NT8D17AA
NT8D18AA
Description
Failure Rate
per 106 hrs
Controller-2
6.5
Controller-4
7.0
Digital Line Card
1.8
5.1
Analog Line Card
Superloop Network Card
5.1
I
Message Waiting Line Card 1
5.8
Universal Trunk Card
3.4
E&M Trunk Card
3.7
Digitone Receiver Card
2.7
Conference/Tone and Digit
5.1
Switch OS) Card
Network/DigitoneReceiver
7.3
.
NT8D19AA
NT8D41AA
!
.;
.?,
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
18 Failure rates
Table 4 continued
Failure rates of circuit packs
Law)
QPC254
--continued-
,
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
..
Tone and Digit Switch (ALaw)
’
14.66
Failure rates 19
Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs
PECINT
Description
1
1 Failure Rate
per 106 hrs
.0.37
Code
QPc266
ACD
QPC272
QI’C280
QPC284
QPC285
QPC286
CO and FX Trunk
Conference (A-Law)
500 Line Circuit (A-Law)
SL- 1 Line Circuit (A-Law)
500 Line Message Waiting
(A-Law)
E&M, DX, Paging Trunk (ALaw)
Loop Signaling Trunk (A-
QPC287
QPC288
QF’C289
QPC290
QF’C29 1
QPC292
QPC293
QF’C294
Interface
_
Recorded Telephone
Dictation Trunk (A-Law)
Recorded Announcement
Trunk (A-Law)
DIGITONE Receiver (ALaw)
OPX 500 Line Circuit (ALaw)
CO, FX Trunk Circuit (ALaw)
Recorded Telephone
Dictation Trunk (A-Law)
10.90
13.95
8.53
5.45
8.61
6.97
7.09
8.19
5.61
6.68
12.75
6.44
7.22
-continued-
.;
(
.‘.:. -:‘-.
.-. .I, : ;
=,; : . ...;
./
Spares planning 553-3001-153
20 Failure rates
Table 4 continued
Failure rates of circuit packs
PEC/NT
Code
QlT295
Description
QPC301
CO, FX, MR DET Trunk
Circuit (A-Law)
4-Wire E&M Trunk (A-Law)
Attendant Console Monitor
@Law)
CDR ROM
QPC327
QPC330
LineCard
MFC Sender/Receiver
Buffered Message Register
Ql’C296
QPC297
Failure Rate
per lo6 hrs
_ 10.46
8.38
7.85
10.05
20.07
9.78
/“‘“’
Spares planning 553-3001-153
..
Failure rates 21
Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs
-continued-
Spares planning 553-3001-153
-.
:
:.
22 Failure rates
Table 4 continued
Failure rates of circuit packs
QPC464
QPC47 1
QPC472
QPC473
QPC475
QPC477
Peripheral Buffer
Clock Controller
Digital Trunk Interface
1 DTI Carrier Interface
1 Digitone Receiver
[ Bus Terminating Unit
I
-continued-
Spares planning 553-3001-153
c
:
:
!
9.00
2.44
6.00
6.60
I
Failure rates 23
Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs
1 PEC/NT
Code
QPC494
QPC496
QPC500
1
1 QFC527
QPC528
QPC532
QPC536
OF040
1 CO/FX/WATS trunk (A-law) 1
CO/IX/WATS trunk - (EIA)
Grd Button Line Card
Digital Trunk Interface
Tone Detector
I
Description
500/2500 Message Waiting
Extender
PE Backplane
-continued-
1Failure Rate1
per lo6 hrs
8.00
0.69
3.24
12.37 1
14.23
13.93
12.36
.6.49
1
-.
..:,:.:
,’
,:,
.-, ,
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
c.
:
24 Failure rates
Table 4 continued
Failure rates of circuit packs
Centralized Attendant
Spares planning 553-3001-153
Failure rates 25
Table 4 continued Failure rates of circuit packs
PEC/NT
Code
Ql’C673
QPC674
QPC706
QPC710
QPC720
QPC723
1 QPC757
QPC775
Ql’C789
QPC814
QPC841
QPC918
QPC939
QPC940
.j
..
:
i
Description
512K RAM Memory Card
256K Memory with Error
Correction
Half PE Expansion Power
Converter, ist tier
p-Law Digitone Receiver
Primary Rate Interface Card
RS-232 Interface Line Card
1 D-Channel Handler Interface 1
Clock Controller Card
16-Port 500/2500 Line
(Message Waiting)
Memory
Four-Port Serial Data
Interface Card
High-Speed Data Card
Read-Only Memory
Read-Only Memory
Failure Rate
per lo6 hrs
5.04
5.80
1.14
5.20
6.00
N/A
N/A
1
2.44
N/A
N/A
2.2
I.
N/A
N/A
N/A
..-..,
-...:.:.:.:.
: i ;. I:: ‘. i
.,
I..
Spares planning 553-3001-l 53
26 Failure rates
Table 5
Failure rates of station equipment
Description
PEC/NT
Code
Ml250 Console
M2250 TCM Console
M2006 Digital Telephone
M2008 Digital Telephone
M2016S Digital Telephone
M2216 Digital Telephone
M2616 Digital Telephone
M3000 Touchphone
500/2500 Telephone Set
Line Cord
NE-500/2500
NE-DGQC35
NE-G3AR-35 Handset
NE-G3DRN- Console Handset
3
NE-T1
Transmitter
NE-u1
Receiver
NTIFOSAA
M200!9 Digital Tel Set
NTlFO6AA
M2012 Digital without hands
Spares planning 553-3001-153
..
.
Failure Rate
per lo9 hrs
N/A
N/A
N/A
3.10
3.90
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
0.50
12.22
12.44
Failure rates 27
Table 5 continued Failure rates of station equipment
PEC/NT
Code
Q=l
Q
,::
QM-I-2
QMT3
QMT4
QMTll
Description
Handsfiee Interface/Remote
Powering Kit
Automatic Handsfree
Interface Kit
Headset Kit
lo-Button Key Lamp
Expansion Module
20-Button Key Lamp
Expansion Module
Lamp Field Array Module
Handset Module
Asynchronous/Synchronous
Failure Rate
per lo6 hrs
0.33
0.82
0.25
2.89
4.73
13.99
0.50
6.34
.-
QMT12
QMTl5
QMT21
..-
Spares planning 553-3001-153
28 Failure rates
Table 6
Failure rates of power equipment
PEC/NTCode
NTSC03BJ
1
Description
1 Failure Rate 1
per 106 hrs
.
N/A
Switched Mode Rectifier
-48V/50A
NT6D40AA
DC Peripheral Equipment
Power Supply
NT6D4 1AA DC Common Equipment
I Power Supply
I
NT6D52AA 1 Switched Mode Rectifier
43Vf30A
NTi’DO3AA DC Ringing Generator
DC Common/Peripheral
NT7DO4AA
Equipment Power Supply
NT7DlOAA
DC Power Distribution Unit
NT7D12AA
NT7D14AA
1.6
0.6
1.2
1.81
3.14
NIA
NT7DlSAA
NT8D21AA
NT8D22AB
NT8D29AA
NT8D39AA
NT8D53AB
NT8D53AD
NT8D56AA
NT8D56AB
NT8D57AA
AC Common Equipment
Power Supply
Power Failure Transfer Unit
AC Power Distribution Unit
Power Distribution Unit Option 21 A
~Module Power Distribution
Unit
Module Power Distribution
Unit
Module Power Distribution
I Unit
+ontinued-
Spares planning 553-3001-153
1.27
5.7
N/A
N/A
.
N/A
N/A
I
N/A
I
Failure rates 29
Table 6 continued Failure rates of power equipment
1
PEC/NT
Code
NT8D62AA
NT8D62DC
QBL12
1 QBLl5
QCA13
1 QCA321
QPC188
QRF12
1 QRF12
1
Description
Temperature Sensor Panel
Battery Distribution Box
I Power/Battery Distribution
Box
DC Power Plant
I Junction Box
1 Battery Monitor
I 48V Rectifier
I-52V Rectifier
1 Failure Rate
per lo6 hrs
N/A
I
!
I
I
1.10
2.81
N/A
N/A
1.20
N/A
Table 7
Failure rates of mass storage equipment
Note:
There are many replacement cables (not fisted here) in lengths
appropriate for various configurations available from Northern
Telecom. The approximated failure rates for most cables are the same
(0.50); the measurement is based on failures in time per billion hours
(FIT) or 109. For a detailed listing of the cables available from
Northern Telecom, see Equipment identijication and ordering
(553-3001-154).
Spares planning 553-3001-153
..
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Spares
planning
Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights resewed.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29, 1990
Printed in U.S.A.
nit
northarn
talocom
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,?1
Equipment identification and
ordering information
Standard
,.., 1::::: ::
: -,: ::: .: ‘;
C.
--
..
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Equipment identification and ordering information
Publication number: 553-3001-154
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
. . . .._”
,.
::-, : :-;
,.
_.;.:.,.)
‘.
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All right reserved
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1.0
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
...
III
About this document
This document identifies equipment of the Meridian 1 System options 21,
5 1,61,71 that can be ordered individually. The items are described in
terms of purpose, quantity required, and system hardware (system option),
as appropriate.
References
See the SL-1 planning & engineering guide for
- Master index (553-3001-000)
- System overview
(553-3001-100)
- Installation planning (553-3001-120)
- System engineering
(553-3001-151)
- Power engineering
(553-3001-152)
_-
- Sparesplanning (553-3001-153)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- System installation procedures (553-3001-210)
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Installation procedures for telephone
sets and attendant consoles (553-3001-215)
- Extended systems installation (553-3001-250)
- Disk drive upgrade procedures (553-3001-251)
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-154
iv About this document
- General maintenance information (553-3001~500)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XII software guide for an overviewbf software kchitecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
- Xl1 software management (553-3001-300)
- Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-I Xl1 input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
c+
..
:..
V
Contents
-,
:.:
._-L’. . .:-..:. .,. . _ ;.
General
1
Equipment packages
Conversion and expansion packages
Equipment availability
Special features
Product coding
1
1
2
2
2
.
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
5
NT6D39AA, NT6D39DC CPU/Network Module
NT6D44AA, NT6D44DC Meridian Mail Module
NT8Dll AC, NT8Dll DC CUPE Module
NT8D13AA,
NT8D13DC Peripheral Equipment Module
NT8D34AA, NT8D34DC CPU Module
NT8D35AA, NT8D35DC Network Module
NT8D36AA Inter Group Module
NT8D37AA, NT8D37DC Intelligent PE Module
NT8D47AA, NT8D47DC Remote PE Module
NT8D49 Spacer Kit
NT8D55AA Universal Equipment Module cover
Universal Equipment Module side panel
Card cage assemblies
Top Cap
Pedestal
5
6
7
8
8
9
10
10
11
12
12
12
12
13
13
--
Power and cooling equipment
15
A0367754 Top Cap Fan
NT5C03BJ Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/50A
NT6D40AA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC
NT6D41 AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC
15
15
15
16
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
vi
Contents
NT6D52AA Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/30A
NT6D53AA Junction Box
NT6D5303 Logic Return Equalizer
NT7D0003 Fan and Sensor Panel
NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC
NT7D04AA CUPE Power Supply DC
NT7DiOAA Power Distribution Unit DC
NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack
NT7D14AA CE/PE Power Supply AC
NT7D15AA System Monitor - System option 21 A
NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC
NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC
NT7D1201 Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit
NT8DOGAA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC
NT8D21 AA Ringing Generator AC
NT8D22AB System Monitor
NT8D29AA Common Equipment Power Supply AC
NT8D39AA Power Failure Transfer Unit
NT8D52AA Blower Unit
NT8D52DC Blower Unit
NT8D53AB Power Distribution Unit AC
NT8D53AD Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A
NT8D56AA Module Power Distribution Unit
NT8D56AB Module Power Distribution Unit
NT8D57AA Module Power Distribution Unit
NT8D62AA, NT8D62DC Temperature Sensor Panel
QBL12 Battery Distribution Box
QBL15 Power/Battery Distribution Box
QCA13 DC Power Plant
QPC188 Battery Monitor
QRF12 -52 V Rectifier
16
17
17
18
18
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
..22
22
23
23
23
24
24 -24
24
25
25
26
26
26
27
Common Equipment cards
NT8D04AA
NT8D17AA
NT8D18AA
NT8DlSAA
NT8D41AA
NT8D68AA
NT8D69AA
Superloop Network
Conference/Tone and Digit Switch (TDS)
NetwotWDigitone
Receiver
Memory/Peripheral Signaling
Serial Data Interface paddle board (Dual Port)
Floppy Disk Unit
Multi Disk Unit
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
C.
.:
:
:
Contents vii
,:.‘:;
f:j
./:,
.--. _ . . . ..^
i/“.._
‘y’.,.$,:, z.;-_
.: >‘,S y::,,
.;
QMM42 Security Data Cartridge
QPC43 Peripheral Signaling
QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender
QPC412 Intergroup Switch
QPC414 Network
QPC417 Junctor Board
QPC441 Three-Port Extender
QPC471 Clock Controller
QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface
QPC579 CPU Function
QPC580 CPU Interface
QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator
QPC583 Memory
QPC584 Mass Storage Interface
QPC687 CPU with SDVRTC
QPC720 Primary Rate Interface
QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface
QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface
QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface
QPC939 Read-Only Memory
QPC940 Read-Only Memory
Peripheral Equipment cards
;;...- :.,
;.:__._.. ..-:--.. . , 1._,I.,
. ,’
NT8DOl AD Controller-2
NT8DOl AC Controller-4
NT8D02AA Digital Line card
NT8D03AB Analog Line card
NT8DOSAB Analog Message Waiting Line card
NT8D14AA Universal Trunk
NT8DlSAA E&M Trunk
NT8D16AA Digitone Receiver
QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter
QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer
QPC65 Remote Peripheral Switch
QPC66 2M Baud Converter
QPC67 Carrier Maintenance
QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk
QPC99 Carrier Interface
QPC192 Off-Premises Extension Line
Equipment identification and ordering information
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34
35
35
35
35
36
36
36
37
37
37
38
38
-39
39
39
40
40
40
41
42
43
43
43
44
44
45
45
46
46
553-3001-l 54
viii Contents
QPC237
QPC250
QPC297
QPC422
QPC430
QPC432
QPC449
QPC450
QPC578
QPC594
QPC659
QPC723
QPC789
QPC918
4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk
Release Link Trunk
Attendant Console Monitor
Tone Detector
Asynchronous Interface Line
4-Port Data Line
Loop Signaling Trunk
CO/FWWATS Trunk
Integrated Services Digital Line
16-Port 500/2500 Line
Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer
RS-232 4-Port interface Line
16-Port 500/2500 Line (Message Waiting)
High-Speed Data Card
Station equipment
Meridian Modular Telephones
M2000 series digital telephones
M3000Touchphone
NE-500/2500 telephone set
Ml 250 and 2250 attendant consoles
Attendant administration overlay template
QMTl and QMT2 key/lamp expansion modules
QMT3 lamp field array module
QMT4 handset module
QMTl 1 asynchronousl
synchronous interface module
QMT12 add-on data module
QMTl5 amplified handset module
QMT21 high-speed data module
QUSl logic handsfree unit
QKKl handsfree remote powering kit
QKK3 automatic handsfree interface kit
QKK8 automatic handsfree interface kit
QKM13 light probe kit
QKNl headset kit
QSR2 venture 1 headset
QSAM2A and QSAMBA group listening switch kit
Asynchronous data options
Mendian programmable data adapter
TeledaptTM
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
46
47
47
47
48
48
48
49
49
49
49
50
50
50
;:‘:5~:
_.-<<.‘l.z.
x-s.. ; 3.J_1
51
. . 51
60
61
61
61
62
62 _62
62
63
63
63
63
64
64
64
64
64
64
65
65
65
66
67
ic+?-‘l
;. : .- I .:’y ,j
Contents ix
Station equipment replaceable items
67
Cabling
71
NT7Dll AE module-to-module power harness
NT8D40AA AC power cord
NT8D40AM module-to-module power-harness
NT8D40AY AC power cord
NT8D40BJ System Monitor to backplane cable
NT8D40BK System Monitor trip cable
NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable
NT8D46AC Thermostat harness
NT8D46AD System Monitor SDI cable
NT8D46AG System Monitor to SDI paddle board cable
NT8D46AH System Monitor to MDF cable
NT8D46AJ System Monitor to UPS (Best) cable
NT8D46AL System Monitor Serial Link cable
NT8D46AM Air Probe harness AC
NT8D46AP Extended System Monitor Serial Link cable
NT8D46AQ System Monitor to UPS (Exide) cable
NT8D46AS System Monitor inter-CPU cable
NT8D46AT System Monitor to QBL15 cable
NT8D46AU System Monitor to UPS (Alpha) cable
NT8D46AV System Monitor to QCA13 cable
NT8D46AW System Monitor to QBL12 cable
NT8D46DC Air Probe harness DC
NT8D73 Inter-cabinet Network cable
NT8D74 Clock Controller to Inter Group cable
NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable
NT8D76 Intergroup Switch to Inter Group cable
NT8D77 FDI to FDU cable
NT8D78AA CPU cable
NT8D79 PRVDTI to Clock Controller cable
NT8D80 CPU interface cable
NT8D81 AA Tip and Ring cable
NT8D82 SDI to I/O cable
NT8D83 PRVDTI to I/O cable
NT8D84AA SDI paddle board (Dual Port) to I/O cable
NT8D85 Network to PE cable
NT8D86 Network to I/O cable
NT8D87 ConferencemDS
to music trunk cable
71
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
74
74
74
74
74
- 74
75
75
75
75
76
76
76
77
77
77
78
78
78
79
79
79
80
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
x Contents
NT8D88 Network to I/O cable
NT8D90AF SDI multiple-port cable - internal
NT8D91 Network to Controller cable
NT8D92AB Controller to l/O cable
NT8D93 SDI paddle board (Dual Port) I/O to DTUDCE cable
NT8D95 SDI I/O to DTUDCE cable
.
NT8D97AX PRVDTI I/O to MDF cable
NT8D98 Inter-cabinet Network cable
NT8D99 CPU to Network cable
NT9J93AD PRVDTI Echo Canceler to I/O cable
NT9J94AB RPE to I/O cable
NT9J96 Intra-cabinet Network cable
NT9J97 Intra-column Network cable
NT9J98 Intra-cabinet Network cable
NT9J99 Intra-cabinet Network cable
QCAD128 connector cable
QCAD274A AC power cord
80
80
81
81
81
82
82
82
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
85
85
Miscellaneous
87
equipment
Field Wiring Kit
Blank Faceplates
NT8D63AA Overhead Cable Tray Kit
Earthquake Bracing Kit
QRY551 Channel Service Unit
TELLABS 251 2CChannel
Digital Echo Canceller
BIX Cross-Connect System
Northern Telecom Publications
87
87
87
88 -.88
88
88
90
List of terms
91
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-154
1
General
The selection of a system option that best meets individual requirements is
determined by the following factors:
- Number and type of terminal devices required
- Number and type of trunks required
- Traffic requirements for lines, trunks and consoles
- Special features required
- Growth forecast in terms of ports and features
Refer to System engineering (553-3001-151) and Power engineering
(553-3001-152) to determine the proper system requirement.
.-
Equipment packages
There are various equipment packages available to provide basic systems.
Information on these packages can be obtained from a Northern Telecom
sales office.
Conversion and expansion packages
In addition to the basic equipment packages, there are conversion and
expansion packages available to upgrade existing systems. Contact a
Northern Telecom sales office for details.
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-154
2 General
Equipment
availability
-
The equipment listed in this Northern Telecom Publication is available
through Northern Telecom. Equipment may not be available in all market
areas and may be discontinued at any time. Contact a Northern Telecom
sales office for equipment availability.
Special features
Special features are purchased as options to the basic system. These
features may consist of software or hardware only, or both. Those special
features that include hardware (e.g., the Data Feature, Call Detail
Recording, Caller’s Name Display and Remote Peripheral Equipment) are
described in separate Northern Telecom Publications which include
ordering information.
Product coding
.
With the application of Modular Documentation System (MDS) by
Northern Telecom, the product code takes on a new form but does contain
similar attributes as the apparatus system (QPC code). Figure l-l provides
a comparison of the old and the new product codes.
The primary difference between the two systems is that the modular code is
of a constant length (eigth characters) and the suffix is defined as family
member. The “release number” and “series” are incremented as change is
applied to the product.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
__
General 3
Figure l-l
Modular and apparatus coding
cohparisbn
MW CODE (MDS)
NT OR00 AA 01
I
I
fixed prefix
QLD CODE IAPPARATUS\
QPC
123
A
A
1
1
I
SL-1 circuit pack
release number
series
553-3046
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
. :.
4 General
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-l 54
5
Universal Equipment Modules and
packaging
Universal Equipment Modules (UEMs) are self-contained equipment
modules which house system components such as card cages, circuit cards,
power units, mass storage units, and cabling.
Each UEM is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide, 52.1 cm (20.5 in.) deep
(55.9 cm (22.0 in.) with covers), and 43.2 cm (17 in.) high. The weight of a
UEM is approximately 21.8 kg (48 lbs) empty, including the top, bottom,
sides, side trim panels, card cage, Input/Output (I/O) panel, and
miscellaneous hardware.
All UEMs are equipped with a card cage assembly and a cover assembly.
Refer to Circuit puck installation and testing (553-3001-211) for the
identification and location of the different cards within each UEM.
A UEM that is populated with various hardware components is referred to
as a module. The different types of modules available are described in this
chapter.
Also described in this chapter are the main components of a system option
which can be ordered as a separate package. These components are the Top
Cap, the card cages, the pedestal, the Spacer Kit, and the Module Covers.
NT6D39AA, NT6D39DC CPU/Network Module
System hardware-System option 51/61
_,
. ~ :- .:
..
:
Purpose-The NT6D39 CPU/Network Module (hereafter referred to as
NT6D39 CPU/NET) houses a Central Processor Unit (CPU) and network
cards.
:-.:._ ;. .;,,
_.‘;,
_I
._
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
s.
.:
6
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
This module is available in two versions:
- NT6D39AA
for AC systems
- NT6D39DC
for DC systems
The NT6D39 CPU/NET card cage contains 18 card slots which support the
following:
- network cards
- Clock Controller
- Serial Data Interface (SDI)/Enhanced Serial Data Interface (ESDI)
- Peripheral Signaling
- 3-Port Extender (3PE)
- mass storage unit
- CPU Function
- CPU Interface
- Changeover Memory Arbitrator (CMA)
- Memory
- D-Channel Handler Interface (DCHI)
- Primary Rate Interface (PRI)/Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
The NT6D39 CPU/NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment
Power Supply.
Quantity-One per System option 51 system; two per System option 61
system
NT6D44AA, NT6D44DC Meridian Mail Module
System hardware-System option 21/51/51/71
Purpose-The NT6D4l Meridian Mail Module is a self-contained unit,
complete with power converters and cooling units. It is designed to
integrate with Meridian 1 Communication Systems but is also available as a
stand-alone system.
This module is available in two versions:
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.u
: ..
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 7
- NT6D44AA
for AC systems
- NT6D44DC
for DC systems
The Meridian Mail Module is powered by two Common Equipment Power
Supplies.
Refer to the Meridian Mail suite of documents (553-7041-xxx) for detailed
information.
Quantity-Maximum of five per system
NT8Dll AC, NT8Dll DC CE/PE Module
System hardwareSystem option 21 and 21A
Purpos+The NT8Dll Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter
referred to as NT8Dll CE/PE) supports CPU, network, and Intelligent
I.
Peripheral Equipment (IPE) cards in a single module.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8DllAC
for AC systems
- NT8DllDC
for DC systems
.-
The NT8Dll CE/PE card cage contains 20 card slots which support the
following:
- Floppy Disk Interface (FDI)/Floppy Disk Unit (FDU)
- CPU
- Memory
- SDI/ESDI
- network
- network/Digitone
Receiver (DTR)
- DCHI
- DTI/PRI
- IPE
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
8
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
The NT8Dll CE/PE Module is powered by a Common/Peripheral
Equipment (CE/PE) Power Supply.
Quantity-One per system
NT8D13AA, NT8D13DC Peripheral Equipment Module
System hardwareSystem option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-The NT8D13 Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter referred
to as NT8D13 PE) supports the Dual Loop Buffer (DLB), and 10 card
slotsThe PE Buffer is situated near the center of the module, with five cards
to the left and five cards to the right.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8D13AA
for AC systems
- NT8D13DC
for DC systems
I.
The NT8D13 PE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply, and a Ringing Generator when 500/2500 sets are supported by the
module.
Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001-151)
NT8D34AA, NT8D34DC CPU Module
System hardware-System option 71
Purpose-The NT8D34 CPU Module (hereafter referred to as NT8D34
CPU) houses the CPU, memory cards, and the mass storage.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8D34AA
for AC systems
- NT8D34DC
for DC systems
The NT8D34 CPU card cage contains 15 card slots which support the
following:
- Memory
- CMA
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
v
,
.-
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 9
- CPU Interface
- MS1
- Segmented Bus Extender (SBE)
- DCHI
- PRI/DTI
- Clock Controller
- Mass Storage Unit (MSU) or Floppy Disk Unit (FDU)
The NT8D34 CPU Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power
SUPPlY *
I.
Quantity-Two per system
NT8D35AA, NT8D35DC Network Module
System hardware-System option 71
Purpose-The NT8D35 Network Module (hereafter referred to as NT8D35
NET) provides the signal interface between the Common Equipment (CE)
cards located in the module.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8D35AA
for AC systems
- NT8D35DC
for DC systems
The NT8D35 NET card cage contains 15 card slots which support the
following:
- 3PE
- Intergroup Switch (IGS) (for System option 71 only)
- peripheral signaling
- network cards
- SDI/ESDI
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
10
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
- PFu/DTl
The NT8D35 NET Module is powered by a Common Equipment Power
S”PPlY.
Quantity-A maximum of 10 per system (five network groups)
NT8D36AA Inter Group Module
System hardware--System option 71
Purpose-The NT8D36AA Inter Group Module provides a path for the
switching of traffic between the network groups in the system. Faceplate
cables from the Clock Controller (CC) and Intergroup Switch (IGS) circuit
cards are connected to the Inter Group Module. This module uses a
QFC417 Junctor Board.
This module is used in both AC and DC systems.
Quantity--One
per system
NT8D37AA, NT8D37DC Intelligent PE Module
System hardware-System option 21/51/61171
Purpose-The NT8D37 Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module
(hereafter referred to as NT8D37 IFE) supports a Controller card and 16
IFE cards. The Controller card is situated near the center of the module,
between slot 7 and slot 8.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8D37AA
for AC systems
- NT8D37DC
for DC systems
The card slots in the NT8D37 IPE card cage support the following:
- Universal Trunk
- E&MTrunk
- Digitone Receiver
- Analog Line card (ALC)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.. .
. ‘:I-. : ,.!I
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
11
- Digital Line card (DLC)
- Analog Message Waiting Line card (MLC)
The NT8D37 IPE Module is powered by a Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply, and a Ringing Generator when 500/2500 sets are supported by the
module.
Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001-151)
.::
NT8D47AA, NT8D47DC Remote PE Module
System hardware-System option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-The NT8D47 Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (hereafter
referred to as NT8D47 RPE) is an interface module used to extend the
interconnection distance between local and remote sites.
The same module is used for both local and remote applications. ‘On the
local side, it interfaces to the QPC4 14 Network card for up to two network
loops; on the remote side, it supports the NT8D13 PE Module.
This module is available in two versions:
- NT8D47AA
- NTfD47DC
for AC systems
for DC systems
The NT8D47 RPE card cage contains 12 card slots which support the
following:
- 1.5 Mb converter
- 2 Mb converter
- carrier interface
- remote peripheral
- local carrier buffer
- carrier interface
- 2 Mb converter
- 1.5 Mb converter
- carrier maintenance
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
12
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
- PRI/DTI (optional)
The NT8D47 WE Module is powered by a Common Equipment/Peripheral
Equipment Power Supply.
I
Quantity-Since each NT8D47 WE Module serves two network loops, the
number of modules required per system depends on the number of stations
in the remote site.
NT8D49 Spacer Kit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Bolts modules together for side-by-side expansion. The Spacer
Kit includes:
- expansion spacer
- RF gasketing
- eight bushings
NT8D55AA Universal Equipment Module cover
System Hardware-All
Purpose-This is the front or rear cover that is part of the UEM. Two
covers are required for each UEM.
Universal Equipment Module side panel
System Hardware-All
Purpose-This is the side panel (PO699724) that is part of the UEM. A
maximum of eight panels are required for multi-column systems.
Card cage assemblies
A card cage assembly consists of a sheet metal case and an associated
backplane. The card cage provides the physical framework that houses the
circuitry and power supplies within the UEM.
The following is a list of all the card cage assemblies available and their
corresponding UEMs:
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
Universal Equipment Modules and packaging 13
- NT6D3903
NT6D39AA/DC
- NT8D1103
NT8Dl lAC/DC Common/Peripheral Equipment
Module
- NT8D1303
- NT8D3403
NT8D13AA/DC Peripheral Equipment Module
- NT8D3503
NT8D35AA/DC Network Module
- NT8D3703
NT8D37AA/DC Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
Module
-
NT8D47AA/DC
Module
NT8D4703
CPU/Network Module
NT8D34AA/DC CPU Module
Remote Peripheral Equipment
Top Cap
System Hardware-All
I.
Purpose-The top cap is mounted on the highest module of each column.
The top cap is approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide by 55.9 cm (22 in.) deep
by 7.6 cm (3 in.) high and weighs 3.6 kg (8 lbs). It consists of a front and a
rear air exhaust grill and thermal sensors. System option 21A contains a
small fan to cool the power supply.
.Three versions of the top cap are available:
- Nl7DOOAA
AC systems
- NT7DOOBA
DC systems
- NT7DOOAC
System option 21A only
Pedestal
System Hardware-All
.
.:
1
..,.
.
Purpose-The Pedestal is a base unit made of die-cast construction. It is
approximately 80 cm (31.5 in.) wide by 64.8 cm (25.5 in.) deep by 25.4 cm
(10 in.) high and weighs 13.6 kg (30 lbs) empty. Leveling feet are provided
for up to four tiers, while a caster option is provided for up to two tiers.
:.:
.,..
‘.’
I..
;:-..:
:
The pedestal is available in three versions:
- NT8D27AB
for AC systems
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
2.
.-
..
14 Universal Equipment Modules and packaging
:,i,
- NT8D27AC
for System option’21A only
- NT7DO9AA
for DC systems
The pedestal for AC and DC systems (except System option 21A) can
house any of the following field replaceable assemblies:
- Power Distribution Unit
NT8D53AB or NT7DlOAA
- Blower Unit
NT8D52A.A or NT8D52DC
- Fan Unit
NT7D17AC or NT7D17DC
- Leveling foot
A03 18207
- Air grill (molded)
PO699797
- Air filter
PO699798
The pedestal for System option 21A is basically the same as the one used
for other system options except it can only house the following field .replaceable assemblies:
- Power Distribution Unit
NT8D53AD
- Leveling foot
A03 18207
- Air grill (molded)
PO699797
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
s.
15
Power and cooling equipment
A0367754 Top Cap Fan
System Hardware-System option 21A
Purpose-The A0367754 Top Cap Fan is located in the Fan and Sensor
Panel. It provides cooling for the NT7D14AA CE/PE power Supply AC.
There is no speed or temperature control provided with it. Power. to the Top
Cap Fan is controlled by the circuit breaker located on the back panel of the
pedestal.
Quantity-One per system
_-
NTSC03BJ Switched Mode Rectifier -48V/50A
System Hardware-System option 71 (DC version)
Purpose-Solid state, switched-mode rectifier. Converts 208/240 VAC
(nominal) to -48 VDC (nominal), with a 50A output. Used in the QCA13
power plant, with up to ten rectifiers in parallel.
Quantity-As required by system power consumption
NT6D40AA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used to provide
power to all peripheral equipment modules in DC systems. It converts -48V
DC to +5V, +8.5V, +lOV, +15V, and -48V DC voltages used to power
peripheral equipment logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines and
trunks. This power supply is located in the far left hand card slot labeled
“PE Pwr Sup”.
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-154
16
Power and cooling equipment
Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of
the following DC modules:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NTSD37DC)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8Dl3DC)
NT6D41AA Common Equipment Power Supply DC
System Hardware-All
Purpos-The Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the
common equipment modules in DC systems. It is located in the first slot on
the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts -48V DC to +5V
and f12 V DC to provide all required voltages for CE and network circuit
cards.
Quantity-One Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in each of
the following DC modules:
_.
- CPU Module (NT8D34DC)
- Network Module (NT8D35DC)
- CPU/Network Module (NT6D39DC)
Two Common Equipment Power Supply DC is used in the Meridian Mail
Module (NT6D44DC).
NT6D52AA Switched Mode Rectifier -48W30A
System Hardware-System option 21/51/61 (DC versions)
Purpose-The Switched-Mode Rectifier is a QRF12 rectifier shielded to
limit electromagnetic interference. It converts 208/240 VAC (nominal) to 48 VDC (nominal), with a 30A output. It connects to the system through
the QBLl5 Battery Distribution Box.
Quantity-Generally one rectifier per every two fully loaded modules.
Exact quantity depends on system configuration and power requirements.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
.-
Power and cooling equipment 17
NT6D53AA Junction Box
System Hardware-All (DC
version)
Purpose-The Junction Box is required when the distance from the rectifier
to the pedestal is over 0.74 m (8 ft), which requires wire larger than 10
AWG. It provides a set of connection terminals for the 4-AWG wire that
comes from the rectifier, and a set of connection terminals for the lo-AWG
wire that goes into the pedestal.
Refer to Power engineering (553-3001-152) for more information.
Quantity--&e
per DC pedestal
NT6D5303 Logic Return Equalizer
System Hardware-System option 71 (DC version)
Purpose-The Logic Return Equalizer (LRE) mounts on top of the QCA13
cabinet. It is used as the single point ground for System option 7 1.
Quantity--One per system
NT7D0003 Fan and Sensor Panel
System Hardware-System
option 21A
Purpose-The NT7DOOO3 Fan and Sensor Panel contains a 230 VAC
tubeaxial fan (A0367754) and a thermal sensor for a high
temperature/shutdown alarm to the option 21A System Monitor. The fan
provides cooling for the NT7D14AA Common/Peripheral Equipment Power
Supply. It is on continously and receives power directly from the Power
distribution Unit via the module power harness.
The N’l7DOOO3 Fan and Sensor Panel consists of the following:
- a perforated top shield (PO703062)
- a Top Cap Fan (A0367754)
- a fan power harness (NT7DOOO4)
- a thermostat harness (NT8D46AC)
Quantity--One
per system
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
18
Power and cooling equipment
NT7D03AA Ringing Generator DC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Ringing Generator DC operates from a nominal -48V DC
input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs superimposed on
-48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are-20/25/50 Hi and 70/80/86
VAC. It also supplies -150V DC Message Waiting lamp 500/2500 set
applications. The Ringing Generator DC mounts in the PE modules to the
right of the Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC.
Quantity--One Ringing Generator DC is used in each of the following,
when these DC modules support 500- or 2500~type analog sets:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37DC)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8Dl3DC)
NT7D04AA CE/PE Power Supply DC
System Hardware-All
(DC versions)
Purpose-The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC converts
-48V DC to +5V, +8.5V, +15V, +12V, 48V, and -150V DC voltages used
to power peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and light
Message Waiting lamps on 500/2500 sets. It provides selectable AC
ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and
voltage options are 20/25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 VAC. It is located to the left
of the module, in the slot labeled “CE/PE Pwr Sup”.
Quantity-One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply DC is used
in each of the following DC Modules:
- Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D 11DC )
- Remote Peripheral Equipment Module m8D47DC)
NT7DlOAA Power Distribution Unit DC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The NT7DlOAA Power Distribution Unit DC distributes power
to the entire column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses five
circuit breakers (one for each Module and one for the Blower Unit) and the
System Monitor.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
.-
Power and cooling equipment 19
Quantity-One p&pedestal/column in DC systems
NT7D12AA Rectifier Rack
System Hardware-21/51/61 (DC versions)
Purpose-This is a 48.3-cm (19-in.) open relay rack which is
approximately 1.5 m (5 ft) high. It supports up to three NT6D52AA
Rectifiers in a single column.
Quantity-One rack per every three NT6D52.44 Rectifiers, up to a
maximum of three racks per system
NT7D14AA CE/PE Power Supply AC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC converts
208/24OV AC to +5V, +8.5V, +15V, +12V, 48V, and -150V DC voltages
used to power peripheral and common equipment, supply talk battery, and
light Message Waiting lamps on 500/2500 sets. It provides selectable AC
ringing voltage outputs superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and
voltage options are 20/‘25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 VAC. It is located to the left
of the module, in the slot labeled “CE/PE Pwr Sup”.
Quantity-One Common/Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC isused
in each of the following AC modules:
- Common/Peripheral Equipment Module (NTSDl 1AC)
- Remote Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D47AA)
NT7D15AA System Monitor - System option 21A
System Hardware-System
option 21A
Purpose--The NT7DlSAA System Monitor - System option 21A provides
an interface to communicate and monitor the NT7D14AA CE/PE Power
Supply AC, the CPU, and the thermal switches. In the event of failure, the
System Monitor - System option 21A is notified and the appropriate alarm
is set. A system alarm LED located below the top cap lights to indicate
CPU failure.
Quantity-One per system
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
20
Power and cooling equipment
NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC
-
System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers
Purpose-The NT7D17AC Fan Unit AC is housed within the pedestal and
provides cooling for the entire column. It consists of three fans and a circuit
breaker located in the front.
Quantity-One per pedestal
NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC
System Hardware-System option 21 with up to two tiers
Purpose-The NT7D17DC Fan Unit DC is the same as the NT7D17AC
Fan Unit AC except that it is used for DC systems. It has an on/off switch
in the front and its own separate circuit breaker located on the Power
Distribution Unit.
Quantity--One per pedestal
NT7D1201 Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit
System Hardware-System option 21/51/61 (DC versions)
Purpose-The Rectifier Baffle/Mounting Kit consists of a set of support
brackets for mounting the NT6D52AA Rectifier to an NT7D12AA Rack,
and a heat baffle plate. The baffle directs exhaust air from the lower
rectifier away from the inlet to the upper rectifier, thereby allowing cooling
by natural convection.
Quantity-One per NT6D52AA
Rectifier
NT8DOGAA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used to provide
power to all peripheral equipment modules in AC systems. It converts
208/24OV AC to +5V, +8.5V, +lOV, +15V, and -48V DC voltages used to
power peripheral equipment logic cards and to supply talk battery to lines
and trunks. This power supply is located in the far left-hand card slot
labeled “PE Pwr Sup”.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.-
Power and cooling equipment 21
Quantity--One Peripheral Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of
the following AC modules:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37AA)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA)
NT8D21AA Ringing Generator AC
-
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Ringing Generator AC operates from a nominal 208/240
VAC input and provides selectable AC ringing voltage outputs
superimposed on -48 VDC. The frequency and voltage options are
20/25/50 Hz and 70/80/86 VAC. It also supplies -15OV DC Message
Waiting lamp 500/2500 set applications. The Ringing Generator AC
mounts in the PE modules to the right of the Peripheral Equipment Power
SUPPlY.
Quantity-One Ringing Generator AC is used in each of the following,
when these AC Modules support 500- or 2500~type analog sets:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D37AA)
- Peripheral Equipment Module (NT8D13AA)
.-
NT8D22AB System Monitor
System Hardware-All except System option 21A
Purpose-The NT8D22AR System Monitor monitors the status of ail
internal power and cooling related components, as well as external DC
rectifiers, batteries, and Uninterruptable Power Supplies (UPS). The
System Monitor is mounted in the Power Distribution Unit, within the
Pedestal.
The System Monitor that handles the communication with the system CPU
(via SD1 port) is the master; all others function as slaves. There is a serial
communication link between the master and the slave System Monitors. In
addition to CPU status reporting, the System Monitor also controls all
external visual status indications.
Quantity-One master and up to 63 slave System Monitors are allowed per
system.
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-154
22
Power and cooling equipment
NT8D29AA Common Equipment Power Supply AC
System Hardware--System option 51/61/71
Purpose-The Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the
common equipment modules in AC systems. It is located in the first slot on
the left in the module labeled “CE Pwr Sup”. It converts 208/24OV AC to
+5V and f12 V DC to provide all required voltages for CE and network
circuit cards.
Quantity-One Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in each of
the following AC Modules:
- CPU Module (NT8D34AA)
- Network Module (NT8D35AA)
- CPU/Network Module (NT6D39AA)
Two Common Equipment Power Supply AC is used in the Meridian Mail
Module (NT6D44AC).
NT8D39AA Power Failure Transfer Unit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides an interface between CO lines, Private Branch
Exchange (PBX), and 500/2500 phones (rotary dial and pushbutton). The
Power Failure Transfer Unit allows eight phones to be connected to the CO
lines in the event of a PBX power failure or malfunction. The Power Fail
Transfer Unit is invisible to the switch and CO lines during normal PBX
operations.
The Power Fail Transfer Unit is approximately 22.8 cm (9 in) long by 22.8
cm (9 in) wide by 8.8 cm (3.5 in) deep. It is screw-mounted to the
Distribution Frame and connects to the Main Distribution Frame and switch
by two 25-pair cables.
Note: The Power Fail Transfer Unit is not recommended for use in
international applications.
Quantity-One per system
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
C.
.-
Power and cooling equipment 23
NT8D52AA Blower Unit System Hardware-All
‘.
.
:;i
Purpose-The Blower Unit is part of the system cooling assembly and
provides forced-convection cooling. Housed within the pedestal, it contains
two backward-curved impellers (rotor blades) which are cylindrically
shaped, approximately 22.8 cm (9.in) in diameter, and 6.9 cm (2.75 in)
thick. A circuit breaker is located on the front of the blower chassis to turn
the unit on and off. Each unit weighs about 1.5 kg (3.5 lbs).
2.::.
..,,-_.
,.:i
The unit communicates with the power distribution section by engaging a
connector in the rear of the pedestal.
Quantity-One per pedestal in AC systems
NT8D52DC Blower Unit
System Hardware-All
Purpos+This Blower Unit is the same as the NT8D52AA Blower Unit
except that it is used for DC systems. It has its own separate circuit breaker
located on the Power Distribution Unit. Also, for maintainability in the
field, a switch is located on the front of the blower chassis to turn the unit
.on and off.
Quantity-One per pedestal in DC systems
NT8D53AB Power Distribution Unit AC
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Power Distribution Unit AC distributes power to the entire
column. It is located in the rear of the pedestal. It houses a main circuit
breaker and the System Monitor.
Quantity-One per pedestal/column in AC systems
Equipment identification and ordering information
s.
.
.- -.
.
.
.
:.
553-3001-154
24
Power and cooling equipment
NT8D53AD Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A
System Hardware-System
option 21A
Purpose--The Power Distribution Unit - System option 21A is a panel
located in the pedestal. It contains a circuit breaker, a terminal block, and
an EM1 filter. The power cable enters the pedestal and connects to the
circuit breaker. From the circuit breaker, the AC voltage goes to the
terminal block through the EM1 falter and back to the terminal block where
it is distributed to the NT7D 14AA CE/PE Power Supply AC and the fan
located in the top cap.
Quantity-One per system
NT8D56AA Module Power Distribution Unit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The NTSD56AA’Module Power Distribution Unit protects the
power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single
breaker and is used in conjunction with the NT8D29AA CE Power Supply
AC.
Quantity--One per NT8D35AA NET, NT6D39AA CPU/NET, or
NT8D34AA CPU Module
NT8D56AB Module Power Distribution Unit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The NTSD56Al3 Module Power Distribution Unit protects the
power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a single
breaker and is used in conjunction with the NT7D14AA CE/PE Power
Supply AIC.
Quantity-One per NT8D47AA WE Module
NT8D57AA Module Power Distribution Unit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The NT8D57AA Module Power Distribution Unit protects the
power supply and distributes power within a module. It houses a dual
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
.-
Power and cooling equipment 25
breaker and is use&in conjunction with the NT8DO6AA PE Power Supply
AC and the NTSD21AA Ringing Generator AC.
Quantity-One per NTSD13AA PE or NT8D37AA IPE Module
NT8D62AA, NT8D62DC Temperature Sensor Panel
System Hardware-AN except System option 21A
Purpose-The NT8D62 Temperature Sensor Panel communicates with the
System Monitor in the event of overheating. It contains hvo temperature
sensors which protect against the.rmal damage by detecting extreme
temperature.
The Temperature Sensor Panel is available in two versions:
- NT8D62AA
for AC systems
- NT8D62DC
for DC systems
The Temperature Sensor Panel consists of the following:
- a perforated shield panel (PO703062)
- an LED bracket (PO703061)
- a thermostat harness (NT8D46AC)
.-
- an air probe harness (NT8D46AM or NTSD46DC)
- an air probe connector bracket (PO703064 or PO708 186)
Quantity-One per top cap
QBLI 2 Battery Distribution Box
System Hardware-All
(DC versions)
Purpose--Connects customer-provided power supplies to the system.
Allows connection of up to 24 modules.
Quantity-One per system
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..:
‘..
26
Power and cooling equipment
QBLI 5 Power/Battery Distribution Box.
System Hardware-System option 21/51/61 (DC versions)
Purpose-Allows the parallel connection of up to three NT6D52AA
Rectifiers, for connection to the system and to reserve batteries. Includes
main fuses, diode blocking, test points, QPC188 battery monitor card, and
sense lead fusing on connections from each rectifier.
Quantity-One per every three NT6D52AA Rectifiers, up to a maximum
of two QBLlSs per system
QCA13 DC Power Plant
System Hardware-System option 71 (DC version)
Purpose--Consists of a primary power cabinet with fusing and distribution
hardware, monitoring and control, and up to four NT5CO3 50A Rectifiers.
Up to two supplemental cabinets can be added, with up to four rectifiers.in
the first supplemental cabinet and up to two rectifiers in the second cabinet,
for a total of 10 rectifiers and a total system capacity of 500A. (This power
system is also referred to as the J2412 power plant; QCA13 is actually the
cabinet designation, but is the more commonly used name.)
Quantity-As required by system power consumption
QPCI 88 Battery Monitor
System Hardwar-All
Purpose-Located in each Battery Distribution Box to monitor rectifier and
battery voltages. Generates low float alarm, low voltage trip alarm and
sense lead fuse conditions.
Quantity-One circuit card in QBL12 or QBLl5
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Power and cooling equipment 27
QRF12 -52 V Rectifier System Hardware--System option 21/51/61
(DC version)
Purpuse-Converts
115 V AC and 220 V AC to -52 V DC (nominal).
QFW12B voltage conversions from 9OV to 129V, and l?OV to 25OV.
Connects to the columns through the QBLi5 Power/Battery Distribution
Box.
Quantity-One for every two modules
Equipment
identification
and
ordering
information
553-3001-154
28
Power and cooling equipment
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
29
Common Equipment cards
NT8D04AA Super-loop Network
System Hardware-All
Purpose- Provides 120 time slots (one superloop) interface between
Network and Intelligent Peripheral Equipment. Utilizes the equivalence of
four network loops. May be connected to one or two NT8DOl Controller
card(s).
The Superloop Network card is equipped with a Motorola 68000~type
microprocessor which performs network diagnostics and signaling control,
and communicates with the Intelligent Peripheral Controller.
Quantity-As required. Refer to System engineering (553-3001-15l);or
engineering details.
NT8D17AA Conference/lone and Digit Switch (TDS)
System Hardwart+All
Purpose-Provides both Conference and TDS functions. This card
accesses two network loops, one for each function.
The Conference circuitry has a warning tone option and supports broadcast
mode. Up to 15 simultaneous conferences can be controlled with the
restriction that the total number of conferees in all conferences is not greater
than 30.
The TDS circuitry provides tones for different countries (up to 256 tones
and cadences).
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
30 Common Equipment cards
Quantity-As required. R&fer to System engineering (553-3001-151) for
engineering details.
NT8Dl8AA NetworWDigitone Receiver
System Hardware-System option 21 and 21A
Purpose-Combines the functionality of the Network Controller and
Digitone Receiver cards in a mother/daughterboard assembly. The
motherboard plugs into a dedicated slot on the backplane. The
daughterboard attaches to the motherboard through an SDI/ESDI connector
and does not connect to the backplane.
Quantity--One
per NT8Dll CE/PE Module
NT8D19AA Memory/Peripheral Signaling
System Hardware-System option 21 and 21A
Purpose-Combines the functionality of the Memory and Peripheral
Signaling cards, as well as miscellaneous CPU functions.
The CPU functions include interrupt and fault monitoring.
The Peripheral Signaling function provides:
- signaling interface between CPU and Peripheral Equipment for up to 32
network loops
- clock and timing signals for real-time transmission functions
Quantity--One
per NTSDl 1 CE/PE Module
NT8D41AA Serial Data Interface paddle board (Dual Port)
System Hardware-System option
21/51/61
Purpose-Provides two serial ports between the SL-1 processor and an
external device. Each port supports
- RS-232-C interface
- g-bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit
- asynchronous, start-stop operation
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..d
.-
Common Equipment cards 31
- data rates of 300,600,1200,2400,4800, and 9600 baud
- Data Terminal Equipment (DTB) mode
- Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode
Quantity-Three maximum per NT8Dl lCE/pE Module; two maximum
per NT6D39 CPU/NET Module
NT8D68AA Floppy Disk Unit
System hardwareSystem
option 21/51/61/71
Purpose--The Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) is used to load the programs and
office data into the system memory. The FDU contains two 3.5~inch floppy
drives and is controlled by the QPC742 Floppy Disk Interface (PDI). Each
floppy drive has a formatted capacity of 1.44 MB.
The FDU occupies two adjacent card slots in the CPU, Network, or PE
Module. It is powered through the cable connecting it to the FDI. The FDU
can be connected to one or two FDIs as required by the system.
Quantity-One per system
NT8D69AA Multi Disk Unit
.-
System hardware-System option 51/61/71
Purpose-The Multi Disk Unit (MDU) is used to load the programs and
office data into the system memory. The MDU contains the following:
- two 3.5-inch floppy drives which are connected to the SCSI interface
through the SCSI/floppy controller; each drive has a formatted capacity
of 1.44 MB
- a 3.5-inch hard disk drive which has a built-in SCSI interface and a
capacity of 20 MB
- an SCSI/floppy controller
The MDU occupies three adjacent card slots in the CPU, CPU/NET, or
Network Module and requires 5V and 12V from the module. The MDU is
controlled by the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface (MSI). The MDU can be
connected to one or two MSIs as needed.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
32 Common Equipment cards
.
j
.i
Quantity-One per systeui
QMM42 Security Data Cartridge
System Hardware-All
Purpose-This is a security measure that allows a customer access only to
software packages purchased for his system. This security data cartridge is
mounted on either the QPC584 Mass Storage Interface or QPC742 Floppy
Disk Interface card.
Quantity-One per MSI/FDI card
QPC43 Peripheral Signaling
System Hardware-System option
51/61/71
Purpose--Provides a signaling interface between the CPU and PE via the
Network cards. Provides basic bit rate 2.048 MHz clock and timing signals
for real-time functions.
Quantity--One
per NT8D35 NET or NT6D39 CPU/NET Module
QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender
-.-
System Hardware-System option 71
Purpose-The Segmented Bus Extender (SBE) extends CPU bus signals
(address, data, and control) to the Network Module. It also allows recovery
of calls by isolating bus faults to a single network group.
Note: QPC215C or later vintage is required.
Quantityane circuit card in each CPU per network group, with a
maximum of five per CPU
QPC412 Intergroup Switch
System Hardware-System option 71
Purpose-Provides space switching between network groups in multigroup
systems.
Equipment identification and ordering information
5X3-3001
-154
Common Equipment cards 33
Quantity-Two pef Network Module (use vintage C when two or more
groups are installed)
QPC414 Network
System Hardware-All
Purpuse-Provides 30 time slots interface per each of two network loops.
Provides speech path switching, signaling and control circuits for two
network loops. Interfaces between network and NT8D13 PE, NT8D47
RPE, and Meridian Mail Modules, and PRI/DTI cards,
Quantity-As required; refer to System engineering (553-3001,151)
QPC417 Junctor Board
System Hardware-System
option 71
Purpose-Provides space switching paths between network groups in
multigroup systems for up to five groups.
Quantity-One per system
QPC441 Three-Port Extender
System Hardware-System
option 61/71
.-
Purpose-Extends CPU data, address and control signals between one
NT8D35 NET Module and a QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender on a CPU
Module in System option 71. In System option 61, interfaces between two
NT6D39 CPU/NET Modules.
Quantity-One per NT8D35 NET or NT6D39 CPU/NET Module
QPC471 Clock Controller
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The Clock Controller (CC) is used in System option 71 to
synchronize the Meridian 1 network to an external source clock and to
generate and distribute clock to the Meridian 1 system. It is also used with
PRA/DTI in all system options.
Note:
QPC471C or later vintage is required.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
34 Common Equipment cards
Quantity-Two for System option 71, and one per CPU when DTI or PU
is required in other options.
QPC477 Bus Terminating Unit
System Hardware-System
option 51/61/71
Purpose-Bus Terminating Units (BTUs) are installed in the CE Modules.
They provide a logical termination to the CPU and network buses. They are
paddle boards installed in dedicated slots, between circuit cards from the
front of the module.
Quantity-The following vintages are required for the modules listed:
- QPC477-A9
One required for each NT6D39 CPU/NET and each NT8D35 NET
- QPC477-A10
One required for each NT6D39 CPU/NET and each NT8D35 NET
- QPC477-A20
One required for each NT8D34 CPU
- QPC477A21
One required for each NT8D34 CPU
- QPC477A22
One required for each NT6D39 CPU/NET
QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data InterFace
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides two serial data interface circuits that can be configured
for either synchronous or asynchronous data communications at rates of up
to 64 kbps (synchronous) or 19.2 kbps (asynchronous).
Note: Use QPC5 13D with Meridian Mail option and other
applications requiring Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)
Application Protocol.
Quantity-As required per application
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
Common Equipment cards 35
QPC579 CPU Function System Hardware-System option
51/61/71
Purpose--The CPU Function card works in conjunction with the CPU
Interface card (QPCSSO). It contains the main CPU logic circuitry. The
CPU provides a 24-bit data bus. The CPU Function card contains a
QPC939 system ROM.
Quantity-One per CPU Module
QPC580 CPU Interface
System Hardware-System option
51/61/71
Purpose-Contains the logic required to interface the CPU with the
external address bus and detects, identifies and isolates bus faults. Works in
conjunction with QPC579 CPU Function card.
Quantity-One per CPU Module
QPC581 Changeover and Memory Arbitrator
System Hardware-System
option 51/61/11
Purpose-The Changeover and Memory Arbitrator (CMA) card contrors
CPU access to the duplicated memory in dual CPU systems, automatically
disables faulty memory cards and controls CPU changeover. The CMA
switches from one CPU to the other in the event of a CPU fault.
Quantity-Two CMA cards are required per system (one per CPU/Memory
configuration).
QPC583 Memory
System Hardware-System option
51/61/71
Purpose-Provides 768K of Random Access Memory (RAM).
Quantity-One per CPU for System option 51/61; two maximum per
System option 71
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
36 Common Equipment cards
QPC584 Mass Storage Interface
System Hardware-System option 51/61/71
Purpose-Interface between the Multi Disk Unit (MDU) and CPU(s).
Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt
control circuits.
i
The MS1 is used with the MDU and contains:
-two high capacity floppy disk drives or
-one Winchester disk drive with two high capacity floppy drives as backup
Note: QPCSS4D or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One MS1 circuit card for each CPUFIDU.
QPC687 CPU with SDVRTC
System Hardware-System option 21 and 21A
Purpos+This is a stand-alone CPU card with error correction, real-time
clock, and one SD1 port
Note: QPC687B or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One per system
QPC720 Primary Rate Interface
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) card allows twenty three
64 Kbps clear channel operation with a single 64 Kbps common signaling
channel. It is used in conjunction with DCHI to provide PRA. The PRI
circuit card provides the physical DS-1 interface and is also used for DTI
applications.
Quantity-One per Primary Rate Access (PRA) or DTI link
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..d
;
_.
:
.
.
.:
Common Equipment cards 37
QPC742 Floppy Disk Inte-rface
System Hardware-All
Purpose--interface between the Floppy Disk Unit (FDU) and one CPU.
Provides address matching, disk drive control, data buffering and interrupt
control circuits.
Quantity-One per CPU
QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The D-Channel Handler Interface @CHI) card processes the
LAPD protocol for ISDN primary rate signaling channel and ISDN
Signaling Link (ISL). It also provides a single asynchronous Serial Data
Interface (SDI) port.
Quantity-One per 16 PRI links to the same location (eight maximum per
system)
QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface
System Hardware-All
-
Purpose-Provides four serial ports between the system processor and an
external device. Each port supports
- RS-232-C interface
- 8-bit ASCII data with parity and stop bit
- asynchronous, start-stop operation
- data rates of 300,600,1200,2400,4800, and 9600 baud
- Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) mode
- Data Communication Equipment (DCE) mode
Quantity-Up to four per system
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
38 Common Equipment cards
QPC939 Read-Only Memory System Hardware-System option 5 l/61/71
Purpose-Read-Only Memory @OM) daughterboard on the QPC579 CPU
Function card.
Quantity-One per CPU
QPC940 Read-Only Memory
System Hardware-System option 21
Purpose-ROM daughterboard on the QPC687 CPU with SDI/RTC card.
Quantity-One per CPU
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
.:
I
::
39
Peripheral Equipment cards
NT8DOl AD Controller-2
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the
Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to two 10.24Mbs
superloops. Each Controller-2 card serves up to 16 IPE cards. . .
The Controller-2 card interfaces with up to two NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network cards. It is equipped with a Motorola 68000~type microprocessor
which performs some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics,
thus off-loading the system CPU.
.Quantity-One per NT8D37 IPE Module
NT8DOl AC Controller-4
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides a primary interface and control function between the
Superloop Network card and the IPE Module over up to four 10.24Mbs
superloops. Each Controller-4 card serves up to 16 IPE cards.
The Controller-4 card interfaces with up to four NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network cards. It is equipped with a Motorola 68000~type microprocessor
which performs some local call processing and maintenance diagnostics,
thus off-loading the system CPU.
Quantity-One per NT8D37 IPE Module
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Y
40 Peripheral Equipment cards
NT8D02AA Digital Line card System Hardware-All
Purpose--Provides interface to up to 16 digital integrated voice and data
sets for a total of 32 ports. It is equipped with an Intel 8051-type
microprocessor which performs several functions; some of which are as
follows:
- control of card operation
- card identification
- self-test
- status reporting to the Controller
- maintenance diagnostics
Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module
NT8D03AB Analog Line card
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides interface to up to 16 analog sets (500/2500). It is
equipped with an Intel 8051~type microprocessor which performs several
functions, some of which are as follows:
- control of card operation
- card identification
- self-test
- status reporting to the Controller
- maintenance diagnostics
Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module
NT8DOSAB Analog Message Waiting Line card
System Hardwart+All
Purpose-Provides interface to up to 16 analog sets (500/2500) with
Message Waiting lamp feature. It is equipped with an Intel 805 l-type
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
--
Peripheral Equipment cards 41
microprocessor which performs several functions, some of which are as
follows:
- control of card operation
- card identification
- self-test
- status reporting to the Controller
- maintenance diagnostics
Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IRE Module
NT8D14AA Universal Trunk
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides interface connecting the trunk facility to the NT8D37
IRE Module. It is equipped with an Intel 8052~type microprocessor which
performs several functions, some of which are as follows:
- control of card operation
- card identification
- self-test
- status reporting to the Controller
- maintenance diagnostics
This card interfaces eight 600 or 900 Q trunks with the system in A-Law or
l.t-Law application. Each of these eight ports can be individually configured
to operate as:
- Central Office (CO) trunk
- Direct Inward Dialing (DID) trunk
- 2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR)
- 2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID) trunk
- Outgoing Automatic Number Identification (OANI) trunk
- Recorded Announcement (RAN) trunk
- Music trunk
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
42 Peripheral Equipment cards
- Paging trunk
The Universal Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA
Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 - Ml985 and EL4 Standard 464A.
Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module
NT8D15AA E&M Trunk
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Used in both A-Law and V-Law applications. Provides interface
connecting the trunk facility to the NT8D37 lPE Module. It is equipped
with an Intel 8052-type microprocessor which performs several functions,
some of which are as follows:
- control of card operation
- card identification
- self-test
- status reporting to the Controller
- maintenance diagnostics
The E&M Trunk provides four analog trunks, each of which can be
individually configured to operate as:
- E&M signaling trunk
- two-wire Tie trunk
- four-wire Tie trunk
- Paging trunk
The E&M Trunk card is software selectable and complies with CSA
Standard C82.2 No. 0.7 - Ml985 and EIA Standard 464A.
Quantity-Up to sixteen cards per NT8D37 IPE Module
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
C.
..
Peripheral Equipment cards 43
NT8DlGAA Digitone R e c e i v e r
System Hardware-All
Purpose--Provides a total of eight channels of Dual Tone Multi Frequency
(DTMF) detection. These channels are assigned on the DS30X loop. There
is one 8 Kbps signaling channel provided for maintenance messaging and
tone reporting.
The NT8D16AA Digitone Receiver allows access to the filters for
parameter alterations in order to service different environments (e.g.
international applications).
Quantity-Refer to System engineering (553-3001-151)
details.
for engineering
QPC62 1.5 Baud Converter
System Hardware-System
option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-Used for Remote Peripheral Equipment (RPE) applications.
Converts an Sl-1 loop into two carrier loops. Used with 1.5 Mb/s Remote
Peripheral Equipment (RPE). Contains switch-selectable line equalizers.
Note:
QPC62F or later vintage is required.
.-
Quantity-Two for each network loop, one in the local module and one in
the remote module
QPC63 Local Carrier Buffer
System Hardware-System
option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions:
- Generates from the 2.048 MHz clock a 1.544 MHz clock
- Decodes and provides enables for outgoing and incoming data
- Delays the data incoming from the carrier so that its frame relative to
the outgoing data frame is equivalent to that returning from a peripheral
buffer
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
44 Peripheral Equipment cards
- Relays line status information to the processor
- Decodes line control information from the processor
Note: QPC63F or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One for each network loop connected to the RPE Module at the
local equipment location
QPC65 Rernote Peripheral Switch
System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Performs the following functions:
- Module, card, and line enables plus the bypass bit to the modules it
serves at the remote site,
- Cyclic scanning of the terminals it serves for incoming signaling
messages
- Monitoring of time slot 0 for outgoing messages
- Assembling incoming messages
Note: QPC65G or later vintage is required.
Quantity--One
per network loop
QPC66 2M Baud Converter
System Hardware-System option 21/S/61/71
Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Converts two carrier loops in to an
Meridian 1 loop.
Note:
QPC66E or later vintage is required.
Quantity-Two required for each network loop, one in the local module
and one in the remote module.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Peripheral Equipment cards 45
QPC67 Carrier Maintenance
System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains an M-type (3017 Hz) faultlocate filter. Provides DC detection circuitry for the fault-locate pair, and
carrier loopback relays to facilitate software maintenance testing.
Terminates and gives access to the order wire pair via a jack and binding
posts on the faceplate.
Note: QPC67E or later vintage is required.
Quantity--One per RPE Module
QPC71 E&M/DX Signaling and Paging Trunk
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Used in P-Law applications in one of the following ways to
interface with appropriate types of trunk facilities:
- E&M signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk
- 2-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk
- 4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk (a 24V4 repeater,
-externally mounted, converts the trunk from 2- to 4-wire)
- paging trunk or externally mounted loudspeaker
Refer to E8uWDX signaling and paging trunk- Circuit description (5532001-187) for more details.
Each card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage
option is selected by switches on the circuit card.
Note: QPC7 1F or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One per two trunk circuits
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.
46 Peripheral Equipment cards
QPC99 Carrier Interface System Hardware-System option 21/51/61/71
Purpose-Used for RPE applications. Contains two carrier line receivers
with 7.5 dB pads built-in. Converts bipolar line signals into TIL level
signals. Provides facilities for carrier looping. Monitors system and
invokes emergency transfer if carrier fails.
Note:
QPC99F or later vintage is required.
Quantity-Two per network loop
QPCI 92 Off-Premises Extension Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose---The Off-Premises Extension (OPX) line circuit interfaces with
500/2500-type sets in p-Law applications. The loop range from the PE
Module to station apparatus is 1400 SL excluding the set. This trunk may
also be used when the line-to-line loss required is less than 5 dE%. Refer to
50012500 line packs-Description and operation (553-2201-183) for more
information.
Quantity-One per two OPX lines
.-
QPC237 4-wire E&M/DX signaling trunk
System Hardware-All
Purpose!-Used in p-Law applications in one of the following modes to
interface with appropriate types of trunk facilities:
- E&M Signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk
- 4-wire DX signaling, 2-way dial repeating trunk (QPC237A/E% only)
Each trunk card has two sepamte, identical trunk circuits with a balanced
terminating impedance of 600 Sz. Trnnk usage options are selected by
option switches on the pack. Refer to Four-wire E&MIDX trunk circuit
description (553-2001-190).
Note: QPC237D or later vintage is required.
Quantity-Maximum of 10 cards per NT8D13 PE Module
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
:.
-.
I
.
.
:.
Peripheral Equipment cards 47
QPC250 Release Link Trirnk
System Hardware-All
:.i
s
‘. 1
7.:
..-.;:. .,
I_ .,..... ._/. ..
L.:.::::;:..:;
‘;.z’..: 7.:’
‘-1
Purpose-Used to interface a remote system, arranged for the Centralized
Attendant Service (CAS) option, with the main system where CAS
attendant is located. Refer to Centralized Attendant S&vice (CAS) Feature description and engineering (553-2681-100) and Release Link
Trunk- Description, operation, and installation (553-2681-180) for more
information.
The card contains two separate, identical trunk circuits, with balanced
terminating impedance of 900 a.
Note: QPC250B or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One per two Release Link Trunks
QPC297 Attendant Console Monitor
System HardwarsAll
Purpose-Interfaces attendant consoles (including add-on modules) when
the supervisory console feature is used. Allows the supervisory attendant to
monitor calls being handled by attendants within the customer group. _
Quantity-One per M1250/QCW4
Console feature
console in systems using Supervisory
QPC422 Tone Detector
System Hardware-All
Purpose--Identifies tones and reports to CPU appropriately. Each card
contains two tone detector circuits controlled by two microprocessors.
Refer to Tone Detector - Circuit description (553-2001- 191) for more
information.
Quantity-One per system
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
48 Peripheral Equipment cards
QPC430 Asynchronous Interface Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides four asynchronous line ports. Used in the SL- 1 Data
Feature to interface to data equipment conforming to the EIA RS-422
standard. Refer to SL-1 Data Feature-General-description and
provisioning (553-2731-100) for more information.
Note:
QPC43OF or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One per four data lines
QPC432 4-Port Data Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides four data-only ports for the SL-1 Dam Feature. Refer
to SL-1 Data Feature - General description and provisioning (553-273 l.
100) for more information.
Note:
QPC432C or later vintage is required.
Quantity--One
per four data ports
QPC449 Loop Signaling Trunk
System
Hardware!-All
Purpose-Interfaces the following 600 or 900 0 trunks in p-Law
applications:
- Direct Inward Dialing (DID)
- 2-way Tie, Dial Repeating (2DR)
- 2-way Tie, Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial (OAID)
- Outgoing Automatic Number Identification (OANI)
The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option
is selected by switches on the circuit card. Refer to Circuit pack option
settings (553-3001-211) for more information.
Quantity-One per four loop signaling trunks
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Peripheral Equipment cards 49
QPC450 CO/FX/VVATS Trunk
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Interfaces four 600 or 900 GJ CO, FX or WATS trunks with the
system in l.t-Law applications. The card can also detect ringing on either the
tip or ring leads and has provision to extend the normal loop range fi-om
1200 SL to 2600 n using balanced battery boost from the Central Office.
Refer to COIFXIWATS trunk engineering description ( 553-2201-185) for
more information.
The card contains four separate identical trunk circuits. Trunk usage option
is selected by switches on the circuit card.
Note: QPC45OE or later vintage is required.
Quantity-One per four CO/IX/WATS trunks
QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Interfaces the Digital telephone sets and the associated ASCII
terminals on Time Compression Multiplexing (‘KM) loops to the system.
Each card contains 16 separate line circuits, 8 Data circuits and 8 Voicecircuits.
Quantity--One per 16 digital lines
QPC594 16-Port 500/2500 Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Allows for 16 circuits per card (quad density) using p-law.
Quantity-One per 16 500/2500 lines
QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Interfaces one or two network loops. Also, a Digitone
daughterboard can be used to convert multifrequency dialing signals from a
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
50 Peripheral Equipment cards
DIGITONE station to dc pulses suitable for processing in the system
control.
Quantity-One per NT8D13 PE Module
I
QPC723 RS-232 4-Port Interface Line
System Hardware-All
Purpose-This card provides four direct interfaces to RS-232 asynchronous
ASCII computer equipment, such as asynchronous hosts, modems, standard
off-the-shelf X.25 Packet Assembler/Disassembler (PAD), data PABXs and
multiplexers.
Quantity-One per NT8D13 PE Module
QPC789 16-Port 500/2500 Line (Message Waiting)
System Hardware-All
I.
Purpose--Provides interface to up to 16 analog sets (500/2500) with
Message Waiting lamp feature.
Quantity-One per 16 500/2500 Message Waiting lines
QPCSI 8 High-Speed Data Card
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Supports two data ports that operate independently of each other
in synchronous/ssynchronous mode. Interfaces with any port on the
QPC432 I-Port Data Line Card.
The High-Speed Data Card (HSDC) provides an interface to high speed
synchronous devices, such as front end processors or video conferencing
ports, through the Multi-Channel System (MCDS) and the PBX. In
synchronous mode, it supports data speeds of up to 64 kbps. Refer to
QPC918 High-Speed Data Card -Description, installation, and operation
(553-2731-108) for more information.
Quantity-As required
Equipment identification and ordering information
Y
553-3001-l 54
Station equipment
Meridian Modular Telephanes
The Meridian Modular Telephones are designed to provide cost effective
integrated voice and data communication capability.
The following Meridian Modular Telephones are available:
- M2006-a single line telephone with 6 programmable keys
- M2008-a multi-line set with 8 programmable keys
- M2616-a high performance multi-line set with 16 programmable keys
and integrated Handsfree unit
- M2016S-a Telephone Security Group Class II approved telephone
designed to provide on-hook security. It is similar to the M2616, with
16 programmable keys, but has no handsfree capability.
- M2216ACD-1-a multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15
programmable function keys, a special ACD Display Module and two
FU-32 jacks for modular electret headsets
- M2216ACD-2-a multi-line set for ACD operations. It has 15
programmable function keys, and a special ACD Display. It is similar
to model 1, but with one PJ-327 jack for a carbon agent headset and
one RJ-32 jack for an electret supervisor headset
The following hardware options can be add on to Meridian Modular
Telephones:
- External Alerter Interface Board
- Display Module
- Programmable Data Adapter
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
52 Station equipment
- Key Expansion Module
Table 1 lists the ordering codes for the Meridian Modular Telephones, alone
and with hardware options installed.
Table 2 lists the hardware options that can be purchased separately, and
Table 3 lists miscellaneous items.
Refer to Meridian Modular Telephones-Description and specifications
(553-2201-116) for additional information.
Table 1
Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory installed options
Description
Ordering code
M2006 (Basic)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZKOGAA-03
NTZK06AA-35
NTZK06AA-93
M2006 (with MPDA)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZKOGAB-03
NTZK06AB-35
NTZK06AB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
M2008 (Basic)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK08AA-03
NTZK08AA-35
NTZK08AA-93
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
,
-’
Station equipment 53
Table 1
Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and
(continued)
Description i
faCtory histalled options
Ordering code
M2008 (with MPDA)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK08AB-03
NTZK08AB-35
NTZK08AB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
NTZK08BA-03
NTZK08BA-35
NTZK08BA-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
NTZK08BB-03
NTZK08BB-35
NTZK08BB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
M2008 (with Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
M2008 (with MPDA and Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
M2616 (basic)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK16AA-03
NTZKl6AA-35
NTZK16AA-93
M2616 (with MPDA)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK16AB-03
(with power board)
NTZKI 6AB-35 (with power board)
NTZKl6AB-93 (with power board)
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
54 Station equipment
Table 1
Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory
(continued)
Description
inktalled options
Ordering code
M2616 (with Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZKl6BA-03
NTZK16BA35
NTZK16BA-93
M2616 (with MPDA and Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK16BB-03
NTZK16BB-35
NTZK16BB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
M2016S (basic)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK20AA-03 (with power board)
NTZK20AA-35 (with power board)
NTZK20AA-93 (with power board)
M2016S (with MPDA)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK20AB-03
(with power board)
NTZK20AB35 (with power board)
NTZK20AB-93
(with power board)
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Station equipment 55
Table 1
Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and
(continued)
Description ,
factory
installed options
Ordering code
M2016S (with Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
M2016S (withMPDA
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
NTZK20BB-03
NTZK20BB-35
NTZK20BB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
and Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
M2216ACP1
Display)
NTZK20BA-03
NTZK20BA-35
NTZK20BA-93
(basic-with ACD
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK22AA-03
NTZK22AA-35
NTZK22AA-93
M2216ACP1 (with MPDA and
ACD Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK22AB-03
NTZK22AB-35
NTZK22AB-93
(with power board)
(with power board)
(with power board)
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
56 Station equipment
Table 1
Order codes for Meridian Modular Telephones and factory
(continued)
Description
iktalled options
Ordering code
M2216ACP2 (basic-with ACD
Display)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
M2216ACD-2
NTZK23AA-03 (with power board)
NTZK23AA-35 (with power board)
NTZK23AA-93 (with power board)
(with MPDA)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NTZK23AB-03
(with power board)
NTZK23AB35 (with power board)
NTZK23AB-93
(with power board)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
C.
:.
Station equipment 57
Table 2
Ordering codes for optional hardware
Description
Ordering code
Additional
Meridian Progfammabie Data Adapter
NT2K64WA
Power Supply Board
Display Module
requirements
- Power Supply Board (M2008:
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NT2K24WA-03
NT2K24WA35
NT2K24WA-93
ACD Display Module
Power Supply Board (M2008;
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NT2K25YH-03
NT2K25YH-35
NT2K25YH-93
I.
Top cover filler plate
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
PO778303-03
PO77833535
PO778393-93
.-
22 Key Expansion Module
Power Supply Board
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
NT2K22WA-03
NT2K22WA-35
NT2K22WA-93
Single Key Module Footstand
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
PO7801 03-03
PO7801 35-35
PO7801 93-93
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
58 Station equipment
Table 2
Ordering codes for optional hardware (continued)
Description
Ordering code
Additional
requirements
Double Key Module Footstand
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
PO780203-03
PO78023535
PO780293-93
External Alerter Interface
NT2K40WA
Power Supply Board
Power Supply Board
NT2Kl OWA
Transformer or closet power
120 V Transformer
A0367335
Power Supply Board
240 V Transformer
A036791 4
Power Supply Board
Equipment identification and ordering information 5533001-154
C.
:
Station equipment 59
Table 3
Ordering codes for miscellaneous items
Description
Ordering code
Card, Directory Number
Black
:-..
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
P O 6 6 5 3 5 2
PO665352
PO652746
Card, key labels
PO657709
Lens, Directory Number
PO652720
Handset
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
A0338908
A0329 173
A03291 74
Handset cord, 2.7m. (9 ft)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
A0334590
A031 8327
A031 8330
Handset cord, 3.6 m. (12 ft)
Black
Chameleon Ash
Dolphin Gray
A0274233
A0274243
A031 4423
Line cord
A0346862
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
60 Station equipment
Table 3
Ordering codes for miscellaneous items (continued)
Ordering code
Set User Guide (regular)
PO703991
Set Reference Card
PO704094 -
Display Module Reference Card
PO704096
Display
PO706836
Installation
Sheet
Meridian Programmable Data
Adapter User Guide
PO705986
M2216ACD
PO704747
User Guide
PO705952
ACD Reference Card
M2000 series digital telephones
The following types of M2000 digital telephones are available for integrated
voice and data communications:
- The M2009 (NTlFOS) has 9 keys for features and lines
- The M2018 (NTlFO7) has 18 keys for features and lines
- The M2112 (NTlFO7) has 12 keys which are as follows:
.
11 keys for features and lines
.
one key to control the built-in handsf&e feature
- The M2317 has 17 keys which are as follows:
.
11 programmable keys
.
one key to control the built-in handsfme feature
.
five soft keys which are programmable for software features
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
.
.
:,
:.
Station equipment 61
An asynchronous data option circuit board (NTlFO9) and data option power
supply (NFS50220-04Ll) are available for the M2000 series digital
telephones to provide for connecting data terminals to the sets.
For additional information on these telephones, refer to M2000 Digital
Telephones - Description, Installation, Operation, and Maintenance
(553-2201-110).
M3000Touchphone
The M3000 (NTlFl 1) Touchphone is a digital integrated voice and data
telephone with a touch sensitive Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) screen for
feature implementation. Refer to Meridian A43000 Touchphone Description, installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-115) for
additional information.
An asynchronous data option circuit board (NTlFlO) and data option power
supply (TEC 00020) are available to provide for connecting data terminals
.
to the sets.
NE-500/2500 telephone set
These are standard single line 500-type rotary dial sets and 2500-type
Digitone pushbutton dial sets that may be used with the Meridian 1 system.
Standard 48-V talk battery and 20-Hz ringing voltage are available so that
conventional equipment such as telephone answering, dictation, data sets,
modems, key telephones, can be used with the Meridian 1 system.
If the message waiting lamp feature is required,. use NE-SOOYR,
NE-2500YQA sets.
Ml250 and 2250 attendant consoles
;:
:
_:
- :- :;- : _‘.
:‘- :;: : :
The Ml250 and M2250 incorporate design improvements based on the
Attendant Console QCW4E and are functionally compatible with the
QCW4. The Ml250 is driven and powered by analog line cards and is
compatible with QCW4 console cabling schemes. The M2250 is driven and
powered by a digital line card and has a modified cabling scheme. The
following list describes the applications for SL-1 System attendant consoles.
- The Ml250 is designed to work in analog mode and functions through
an analog line card when connected to a digital switch.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
62 Station equipment
- The M2250 is a digital version of the.Ml250, offering additional
features. A digital link connects the M2250 to the switch.
Refer to MI250 and M22.50 Attendant ConsoIes description (553-2201-117)
for additional information.
Attendant administration overlay template
This plastic overlay is placed over the attendant console to indicate the key
functions when using the Attendant Administration feature. Order number
is PO613887. Refer to Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305) for more
details.
QMTI and QMT2 key/lamp expansion modules
These modules allow the expansion of key/lamp field of QSU-type
telephone sets or QCW-type attendant consoles for additional directory
number and feature activation facilities. These modules require a local.24 V
plug-in transformer or a QUTl centralized power unit.
- QMTl - consists of one Xl-button nonlocking key strip
- QMT2 - consists of two lo-button nonlocking key strips.
QMT3 lamp field array module
This is an add-on module for QSU-type telephone sets or QCW-type
attendant consoles to display the busy-idle status of 150 consecutive
stations. It requires a local 15 V plug-in transformer or a QUTl centralized
power unit. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules, interface kits
and Meridian Ml000 Series Telephones description (553-2001-l 10) for
more information.
QMT4 handset module
This module is used as a handset cradle to hold the attendant console
handset. No active components are contained inside the module.
This module includes the NE-G3 handset. It may be attached to the console
or left freestanding. It contains two jacks to accommodate a standard
headset or handset plug when module is attached to the console. It also
allows hearing aids to be coupled with telephone adaptors to the handsets.
Refer to Attendant Consoles and Add-On Modules-Description (5532001-l 15) for more information.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.-
Station equipment 63
If QCW4E or later vintage is used, either a.QMT4C must be used or the
QMT4A or QMT4B must be used as standalone cradles.
QMTI 1 asynchronous/ synchronous interface module
The Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module (AS&I) is similar to the
QMT9 but provides added dialing capabilities and six data feature keys and
associated lamps and data control switches. Refer to SL-1 Data Feature General description andprovisioning (553-2731-100) for more information.
QMT12 add-on data module
The synchronous ADM provides a CCIlT V.35 interface between the
Meridian 1 system and customer-supplied dam equipment. Refer to SL-I
Data Feature-General description and provisionin (553-2731-100) for
more information.
Each ADM requires a local supplementary power supply such as the
I.
PO593922 or PO610756 transformer.
QMTI 5 amplified handset module
This module is similar to the QMT4 module, with addition of an amplifier
for the hearing impaired. It includes a volume control, 2 headset plugs on
the right side of the module which plug into the headset jacks on the __
console. It also has 2 headset/handset plugs on the left side. One (attendant
jack) is under control of the amplifier; the second (supervisor jack) cannot
have its volume adjusted.
QMT21 high-speed data module
This module is similar to the QMTll module. It provides RS-232/V.35
interface and allows synchronous data transmission of up to 64 kbps. It
provides connectivity to the Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) for intraswitch communications, as well as wide area communications over DTI/PRI
links to other Northern Telecom switches. Refer to QMZZ High-Speed
Data Module -Description, installation, and operation (553-2731-107)
for more information.
QUSI logic handsfree unit
This unit provides handsfree voice switching facilities on the SL-1
telephone. Refer to 512-6251-200 for a complete description.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
64 Station equipment
QKKI handsfree remote powering kit
This kit is used to modify SL- 1 telephone sets for use with the QUS 1 Logic
handsfiee unit and to extend the SL-1 set operating range from 1830 m
(6000 ft) to 2438 m (8000 ft). It requires a 24 V ac local transformer
(ordered separately).
This kit is field-installable inside a set. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, AddOn Modules, interface kits and Meridian Ml000 Series Telephones
description (553-2001-l 10) for more information.
QKK3 automatic handsfree interface kit
This kit is the same as QKKl for systems with the Automatic Answer
feature. It automatically answers calls after a single ring (see QKK8 and
refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules, interface kits and Meridian
Ml000 Series Telephones description (553-2001-l 10)).
QKK8 automatic handsfree interface kit
This kit is the same as QKK3 but for QSU71 sets only.
QKM13 light probe kit
This kit enables a sight-impaired person to use existing consoles and SL-1
sets. The probe consists of a small hand-held box with a light sensor.
When the sensor is placed over an LED that is on, a tone is heard in the
handset or headset, Refer to Attendant Consoles and Add-On Modules
description (553-2001-l 15) for more information. Two PO590352
connector kits are required to install the light probe into an SL-1 set.
--
QKNI headset kit
This kit is used to modify QSU-type telephone set for NE-5Ztype Venture
1 or equivalent headset operation. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On
Modules, interface kits and Meridian Ml 000 Series Telephones description
(553-2001-l 10) for more information.
This kit provides the following features:
- field-installable inside a set
- jack and ON-OFF switch are located in the filler plate position on the
left-hand side of the set
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
,..- 7.
;; ..”
,. . . .:‘7
:.. :.:‘, : 1
‘,’
Station equipment 65
- no supplementary power is required
:.>; .::. ..~ ‘L_.. ,
4 _ .-:I:--”
.._, _ ._.. ..._
QSR2 venture 1 headset
This set is used in conjunction with the QKNl headset kit to provide head
telephone set operation. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules,
interface kits and Meridian Ml 000 Series Telephones description
(553-2001-110) for more information.
This headset provides the following features:
- lightweight (17 g)
- ear-mounted - left or right
- six different sizes of eartips
- acoustic, noise-canceling transmitter held close to user’s mouth by a
thin, plastic covered, stainless steel arm attached to the headset capsule
I.
QSAM2A and QSAM3A group listening switch kit
This kit allows the speech of both parties to be heard through the speaker of
the SL-1 set. Refer to QSU-Telephone Sets, Add-On Modules, interface kits
and Meridian Ml000 Series Telephones description (553-2001-l 10) for
more information.
.An ON/OFF switch is mounted in the left-hand filler plate of a QSU-type
set. When ON, the speech of the SL-1 set user and the connected party are
heard through the speaker of the SL-1 set. When OFF, the SL-1 set
functions normally.
- QSAM2A used on phase I SL-1 sets
- QSAM3A used on phase II SL-1 sets, (QSUlF and later vintage)
Asynchronous data options
---- -._:.:. -;
These microprocessor-controlled devices provide the interface (RS-232
compatible) through which ASCII Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be
connected to the Meridian 1 network. Two types of asynchronous data
options are available for use with the following digital telephones:
- NTlFOBAA printed circuit board for use with M2009, M2018 and
M2112 digital telephones. Refer to Meridian M2000 Digital
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
66 Station equipment
Telephones -Description, installation, operation, and maintenance
(553-2201-l 10) for more information.
- NTlFlOAA printed circuit board assembly and housing for M3000
digital touchphone. Refer to Meridian h43000 Touchphone Description, installation, operation, and ma@tenance (553-2201-l 15)
for additional information.
,-,..‘..F
1. .c;. ___
“;.‘“.‘-,.:
,
The following features are available:
- Automatic data rate detection at all rates using the ASCII “Carriage
Return” character
- Keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local and remote hosts or
DTE from the terminal keyboard
- Break detection and generation
Meridian programmable data adapter
.
This adapter provides the interface (RS-232 compatible) through which
ASCII Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) may be connected to the Meridian
1 network. It is available with the M2006, M2008, M2016S, and M2616
Meridian Modular Telephones
Some of the features available are as follows:
- keyboard dialing for originating data calls to local or remote hosts or
DTE
- telephone keypad dialing for originating and releasing data calls
- - parameter setting from telephone keypad
- voice call origination from terminal keyboard
- script file capabilities to pre-program resource locations via mnemonic
address names
Teledaptm
Teledapt standardized telephone connectorization for QSU-type sets
provides an alternative to the conventional spade tip form of set termination.
QSU-type sets possessing the Teledapt capability are designated by “ QM”
suffix on the set code (i.e., the QSUlEQM). while “QM” sets use a 2 m
(7 ft) cord, the NED6QF Teledapt cord assembly may be ordered
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.-
Station equipment 67
..
:”.;
.;
.,.-,’ l, . .
s”Tz$
‘C\ ” ,’
separately in 2 m (7 ft), 4 m (14 ft), qr 7.5 m (25 ft) lengths for conversion
of existing SL-1 sets. These assemblies are compatible only with the
Teledapt jacks designed for the system.
Station equipment replaceable items
Table 4 lists the individual parts of the station equipment that are fieldreplaceable. These parts may be ordered by using the given apparatus
number.
_:
.I
j
.
:y:
.. ...
I-.
. .. . .
^ /: .‘
. . ,..: .:
,: ::::
. .;
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
68 Station equipment
Table 4
Station equipment replaceable items
Equipment
GICW-Type
Attendant Consoles
Replaceable items
Apparatus
number
Cover Assembly
PO538435
Attendant
3CWl , QCW2 only
QCW3, QCW4 only (see Note)
M2006, M2008, M2016S, M2216,
and M2616 sets
Administration -
c
Overlay
PO61 3887
Console Caps Package
PO58631 2
Bezel
PO567037
Bezel
PO578254
Dial Pad
PO536503
LED Assembly (1 strip)
PO548801
LED Assembly (2 strips)
PO548799
LED Assembly (3 strips)
P O 5 4 8 8 0 0
Line Cord
N E-D50QE-35
8-Digit Display (QCW2)
PO578270
Key button strip PCB
(QCW3 only)
QPC246
Key button strip PCB
QPC247
Key button strip PCB
QPC248
Directory Number Card
P0665352,
PO652740
Key Label Card
PO657709
Directory Number Lens
PO652720
Handset
Black
A0338908
Chameleon Ash
A03291 73
Dolphin Gray
A0329 174
Handset Cord (2.7 m/g ft)
Black
A0334590
-continued -
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
%.
:
:
Station equipment 69
Table 4
Station equipment replaceable items (continued)
Equipment
Replaceable items
Apparatus
number
Chameleon Ash
AQ318327
Dolphin Gray
A031 8330
Handset Cord (3.6 m/l 2 ft)
All Sets and Consoles
I
Black
A0274233
Chameleon Ash
A0274243
Dolphin Gray
A031 4423
Line Cord
A0346862
Card Holder
PO535652
Filler Plate
PO523535
Note: The QCW3 houses one QPC246, one QPC247 and one QPC248. The QCW4 houses one
QPC247 and two QPC248 PCBs (right and left).
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-154
70 Station equipment
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.w
,:
:
71
Cabling
The cables are differentiated by the cabling method used. Two types of
cables are available.
Intra-UEM cables are cables that connect to different cards within a UEM,
or cables that go to the I/O connector panels at the rear of the UEM.
Intra-UEM cables are not shielded. These cables arc typically round and
use bail locks or screws to prevent accidental removal.
Inter-UEM cables are cables that are routed internally between UEMs.
These cables are used primarily for interconnecting the following
subsystems together:
- CPU toCPU
.-
- CPU to Network
- Network to Network
- Network to Peripheral Equipment
All of the faceplate connectors use a go-degree cable egress and all of the
backplane connectors use a 180-degree cable egress.
NT7Dl IAE module-to-module power harness
Purpose-This power wiring harness is used in DC modules to connect the
input DC power and speed control signals vertically through the column. It
is constructed in a modular form, and can be disconnected when necessary
to allow for the removal and/or replacement of modules. The DC power
harness is larger than that of the AC system since it requires the use of more
input wires in order to handle the lower voltage and its associated higher
current.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
72 Cabling
NT8D40AA AC power cord
Purpose-This cable conducts AC power into the pedestal for AC systems.
It is 9.1 m (30 ft) long.
NT8D40AM module-to-module power harness
Purpose--This power wiring harness is used in AC modules to connect the
input AC power and speed control signals vertically through the column. It
is constructed in a modular form, and can be disconnected when necessary
to allow for the removal and/or replacement of modules.
NT8D40AY AC power cord
Purpose-This cable conducts AC power into the pedestal for System
options 21A. It is 2.7 m (9 ft) long.
NT8D40BJ System Monitor to backplane cable
Purpose--This cable is used for System option 21A. It connects the ‘System Monitor to the common/peripheral equipment backplane to allow
control and monitoring of the system.
NT8D40BK System Monitor trip cable
Purpose-This internal cable is used for System option 21A. It connects
the System Monitor to the power distribution unit. It allows the System
Monitor to trip the circuit breaker.
NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable
Purpose!-This cable is used to connect the monitoring signals vertically
through the column. It is constructed in a modular form, and can be
disconnected when necessary to allow for the removal and/or replacement
of modules.
NT8D46AC Thermostat harness
Purpose-The thermostat harness is part of the Temperature Sensor
Assembly. It contains two thermal sensors and a fault LED. At 70degree
Celsius, the thermal sensors trip and cause system shutdown. The
thermostat harness plugs into the backplane of the top module.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
C’
.-
Cabling 73
NT8D46AD System Monitbr SDI cable
‘/
PurpoeThis cable is used to connect an SD1 card to the System Monitor.
It replaces the NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable when the SD1 is
in the same UEM.
i-.:.2-,
:j !..,.:
‘c;: !>
1 . .---..“..-:.,i..i :I.
NT8D46AG System Monitor to SDI paddle boar’d cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the
NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board (dual port). It replaces the NT8D46AA
System Monitor column cable when the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board
(dual port) is in the same UEM.
NT8D46AH System Monitor to MDF cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor Power Fail
Transfer Unit to the MDF.
This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long.
I.
NT8D46AJ System Monitor to UPS (Best) cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the Best
Uninterruptable Power Supply (UPS). It is used for UPS monitoring.
This cable is 13.7 m (45 ft) long.
.-
NT8D46AL System Monitor Serial Link cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor from one
column to another.
This cable is 2.1 m (7 ft) long.
NT8D46AM Air Probe harness AC
Purpose-The Air Probe harness AC is part of the Temperature Sensor
Assembly and is used in AC systems. It uses a 24-pin connector. It senses
exit air temperature and relates the information to the blower unit.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
-.
:
.:
.:.
:
74 Cabling
NT8D46AP Extended System’ Monitor Serial Link cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor from one
column to another.
This cable is 7.6 m (25 ft) long.
NT8D46AQ System Monitor to UPS (Exide) cable
PurposeThis cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the Exide
UPS. It is used for UPS monitoring.
This cable is 13.7 m (45 ft) long.
NT8D46AS System Monitor inter-CPU cable
Purpose--This cable is used to connect the dual CPUs in Meridian 1
System option 71 together for System Monitor monitoring. It replaces the
NT8D46AA System Monitor column cable in both CPU modules.
NT8D46AT System Monitor to QBLIS cable
Purpose-This cable connects the System Monitor to the QBLl5
power/battery distribution box. It is used to monitor the DC power plant.
This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long.
NT8D46AU System Monitor to UPS (Alpha) cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the System Monitor to the Alpha
UPS. It is used for UPS monitoring.
This cable is 13.7 m (45 ft) long.
NT8D46AV System Monitor to QCA13 cable
Purpos-This cable connects the System Monitor to the QCA13 DC
power plant. It is used to monitor the DC power plant.
This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
.-
Cabling 75
NT8D46AW System Monitor to QBL12 cable
Purpose----This cable connects the System Monitor to the QBL12 battery
distribution box. It is used to monitor the DC power plant.
This cable is 9.7 m (32 ft) long.
NT8D46DC Air Probe harness DC
Purpose-The Air Probe harness DC is part of the Temperature Sensor
Assembly and is used in DC systems. It uses a 36-pin connector. It senses
exit air temperature and relates the information to the blower unit.
NT8D73 Inter-cabinet Network cable
Purpose--This cable is used to interconnect QPC414 Network cards:
- from Network Module to PE Module via the I/O connector panels
- from QCA55 cabinet to PE Module
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D73AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NTSD73AF
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT8D73AL
6 m (20 ft)
- NT8D73AS
9.1 m (30 ft)
NT8D74 Clock Controller to Inter Group cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC47 1 Clock Controller card
to the NT8D36AA Inter Group Module.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D74AC
1.2m(4ft)
- NT8D74AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D74AE
2.4 m (8 ft)
- NT8D74AF
3 m (10 ft)
- NT8D74A.I
4.8 m (16 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
76 Cabling
NT8D75 Clock Controller to Clock Controller cable
Purpose-This cable is used to interconnect QF’C471 Clock Controller
cards.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D75AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D75AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D76 Intergroup Switch to Inter Group cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QF’C412 Intergroup Switch
card to the NT8D36AA Inter Group Module.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D76AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D76AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D76AE
2.4 m (8 ft)
- NT8D76AF
3 m (lqft)
- NT8D76AG
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT8D76A.l
4.8 m (16 ft)
- NT8D76AL
6 m (20 ft)
- NT8D76AP
7.6 m (25 ft)
.-
NT8D77 FDI to FDU cable
Purpose!-This cable is used to connect the QPC742 FDI card to the
NT8D68AA FDU card.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D77AES
0.6 m (2 ft)
- NT8D77AA
0.9 m (3 ft)
- NT8D77AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D77AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
: -.
..:
..:.
..’
Cabling 77
NT8D78AA CPU cable __i
.:
‘:
I
: ..I.:. . 1
;::.> . .Y,’
,...-.
_. :_:.:I
..,
tI_ ..-.
.,. ..I
: -’ ‘. ; --;
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC580 CPU Interface card to
QPC579 CPU Function card.
This cable is 5 cm (2 in.) long.
NT8D79 PRVDTI to Clock Controller cable
Purpose--This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI card to the QPC471
Clock Controller card.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D79AB
0.6 m (2 ft)
- NT8D79AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D79AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D79AE
2.4 m (8 ft)
- NT8D79AF
3 m (10 ft)
NT8D80 CPU interface cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the following:
- QPC581 CMA card to QPC581 CMA card in a dual CPU config&ion
- QPC584 MS1 card to NT8D69AA MDU
- QPC215 Segmented Bus Extender in CPU to Network via QPC441
3PE
- QPC4413PE in Network 0 to QPC4413PE in Network 1 (Meridian 1
System option 61 only)
This cable is available in the following lengths:
_I].I
:I
i ._
.: ,:. ..i :
1..
r ,..;
:-.. ...
- NT8D8OAB
0.6 m (2 ft)
- NT8D80AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D80AZ
- NT8D80AD
1.5 m (5 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D80AE
2.4 m (8 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
78 Cabling
- NT8D80AF
3m(lOft)
- NT8DSOAG
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT8D80A.I
4.8 m (16 ft)
- NT8D80AL
6 m (20 ft)
- NTSDSOAP
7.6 m (25 ft)
NT8D81AA Tip and Ring cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect a line card to the I/O connector
panel.
This cable is 50 cm (20 in.) long.
NT8D82 SDI to I/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the the following cards to the I/O
connector panel:
- QPC757 D-Channel Handler Interface
- QPC513 Enhanced Serial Data Interface
- QPC84 1 Four-Port Serial Data Interface
- QPC687 CPU with SDI/ RTC
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D82AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D82AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D83 PRVDTI to l/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI card (Tl port) to the
I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D83AC
- NT8D83AD
1.2 m (4 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
u
.:
_:
Cabling 79
NT8D84AA SDI paddle board (dual. port) to I/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board
(dual port) to the I/O connector panel.
This cable is 45.7 cm (18 in.) long.
NT8D85 Network to PE cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the following:
- QPC58 1 CMA card to QPC58 1 CMA card in dual CPU configuration
- QPC414 Network card to PRI/DTI card
- QPC414 Network card to QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card
(for internal cabling only)
- QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card to QPC659 Dual Loop
Peripheral Buffer card when connecting two NTSD13 PE Modules
I.
together
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D85AB
0.6 m (2 ft)
- NT8D85AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D85AZ
1.5 m (5 ft)
- NT8D85AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D85AB
2.4 m (8 ft)
- NT8D85AF
3 m (10 ft)
- NT8D85AJ
4.8 m (16 ft)
- NT8D85AL
6 m (20 ft)
- NT8D85AP
7.6 m (25 ft)
- NT8D85AT
10.6 m (35 ft)
- NT8D85AV
13.7 m (45 ft)
-
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
80 Cabling
NT8D86 Network to I/O cablePurpose!-This cable is used to connect the following to the I/O connector
panel:
- QPC414 Network card
- PRIlDTIcard
- QPC659 Dual Loop Peripheral Buffer card
- NT8D47RPE
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D86AC
1.5 m (5 ft)
- NT8D86AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D87 Conference/TDS to music trunk cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D17AA Conference/IDS
card to the music trunk or I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D87AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D87AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D88 Network to I/O cable
Purpose--This cable connects the NT8DO4AA Superloop Network card to
the I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D88AC
1.5 m (5 ft)
- NT8D88AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
NT8D90AF SDI multiple-port cable - internal
Purpose-This is a multiple-port extension cable for QPC841 Four-Port
SD1 card. This cable is used to connect from the I/O connector panel to the
NT8D96AB cable.
This cable is 3 m (10 ft) long.
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
-,._ -..,.,. ..I. :
,2
:.
‘% .I
Cabling 81
NT8D91 Network to Controller cable
Purpose-This cable is used for internal cabling to connect NT8DO4
Superloop Network card to NT8DOlAD Controller-2 or NT8DOlAC
Controller-4 card.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D91AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NT8D91AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
- NT8D91AE
2.4 m (8 ft)
- NT8D91AF
3 m (loft)
- NT8D91AG
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT8D9lAI
4.8 m (16 ft)
- NT8D91AP
7.6 m (25 ft)
- NT8D91AT
10.6 m (35 ft)
- NT8D91AV
13.7 m (45 ft)
NT8D92AB Controller to I/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8DOl Controller card tothe
I/O connector panel. This method of cabling is used only when the
Network loop is cabled externally to the DEM.
This cable is 50 cm (20 in.) long.
NT8D93 SDI paddle board (dual port) I/O to DTE/DCE cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D41AA SD1 paddle board
(dual port) to the DTE or DCE via the I/O connector panel.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
j
.i
., _
‘.‘_....:,..:.‘,
- NT8D93A.l
4.8 m (16 ft)’
- NT8D93AW
14.6 m (48 ft)
NT8D95 SDI I/O to DTE/DCE cable
Purpose--This cable is used to connect the following cards to the DTE or
DCE via the I/O connector panel:
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
82 Cabling
- QPC513 Enhanced Se&l Data Interface
- QPC841 Four-Port Serial Data Interface
- QPC687 CPU with SDI/ RTC
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D95A.I
4.8 m (16 ft)
- NT8D95AT
10.3 m (34 ft)
- NTSD95AW
14.6 m (48 ft)
97AX PRllDTl
-
to MWDF cable
Purpose-This cable connects the PRI/DTI card to the MDF via the I/O
connector panel.
This cable is 15.2 m (50 ft) long.
Purpose--This cable is used to interconnect NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network cards:
- from Network Module to IPE Module via the I/O connector panels
- from QCA55 cabinet to IPE Module
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D98AD
- NT8D98AF
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT8D98AL
6 m (20 ft)
- NT8D98AS
9.1 m (30 ft)
- NT8D98AT (not for QCA55 cabinet application)
11.5 m (38 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
. .
1.8 m (6 ft)
_-
Cabling 83
NT8D99 CPU to Network cable
Purpose-This cable is used to:interconnect NT8D35 NET Modules in full
group configuration
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT8D99AR
0.6 m (2 ft)
- NT8D99AC
1.2 m (4 ft)
- NTm99AD
1.8 m (6 ft)
-
NT9J93AD PRVDTI Echo Canceler to I/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the PRI/DTI Echo Canceler port to
the I/O connector panel.
This cable is 1.8 m (6 ft) long.
NT9J94AB RPE to I/O cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8D47 RPE to the I/O
connector panel.
This cable is 0.6 m (2 ft) long.
NT9J96 Intra-cabinet Network cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC414 Network card to the
I/O connector panel within an existing SL-1 cabinet (QCA55).
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT9J96AC
1 m (40 in.)
- NT9J96AD
1.8 m (70 in.)
- NT9J96AE
2.2 m (85 in.)
- Nl9J96AG
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT9J96AH
4.3 m (14 ft)
- NT9J96AJ
4.9 m (16 ft)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
84 Cabling
NT9J97 Intra-column Network cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network card to the I/O connector panel in a QCA55 cabinet.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT9J97AC
1 m (40 in.)
- NT9J97AD
1.8 m (70 in.)
- NT9J97AE
2.2 m (85 in.)
- NT9J97AG
3.6 m (12 ft)
- NT9J97AH
4.3 m (14 ft)
- NT9J97AJ
4.9 m (16 ft)
NT9J98 Intra-cabinet Network cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the QPC414 Network card to the
I/O connector panel of the QCAlO8 or QCA136 cabinet.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT9J98AC
1 m (40 in.)
- NT9J98AD
1.8 m (70 in.)
- NT9J98AE
2.2 m (85 in.)
.
NT9J99 Intra-cabinet Network cable
Purpose-This cable is used to connect the NT8DO4AA Superloop
Network card to the I/O connector panel of the QCAlO8 or QCA136
cabinet.
This cable is available in the following lengths:
- NT9J99AC
1 m (40 in.)
- NT9J99AD
1.8 m (70 in.)
- Nl9J99AE
2.2 m (85 in.)
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
Cabling 85
QCADI 28 connector cable
Purpose-Connects QPC472 DTI Carrier Interface (J5) connector to the
cabinet filter panel. It is a 15-conductor flat ribbon cable with a U-pin
D-type female connector at one end and a 15-pin D-type male connector at
the other.
QCAD274A AC power cord
Purpose-This cable conducts AC power to the NT6D52AA rectifier. It is
2.7 m (9 ft) long.
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
: .:
553-3001-154
06 Cabling
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
87
Miscellaneous equipment
Field Wiring Kit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-The NT6D54AA Field Wiring Kit is used in conjunction with
the System Monitor to QBLl5 cable. It provides the necessary hardware to
connect four NT6D52AA rectifiers to a System Monitor.
..
Blank Faceplates
System
Hardware-All
Purpose-An NT7DOSAA blank faceplate is required in a slot reserved for
the Ringing Generator when the Ringing Generator is not in place.
.Although not required, other unoccupied slots can be covered by any of the
following blank faceplates, depending on the width of the slot:
- 2.2 cm (0.875 in.) NT8D3lAA
- 2.5 cm (1 in.)
NT8D31AB
NT8D63AA Overhead Cable Tray Kit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Holds I/O cables that go from the system to the Main
Distribution Frame (MDF). Provides support for overhead cabling tray.
Mounts to the highest module in each column. Each kit consists of the
following:
- support brackets
- front and rear top cap air grills with cut-outs
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
68 Miscellaneous equipment
N o t e : This kit does not include the cable tray.
Earthquake Bracing Kit
System Hardware-All
Purpose-Provides a means to hold together all modules that are stacked
up in vertical expansion so that in the case of an earthquake, the whole
column will move as a unit. Used only for non-raised floor. Each kit
contains the following:
- four threaded rods
- two tie bars
- miscellaneous hardware (nuts and washers)
Three different Earthquake Bracing Kits are available:
- two-tier NT8D64AA
- three-tier NTSD64AB
- four-tier JYlSD64AC
QRY551 Channel Service Unit
Purpose-When required under FCC regulations (FCC 03), provides a 24- .channel digital interface between a PRI/DTI and Tl line when connecting to
registered common carrier trunks.
TELLABS 251 24-Channel Digital Echo Canceller
Purpose-For use with PRI/DTI when echo control is required on voice
calls.
BIX Cross-Connect System
Purpose-The BIX In-Building Cross-Connect System provides modular
terminations and cross-connections for Meridian 1 system. (See
63 1-451 l-100 for ordering information for the BIX system and Table 5 for
designation label ordering information.)
Equipment identification and ordering information
553-3001-l 54
s.
:
:
I
:
Miscellaneous equipment 89
Table 5
Order Numbers for BIX Designation Labels for NT8D13 PE Modules
Description
Color
Order number
Basic 500/2500
set labels (eight circuits per card). A set
of four labels for each PE shelf is used
White
PO641 810
SL-1 set (eight circuits)
Blue
PO641 813
COIFXAVATS trunk (four circuits)
Green
PO641812
COIFXANATS trunk (two circuits)
Green
PO587230
Loop Signaling trunk (four circuits)
Red
PO641 811
Loop Signaling trunk (two circuits)
Red
PO587231
E&M/DX and Paging trunk (two circuits)
Yellow
PO587233
Recorded Telephone Dictation trunk (two circuits)
Orange
PO587232
Recorded Announcement trunk (two circuits)
Purple
PO587234
Four-Wire E&M/DX Type I trunk (two circuits)
Yellow
PO631 a58 ..
Four-Wire E&M/DX Type II trunk (two circuits)
Yellow
PO631 859
Power Fail Transfer cables (PlO, PFJl, PFJ2)
Yellow
PO641 814
Power Fail Transfer cables
Transfer Unit
Yellow
PO686506
(Pl 0, PFJl) QUA6 Power Fail
Blank labels for sets
Blank labels for trunks and riser cables
Yellow
Po5884oi
Blue
PO588403
Silver
PO588404
Green
PO58841 5
Blue
PO58841 6
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
90 Miscellaneous equipment
Northern Telecom Publicatidns
Northern Telecom Publications are packaged in standard Northern Telecom
binders to support the various Meridian 1 systems.
Title and description
Qrder
Installation and maintenance guide
21,51, 61, 71
Planning and engineering guide
51, 61, 71
number
- System options
PO71 0530
- System options 21,
PO71 0531
X1 1 software guide
PO71 0532
Xl 1 input/output guide
PO71 0533
Special features guide
PO71 0534
Automatic
Call
Distribution
reference
guide
Meridian Link general guide
Equipment identification and ordering information
PO71 0535
PO71 0536
553-3001-l 54
91
List of terms
ACD
Automatic Call Distribution
ASIM
Asynchronous/Synchronous Interface Module
BPS
Bits Per Second
BTU
Bus Terminating Unit
CAS
Centralized Attendant Service
cc
Clock Controller
CE
Common Equipment
CMA
Changeover Memory Arbitrator
co
Central Office
CPU
Central Processing Unit
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
92
List of terms
CRT
Cathode Ray Tube
DCE
Data Communication Equipment
DCHI
D-Channel Handler Interface
DID
Direct Inward Dialing
DTE
Data Terminal Equipment
DTl
Digital
Trunk
Interface
DTMF
Dual Tone Multi Frequency
DTR
Digitone Receiver
EIA
Electronics Industry Association
FDI
Floppy Disk Interface
FDU
Floppy Disk Unit
HSDC
High-Speed Data Card
IGS
Intergroup Switch
I/O
Input/Output
Equipment identification and ordering information
5533001-154
List of terms 93
ISDLC
Integrated Services Digital Line card
Integrated Services Digital Network
LRE
Logic Return Equalizer
MCDS
Multi-Channel System
MDF
Main Distribution Frame
MDU
Multi-Disk Unit
MSI
Mass Storage Interface
MSU
Mass Storage Unit
OAID
Outgoing Automatic Incoming Dial
OANI
Outgoing Automatic Number Identification
OPX
Off-Premises Extension
PAD
Packet Assembler/Disassembler
PBX
Private Branch Exchange
b... .
,:,:y;.7.-.
, . . , . .
;
: .‘.,.,..”
: ;;
-.:
PCM
Pulse Code Modulation
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
..
‘.
.- -.
:
94
List of terms
PE
Peripheral Equipment
PRA
Primary Rate Access
PRI
primary Rate Interface
RAM
Random Access Memory
RAN
Recorded Announcement
ROM
Read-Only Memory
RPE
Remote Peripheral Equipment
SBE
Segmented Bus Extender
SCG
System Clock Generator
SDI
Serial Data Interface
TCM
Time Compression Multiplexing
TDS
Tone and Digit Switch
UEM
Universal Equipment Module
^-. .
_../ .:.j
I
,;
Equipment identification and ordering information
..
553-3001-l 54
List of terms 95
UPS
Uninterruptable
Power Supply
3-Port Extender
Equipment identification and ordering information 553-3001-154
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Equipment identification and
ordering information
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
R e l e a s e 1 .O
Standard
January 29, 1990
Printed in U.S.A.
Et
narthorn
t~lacom
.
.
.
ti
northtzrn
telecom
PRACTICE 553-2201-180
Issrzid: 88 01 27
Standard
INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK
MERIDIAN SERIES
DIGITAL TELEPHONES
l
LINE ENGINEERING
CONTENTS
The module indicated by a bullet (@) in the checklist has been
revised. The reason for this revision is given in tbe first page of the
af f acted module.
Note:
Prinkd
in U.S.A.
‘Northern
T&corn
Limited
Page i
1 Page
.:-
. .
CHECKLIST
pzizJFq
ITEM
ISSUE
DATE
cxoooo
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
86 06 05
l-P 0010
DP 1001
DP 1002
DP 1003
DP 1004
DP 1005
DP 1006
DP 1007
IX 9999
86 06 05
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
86 01 27
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
pjgFFJq
NOTES
Note:
This module is reissued to change the minimum loop length requirement to
100 ft. and to add metric equivalents.
(I) Cable pair selections must meet the following requirements:
l AC signal loss must be less than 12.9 dB at 256 kHz due to all sources
l
DC loop resistance must be less than 175 Ohm
l Minimum loop length (mainframe bulkhead to telephone) of 30 m (100 ft)
l Near end crosstalk coupling loss >38dB at NyTuist frequency of 256 kHz
(not an issue for typical 22, 24, and 26 AWG twisted pair cable)
l No bridge taps are permitted
l No loading coils are permitted
e Protection devices of the carbon-block and gas-filled type are permitted
if the off-state shunting impedance is better than 10 Megohm resistive,
and less than 0.5.pF capacitive.
(2) The following criteria have to be met where undercarpet cabling is used.
l characteristic impedance at 256 ~Hz, 100 f 10 Ohm
l insertion loss at 256 Wz, < 4.6 dB/kft
l next pair-to-pair coupling loss at 256 kHz, > 40 dB
(3) For the typical system of 22, 24, or 26 AWG standard twisted pair cable,
the requirements translate to the following allowable loops.
..
l up to 915 m (3000 ft) of 22 or 24 AWG cable
l up to 640 m (2100 ft) of 26 AWG cable
(4) If selected cable pair does not work satisfactorily. select another cable
pair using the following flowchart (Page 2):
E N G I N E E R
-1
T E L E P H O N E
L I N E
-[ 11
Select (another) loop that
meets the criteria for
cable length. (DP 1001)
.[21-l
.
.
Is there a bridge
UP?
l
l No
c31-.
l
Is there another
. loop available?
l
l
.0
.
l
..
Yes
.7
rl
step 1
Remove the bridge tap.
cl
step 5
Page 3
I
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
.[ 51
.[61
.
0 Is the loop length
. less than 2.1 kft?
l
@No
l
a
.
-
.
.
Yes
.
l
No
.
l -
.
a
0
.
.-
.
a Is there any 26
. AWG cable in the
loop?
.
l
Yes
l
step 9
L&l
-[ 71
Calculate the loop
resistance (DP 1002)
.[ 81
l
l
0
Is the resistance less 0
than 175 Ohm?
. No
a
.
.
.[91l Is the PBXat
the
. Central Office?
l
l
*
Yes
l
0
.
.
Doesthelooppass
the loop diagnostic
test? (DP 1003)
.
Repair the problem.
l
.
.
.
.
.
N o
-
ENGINEER
11
T
E
L
E
P
H
O
N
E
LINE
. [121
.
0
.
.
Is the Impulse noise- 0
within limits? (DP
.
1004)
No
0
.
.I131 -.
l
.
Is the background
noise within limits?
l
l No
0
.
l
rl
step 1
Page 2
Install Meridian Digital
Telephone and check
&51-~
..
Is the performance l
l
.
.
_ . .. ..
“ . I ,...- . _
. .. . . . .._,. _I
. :,... : ..;:
1
:‘.
~’
::
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
pz+Fffj
. [ 161
.
0 Is there another pair
. available?
l
.
No
.
a
.
cl
step 18
.Wl-.
Isthisthesecond
. time around?
l
l
.
.
No
.
0
.
.
0
I
-[181
Collect more detailed
loop data and calculate
EPL (DP 1006)
l
[ 191
.
. Is EPL less than 12.0 .
. dB?
l
0
.
0
c
:
No
Install Meridian Digital
Telephone and check
performance if not
l
t211 I*
Is the performance
OK?
l
.
l
’
.
No
.
.
.
.
.
YSS
step 22
A
. [22l
l
l
0
--A
.
Are the loop
diagnostics and
noise measurement
already done?
.
l
Yes
.
.
a
l
0
.
step 21
Page 8
No
q!l
Perform loop diagnostics
and noise measurements.
(DP 1003, DP 1004 and
cl
Step 24
Page I
..
:..
I.
:.
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
-1
. [241
.
Are impulse noise
. and background
noise within limits?
.
l
l
l
l
l
Is the problem
fixed?
Yes
.
l No
.
. [261 -.
0 Is the performance
. OK?
.-
l
l No
cl
step 21
Page 8
E
-1
N
G
I
N
E
E
R
TET L
I
N
E
-[2n
Measure the dc loop
resistance. (DP 1007)
l
l
.l
.
[281
1[291-,
0
Is the loop
resistance less than
175 Ohm?
.
Install new cable.
. No
.
-
r--E301 L,
Measure loop insertion
loss at 256 kHz.
l
l
.
.
[311 --J----.
Is the insertion loss 0
less than 12.0 dB?
l
Yes
.:.
. . .. _ _
.i.-.2.
.. . .,
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
p%JFffj
Replace any under-carpet
cable if insertion loss can
be reduced.
Install Meridian Digital
Telephone and check
. [341-.
0 Is the performance 0
. OK?
l
Yes
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
N o
-
[ 351
-
At this point there may
be other problems as
listed in Table 0010-A
c
I
-1
E
N
G
I
N
E
E
R
TEL? L
I
N
E
Table 0010-A
POSSIBLE FAULTS
l
l
l
EM1
Unrecorded bridge taps
Under-carpet cable
l
Split cable pairs
l
Impulse noise - not recorded due to speed limitations of the impulse counter.
l
Faulty telephone
.-
c
SELECT A LOOP
-1
NOTES
0.01 The requirements for a Meridian Digital Telephone are that the loop be
without bridge taps, and be less than 175 Ohm dc resistance. and less than 12.0 dB
loss at 256 kHz. For a single gauge cable, the-length limits are 3000 ft for 22 and
24 AWG cable and D inside wiring, and 2100 ft for 26 AWG cable.
0.02 The allowable loop length assumes that there is no under-carpet cable. If
there is under-carpet cable of a type that is different from Western Electric
4-pair cable, reduce the allowable loop length using the following equation:
. LM = I12 -(UC x UL) 1 /LL
where
LM = loop length limit in km (kftl (excluding the length of the under-carpet
cable).
LL = loop loss in dB/km (dB/Kftl at 256 kHz.
UC = length of the under-carpet cable in km (kft).
..
UL = loss of the under-carpet cable in dB/km (dB/kftl at 256 kHz. Refer to
Table 1006-B for dB-values.
L..j. .t. . .\
:.fY : :,:.l:,:j
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
pJ%$qy
Chart 1002-l
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Calculate the dc loop resistance by adding the resistance of each cable section. Calculate
the resistance of each cable section using the following formula (Cable resistances are
given in Table 1002-A.):
LRi = CRi X SLi
where:
2
l
LRi = dc resistance for cable section “i”
l
CRi = conductor resistance per unit length for the cable section “i”
l
SLi = length of cable section “i”
Add the total of all cable sections. If the total of all sections exceeds 175 Ohm, select
another loop.
Note: The loop resistance limit of 175 Ohm must be reduced by 1 Ohm for each 1%
.of the loop which is aerial cable.
::..::..-.:.?
,-;..:, ..:I-,,,’
_. i, . . _ >..,.
..
..
: ..
,:
:.
:
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
Table 1002-A
CONDUCTOR RESISTANCE PER UNIT
Gauge
E
22
19
Ohm per loop kft
83 52
33
16
Ohm per loop km
218 173
109
54
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
p&qFJy
Chart 1
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
APPARATUS:
01
Volt-Ohmeter (VOM)
1
77 Cable Analyser or
l
STEP
eqUiValent
PROCEDURE
FOREIGN VOLTAGE TEST
1
Set the VOM range switch to a scale 60 Vdc/Vac or more.
2
Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distributing frame.
3
Measure the dc and ac voltage between the following points under no-load conditions.
l
l
l
T and R
T and GND
Rand GND
Requirement:
Voltage readings should be less than 1 Vdc/Vac.
INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST
1
Set the VOM range switch to OhmX1O.OOO and adjust the meter to zero.
2
Connect the VOM test probes to the loop at the line card or distributing frame.
3
Measure the resistance between the following points under no-load conditions.
l
T and R
l
T and GND
R and GND
l
Requirement:
Resistance readings should be greater than 10 MOhm.
DC CONTINUITY TEST
1
Short circuit the T and R at the far end.
2
Using the VOM. measure the resistance between the
T and R.
Resistance measurement should be approximately equal to the
calculated loop resistance per DP1002.
Requirement:
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
Chart 1 Continued
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
STEP
PROCEDURE
CAPACITANCE
1
UNBALANCE
TEST
Using the 77 Cable Analyser or equivalent, measure the capacitance between the following
points:
l
l
T and GND
R and GND
Requirement:
Difference between the two readings should be <0.002 microfarads.
..
:.
MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE
-1
Chart 1004-l
MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Measure impulse noise on selected lines during busy hours. Use an NE-58B Noise
measurement set, or equivalent.
Note:
The termination and weighting filter required are 135 Ohm and 100 kHz
respectively. and the blanking interval 25 microseconds.
2
Using Figure 1004-L Determine that for a given loop loss and noise threshold, the impulse
noise counts per 15 minutes are below the corresponding curve.
The values in Figure 1004-l were derived assuming the counter has a count
rate of 512 pulses per second.
Note:
Due to the inaccuracy of the Noise Measuring Set, it is possible that
additional errors may occur during the blanking interval and the reading will
..
consequently be lower than actual.
Note:
::
_:.;
-3
;
^
,
:. . . . . ._ I -.,
j
.Z,.”
: ‘.
..
1 Page 2 of 2 1 1004
5 5 3 - 2 2 0 1 - 1 8 0 1 DP
Standard ) 86 01 27
MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE
1000
100
Loss in di3
Fig. 1004-l
Maximum Allowable Impulse Noise Counts Versus Loop Loss
s.
..:
...
MEASURE BACKGROUND NOISE
-1
Chart 1005-l
1
Measure background noise on the loop using an
NE-58B noise measuring set.
The weighting and termination to be used are 100 kHz flat and 135 Ohm
respectively.
Note:
2
Reject the loop being tested if the background noise measured is not less than 5ldBrn.
-
..;:p.
:: : : .:]1
‘:,-.
..
.,i
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL
p%JFfg
Chart 1006-l
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL
(EXPECTED PULSE LOSS)
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Collect loop makeup data between the line card and the terminal, For each cable section,
the data required is:
the cable type (PIG or pulp)
gauge
length
type of plant construction (underground. aerial, inbuilding)
Calculate individual cable section losses using the figures in Tables 1006-A. 1006-B,
..
1006-C. and the following equation.
CSLi = SLi x Li
3
l
CSLi = cable section loss for section “i”.
l
SLi = section length of section “i”.
l
Li = loss per unit length for section “i”.
--
Correct individual cable section losses for maximum cable temperature using the following
equation.
TCLi = CSLi x TCFi
l
TCLi = temperature corrected loss for section “i”
l
TCFi = temperature correction factor for section “i”
CORRECTION
FACTORS
Aerial Cable TCF = 1.1
Underground cable TCF = 1.04
Inbuilding cable TCF = 1
4
Determine junction loss. (Figure 1006-l)
Junction loss due to gauge discontinuity of outside plant cables and D-inside
wire varies between 0.03 dB and 0.07 dB and can be ignored. However, AMP 25-pair
under-carpet wiring has a characteristic impedance of 40 Ohm at 256 kHz and its
junction loss is approximately 2 dB. This must be included in the calculation.
Note:
5
Calculate the EPL by finding the sum of the above items.
COLLECT
Chart 1006-l Continued
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA
(EXPECTED PULSE LOSS)
STEP
AND
LOOP
MAKEUP
CALCULATE
DATA
EPL
PROCEDURE
Reject loops whose expected pulse loss is not less than 12.0
6
EXAMPLE
Section 1:
Mainframe bulkhead to DFl - 500m. 26 AWG PIC, underground
Section
AND
2:
DFl to DF2 - 200m. 26 AWG PIC, inside
Section 3:
DF2 to terminal - 24 AWG NT D-inside
Therefore:
SLl = 0.5km, SL2 = 0.2km, SL3 = O.lkm
From Tables 1006A and 1006C:
Ll = 13.7 dB/km. L2 = 13.7 dB/km. L3 = 13.3 dB/km.
Using the equation in Step 2 we arrive at:
CSLl = 6.85 dB, CSL2 = 2.74 dB, and CSL3 = 1.33 dB
Temperature
Corrections:
Using correction factors of TCFl = 1.04. TCF2 and TCF3 = 1. and
using the equation in Step 3 results in TCLl = 7.12 dB.
TLC2 = 2.14 dB, and TCL3 = 1.33 dB.
EPL Value:
Neglecting any junction loss per explanation in Step 4.
Step 5 results in an EPL value of:
TSLl + TSL2 + TSL3 + 0 = 11.19 dB.
This is under the I2 dB limit and meets the criteria.
c
dB.
CALCULATE
EPL
COLLECT
LOOP
MAKEUP
DATA
AND
CALCULATE
Table 1006-A
CABLE ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ AND 21.1 =‘C 170’
j
j
,,
,!
26 A W G
i.L:.::.:.-.., .._--..:.:.
r-;.~.-.;~.+;
““.
,.._.:; ;
dB/kft
4.2
.4.3
PIG
PULP
24 A W G
dB/km
13.7
14.3
dB/kft
3.1
3.5
EPL
F)’
22 A W G
dB/km
10.2
11.4
dB/kft
2.5
2.1
19 A W G
dB/km
dB/kft
dB/km
5.6
6.6
Table
1006-B
ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ FOR U/C CABLE
W E 4 pairs
dB/kft
3.6
dB/km
15.3
A M P 25 pair
dB/kft
19.0
dB/km
63.3
Table
1006-C
ATTENUATION AT 256 KHZ FOR D INSIDE WIRING CABLE
WE
NT
dB/kft
4.0
dB/km
13.3
SUPERIOR
dB/kft
3.2
dB/km
10.7
*.
.- -.
‘..-
dB/kft
3.1
GENERAL
dB/km
13.3
dB/kft
4.6
dB/km
15.3
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE EPL
7 , , , , , , , , ,
6.
5
4
3-
2.
1
0 ““““I
20
L
Cable Characteristic
Fig. 1006-l
Junction Loss vs Cable Characteristic Impedance
..
Impedance in Ohms
,i ,. : : ‘:
_. ,I . . . .. .
a.
::-” : 3
‘..
.,I
MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
p%Jflg
Chart 1007-l
MEASURE LOOP RESISTANCE
STEP
1
PROCEDURE
Measure loop resistance using standard procedures.
Note: The dc loop resistance limit of 175 Ohm should be reduced by 1 Ohm for
each 1% of the total loop that is aerial cable.
.., . .
.-;
.I ..:)
:,
.. . ./’
%.
PROCEDURE
TITLE
NUMBER
CALCULATE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
DP 1002
CHECKLIST
CKoooo
COLLECT LOOP MAKEUP DATA AND CALCULATE
TP 0010
INDEX
Ix 9999
BACKGROUND
NOISE
DP lQo5
MEASURE DC LOOP RESISTANCE
DP 1007
MEASURE IMPULSE NOISE
DP 1004
PERFORM LOOP DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
SELECT A LOOP
I
DP 1006
ENGINEER TELEPHONE LINE
MEASURE
;
EPL
. .-.... ._.
..~,‘-’ :.:c
,‘-.-.. -._...
; .Y’..’
-‘. ._ .-;.
::,
..
,. DP1003
DP 1001
..
:
PRACTICE 553-2201-182
Issued: 85 06 15
Standard
northem
tdaconl
INTEGRATED SERVICES NETWORK
MERIDIAN SL-1%
SUMMARY
OF
TRANSMISSION
PARAMETERS
CONTENTS
1.
u-LAW
2.
A-LAW
3.
D T I
PAGE
TRANSMISSION
PARAMETERS
TRANSMISSION
L O S S
PARAMETERS
T A B L E S
l-l
2-l
3 - 1
Tables
1-A
Insertion Loss at 1020 Hz (““Connections
Between Analog Ports) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - B Frequency Response (Amplitude Distortion)
1 - C Overload Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - D Tracking (Linearity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - E Transhybrid Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - F Input Impedance
: : : 1 : 1. : : : : : :
1 - G Idle Channel Noise ...........
...................
1 - H Longitudinal
Balance
1 -I
impulse Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-J
Intermodulation Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - K Envelope Delay Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - L Quantizatron Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 - M Crosstalk
1 - N Return Loss iDesign
Requirements)’ : : : : : : :
1 - o Return Loss (In-Service Requirements) . . . . .
1 - P Harmonic Dlstortlon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - A Insertion Loss At 820 Hz . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - B Maximum lnband Amplitude Distortion . . . . .
2 - c Return Loss (Desrgn
Requirements) . . . . . . .
2 - D Return Loss (In-Service Requirements) . . . . .
2 - E Distortion and Modulation Products . . . . . . .
Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-F
2 - G Envelope Delay Drstortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - H Crosstalk . . . . . . . . .
::::::::::::
2 - J OverloadLevels......:::::
2 - K Message Circuit Norse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-L
Impulse Noise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - M Longrtudinal
Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2 - N Quantrzation Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
l-l
1-l
1-2
1-2
1-2
: Al-3
l - 3
l-3
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-5
l - 5
l-5
1-6
1-6
2 - l
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
2-5
2-5
2-6
2-6
:’ 2 - 6
2 - 7
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
CONTENTS
3-A
3-B
3-c
3-D
PAGE
1000 Hz Insertion Loss for ConnectIons
between an Analog Port
and a Digital Trunk Interface IDTI) Port
1000 Hz Insertion Loss for Connections’
between Two Ports
of a Digital Trunk interface (DTI)
_.
1000 Hz Insertion Loss for Connections
between an Analog Port
and a DigItal
Trunk Interface IDTI) Port
for Connections to a Satellite PBX
1000 Hz InsertIon Loss for Connections
between Two Ports
of a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI)
for Connections to a Satellite PBX
3-4
3-6
This practice is reissued to include
transmission parameters for the Digital Trunk Interface. and to revise
and add LO the parameters for the Meridian SL-1. Changes have been
marked with bracketing arrows and arrowheads.
Reason for Reissue:
, . -.. .
,:Ii,: 1. ‘,. .I,i
Page ii
PRACTICE
553
-2201-182
1. u-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which
Meridian SL-1 is destgned to meet or exceed in M-Law applications.
The specified performance applies in the temperature range of 0 to 50°
C.
1.01
1.02 Unless otherwise specified. all specifications are stated in terms of
being met by 95% of connections.
Table 1-A
INSERTION LOSS AT 1020 Hz (Connections Between Analog Ports)
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
NOMINAL
INSERTION
LOSS (dB)
+
LOSS
VARIATION
(dB)
Line-to-Line
5
5 1.0
Line-to-Trunk
1
+0.7
Trunk-to-Trunk
1
50.7
The above loss values apply to connections between analog ports. Port-to-port losses for c1
connections involving a Digital Trunk Interface (DTI) port are given in Part 3.
cl
Note:
Table 1-B
FREQUENCY
RESPONSE
(AMPLITUDE
- -
DISTORTION)
9
Frequency Response in dB at the specified frequencies (Hz) for line-to-line, line-to-trunk. or
trunk-to-trunk
connections.
60 Hz
MIN MAX
+20
-
200 Hz
MIN MAX
0.0 +5.0
FREQUENCY RESPONSE (dB) AT FREQ (Hz)
300 Hz
3000 Hz
3200 Hz
MIN MAX
MIN MAX
MIN MAX
-0.5 $1.0
-0.5
+1.0
- 0 . 5 f1.5
3400 Hz
MIN MAX
0.0
$3.0
Note: Values are stated relative to loss at 1000 Hz. The symbol + denotes more loss: the symbol
- denotes less loss than that measured at 1000 Hz.
Page l-l
6 Pages
..
+I
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 1-C
OVERLOAD LEVELS
TYPE OF
CIRCUIT
NOMINAL OVERLOAD LEVEL (dBm)
RECEIVE (AID)
TRANSMIT
(D/A)
Line
Trunk
Receive and Transmit relate to Switch.
Note:
Table 1-D
TRACKING
(LINEARITY)
INPUT SIGNAL (dB)
BELOW OVERLOAD
TRACKING ERROR (dB)
MAXIMUM
AVERAGE
+3 to -40
&OS
i-o.25
-40 to -53
k1.0
+0.5
Note
I: Signal at 1020 Hz.
Note
2: Maximum specification for 99% of all connections.
..
Table 1-E
TRANSHYBRID LOSS
TWO-WIRE
PORT
TRANSHYBRID LOSS (dB)
200 to 3400 Hz
500 to 2500 Hz
Line
>17
>19
Trunk
>18
>21
Note
1: This parameter is for EIA-compatible
trunks only.
2: Measurement of transhybrid loss (THL) is made from
equal-level (transmit and receive) four-wire port towards the
two-wire port.
Note
3: Two-wire port compromise impedance: 600 R. or 350 R in
series with 160 Iz. 0.21 UF.
Note
Page l-2
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 1-F
INPUT IMPEDANCE
CONNECTION FROM
4W TRUNK TO PORT
REFERENCE
IMPEDANCE
FREQUENCY
RANGE
MINIMUM
RETURN LOSS
Line
600 R
200-500 Hz
500-3400 Hz
2 0 dB
2 6 dB
Trunk
600 R
200-500 Hz
500-1000 Hz
1000-3400 Hz
20 dB
2 6 dB
3 0 dB
Note 1:
This parameter is for EIA-compatible
trunks only.
Note 2:
A reference impedance of 600 R resistive is used.
Table 1-G
IDLE CHANNEL NOISE
Table 1-H
LONGITUDINAL
CONNECTION
TYPE
C-MESSAGE
WEIGHTED
(d8rnC)
3 kHz FLAT
(d8rn)
Line-Line
<20
<29
Line-Trunk
<20 at line
<23 at trunk
<29 at line
<29 at trunk __
Trunk-Trunk
<20
<29
BALANCE
FREQUENCY
(Hz)
200
500
1000
3000
Note:
MINIMUM
BALANCE (d8)
AVERAGE
BALANCE (d8)
:i
:z
63
58
Measured according to IEEE Standard 455-1983.
Page 1-3
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 1-I
IMPULSE NOISE
CONNECTION
NUMBER OF COUNTS ABOVE 55 dBrnC
AH
0
Note:
Table 1-J
INTERMODULATION
For test purposes. a five-minute couiiting interval is used.
DISTORTION
CONNECTION
TYPE
DISTORTION LIMITS
(dB BELOW RECEIVED LEVEL)
TEST SIGNAL
INPUT LEVEL
R2
R3
(dBm)
Line-to-Line
40
43
- 9
Line-to-Trunk
45
53
-9 at line
-13 at trunk
Trunk-to-Trunk
45
53
-13
Note 1:
Four-tone method is used.
Note 2:
Test Signal Input Level is the composite power level of all four tones.
Table 1-K
ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION
BANDWIDTH
(Hz)
Page l-4
ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION (&
LINE-LINE
LINE-TRUNK/
TRUNK-TRUNK
800 to 2700
750
.
375
1000 to 2600
380
190
1150 to 2300
300
150
..
PRACTICE
Table 1-L
QUANTIZATION
553-2201-182
D I S T O R T I O N INPUT LEVEL
BELOW OVERLOAD
SIGNAL/DISTORTION
RATIO (dB)
+3 to -33
33
-33 to -43
27
-43 to -48
22
+I
Input signal is 1 kHz sinewave: output measured with
4
C-message weighting. (See Table 1-C for overload definition.)
Note:
Table 1-M
CROSSTALK
CONNECTION
MINIMUM CROSSTALK
ATTENUATION (dB)
Line-to-Line
Line-to-Trunk
Trunk-to-Trunk
Note:
>75
>I5
>I5
Input frequency range of 200 to 3200 Hz, 0 dBm level.
.-
Table 1-N
RETURN LOSS (Design Requirements)
CONNECTION
ECHO
RETURN
LOSS (dB)
SINGING
RETURN
LOSS (dB)
>18
>25
>12
>19
>22
>28
>17
>22
Line Interfaces:
Line Side (Note)
4W Trunk Side (Note)
2W Trunk Interfaces:
2W Trunk Side (Note)
4W Trunk Side (Note)
The design requirements in this table are intended to ensure the
satisfaction of the in-service requirements in Table 1-O.
Note: Terminating
impedances are:
- 600Q for SL-1 line
- 600R for PBX line.
Page l-5
..
:
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 1-O
RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements)
CONNECTION FROM
4W VNL TIE
TRUNKTOTHE
FOLLOWING:
CIRCUIT
TERMINATION
ECHO
RETURN
LOSS
LOW/HIGH
SINGING
RETURN
_ LOSS
NOTES
4W VNL Tie Trunk
(through balance)
4W legs of Hybrid
terminated in
600/900R
21
20120
1.3
4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk
(terminal balance)
600/9OOrr + 2.16
UF at distant PBX
22
15/U
1.3
2W Non-VNL Tie Trunk
(terminal balance)
600/900R + 2.16
UF at distant PBX
18
lO/lO
1.5
CO or FX Trunk (terminal
balance)
900R -k 2.16 UF at
co
18
lO/lO
2.5
PBX Station Line (terminal
balance)
60017 + 2.16 pF
24
18/18
1.4
SL-1 Station Line (terminal
balance)
600R
24
18/18
1.4
PBX Station Line (terminal
balance)
Station off-hook
12
818
1.4
Note 1:
Reference impedance is 600/900~ + 2.16 UF.
Note
2: Reference impedance is 900~7 -I- 2.16 ,UF.
Note
3: Switchable pads set for nominal loss of 1 dB.
Note 4:
.-
Switchable pads set for nominal loss of 3 dB.
If facility loss is less than 2 dB or adequate impedance correction is not provided.
nominal loss has to be increased to 3 dB by switching in the 2 dB pad.
Note 5:
Table 1-P
HARMONIC
DISTORTION
I+
BANDWIDTH
(Hz)
MAX. LEVEL
OF
DISTORTION
PRODUCT
(d8)
TEST SIGNAL
INPUT LEVEL
.
(dBm)
,“.
:
200 to 4600
4
228
Page l-6
.
:
0
.
,J
PRACTICE 553-2201-182
2. A-LAW TRANSMISSION PARAMETERS
2.01
:;*;
:z:’i
The tables in this part provide the transmission requirements which
Meridian SL-1 is designed lo meet on 95% of all connections in A-Law
applications.
, . _. :. .-;. .:..\1 . _
r,. I:.._.y.;.. .. ..Ijl,.
;y;
Table 2-A
INSERTION LOSS AT 820 HZ
NOMINAL
INSERTION
LOSS (d6)
at 25%
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
Table 2-B
MAXIMUM
INBAND
MAXIMUM
INSERTION
LOSS (dB)
at O” to 50°C
MINIMUM
INSERTION
LOSS (dB)
at O” to 50%
Station
line-to-line
5
6
4
Station
line-to-trunk
1
2
0
Trunk-to-trunk
1
2
0
AMPLITUDE DISTORTION
CONNECTION
Line-to-line
AMPLITUDE DISTORTION (dB)
0.2 kHz
3.4 kHz
MIN
MAX
MIN
MAX
-0.5
3.5
0.0
3.5
Trunk-to-trunk
0.0
3.0
0.0
3.0
Trunk-to-line
0.0
4.0
0.0
3.0
-
Note: Performance limits quoted apply to 95% of all
connections.
Page 2-1
7 Pages
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 2-C
RETURN LOSS (Design Requirements)
CONNECTION
Line
ECHO
RETURN
LOSS (d8)
SFRL LOSS id81
>18
>21
>12
>19
>22
>21
>14
>19
(300-3200 Hz)
Interfaces:
Line Side (Note 1)
4W Trunk Side (Note 2)
2W Trunk Interfaces:
2W Trunk Side (Note 2)
4W Trunk Side (Note 2)
The design requirements in this table are intended to ensure the
satisfaction of the in-service requirements in Table 2-D.
are:
- 6OOQ for SL-1 line
- 60012 and 2.16 UF for PBX.
2: Terminating
impedances are:
- 60012 for SL-1 line
- 600 or 900R and 2.16 pF for
PBX line.
Note 1:
Note
Terminating impedances
..
L *.-.. .~
_:.:;-, 1
.. ; :
..
.I
Page 2-2
..
.:
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 2-D
RETURN LOSS (In-Service Requirements)
CONNECTION FROM
4W VNL TIE
TRUNK TO THE
FOLLOWING:
CIRCUIT
TERMINATION
ECHO
RETURN
LOSS
LOW/HIGH
SINGING
RETURN
LOSS
NOTES
4W VNL Tie Trunk
(through balance)
4W legs of Hybrid
terminated in 600~
21
20/20
I,3
4W Non-VNL Tie Trunk
(terminal balance)
600R •k 2.16 ,AF at
distant PBX
22
15/u
1.3 +
2W Non-VNL Tie Trunk
(terminal balance)
600R i- 2.16 uF at
distant PBX
18
lO/lO
1.5
CO or FX Trunk (terminal
balance)
900R -k 2.16 ,uF at
co
18
lO/lO
2.5
PBX Station Line (terminal
balance)
600R + 2.16 ,uF
24
18/18
1.4
SL-1 Station Line (terminal
balance)
600R
24
18/18
1.4
12
8/8
I,4
PBX Station Line (terminal
balance)
Station off-hook
-:
Note 1: Reference impedance is 600/900R -I- 2.16 uF.
Note 2: Reference impedance is 90011 i- 2.16 uF.
Note 3:
Switchable pads set for nominal loss of 1 dB.
Note 4:
Switchable pads set for nominal loss of 3 dB.
.-
5: If facility loss is less than 2 dB or adequate impedance correction is not provided,
nominal loss has to be increased to 3 dB by switching in the 2 dB pad.
Note
Page 2 -3
c
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 2-E
DISTORTION AND MODULATION PRODUCTS
DISTORTION
TYPE
INPUT
LEVEL
(d8)
BELOW
OVERLOAD
INPUT
FREQUENCY/s
(Hz)
(excluding
submultiples
of 8 kHz)
MAXIMUM
LEVEL
OF DISTORTION
PRODUCT
Harmonic
3
700-1100
340 dB below
fundamental
output signal
Intermodulation
13
300-3400
(see Note)
a35 dB below
fundamental
output signal
Sideband
Suppression
3
700-1100
340 dB below
fundamental
output signal
Quantization
o-33
700-1100
333 dB
33-43
700-1100
321 dB
43-48
700-1100
322 dB
Using two oscillators. each with an output impedance of
1200/1800~.
..
Note:
Table 2-F
LINEARITY
Page 2-4
..
820 Hz SIGNAL
INPUT LEVEL (dB)
BELOW OVERLOAD
VARIATION IN
INSERTION LOSS (dB)
0 to 4 3
4 3 to 5 3
53 to 5 8
kO.5
?rl
k3
.-
PRACTICE
Table 2-G DELAY DISTORTION
ENVELOPE
553-2201-182
-
BANDWIDTH
(Hz)
ENVELOPE DELAY DISTORTION (,us)
LINE-LINE
LINE-TRUNK/
TRUNK-LINE/
TRUNK-TRUNK
1 0 0 0 to 2600
380
190
1 1 5 0 to 2300
300
150
800 to 2700
750
375
Note:
The limits above apply to 95% of all connections.
Table 2-H
CROSSTALK
CONNECTION
CROSSTALK
AlTENUATlON
(dB)
Line-to-Line
Line-to-Trunk
Trunk-to-Trunk
>75
>75
>75
Frequency range of test signal 0.2 to 3.4 kHz at
-10 dBm.
Note:
__
Table 2-J
OVERLOAD LEVELS
TYPE
CIROC’UIT
NOMINAL OVERLOAD LEVEL (dBm)
TRANSMIT
RECEIVE
Line
Trunk
::
il
y/
;
:.
;
,.;
‘.
7
.:-.
-/
Page 2-5
..
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 2-K
MESSAGE CIRCUIT NOISE
NOISE LEVEL
CONNECTION
dl3mOp
dBrn
3 kHz FLAT
G-65
~29
(a) Trunk side
(b) Line side
6-65
~-65
<29
629
Trunk-to-Trunk
(2 dB pads out)
e-65
~29
Line-to-Line
Line-to-Trunk:
Table 2-L
IMPULSE NOISE
With all circuits at the MDF correctly terminated. the impulse noise measured at line terminals should
be as follows.
NOISE
LEVEL
(d8)
COUNTS
-
Table 2-M
LONGITUDINAL
50
<5 counts/S min for 50% of the connections
50
GO0 counts/5 min for all connections
59
<5 count.45 min for all connections
BALANCE
FREQUENCY
(Hz)
MINIMUM
BALANCE (d8)
200
500
1000
3000
58
AVERAGE
BALANCE (dB)
66:
::
53
Fi;
Page 2-6
,
..d
cl
.‘,Y, z-.x
:‘;. <.\\
::.-_.:.._ .:_ 1
_‘I -1
PRACTICE
Table 2-N
ClUANTlZATlON
DISTORTION
553-2201-182
-
INPUT LEVEL
BELOW OVERLOAD
SIGNAL/DISTORTION
RATIO (dB)
3 to 33
33
33 to 43
21
43 to 48
22
Input signal is 820 Hz sinewave: output measured with
psophometric weighting. (See Table 2-J for a definition of
overload.)
Note:
Page 2-7
cl
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
3. DTI LOSS TABLES
+I
3.01 Tables 3-A through 3-D provide the insertion loss specifications of
the SL-1 Business Communications System when it is equipped with a
QPC472 Digital Trunk Interface (DTI).
3.02 The insertion loss for connections between analog ports of the
SL-1 and the DTl or beteween DTI ports is connection-specific in
order to be compatible with end-to-end network connection loss
requirements. SL-1’ connection loss specifications are in agreement with
U.S. and Canadian standards which are formulated to provide
satisfactory transmission on connections between switches in a *private
network and between a private network and the public network. (EIA
Communications Interim Standard. CIS-4 (U.S.); Department of
Communications Standard CS-03 (Canada).) This formulation is based
on the use Qf a fixed loss plan for digital portions of these connections.
As a result. certain connections through the SL-1 are asymmetrical: this
asymmetry is resolved at the far end of the connection.
3.03 Tie trunk connections to a satellite PBX require different loss
treatment than non-satellite Lie trunks. The insertion loss for satellite
tie trunk connections is given in Tables 3-C and 3-D. Loss values
associated with tie trunks in Tables 3-A and 3-B should not be applied
..
to satellite PBX tie trunk connections.
Note: In this NTP. “satellite” denotes a PBX which homes on a
main PBX and does not have a directorv number for incoming
calls: satellite tie trunks are trunks connecting such a PBX to the
main PBX. There is no explicit or implied reference to facilities
usuing satellite (i.e.. space vehicle) circuits.
3.04 In these tables. the notation “1000 Hz Insertion Loss” refers to a
sinusoidal signal having a frequency between 1000 and 1020 Hzrthe
value of 1004 Hz has been standardized in the telephone industry in
order to avoid frequency beating of an exact 1000 Hz signal in the
presence of PCM carrier systems.
Page 3-1
6 Pages
PRACTICE
I+
553-2201-182
Table 3-A
1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BEiWEEN AN ANALOG PORT
AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
ANALOG
PORT
Station to
Trunk
Analbg port
to DTI
DTI to
Analog port
Tie Trunk
3
9
Local Station
CO/FX/WATS
3
3
Local Station
Toll WATS (Note 1)
3
9
OPS
Tie Trunk
0
6
OF5
CO/FX/WATS
0
0
OF5
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
6
Tie Trunk
Tie Trunk
-2
4
Tie Trunk
CO/FX/WATS
3
3
Tie Trunk
Toll WATS (Note 1)
-2
4
Tie Trunk
-2.5
3.5
Tie Trunk-ESN
CO/FX/WATS
2.5
2.5
Tie Trunk-ESN
Toll WATS (Note 1)
-2.5
3.5
CO/FX/WATS
Tie Trunk
0
6
CO/FX/WATS
CO/FX/WATS
0
0
CO/FX/WATS
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
6
Toll WATS (Note 1)
Tie Trunk
-3
3
Toll WATS (Note 1)
CO/FX/WATS
3
3
Toll WATS (Note 1)
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
6
Tie
Note
NOMINAL
INSERTION LOSS (dB)
Local Station
Trunk to
Trunk
Note 1:
DIGITAL
PORT
Trunk-ESN
Toll WATS is a trunk to a Toll (Class
4) office for WATS access.
2: Insertion loss limits are nominal loss f0.7 dB.
4
Page 3-2
s.
:
: ..
PRACTICE 553-2201-182
Table 3-8
1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECilONS BETWEEN.TWO
OF A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI)
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
Trunk to
Trunk
Note 1:
Note
DIGITAL
PORT
(A)
DIGITAL
PORT
(B)
Tie Trunk
+I
PORTS
NOMINAL
INSERTION LOSS (d8)
-
DTI port’ (A)
to DTI port (B)
DTI port (B)
to DTI port
(A)
Tie Trunk
0
0
Tie Trunk
CO/FX/WATS
6
0
Tie Trunk
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
0
CO/FX/WATS
CO/FX/WATS
3
3
CO/FX/WATS
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
6
Toll WATS (Note 1)
Toll WATS (Note 1)
0
0
Toll WATS is a trunk to a Toll (Class
4) office for WATS access.
2: Insertion loss limits are nominal loss +0.2 dB.
Page 3 -3
..
PRACTICE
P
553-2201-182
Table 3-C
1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS-BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT
AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT
FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
Station to
Satellite
Tie Trunk
Non-satellite
Trunk to
Satellite
Tie Trunk
Satellite
Tie Trunk to
DTI Trunk
ANALOG
PORT
DIGITAL
PORT
(Note 1)
NOMINAL
_ INSERTION LOSS (dB)
Analog port
to DTI
DTI to
Analog port
Local Station
Comb. STT
3
9
Local Station
Digital STT
3
3
OPS
Comb. STT
0
6
OP.3
Digital STT
2
2
Tie Trunk
Comb. STT
-2
4
Tie Trunk
Digital STT
(Note 3)
3
3
I.
Tie
Trunk-ESN
Comb. STT
-2.5
3.5
Tie
Trunk-ESN
Digital STT
(Note 4)
2.5
2.5
CO/FX/WATS
Comb. STT
-3
3
CQ/FX/WATS
Digital STT
0
0
Toll WATS (Note 2)
Comb. STT
-3
3
Toll WATS (Note 2)
Digital S’lT
3
3
STT
Comb. STT
1
I
STT
Digital STT
1
1
STT
Tie Trunk
(non-satellite)
1
7
STT
CO/l=X/WATS
1
1
_-
STT
Toll WATS (Note 2)
1
I
SIT-ESN
Comb. STT
0.5
6.5
STT-ESN
Digital STT
0.5
0.5
STT-ESN
Tie Trunk
hoc-satellite)
0.5
6.5
4
Page 3-4
:
:
L
.,
: .- : . .
,......!
:
..,I
.
PRACTICE
553-2201-182
Table 3-C Continued
1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN AN ANALOG PORT
AND A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI) PORT
FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
ANALOG
PORT
DIGITAL
PORT
(Note 1)
NOMINAL
INSERTION LOSS (d8)
Analog port
to DTI
DTI to
Analog port
STT-ESN
CO/FX/WATS
0.5
0.5
STT-ESN
Toll WATS (Note 2)
0.5
6.5
Note
1: DTI port to Combination or Digital Satellite Tie Trunks KIT) unless otherwise noted.
Note
2: Toll WATS is a trunk to a Toll (Class 4) office for WATS access.
3: Optionally. 1 dB loss each direction may be specified. provided the satellite PBX does not
serve OPS lines.
Note
4: Optionally. 0.5 dB loss each direction may be specified, provided the satellite PBX does
not serve OPS lines.
Note
Page 3-5
I
..
PRACTICE 553 -2201-182
r Table
3-D
1000 Hz INSERTION LOSS FOR CONNECTIONS BiTWEEN TWO PORTS
OF A DIGITAL TRUNK INTERFACE (DTI)
FOR CONNECTIONS TO A SATELLITE PBX
TYPE OF
CONNECTION
Satellite
Trunk to
Trunk
Note 1:
Note 2:.
Note
NOMINAL
INSERTION LOSS
DIGITAL
PORT
(A)
(Note 1)
DIGITAL
PORT
(Note 1)
DTI port (A)
to DTI port (B)
DTI port (B)
to DTI port
(A)
Comb. STT
Comb. STT
0
0
Comb. STT
Digital STT
6
0
Comb. STT
Tie Trunk
(non-satellite)
0
0
(8)
Comb. STT
CO/FX/WATS
6
0
Comb. STT
Toll WATS (Note 2)
0
0
Digital STT
Digital STT
0
0
Digital STT
Tie Trunk
(non-satellite)
0
6
Digital STT
CO/FX/WATS
0
0
Digital STT
Toll WATS (Note 2)
0
6
DTI port to Combination or Digital Satellite Tie Trunks
(STT) unless otherwise noted.
Toll WATS is a trunk to a Toll (Class 4) office for WATS access.
3: Insertion loss limits are nominal loss +0.2 dB.
4
Page 3-6
..
(dB)
-
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Analog line card description
Standard
nit
norf horn
tulacom
Meridian I
.
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Analog line card description
Publication number: 553-3001-l 61
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
-
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Analog line card description
..
.
.
.
553-3001-l 61
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1 .O
Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61
iii
About this document
This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the
NTI3DO3AB Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a
guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit.
New naming conventions are applied to this release. The following
documents should be used as references to this document:
References
See. the SL-I planning & engineering guide for
- Master index (553-3001-000)
- System overview
- System engineering
(553-3001-100)
(553-3001-151)
- Sparesplanning (553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering
(553-3001-M)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XII sofhvare guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
Analog line card description 553-3001-161
iv About this document
- XII software management
(553-3001-300)
- XII features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-I XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of alI
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific
telephone sets:
- Meridian M2ooO digital telephones: description, installation,
operation
and
maintenance
(553-2201-110)
- Meridian M2317 digital telephone with alphanumeric display:
description , installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-113
- Meridian M3000 touchphone: description, installation, operation and
maintenance (553-2201-115)
- Meridian modular telephones: description and speci&ztions
(553-2201-116)
Analog line card description
553-3001-l 61
..
:.
V
Contents
General information
Application
2
Characteristics
I.
Functional
Technical summary
Analog line interface
Input impedance
Insertion loss
Frequency response
Message channel noise
Power requirements
Foreign and surge voltage protections
Overload level
Analog line card description
..
:
3
3
4
4
4
4
4
5
6
, 6
6
553-3001-l 61
vi
Contents
Analog line card description
553-3001-l 61
1
General information
This publication outlines the characteristics, application and operation of the
Analog Line Card. The information is intended to be used as a guide when
connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line circuit. The following
Analog Line Card is available:
- NT8DO3AB - Analog Line Card (p-Law)
The Analog Line Card provides talk battery and signaling for regular 2-wire
common battery 500~type (rotary dial), 2500~type (DIGITONE dial)
telephones and key telephone equipment.
Note:
DIGITONE is a trademark of Northern Telecom.
.The NT8DO3AB Analog Line Card mounts in an NT8D37AA Intelligent
Peripheral Equipment Module (IPE). The circuit connects with the
switching system and with the external apparatus via an 80-pin connector at
the rear of the pack. The pack is 3 18 mm (12.5 in) in height and 254 mm
(10 in) in depth.
The circuits are connected to the shelf backplane and fed to the I/O panel
via I/O cables. Fron the I/O panel, the circuits are connected to the crossconnect terminal via 25-pair cables. Connection to the station apparatus is
made at the cross-connecting terminal.
Analog line card description
.,
553-3001-l 61
2 Summary
Application
-
The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in
Table 1.
Table 1
Line circuit application and compatibility
Equipment
Specifications
NE-500 type rotary dial
sets (or equivalent)
Dial Speed
8.0 to 22.5 pps
Percent Break
58 to 70%
Interdigital Time
240 ms
NE-2500 type Digitone sets
(or equivalent)
Frequency Accuracy
+ 1.5 %
Pulse Duration
40 ms
Interdigital Time
40 ms
Speed
12.5 digits/s
Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61
Summarv
3
Characteristics
Functional
The Analog Line Card contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the
following functions:
- card self-identification
- self-test
- control card operation
- status report to the controller
- diagnostics for maintenance purposes
The Analog Line Card also provides the following:
..
- 6OOQ balanced terminating impedance
- analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines
- transmission and reception of SSD signalling messages over a DS30X
signalling channel in A10 format
-- detection of on-hook/off-hook status
- connection of 20 Hz ringing signal and automatic disconnection when
the station goes offhook
- synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to
zero crossing of ringing voltage
- loopback of SSD messages and PCM signals for diagnostic purposes
- indication of board status with faceplate-mounted LED
- correct initialization of all features at power-up
- direct reporting of digit dialed (500 sets) by collecting dial pulses
Analog line card description
553-3001-l 61
4 Summary
Technical summary
Analog line interface
Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of
20 dB for 200-500 Hz
26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz
Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line conkction, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB
+ 1dB. This is arranged as 3.5dB loss for analog to PCM and 2.5dB loss for
PCM to analog.
Frequency response
The loss values in the table below are measured relative to the loss at 1
KHz:
Table 2
Frequency
response
Frequency
Minimum
60 Hz
200 Hz
20.0 dl3
0.0 dB
5.0 dB
300 Hz
3000 Hz
3200 Hz
-0.5 dB
-0.5 dB
-0.5 dB
l.OdB
l.OdB
3400 Hz
0.0 dB
3.0 dB
Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61
Maximum
1.5dB
_-
Summary 5
Message channel noise
The message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections
(line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20
dBmC.
A technical summary of the Analog line c&it pack is’given in Table 3.
Table 3
Technical summary of Analog Line Card
Impedance:
Loop limit (excluding
set)
600!2
1000 a at nominal 48 V
(excluding set)
Leakage resistance
30,000 sz
Ring trip
During silent or ringing
intervals
86Vac
Loop start
Normal battery conditions are
continuously applied (48 V on
ring; ground on tip)
48, +15, -15, +8.5 V and
ringing voltage; also -150 V on
Message Waiting Line card.
6dB f 1dB at 1020 Hz
3SdB loss for analog to F’CM,
2.5dB loss for PCM to analog
1.5dB at 1020 Hz
Ringing voltage
Signaling
Supervision
Power input from
shelf backplane
Insertion loss
Effective gain
Analog line card description
-.
553-3001-l 61
6 Summary
Power
requirements
-
NT8D03AB
The NlSDO3AB Analog Line Card has the following power requirements:
Tolerance Idle
Active Current Current
Voltage
(+/-I
Max
+ 150Vdc
0.50 V dc
48 ma
Oma
48 ma
+ 8.5 Vdc
l.OOVdc
150 ma
8ma
280 ma
- 48.0 V dc
2.40 V dc
48 ma
40 ma
688 ma
- 48.0 V dc
2.40 V dc
Oma
(1)lOma
320ma
86.0 V ac
5.00 V ac
Oma
(2) 10 ma
160 ma
-150.0 V dc
5.00 V dc
0 ma
2ma
1
32 ma
Note: (1) Each active ringing relay requires 10 ma of battery voltage.
(2) Reflects the current for ringing a single station set. There
may be as many as five ringers on each line.
Foreign and surge voltage protections
.-
When telephone lines connected to the line circuit are exposed to foreign
voltages by direct contact or induction (for example, power line crosses or
lightning), protection devices must be installed on the customer’s premises.
These devices must be capable of providing a path to ground from tip and
ring for foreign voltages that exceed 600 V peak.
Overload level
Signal levels exceeding + 7 dRm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.
.- .._
. .: ^
i: ‘_ ,.- . . :
;-.
‘.
.)
,*
Analog line card description 553-3001-l 61
..
:..
I
.
-8.. -... . .
:1
-,_.-..-
.,
!
::
‘.-
.-
,,’
..
:
:.:
.-
SL-1 System
Options 21,51,61,71
Analog line card description
Copyright Q 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29,199O
Printed in U.S.A.
n#
nartharn
tolocom
.J
I
_ .I _.,
_...
.., .-.
,, __
.
,.,.-.. . ,....
:. , I .“,::
I;
IL:i
.I
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Digital line card description
Standard
:
I
;
.,.-y.
‘. _.: ..; . .
,.
_
:.‘T :‘. ,’ .’ ;
Et
..x
.:
northorn
fdocom
Meridian1
..
.:
:.
. ...:.;
. _ .1
..:
.,
:
,J
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Digital line card description-
Publication number: 5533001-l 62
Document status: Standard
Document release: 1 .O
Date: January 29,199O
.
.
,..’
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
ii
Revision history
Januaty29,1990
First issue of this document.
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
s.
:
iii
About this document
This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the
NTt3DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC). The information is intended tc be
used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line
circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this release. The following
documents should be used as reference material:
References
See the SL-1 Planning & Engineering Guide for
- Muster Index (553-3001~OGO)
- System Overview
(553-3001-100)
- System Engineering
- Spares Planning
(553-3001-151)
(553-3001-153)
- Equipment Identijication
and Ordering (553-3001-154)
See the list of Line and Trunk Circuit Descriptions in the Muster Index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 Installation and Maintenance Guide for
- Circuit PuckZnstuZlution
and Testing (553-3001-211)
- Fault Cieuring (553-3001-510)
- Hurdware
Replacement (553-3001-520)
See the SL-1 XI 1 Software Guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all Xl 1 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
Digital line card description
.,
553-3001-l 62
._.
iv About this document
- XII Software Management
(553-3001-300)
- Xl1 Features and Services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-I XII Input/Output Guide (553-300140) for a description of
all administration programs, maintenance proms, and system messages.
See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific
telephone sets:
- Meridian M2000 digital telephones: description, installation,
operation and maintenance (553-2201-110)
- Meridian M2317 digital telephone with alphanumeric display:
description , installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-113
- Meridian M3ooO touchphone: description, installation, operation and
maintenance (553-2201-115)
- Meridian modular telephones: description and specifications
(553-2201-l 16)
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
s.
V
Contents
General information
1
Requirements
1
Description
3
Meridian SL-1 data block
Physical
Functional
Configuration
Power supply to digital telephones
Characteristics
..
3
3
4
4
4
- 5
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
vi Contents
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
General information
The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is based on the design of the
QPC578 Integrated Services Digital Line Card. See 553-2201-193 for a
complete description of the QPC578. The Dgtl LC is a voice and data
communication link between the Meridian SL-1 switch and modular digital
telephones. When a digital telephone is equipped with the data option, an
asynchronous ASCII terminal or PC can be connected to SL-1 System
.through the digital telephone.
The Dgtl LC supports voice only or simultaneous voice and data service
over a single twisted pair of standard telephone wiring.
This publication describes the Dgtl LC. New naming conventions are
_applied to this document.
For more information on modular digital telephones, see 553-2201-110 and
553-2201-l 11 for the M2000 series telephones, 553-2201-115 for the
M3000 telephone, and 553-2201- 113 for the M23 17 telephone.
Requirements
To use the Dgtl LC, the following SL- 1 requirements must be met:
- Intelligent Peripheral Equipment (IPE) Modules must be used
- Generic Xl 1, Release 15 software must be running
- Superloops must be defined in the software
Digital line card description
..
: :. :
553-3001-l 62
2 General information
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
!
:i
,
,’ _.: .::.
.I .: -:;;:::
_. _ c _ .
5 T 7’;
: _’
.-
3
Description
The NT8DO2AA Digital Line Card (Dgtl LC) is equipped with 16 identical
line circuits housed within an NTSD37AA Intelligent Peripheral Equipment
Module (IPE). Each line circuit provides a multiplexed voice, data, and
signaling path to and from digital apparatus over a a-wire full duplex 5 12
KHz Time Compression Multiplexed (KM) digital link.
.
Meridian SL-1 data block
Each digital telephone and each associated data terminal is assigned a
separate Terminal Number (TN) in the SL-1 System data base.
Physical
Dgtl LC circuitry is contained on a 320 mm (12.5 in.) by 254 mm (10 ii%)
double-sided printed circuit board The pack connects to the backplane via
a 120-pin edge connector.
The faceplate of the Dgtl LC (7/S in. wide) snaps in place on the front of
the pack and is equipped with a red LED which lights only when the pack is
disabled. Upon power-up, the DgtI LC resets and the red LED will turn off
after the Dgtl LC is enabled. The card provides self-identification and fault
detection.
For information on the Mean Time Between Failure rate for the Dgtl LC,
see Spares Planning (553-3001-153).
Digital line card description
.u
.
.
.:
553-3001-l 62
4 Description
Functional
The Dgtl LC contains an 8050 microprocessor that provides the following
functions:
- card self-identification
- self-test
- control card operation
- status report to the controller
- diagnostics for maintenance purposes
Configuration
Up to 16 Dgd LC circuit packs can be mounted in one PE shelf if the
remaining slots are not used. In addition, up to 16 Dgtl LC packs can be
supported by a single NT8DO6AA Peripheral Equipment Power Supply (PE
._
Pwr Sup). The PE Pwr Sup is available for both ac and dc power.
Power supply to digital telephones
The Dgtl LC needs +15V dc over each loop at a maximum current of 80
mA. The line feed interface can supply power to one loop of varying length
up to 1067 m (3500 ft) using 24 AWG gauge wire with a maximum
allowable ac signal loss of 15.5 dB at 256 KHz, and a maximum dc loop
resistance of 210 ohms.; 26 AWG gauge wire is limited to 745 m (2450 ft).
For a detailed description of the exact power requirements of each set type,
refer to Meridian modular telephones (553-2201-l 16)
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
..d
:
--
5
Characteristics
Table 1
Digital Llne Card circuit characteristics
Characteristics
Description
Circuits per pack
16 voice, 16 data
Options
Nil
Impedance
1008
..
Loop limits
100 ft (30 m) to 3000 ft (900 m) with
24 AWG PVC cable kl5 VDC at 80
mA)l
0 to 3500 ft (1067 m) with 24 AWG
PVC cable &15 VDC at 80 mA)]
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
..
6 CharacterisGcs
Table 1 continued
Digital Line Card circuit characteristics
I
dharacteristlcs
Description
Line rate
512kbps&lOOppm
Power supply
+ 5vdc
*15vdc
+lOVdc
Transmitter output voltage
-successive “1” bits
+1.5&0.15Vand-1.5kO.15V
-“On bits
0*50mV
Note: The Dgtl LC requires +lW, - lSV, and +5V from the
backplane.
Digital line card description 553-3001-l 62
..
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Digital line card description
8 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29, 1990
Printed in U.S.A.
r%t
northarn
talocom
SL-1
System options 21, &, 61,71
Analog message waiting line card description
Standard
Et
northern
tWocam
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Analog message waiting line card description
Publication number: 553-3001-l 63
Document release: 1 .O
Document status: Standard
Date: January 29,199O
0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Analog message waiting line card, description
.
.I.’
:
553-3001-l 63
.’ :
-.
ii
Revision history
January 29,199O
Standard, release 1.0
Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-t 63
:,j
-1
.‘,:;I’?
,-.. . . . . .,
,...- _....
,..- . .._
y
-::- _ .
j
iii
About this document
This practice outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of the
NTsDO9AB Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is
intended to be used as a guide when connecting customer-provided
apparatus to the line circuit. New naming conventions are applied to this
release. The following documents should be used as a reference:
References
See the SL-I planning & engineering guide for
- Masfer index (553-3001-000)
- System overview (553-3001-100)
- System engineering
--
(553-3001-151)
- Sparesplanning (553-3001-153)
- Equipment identification and ordering (553-3001-154)
See the list of line and trunk circuit descriptions in the Master index
(553-3001-000) for specific references to lines and trunks.
See the SL-1 installation and maintenance guide for
- Circuit pack installation and testing (553-3001-211)
- Fault clearing (553-3001-510)
- Hardware replacement
1
:
::
:
:.
(553-3001-520)
See the SL-I XII software guide for an overview of software architecture,
procedures for software installation and management, and a detailed
description of all X 11 features and services. This information is contained
in two documents:
‘;
.,
Analog message waiting line card description
..d
553-3001-l 63
iv About this document
- Xl1 softwure management (553-3001-300)
- Xl1 features and services (553-3001-305)
See the SL-1 XII input/output guide (553-3001-400) for a description of all
administration programs, maintenance programs, and system messages.
See the following Northern Telecom Publications for references to specific
telephone sets:
- Meridian M2lHO digital telephones: description, installation,
operation and maintenance (553-2201-110)
- Meridian M2317 digital telephone with alphanumeric display:
description , installation, operation, and maintenance (553-2201-113
- Meridian M3000 touchphone: description, installation, operation and
maintenance (553-2201-l 15)
- Meridian modular telephones: description and specifications
..
(553-2201-l 16)
Analog message waiting line card description
.
: ..-.
553-3001-l 63
V
Contents
General information
1
Application
3
Characteristics
Functional
Technical summary
Analog line interface
Input impedance
Insertion loss
Frequency response
Message channel noise
Power requirements
Foreign and surge voltage protections
Overload level
Analog message waiting line card description
..
5
5
7
7
7
-- 7
7
8
9
9
9
553-3001-l 63
vi Contents
Analog message waiting line card description
553-3001-l 63
..
.’
1
General information
This publication outlines the characteristics, application, and operation of
the Analog Message Waiting Line Card. The information is intended to be
used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the line
circuit. The following Analog Message Waiting Line Card is available:
- NT8DO9AB - Analog Message Waiting Line Card @-Law)
I.
The Analog Message Waiting Line Card provides talk battery and signaling
for regular 2-wire common battery 500~type (rotary dial), 2500-type
(DIGITONE dial) telephones and key telephone equipment.
Note:
DIGITONE is a trademark of Northern Telecom.
The NT8DO9AB Analog Message Waiting Line Card mounts in any ofthe
16 slots in an NT8D37AA Intelligent Peripheral Equipment Module (IPE).
The 16 circuits connect with the switching system and with the external
apparatus via a H-pin connector at the rear of the pack. The pack is
320 mm (12.5 in) in height and 254 mm (10 in) in depth.
The circuits are connected to the shelf backplane and fed to the I/O panel
via I/O cables. From the I/O panel, the circuits are connected to the crossconnect terminal via 25-pair cables. Connection to the station apparatus is
made at the cross-connecting terminal
Analog message waiting line card description
..
553-3001-l 63
2 General information
.-
., . . .
.::\...,
.e%.
.-. ,_..
i:
: ::..,..: ::y.,
:..;
Analog message waiting line card description
C.
553-3001-l 63
3
Application
The line card interfaces and is compatible with the equipment listed in
Table 1.
Table 1
Line card application and compatibility
Equipment
Specifications
NE-500 type rotary dial
sets (or equivalent)
Dial Speed
8.0 to 12.5 pps
Percent Break
58 to 70%
Interdigital Time
240 ms
NE-2500 type Digitone sets
(or equivalent)
Frequency Accuracy
+ 1.5%
Pulse Duration
40 ms
Interdigital Time
40 ms
Speed
12.5 digits/s
Analog message waiting line card description
..
:
:
553-3001-l 63
4 Application
Analog message waiting line card description
.
553-3001-l 63
5
Characteristics
Functional
The Analog Message Waiting Line Card contains a microprocessor that
provides the following functions:
- card self-identification
- self-test
- control card operation
- status report to the controller
- diagnostics for maintenance purposes
The Analog Message Waiting Line Card also provides the following:
--
- 6OfIQ balanced terminating impedance
- analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission and
reception signals for 16 audio phone lines
- transmission and reception of SSD signalling messages over a DS30X
signalling channel in A10 format
- detection of on-hook/off-hook status and switchhook flash
- connection of 20 Hz ringing signal and automatic disconnection when
the station goes offbook
- synchronization for connecting and disconnecting the ringing signal to
zero crossing of ringing voltage
- loopback of SSD messages and PCM signals for diagnostic purposes
- indication of board status with faceplate-mounted LED
Analog message waiting line card description
553-3001-l 63
..
:
6 Characteristics
- correct initialization of all features at power-up
- connection of -150 Vdc at 1 Hz to activate message waiting lamps
- direct reporting of digit dialed (500 sets) by collecting dial pulses
- detection of lamp status
- disable/enable-selected circuits for maintenance
Analog message waiting line card description
..
:..
:
553-3001-l 63
7
Technical summary
Analog line interface
Input impedance
The impedance at tip and ring is 600 Ohm with a return loss of
20 dB for 200-500 Hz
26 dl3 for 500-3400 Hz
Insertion loss
On a station line-to-line connection, the total insertion loss at 1 KHz is 6dB
+ 1dB. This is arranged as 3SdB loss for analog to PCM and 2.5dB loss for
PCM to analog.
Frequency response
The loss values in the table below are measured relative to the loss at 1
KHz:
Table 2
Frequency
:
.:
.:
I;
,....
-...:..
_‘.
.
, ., . _
.,:.::
;.
r’::,
response
Frequency
Minimum
Maximum
60 Hz
20.0 dB
200 Hz
0.0 dB
5.0 dB
300 Hz
-0.5 dB
l.OdB
3000 Hz
-0.5 dB
l.OdB
3200 Hz
-0.5 dB
1.5 dB
3400 Hz
0.0 dB
3.0 dB
Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63
.:
8 Technical summary
Message channel noiseThe message channel noise C-weighted (dBmC) on 95% of the connections
(line to line) with both ends terminated in 600 ohms does not exceed 20
dEImC.
A technical summary of the line card is given in Tible 3.
Table 3
Technical summary of Analog Message Waiting
Line Card
impedance:
6oQsz
Loop limit (excluding
set)
1000 Sz at nominal -48 V
Leakage resistance
30,ooo Q
Ring trip
During silent or ringing
intervals
86Vac
Loop start
Normal battery conditions are
continuously applied (48 V on
ring; ground on tip)
-48, +15, -15, +8.5 V and
ringing voltage; also - 150 V on
Message Waiting Line card.
6dB +ldB at 1020 Hz
3.5dB loss for analog to PCM,
2.5dB loss for PCM to analog
1.5dB at 1020 Hz
Ringing voltage
Signaling
Supervision
Power input from
shelf backplane
Insertion loss
Effective gain
.-
---...
.:-‘-::.:
i,’ ._.,‘,’ -‘;.-1
:
J
Analog message waiting line card description
553-3001-l 63
Technical
summarv
9
Power requirements NT8DOSAB
The NT8DO9AR Analog Message Waiting Line Card has the following
power requirements:
Table 4
Power requirements
Voltage
(+/-I
Tolerance Idle
current
+ 12.0Vdc
0.36 V dc
48 ma
Active
current
Max
Oma
48 m a
+ 8.0 Vdc
8ma
280 m a
- 48.0 Vdc
40 ma
688 m a
- 48.0 Vdc
(1) 10 ma
320 m a
88.0 V ac
(2) 10 ma
160 m a
2ma
-150.0 V dc
1
32 m a
Note: (1) Each active ringing relay requires 10 ma of battery voltage.
(2) Reflects the current for ringing a single station set. There
may be as many as five ringers on each line.
--
Foreign and surge voltage protections
When telephone lines connected to the line circuit are exposed to foreign
voltages by direct contact or induction (for example, power line crosses or
lightning), protection devices must be installed on the customer’s premises.
These devices must be capable of providing a path to ground from tip and
ring for foreign voltages that exceed 600 V peak.
Overload level
Signal levels exceeding + 7 dBm applied to the tip and ring cause distortion
in speech transmission.
Analog message waiting line card description 553-3001-l 63
SL-1
System options 21,51,61,71
Analog message waiting line card
description
Copyright 0 1990 Northern Telecom
All rights reserved.
Information subject to change without notice.
Release 1 .O
Standard
January 29,199O
Printed in U.S.A.
rEt
nartharn
talaccrm
C.
PRACTICE 553-2201-184
Issued: 84 01 20
Standard
IKTEGRATED
SERVICES NETWORK
c
MERIDIAN SL-1.
c
SL-1 LINE AND CONSOLE LINE PACKS
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CONTENTS
Printed in C.S.A.
..
PAGE
1.
GENERAL
2.
DESCRIPTION
Functions
Physical Description
Interconnection
with
Power Supply to Terminals
l-l
.._
Shelf
3.
CIRCUIT
4.
OPERATION WITH SL-1 SET
I d l e
C i r c u i t
S t a t e s
Call Originated from an SL-1 Set
C a l l
t o
S L - 1
S e t
Class-of -Service and Features
4-l
4-l
--4-l
4-2
4-6
5.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Foreign and Surge Voltage Protection
Overload Level
5-l
5-1
5-l
@ Northern
CHARACTERISTICS
2-l
2-1
2-l
2-2
2-2
T&corn Limited 1993
3-1
Page i
1 Page
Revised, 05 06
--
r
..
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
1. GENERAL
This practice outlines the functions, interconnections, characteristics
and operation of the SL-1 Business Communications System, SL-1 Line
and Console Line circuit packs. The information is intended to be used
as a guide when designing or engineering the connection of apparatus to
the line circuit.
1.01
1.02 The information in this practice applies to the following packs:
l
l
l
l
QPC451 SL-1 Line (~-Law)
QPC520 SL-1 Line (A-Law)
QPC518 Console Line (~-Law) (superce&d
by the QPC451)
c
QPC519 Console Line (A-Law).
1.03 The four packs use identical circuit boards but are configured for
their respective operation. The SL-1 line packs can each interface to up
to eight SL-1 sets. The console line packs can interface to two attendant
consoles. The QPC451 SL-1 line pack can be used for four attendantconsoles without console power or two attendant consoles with console
.
power.
cl
Page l-l
1 Page
Revised, 65 06
..
.-
PRACTICE 553 -2201-184
2. DESCRIPTION
FUNCTlONS
2.01 The SL-1 and console line circuit packs each contain eight line
circuits (see Fig. 2-l). The SL-1 line pack can use all eight circuits,
each circuit interfacing to an SL-1 set. The console line pack uses pairs
of line circuits to interface to attendant consoles: one pair may be used
from the upper four circuits and one pair from the lower four to
interface to two consoles.
Line circuits on the SL-1 line pack are automatically
powered up during signaling and transmission. The connected
circuit pairs on the console line pack are continuously powered on.
Note:
2.02 For SL-1 set connections. one pair of wires is used for+
transmission and a second pair for signaling (see Fig. 2-2). For
attendant console connections, two pairs of wires are used for
transmission connections and two pairs for signaling connections. These
connec Lions:
(a) terminate the loop tip and ring conductors with a balanced
600-ohm termination:
(b) provide ~15 V power, phantomed over the transmission and
signaling pairs, to the set or console terminals:
(c) provide a measure of isolation of foreign potentials on the loop
from portions of the transmission and signaling circuitry;
(d) convert from the 2-wire transmission path of the loop to a 4-wire
transmission path:
(e) provide analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion _qf
transmission signals.
2.03 The circuit pack includes two common multiplexing circuits to:
(a) interface the individual line circuits with the peripheral bus
signaling channel:
(b) retime digital signals received from the peripheral bus;
(c) decode address information received from the peripheral bus and
enable individual line circuits during selected time slots.
2.04 The information and signaling relevant to the SL-1 set or console
passes through the line circuit pack and is multiplexed with information
from other circuit packs. A multiplex loop connects the input and
output of up to two Peripheral Equipment (PE) shelves to the Common
Equipment (CE) where switching takes place (see Fig. 2-2 and 2-3).
PHYSICAL
DESCRIPTION
2.05 The line circuits and common circuitry of the pack are mounted
on a 12.5 in (320-mm) by 10 in (254-n& printed circuit board. The
front of the pack is equipped with two pack extractors and a Light
Emitting Diode (LED). The rear of the pack is equipped with a
connector capable of accepting 80 pins. Ten of these circuit packs may
be mounted in one PE shelf but not to exceed 50% of the packs in a
cabinet.
Page 2-l
3 Pages
Revised, 85 06
:
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
I- Printed
Circuit Board
L Common
Circuitry
Connector With 2 Rows of
40 Pins Each for Shelf
Connections
Circuits
Fig. 2-l
Identification of the Circuits on the Board
INTERCONNECTION
WITH SHELF
2.06 The IO-pin connector on the rear of the circuit pack connects to
an 80-line bus system at the rear of the PE shelf. The bus lines feed
into eight multi-pin connectors. Seven of these connectors link the line
circuits to the corresponding terminal equipment and one feeds power
to the PE shelf from the power converter shelf.
2.07 Thirty-two of the 80 pins per circuit pack are connected to
terminal equipment, 2 pins provide ground, 13 pins interface with the
CE via the peripheral buffer and 15 pins provide voltages to the circuit
pack.
2.08 For detailed information on terminal set line connections to the
four PE shelf connectors, refer to 553-2Wl-210.
POWER SUPPLY TO
TERMINALS
2.09 The SL-1 set battery supply is -30 V dc phantomed over the
audio and signaling leads to each terminal set.
2.10 As a general installation guideline. sufficient power is available for
the SL-1 set at a normal operating range of 189 ohms (see Loop Limits
in Table 3-A).
+
-9
Page 2-2
Revised, 85 06
.-
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
Fig. 2-2
Line Circuit Connection to SL-1 Set
-
I
..:..-..
I
I
J
:-..I,
~ : ~
: _ I:i
,f
Fig. 2-3
Line Circuit Connection to Attendant Console
Page 2-3
--
..
:
PRACTICE
3. CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS
553-2201-184
_
3.01 The circuit characteristics of the line pack are listed in Table 3-A.
Table 3-A
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE PACK
CHARACTERISTICS
AS RELATED TO THE CIRCUIT PACK
CIRCUITS PER PACK
Eight individual circuits
OPTIONS
Nil
IMPEDANCE
Voice Pair
Signaling Pair
NOMINAL INSERTION LOSS
600 ohms
600 ohms
5 dB line-to-line
LOOP LIMITS
WIRE
GAUGE
+
DISTANCE
22
6000 feet (1830 m)
24
3700 feet (1150 m)
26
2300 feet (675 m)
-Under certain conditions the loop limits may be
extended to 8000 feet (2450 m). See 553-2YYl-210.
Note:
SIGNALING PAIR
Mode
Diphase
Rate
2.37K bit/s
Level
0.75 kO.05 V peak-to-peak across the line.
AUDIO PAIR
Mode
Analog (audio)
Page 3-1
Revised, 85 06
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
Table 3-A Continued
CIRCUIT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE LINE PACK-
TO THE CIRCUIT PACK
CHARACTERISTICS
AS RELATED
PHANTOMED
30 +l V divided as:
POWER
Audio Pair Level
+15 kO.05 v
Signaling Pair Level
-15 *0.05 v
POWER INPUT FROM SHELF
BACKPLANE
f6, -6, +2.5 V,
30 V dc balanced
_.... _^,
5
‘,_
.’
Page 3-2
Reissued, 85 06
..
-1
‘,
PRACTICE 553-2201-184
4. OPERATION WITH SL-1 SET
IDLE CIRCUIT STATES
Multiplex control generates and sends scan
message to SL-1 set (2.5 ms message every 10 ms). Message is sent via
the signaling pair and hybrid transformer (Fig. 4-l).
4.01 SL-1 Set On-Hook.
(1) Message detected by Scan and Signal Distributor @SD). (See Fig.
4-2 and 4-3.)
(2) No message is being sent to line circuit on signaling pair.
(3) In time slot 0, CE scans each line circuit on loop in sequence,
detecting any change in signaling on the data input bus.
(4) Line circuit 0 is enabled in time slot 0. Signaling on data output
bus indicates that CE is ready to receive data.
(5) No message on data input bus to CE indicates line circuit 0 is idle.
CALL ORIGINATED
FROM AN SL-1 SET
SL-1 is off-hook (key operated). Off-hook
is detected by SSD in SL-1 set.
4.02 Originating the Call.
(1)
SSD sends off-hook signaling to line circuit on signaling pair at
2.37K bit/s when scanned by message from multiplex. control.
(2)
Off-hook message from line circuit 0 is multiplexed with messages
from other line circuits and sent at a rate of 64K bit/s to the CE.
(3) CE line scan detects change in signaling for line circuit 0.
(4) CE line scan stops.
(5) For the next 31 times, time slot 0 signaling message is sent-to CE
on data input bus from line circuit 0, then line scan continues.
(6) CE detects signaling from line circuit 0 and determines circuit
number (TN number).
(7)
CE assigns message time slot to line circuit from time slots 2
through 31.
(8) Signaling from CE is applied to the SL-1 set or console on
signaling pair. Rate is changed from 64K bit/s to 2.37K bit/s by
multiplex control.
(9) Signaling is detected by SSD.
I
/
I
(10)
SL-1 set directory number lamp is lit.
(11)
PCM codec is enabled during message time slot assigned by
(12)
Dial tone on the data output bus is applied to SL-1 set via
multiplex control, PCM codec, digital-to-analog filter, hybrid
transformer and audio pair (during message time slot).
(13)
Dialed information from SL-1 set on signaling pair is applied to
the data input bus during time slot 0 (signaling).
.
.
_ , -:
. . 7.’ ..!,
,_.,..-,..
:
CF.
Page 4-l
6 Pages
PRACTICE 553-2201-184
(14)
CE detects dialing and removes dial tone at start of dialing.
(15)
CE encodes dialed information.
(16)
Ringback tone on the dam output bus is applied to SL-1 set over
audio pair during message time slot assigned by CE (busy tone
received if called number is busy).
4.03 Talking Connection.
Called number answers.
(1)
Ringback tone is removed by CE.
(2)
Digital voice on dam output bus is applied to SL-1 set via
multiplex control, PCM codec, digital-to-analog filter, hybrid
transformer and audio pair during message time slot.
(3)
Analog voice on audio pair from SL-1 set is applied to dam input
bus via hybrid transformer, analog-to-digital filter, PCM codec,
multiplex control, and buffer (during time slot).
4.04 Terminating the
(11
Call. Assume SL-1 set goes on-hook first.
On-hook message is transmitted from set to line circuit.
(2) Signaling on data output bus changes: SL-1 set lamp extinguishes.
.-
(3) ADD inputs removed (no signaling for line circuit 01.
(4) Line circuit enable inputs are removed (message time slot is no
longer assigned to line circuit).
(5)
CALL TO SL-I SET
Circuitry in IDLE condition, ready for next call.
4.05 Signaling to the TerminaLIn
time slot 0, CE scans each line on
the loop-in sequence.
(1)
CE has call for line circuit 0.
(21
CE determines line circuit 0 is idle (no signaling from circuit on
data input bus during time slot 01.
(31
CE assigns message time slot for audible signaling (from time slots
1 through 31).
(41
Line circuit is enabled during time slot 0.
(5)
Visual signaling data on data output bus during time slot 0 is
applied to multiplex control. Visual signaling data is applied to
SL-1 set over signaling pair.
(6) Signaling is detected by SSD (Line lamp of SL-1 set flashes).
(7)
PCM codec is enabled during message time slot.
I-
::;-:, : ‘. :.j
Page 4-2
..
(8)
Audible signaling applied to SL-1 set via digital-to-analog filter,
hybrid transformer and audio pair.
(9)
SL-1 set signaled audibly (tone ringing).
PRACTICE 553-2201-184
---------------
1 d-ky
I SL-1 Line Circuit II
Multiplex
-, Control
Hybrid
Transformer
Audio
Pair
SL-1
Terminal
set
I
I
j,”
I
-
Codec
I
r_ -,- Data
out
/’
Digital-to- Analog Filter
I
[ C o d e c
1’
1
<’
Enable 1
‘E Shelf
3%kplane
to CE)
I ’
1
l
L
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
_ I’
‘\
\
‘\-
Card
Enable
J
Audio--t(=r----SL-,LineCiCcuit,----l
S i g n a l i n g * a- - - - - - - - - - - - - _1
- -
----(=I--------SL-1 Line Circuit 2
( 1
ll
A
c=r---SL-1 Line Circuit 3
( --I
1
(---SL-1 Line Circuit 4
c1
+
(=r-----------l
(1
,
SL-1 Line Circuit 5
(=T----------~
SL-1 LineCircuit 6
(1
,
CT ----_
cq,
SL-1 Line Circuit 7
+6V
-
~
Fig. 4-l
Simplified Functional Block Diagram of Line Circuit Pack
Page 4-3
-.
:.
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
AUDIO
I
SIGNALING
PAIR
AMPLIFIER
SSD
Fig. 4-2
SL-1 Line Circuit Connected to Basic SL-1 Set
Page 4-4
PAIR
TRANSFORMER
.
2.37 Kbps
PRACTICE
BASIC ATTENDANT CONSOLE
553-2201-184
-
,
n
LED
SIGNALING
PAIR 1
+ HYBRID
TRANSFORMER - X’
2.37.Kbps
SPEAlER
1 ATTENDANT
HANDSET
,
O
1
HEADSET
I I
!
(
,
1
R
1
VOLUME,
1
BUZZ
f++j
;U$;;q TR:ki%MERt”“‘“‘““I
1
NETWORK
I‘
1 ‘-f-
CONTROL
I
.
TIMING
A
SSD
(4)
I
i
-
4
AMPLIFIER
AND
C L O C K
EXTRACTOR
1
.=
ClCLIAI IUI-
HYBRID
TRANSFORMER - X’
, .JI”I.-LII.v
PAIR 2
2.37 Kbps
4
I
I
I-
-
I
--A
Fig. 4-3
Console Line Circuit Connected to Basic Attendant Console
Page 4-5
..
..:
PRACTICE
553-2201-184
SSD in SL-1 set sends off-hook signaling to
line circuit on signaling pair.
4.06 Terminal Answers.
(1)
Off-hook signaling data on data input bus during time slot 0 (via
multiplex control and buffer).
(2)
CE detects signaling.
(3)
CE changes visual signaling on data output bus during time slot 0.
Visual signaling is applied to SL-1 set on signaling pair. Line lamp
of SL-1 set changes from flashing to steady light,
(4)
CE removes audible signaling from data output bus during message
time slot (message time slot now assigned for voice
communications).
(5)
Audible signaling at SL-1 set stops.
4.07 Talking Connection.
PCM codec is enabled during message time
slot.
(1) Digital voice on data output bus is applied to SL-1 set via
multiplex control, PCM codec, digital-to-analog filter, hybrid ._
transformer, and audio pair.
(2) Analog voice from SL-1 set is applied to data input bus via audio
pair, hybrid transformer, analog-to-digital filter, PCM codec,
multiplex control, and buffer.
4.08 Terminating the Call.
(1)
Assume SL-1 is put on-hook first.
SSD transmits on-hook message to line circuit.
(2) On-hook message transmitted to CE through data input bus during
time slot 0 at a rate of 64K bit/s.
(3) CE detects a change in signaling.
(4) Signaling on data output bus changes; SL-1 set line lamp
extinguishes.
CLASS-OF-SERVICE
AND FEATURES
Page 4-6
(5)
ADD inputs are removed (no signaling for line circuit 0).
(6)
Enable inputs are removed (message time slot no longer is assigned
to line circuit 0).
(7)
Circuitry in IDLE condition: ready for next call.
4.09 All calls originating from and terminating on stations connected to
line and trunk circuits may be controlled with or without attendant
assistance. Call restrictions to the exchange network and special services,
are assigned through unique station/line circuit data blocks contained in
the system memory. Similarly, feature assignments are arranged through
the same data blocks. Refer to 553-2YYl-105 for a complete list and
description of features and services. Refer to 553-2YYl-310 for a
description of how features and services are created in the system
memory.
-
PRACTICE 553-2201-184
5. DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
FOREIGN AND SURGE
VOLTAGE PROTECTION
5.01 When telephone lines connected to the line circuit are exposed to
foreign voltages by direct contact or induction (e.g., power line crosses
or lightning), protection devices must be installed on the customer’s
premises. These devices must be capable of providing a path to ground
from tip to ring for foreign voltages that exceed 600 V peak.
OVERLOAD LEVEL
5.02 Signal levels exceeding +7 dBm applied to the tip and ring will
cause distortion in the system.
Page 5-1
1 Page
.
::
‘.
rut
northern
tukcom
PRACTICE 553-2201-183
Issued: 88 08 10
Standard
INTEGRATED
SERVICES
NETWORK
MERIDIAN SL-i.
500/2500 LINE PACKS
DESCRIPTION AND OPERATION
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..... 1-1
2.
DESCRIPTION
3.
APPLICATION
3-1
4.
C H A R A C T E R I S T I C S
F u n c t i o n a l ..,.,....._..,, ,,. _.,.
T e c h n i c a l
S u m m a r y
L i m i t a t i o n s
Power Requirements
E n v i r o n m e n t a l
Foreign and Surge Voltage Protection
O v e r l o a d
L e v e l
4-1
4-1
5.
2
-
O
P
E
R
A
T
I
O
N
I d l e
C i r c u i t
S t a t e
Call Originated from a 500/2500 Telephone
C a l l
t o
T e l e p h o n e
Message
Waiting
Lamp
Operation
Ground
Button
Operation
Class of Service and Features
1
4-3
4-4
4-4
4-6
4-6
4-6
5-1
5-l
5-1
5-2
5-3
5-4
5-5
This practice is reissued to include
information related to the QPC789 16-Port Message Waiting c
500/2500 Line circuit pack. Changes are indicated by margin arrows. c
Reason for Reissue:
Prlnred I” LISA
’ Northern T&corn 1983
Page i
1 Page
.
PRACTICE
553-2201-183
1. GENERAL
This practice outlines the characteristics, application and operation
of the 500/2500 line circuit packs. The information is intended to be
used as a guide when connecting customer-provided apparatus to the
line circuit.
1.01
1.02
The following 500/2500 line packs are availadle:
. QPC192 - Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Line pack (+a~)
l
QPC292 - Off-Premise Extension (OPX) Line pack (A-Law)
l
QPC452 - Basic 500/2500 Line pack for ~-Law applications
l
QPC494 .- Message Waiting Line pack
(~-Law)
l
QPC521 - Basic 500/2500 Line pack for A-Law applications
l
QPC532 - Ground Button Recall Line pack (A-Law and ~-Law)
l
QPC558 - Message Waiting Line pack (A-Law)
l
QPC594 - 16-Port Basic 500/2500 Line pack (+a~)
l
QPC681 - Parallel Message Waiting Line pack (~-Law)
l
QPC682 - Parallel Message Waiting Line pack (A-Law).
l
QPC729 - 16-Port Basic 500/2500 Line pack (A-Law)
l
QPC789 - 16-Port Message Waiting 500/2500 Line pack (+a~)- +
Page l-l
1 Page
--
PRACTICE
553-2201-183
2. DESCRIPTION
2.01 All versions of the 500/2500 line packs provide talk battery and
signaling for regular 2-wire common battery SOO-type (rotary dial),
2500-type (DIGITONE* dial) telephones and key telephone equipment.
The various special versions serve additional purposes as described in
Part 4.
2.02 The line circuit packs mount in a Peripheral Equipment (PE) shelf.
The circuits connect with the switching system and with the external
apparatus via an 80-pin connector at the rear of the pack. The pack is
318 mm (12.5 in) in height and 254 mm (10 in) in depth.
2.03 The 80-pin connector plugs into an IO-line bus system on the back
of the PE shelf. These 80 bus lines feed into seven multi-pin
connectors. Seven connectors link the line circuits to the cross-connect
terminal; ttio faceplate connectors on the Peripheral Buffer link the PE
shelves to each other and to the Common Equipment (CE); and one
connector feeds power to the PE from the converter shelf.
2.04 Connection to the station apparatus is made at the
cross-connecting terminal, as shown in the following block diagram of
the line circuit connected to a 500/2500 telephone:
.-
:’
:
. ..._.
. .
:
. ..I ..;
.\:.
* DIGITONE
is a trademark of Norlhern
Telecom
Page 2-l
1 Page
..
.,:
PRACTICE
553-2201-183
3. APPLICATION
3.01 The line circuit interfaces and is compatible with the equipment
listed in Table 3-A.
Table 3-A
LINE CIRCUIT APPLICATION AND COMPATIBILITY
EQUIPMENT
SPECIFICATIONS
NE-500 TYPE ROTARY DIAL
SETS (or equivalent)
Dial Speed
8.0 to 12.0 pps
Percent Break
58 to 69%
Interdigital Time
240 ms
NE-2500 TYPE DIGITONE
SETS (or equivalent)
Frequency Accuracy
k1.5 %
Pulse Duration
40 ms
Interdigital Time
40 ms
Speed
12.5 digits/s
KEY TELEPHONE
EQUIPMENT
NE-lA1, NE-lA2, oiequivalent
RECORDED
ANNOUNCEMENT
*CODE-A-PHONE 200
VCA RDY
(unattended telephone
answering set)
DIAL LONG LINE CIRCUIT
J99234T-2/SD96555-01
LOOP
Various
EXTENDERS
24V4 REPEATERS
598615 AJ-l/SD97747-01
598615 BJ-l/SD97747-01
* CODE-A-PHONE is a trademark of Ford Induwier Inc
Page 3-l
1 Page
--
.i
:
: ..
PRACTICE
4.
553-2201-183
CHARACTERISTICS
FUNCTIONAL
Common Features
4.01
The following features are provided:
l
6000 balanced terminating impedance
l
-48 V through a battery feed resistance and ground
l
supervise the loop current to determine on-hook/off-hook status
l
ringing current to the loop
l
isolation of foreign potentials on the loop from the transmission and
signaling circuit
l
conversion from a 2- to a 4-wire transmission path
l
analog-to-digital and digital-to-analog conversion of transmission
signals
l
common multiplexing’ circuit to interface with the peripheral bus
signaling channel
.
l
retime the digital signals received from the peripheral bus
l
decode address information received from the peripheral bus to
enable individual line circuits during selected time slots
control the disconnection timing of ringing current to the loops to
avoid switching during current peaks.
-4.02 The various special versions of the 500/2500 line pack have
additional features as follows:
l
Unique Features
4.03 QPCl92 and QPC292 OPX Line packs:
l
l
l
serve lines up to a maximum loop resistance of 1400 R
serve Dataphone sets
have line-to-line insertion loss of 1 dB.
4.04 QPC494 and QPC558 Message Waiting Line packs:
.A.::
.
._
.: :.
::.::.:.,
l
provides connection of -150 V in a steady or 1 Hz flash rate to
activate the Message Waiting lamp on the telephone
l
provides for one Message Waiting lamp per line
l
maintain all Message Waiting lamps off and do not allow phones to
ring during power-up sequence.
Page 4-l
8 Pages
..
PRACTICE 553-2201183
l
generate diagnostics ‘an “ERROR 500” message when the Message
Waiting lamp is defective or the telephone is unplugged provided
-150 V is present. If -150 V is missing (blown fuse) no message is
generated under any condition.
4.05 QPC681 and QPC682 Parallel Message Waiting Line packs:
l
provides the same features as the QPC494‘ and QPCS58 Message
Waiting Line packs
l
provides a -48 V connection to a lamp bank.
4.06 QPC532 Ground Button Recall Line pack:
l
provides detection of ground on tip or ring with 40 ms validation
time
l
strap-selectable A-Law or ~-Law coding
l
strap-selectable 0, 1, 2 or 4 dB pad in each transmission path
l
l
impedance-matching to 3-component complex impedances
trans hybrid balance against 3-component
complex impedances.
4.07 RPC584 and QPC729 16-Port Basic 50012500 Line Packs:
l
sixteen individual line circuits per pack.
4.08 QPC789 16-Port Message Waiting 50012500 Line Pack:
l
sixteen message waiting individual line circuits per pack.
-
,:
;
*.
<,.?.
‘;,.->:
.:.
..’
Page 4-2
.
.’
;-
.A’
r
.j
‘,I.
-1
,,
.:
‘,,
PRACTICE
TECHNICAL
SUMMARY
553-2201-183
4.09 A technical summary of the line circuit pack is given in Table
4-A.
Table 4-A
TECHNICAL SUMMARY OF LINE CIRCUIT PACK
Impedance:
QPC452/521, QPC494/558
QPC594/129/189, QPC681/682
QPC192/292
QPC532
600 R
600 R
900 n
600 R, matches 3-component complex
impedances
+
Loop Limit (excluding set):
QPC192/292
All others
1400 R at nominal -48 V
1000 R at nominal -48 V
Leakage Resistance
QPC532
All others
20,000 R
30,000 R
Ring Trip
During silent or ringing intervals
Ringing Voltage
Determined by the type of ringing generator
provided in the system
Signaling
Loop start
Supervision
Normal battery conditions are continuously
applied (-48 V on ring: ground on tip) - -
Power input from shelf backplane
-52, -48, i-6, -6, i-2.5 V and ringing voltage:
also -150 V on Message Waiting Line cards.
Insertion loss
5, +1 dB, at 1020 Hz
Effective Gain (QPC192/292)
1.5 dB at 1020 Hz
Page 4-3
PRACTICE
553-2201-183
p LIMITATIONS
The maximum number of Ringers that can be connected to each
DN loop is shown below:
4.10
MAXIMUM NUMBER OF RINGERS
QPC452lQPC494
QPC594/QPC789
QPC521/QPC558
-QPC729
LOOP
RESISTANCE
1000
850
600
350
Note:
4.11
2
3
i
4
4
i
Loop resistance excludes impedance of telephone sets.
Supervision limitations are given in Table 4-B.
4.12 To maintain transmission quality, the following shows . the
maximum number of Voice Calls (number of telephone sets off-nook.
on the same DN) recommended:
RESISTANCE
(OHMS)
up
41
101
251
to
to
to
to
QPC5941QPC789
QPC729
17ma
17ma
20ma
;
40
100
250
1000
Note 1:
QPC452lQPC494
QPC521/QPC558
2
1
1
1
2
1
;
:
20ma
1
1
1
1
Loop resistance exclttdes impedance of telephone sets.
Note 2: 17ma/20ma is the current that a typical telephone set
requires in an off-hook condition.
4
POWER
REQUIREMENTS
4.13 The QPC452, QPC521, QPC681 and QPC682 packs
VOLTAGE
+2.5 V, *00.5%
+6 V, kl%
-6V, +l%
-48 V, f3%
-f-52 V, +4%
Page 4-4
have the
following typical power requirements:
IDLE CURRENT
ImA)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF
File Type Extension : pdf
MIME Type : application/pdf
PDF Version : 1.4
Linearized : No
Page Count : 867
Page Mode : UseOutlines
Page Layout : SinglePage
Mod Date : 2002:01:05 20:06:48-06:00
Producer : Photoshop PDF Plug-in 1.0
Creation Date : 1999:09:21 16:11:56Z
Author : EZ Manuals
Modify Date : 2002:01:05 20:06:48-06:00
Create Date : 1999:09:21 16:11:56Z
Metadata Date : 2002:01:05 20:06:48-06:00
Creator : EZ Manuals
EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools